NASA Contractor Report 180781

VAPEPS USER'S REFERENCE

MANUAL

VERSION 5.0

Prepared by:

D. M. Park

lockheed Missiles and Space Company

1111 Lockheed Way

Sunnyvale, California 94086

July 1988

Under

Contract no. NAS5-29452

NASA

National Aeronautics and Space Administration

for

Goddard Space Flight Center

Greenbelt. Maryland 20771

and

United States Air Force Space Division

Los Angeles, California 90009

_5_'!_AI , v" ,t_. , r_. __._:) _- irl.:l

,'_,i s_i | :..-_ _n _ _;_ _c:.' Co. )

_'ti:' ',_ CeLL 0'4 r_

"" J/:Jl

N'?J-Lr?ll J

https://ntrs.nasa.gov/search.jsp?R=19900011397 2019-06-27T11:25:04+00:00Z
",,.,_i
Preface

A database management and prediction system named VAPEPS (VibroAcoustic Payload

Environment Prediction System) has been developed for the vibration and acoustic data

obtained from Space Shuttle and Expendable Launch Vehicle payload components.

VAPEPS accepts vibroacoustic and structural data and constructs a database which the

aerospace community can utilize to establish environments for new payload components.

Additionally, VAPEPS provides a full range of software routines that can be used to

manipulate and perform computational operations on data.

This document is the VAPEPS User's Reference Manual. It is intended as the primary

reference to commands in the VAPEPS software. Before attempting to read this manual it

is suggested that the VAPEPS User's Guide be read. It provides an introduction to the

VAPEPS software and some of the most used commands. The majority of the text in this

manual is contained in the on-line help files. The on-line help will always be more current

than the manual. Therefore, if a question arises, that is not answered satisfactorily in this

manual, the on-line documentation may be consulted to see if more current documentation

exists.

This volume is so large that it is nearly impossible to provide the quality of documentation

desired. It is hoped that the documentation is clear and concise. This document will be

constantly updated as new commands and documentation errors are reported. Eventually it

is the goal of the author to provide examples for every command in this volume. However,

at present only a few of the commands have good examples.

VAPEPS is described in four self-contained volumes The VAPEPS User's Reference

Manual is the most current of the documentation (other than the on-line help) and should be

referred to before consulting the other documentation.

Volume I: VAPEPS Technical Manual, NASA CR 166823, June 1984, which illustrates the overall design concepts, database architecture, and the prediction schemes.

VAPEPS User's Reference Manual version 5.0, NASA CR 180781, July 1988,

which describes the operations necessary to build a VAPEPS database and how to use the

data processing and prediction routines. This replaces Volume II: VAPEPS USER'S

MANUAL, NASA CR 166823, December 1982 and Volume V: VAPEPS PLOT

PACKAGE, NASA CR 166823, June 1984.

Volume III: VAPEPS Programmer's Manual, NASA CR 166823, June 1982,

which describes the internal workings of the VAPEPS computer program and its interaction

with the database.

Volume IV: VAPEPS Sample Problems, NASA CR 166823, December 1982,

shows typical operations required in data input, data retrieval, and environmental predictions with VAPEPS.

An introduction to the VAPEPS software may be found in the VAPEPS User's Guide,

NASA CR 180782, July 1988.
,._.j
k

Acknowledgements

This work is supported by NASA Goddard Space Flight Center under Contract NAS5-

28577 and NAS5-29452. The technical monitor is Mr. Frank On. The funding is from the

U.S. Air Force Space Division. Lt. C. Brown is the program monitor.

The author wishes to acknowledge the efforts of W. Henricks who has made numerous

suggestions and comments about the content of this manual. Also the input of personnel at

JPL for there comments concerning errors in the documentation.
V
CONTENTS -i

Table of Contents

l.

2.

.

INTRODUCTION

i.i.

1.2.

1.3.

PURPOSE OF MANUAL

CONVENTIONS USED IN MANUAL

ORGANIZATION OF MANUAL

GENERAL TOPICS

2.10

2.2.

2.3.

2.3.1.

2.3.2.

2.3.3.

2.3.4.

2.3.5.

2.4.

2.4.1.

2.5.

2.5.1.

2.5.2.

2.5.3.

2.5.4.

2.5.5.

2.5.6.

2.5.7.

2.5.8.

2.5.9.

2.5.10.

2.5.11.

2.5.11.i.

2.5.11.2.

2.5.11.3.

2.5.12.

COMMAND FORMAT

DAL FILES

FORMAT

BASIC APPROACH

VARIABLES

MULTIPLE VALUES

INDIRECT MODE

ERRORS

HELP

USING HELP

MENU UTILITY

ARITHMETICS COMMANDS MENU

ADVANCED USAGE COMMANDS MENU

ELEMENT CREATION/MANIPULATION MENU

ELEMENT, FILE AND SYSTEM CONTROL MENU

GRAPHICS MENU

INPUT OUTPUT MENU

LOGIC AND SORTING MENU

STATISTICS COMMANDS MENU

VARIABLE CONTROL MENU

VIBROACOUSTIC DATABASE MENU

VIBROACOUSTIC PREDICTION MENU

EXTRAP I PREDICTION MENU

EXTRAP II PREDICTION MENU

SEA MODELER MENU

VIBROACOUSTIC TOOLS MENU

GENERAL COMMANDS

3.1. RUN=ADDC

3.2. RUN=ADNC

3.3. RUN=AJNV

3.4. RUN=AL L

3.5. AND

3.6. ASMD

3.7. RUN=AVG

3.8. RUN=BCL

3.9. RUN=BEAM

3. i0. RUN=BOOT

i-i

1-3

1-4

1-5

2-1

2-2

2-4

2-14

2-14

2-15

2-16

2-17

2-18

2-19

2-20

2-21

2-21

2-21

2-22

2-22

2-22

2-23

2-23

2-23

2-24

2-24

2-24

2-25

2-25

2-25

2-26

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

3-10

3-11

3-12

3-14
-2 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

.!i

.12

.13

.14

.15

.16

.17

.18

.19

.20

.20.1.

.21

.22

.23

.24

.25

.26

.26.i.

.26.2.

.26.3.

.26.4.

.26.5.

.26.6.

.26.7.

.26.8.

.26.9.

.27.

.28.

.28.1.

.29.

.30.

.31.

.31.1.

.32

.33

.34

.35

.36

.37

.38

.39

.40

.41

.42

.43

.44

.45

RUN=BSC

BUILD

RUN=BWTH

CALCULATOR

CBIT

CEAL

CHANGE

RUN=CHKO

CHL

CHOP

OPTIONAL

RUN=CIMV

RUN=CLFG

RUN=CLFP

CMOD

RUN=CMPF

CNFG

INPUT

READ

DISABLE

ENABLE

PACK

CHECK

LIST

DONE

OMIT

RUN=COG

CONVERT

EXAMPLES

RUN=CONV

RUN=COPS

COPY

COPYF

RUN=COPY

CORE

CPU

RUN=CPYS

CRYPT

RUN=CSD2

RUN=CSDF

RUN=CSDS

CSYM

CYCLE

RUN=DATA

RUN=DCON

RUN=DIAG

DISABLE

FORMSOFCHOP

3-17

3-18

3-24

3-25

3-29

3-30

3-33

3-35

3-36

3-38

3-40

3-42

3-43

3-44

3-45

3-47

3-48

3-48

3-49

3-50

3-50

3-51

3-51

3-52

3-52

3-53

3-54

3-55

3-57

3-58

3-59

3-60

3-61

3-63

3-64

3-65

3-66

3-67

3-70

3-73

3-74

3-76

3-78

3-80

3-81

3-82

3-83
CONTENTS -3

Table of Contents

3.46.

3.46.1.

3.46.1.1.

3.46.1.2.

3.46.1.3.

3.46.1.4.

3.46.1.5.

3.46.1.6.

3.46.1.7.

3.46.1.8.

3.46.1.9.

3.46.1.10.

3.46.1.11.

3.47.

3.48.

3.49.

3.50.

3.51.

3.52.

3.53.

3.54.

3.55.

3.56.

3.57.

3.58.

3.59.

3.60.

3.61.

3.62.

3.63.

3.64.

3.65.

3.66.

3.67.

3.67 .i.

3.68.

3.69.

3.7O.

3.71.

3.72.

3.73.

3.74.

3.75.

3.76.

3.77.

3.78.

3.79.

DOC

FORMATING OF OUTPUT

DECK

KEYS

DESCRIPTION

BLOCK

END

ON-OFF

TITLE

FIGURE

TABLE

ENHANCE

EJECT-REMAIN

DPTOR

RUN=DTAB

ECOL

ENABLE

RUN=ENTR

RUN=EQPL

RUN=ERRO

RUN=ESAV

EULER

RUN=EVEN

EXPAND

RUN=EZDB

EZOUT

FFT

FILES

FIND

FIT

FNAME

RUN=FPAS

RUN=FREQ

FREQUENCY

PROGRAM

FUN

RUN=GCLS

GCOL

RUN=GDOC

RUN=GENP

RUN=GETR

GLOSSARY

RUN=GLST

RUN=GMOD

RUN=GPSD

GREAD

RUN=GRLT

3-84

3-85

3-85

3-86

3-86

3-87

3-87

3-88

3-88

3-89

3-89

3-90

3-91

3-92

3-93

3-95

3-97

3-98

3-99

3-104

3-105

3-106

3-108

3-109

3-113

3-114

3-117

3-119

3-120

3-122

3-124

3-125

3-127

3-128

3-129

3-131

3-133

3-134

3-136

3-137

3-138

3-139

3-140

3-141

3-142

3-144

3-147
-4 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

3.80.

3.81

3.82

3.83

3.84

3.85

3.86

3.87

3.88

3.89

3.90

3.91

3.92 3 93 3 94. 3 94.1. 3 94.2. 3 94.3. 3 94.4. 3 94.5. 3 94.5.1.

3.94.5.2. 3 94.5.3. 3 94.6. 3 94.7. 3 94.8.

3949. 3 94 I0.

3.94 ii.

3.95

3.96

3.97

3.98

3.99

3.10(

3.101.

3.102.

3.103.

3.104.

3.105.

3.106.

3.107.

3.108.

3.109. 3.Ii0. 3.iii.

3.112.

RUN=GRMS

GROUP

RUN=GVAL

RUN=HEAD

RUN=INDE

INDEX

INTERPOLATE

RUN=INTE

INVERT

JPI

RUN=JTOD

LAST

RUN=LFU

LOCATE

LOOK

EXIT

HELP

LIST

MENU

PLOT

LABELS

RANGE

TYPE

READ

SELECT

STATUS

TITLES

WINDOW

WRITE

RUN=LOOK

RUN=LRMS

RUN=LTRP

RUN=MANU

MAXMIN

MDIFF

RUN=MEZ

MGRATE

MODIFY

RUN=MPNT

MSAP

RUN=MSDF

RUN=MSDS

MSPAR

MTJ

MTRAN

MULTIPLY

RUN=MVC

3-148

3-150

3-153

3-154

3-155

3-156

3-159

3-161

3-162

3-163

3-164

3-165

3-166

3-167

3-168

3-168

3-169

3-169

3-170

3-170

3-171

3-171

3-171

3-172

3-173

3-173

3-174

3-174

3-175

3-176

3-177

3-179

3-180

3-181

3-183

3-184

3-185

3-186

3-188

3-189

3-190

3-191

3-193

3-195

3-196

3-197

3-198
CONTENTS -5

Table of Contents

3.113.

3.114.

3.115.

3.116.

3.117.

3.118.

3.119.

3.120.

3.121.

3.122.

3.123.

3.124.

3.125.

3.126.

3.127.

3.128.

3.129.

3.130.

3.131.

3.132.

3.133.

3.134.

3.135.

3.136.

3.137.

3.138.

3.139.

3.140.

3.141.

3.142.

3.143.

3.144.

3.145.

3.146.

3.147.

3.148.

3.149.

3.150.

3.151.

3.152.

3.153.

3.154.

3.155.

3.156.

3.157.

3.158.

3.159.

RUN=NEWS

RUN=NOML

NORM

RUN=NORM

NOT

NTOW

RUN=OCT3

OR

ORDER

RUN=ORTH

RUN=OTOC

RUN=OVER

PACK

RUN=PADM

RUN=PCOM

RUN=PDBG

RUN=PGLS

RUN=PGRM

RUN=PICK

RUN=PMDS

POW

RUN=POWE

RUN=POWI

RUN=PRSP

RANDOM

RLJUST

RUN=ROUN

RUN=RRAN

RTOI

RUN=SAVE

RUN=SAVG

RUN=SCSD

SEARCH

RUN=SEND

SEQUENCE

RUN=SGET

RUN=SHIF

SHOCK

RUN=SMAX

RUN=SNDP

RUN=SNPV

RUN=SPIL

RUN=SPIN

RUN=SPRE

SREAD

SSTRNG

RUN=STAC

3-199

3-200

3-202

3-203

3-205

3-207

3-209

3-210

3-211

3-213

3-214

3-215

3-216

3-217

3-218

3-221

3-222

3-223

3-224

3-225

3-226

3-227

3-228

3-229

3-230

3-231

3-232

3-233

3-234

3-235

3-236

3-237

3-239

3-242

3-243

3-244

3-245

3-246

3-248

3-249

3-250

3-252

3-259

3-260

3-261

3-263

3-264
-6 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

4.

3.160. RUN=STAS

3.161. 5TAT

3.162. RUN=STAT

3.163. STORE

3.164. STRESS

3.165. RUN=STT5

3.166. RUN=SUBC

3.167. RUN=SUM

3.168. SYMIN

3.169. RUN=TBLP

3.170. RUN=TCPY

3.171. TDUMP

3.172. RUN=TEMP

3.173. RUN=TGLS

3.174. TMUL

3.175. TOC

3.176. RUN=TOCO

3.177. RUN=TPVL

3.178. TRA/_SPOSE

3.179. TRDAL

3.179.1. MAGIC

3.179.2. HASP

3.180. RUN=TRMT

3.181. RUN=TSTA

3.182. TTYP

3.183. RUN=UPDS

3.184. RUN=VFIX

3.185. RUN=WLSQ

3.186. WTAPE

PRINTING AND PLOTTING

4.1. PLOT

4.2. PRCRN

4.3. PRINT

4.4. PSET

4.4.1. COLOR

4.4.2. COPY

4.4.3. CURVE

4.4.4. DELAY

4.4.5. DEVICE

4.4.5.1. LIST

4.4.6. DONE

4.4.7. EPL

4.4.8. FLAG

4.4.9. GRACE

4.4.10. HGT

3-265

3-267

3-269

3-270

3-271

3-274

3-276

3-277

3-278

3-280

3-282

3-283

3-286

3-287

3-288

3-289

3-290

3-291

3-292

3-294

3-297

3-298

3-299

3-300

3-301

3-302

3-303

3-305

3-306

4-i

4-2

4-7

4-8

4-12

4-13

4-13

4-13

4-15

4-15

4-16

4-17

4-17

4-18

4-19

4-19
CONTENTS -7

Table of Contents

.

4.4.11.

4.4.12.

4.4.13.

4.4.14.

4.4.15.

4.4.16.

4.4.17.

4.4.18.

4.4.19.

4.4.20.

4.5.

4.6.

4.7.

DATA ENTRY

5.1.

5.2.

5.3.

5.4.

5.5.

5.5.1.

5.5.2.

5.5.3.

5.5.4.

5.5.5.

5.5.6.

5.5.6.1.

5.5.6.2.

5.5.6.3.

5.5.6.4.

5.5.6.5.

5.5.6.6.

5.5.6.7.

5.5.6.8.

5.5.6.9.

5.5.7.

5.5.8.

5.5.8.1.

5.5.9.

5.5.9.1.

5.5.9.2.

5.5.9.3.

5.5.9.4.

5.5.9.5.

5.5.9.6.

5.5.9.7.

IPP

LEGEND

MIXALF

PAGE

PPF

ROT

SHADE

STYLE

WAIT

ADVANCED USAGE

RITE

TABLE

WRITE

FEATURES OF ENTER

EXAMPLE

STEPS TO PERFORM ENTER

EXECUTION

COMMAND FORMAT

ISEC (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

NIN (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

IPNT (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

IFAT (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

EVENT DESCRIPTION

DATA PARAMETERS

NCHAN (DATA PARAMETER)

NFRQ (DATA PARAMETER)

ITYPE (DATA PARAMETER)

ITCH (DATA PARAMETER)

NDVPC (DATA PARAMETER)

IFORM (DATA PARAMETER)

IFREQ (DATA PARAMETER)

ISEQ (DATA PARAMETER)

lOVER (DATA PARAMETER)

FORTRAN FORMAT

FREQUENCY DEFINITION

FREQUENCY DEFINITION EXAMPLE

CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

ID (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

NAME (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

TYPE (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

UNITS (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

RMS (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

NOTES

4-20

4-20

4-21

4-21

4-22

4-23

4-23

4-24

4-24

4-25

4-26

4-28

4-33

5-1

5-2

5-3

5-5

5-6

5-7

5-7

5-8

5-8

5-8

5-9

5-9

5-9

5-10

5-10

5-11

5-11

5-12

5-13

5-13

5-14

5-14

5-15

5-16

5-16

5-17

5-17

5-18

5-18

5-19

5-19

5-20
-3 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

6.

SPECTRAL DATA

OUTPUT DAL ELEMENTS

DATABASE PREPARATION

.i.

.i.i.

.i.i.i.

.1.1.2.

.1.2.

.1.3.

.1.4.

.1.5.

.1.6.

.1.7.

.1.8.

.1.9.

.i. I0.

.i. Ii.

.1.12.

.1.13.

.i.14.

.1.15.

.2.

,3.

.3.1.

.3.2.

.3.3.

.3.4.

.3.5.

.4.

.4.1.

.4.1.1.

.4.1.2.

.4.2

.4.3

.4.4

.4.5

.4.6

.4.7

.4.8

.4.9

.4.10.

.4.11.

.5,

.5.1.

.5.1.1.

BOOK

APROPOS

WORDS

DEFINITIONS

INIT

LIST

DONE

0MIT

PROCESSING

CONTRACTING

COGNIZANT

DATE

TIME

EVENT

LOCATION

VEHICLE

DESC

EXAMPLE

CHECK

CHANNEL

LIST

CHANGE

DONE

OMIT

EXAMPLE

CONFIGURATION

APROPOS

WORDS

DEFINITIONS

INPUT

LIST

DISABLE

ENABLE

PACK

READ

CHECK

DONE

OMIT

EXAMPLE

MODULES

APROPOS

WORDS

5-20

5-22

6-1

6-2

6-2

6-3

6-3

6-4

6-4

6-4

6-5

6-5

6-6

6-6

6-7

6-7

6-8

6-9

6-9

6-10

6-i1

6-12

6-13

6-14

6-15

6-16

6-16

6-16

6-19

6-20

6-20

6-20

6-21

6-22

6-22

6-23

6-23

6-24

6-24

6-25

6-25

6-25

6-27

6-28

6-29
CONTENTS -9

Table of Contents

7.

6.5.1.2. DEFINITIONS

6.5.2. DAMO

6.5.2.1. DESC

6.5.2.2. EXTA

6.5.2.3. SKIN

6.5.2.4. INTA

6.5.2.5. MONT

6.5.2.6. INST

6.5.2.7. FRAM

6.5.2.8. P*

6.5.2.9. C*

6.5.2.10. REMOVE

6.5.2.11. LIST

6.5.2.12. READ

6.5.2.13. SAVE

6.5.2.14. CHECK

6.5.2.15. DONE

6.5.3. ATTACH

6.5.4. LIST

6.5.5. DUMP

6.5.6. EDIT

6.5.7. CHANGE

6.5.8. READ

6.5.9. CHECK

6.5.10. REMOVE

6.5.11. DISABLE

6.5.12. ENABLE

6.5.13. PACK

6.5.14. SAVE

6.5.15. DONE

6.5.16. OMIT

SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.1. NAME

7.2. BOOK

7.2.1. AND

7.2.2. OR

7.2.3. NOT

7.2.4. NAME

7 .2 .5 . INTERSECT

7.2.6. INCLUDE

7.2.7. EXCLUDE

7.2.8. SYNONYMS

7.2.9. DONE

7.3. EVENT

7.3.1. NAME

6-29

6-30

6-30

6-31

6-31

6-32

6-32

6-33

6-33

6-34

6-34

6-35

6-35

6-36

6-36

6-37

6-37

6-38

6-38

6-39

6-39

6-40

6-41

6-41

6-42

6-42

6-43

6-43

6-44

6-44

6-44

7-1

7-2

7-3

7-3

7-4

7-6

7-7

7-7

7-8

7-8

7-9

7-10

7-i1

7-12
-i0 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

3.2.

3.3.

3.4.

3.5.

4.

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

.4.5

.4.6

.4.7.

.4.8.

.4.9.

.4.10.

.4.11.

.5.

.5 .i.

.5.2.

.5.3.

.5.4.

,6.

.6.1.

.6.2

.6.3

.6.4

.6.5

.6.6

.6.7

.6.8.

.6.9.

.6.10.

.6 .ii.

.6.12.

.6.13.

.7.

.7 .i.

.7.2.

.7.3.

.7.4.

.7.5.

.8.

.9.

.i0.

.ll.

INTERSECT

INCLUDE

EXCLUDE

DONE

CONFIGURATION

MODE

AND

OR

NOT

TREE

SAVE

RESTORE

LIST

STATUS

NAME

DONE

MODULE

MODE SETTING COMMANDS

MODULE SEARCHING SUBCOMMANDS

ELEMENT SEARCHING COMMANDS

MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS

GENERAL

LIST

SAVE

RESTORE

STATUS

NAME

INTERSECT

INCLUDE

EXCLUDE

AND

OR

NOT

SYNONYMS

DONE

FIND

AND

OR

NOT

NAME

DONE

LIST

SAVE

RESTORE

STATUS

7-12

7-13

7-13

7 -14

7-15

7-15

7-16

7-16

7-17

7-18

7-18

7-19

7 -19

7-20

7-20

7-21

7-22

7-22

7-23

7-24

7-25

7-27

7-27

7-28

7-28

7-29

7-29

7-30

7-30

7-31

7-31

7-32

7-32

7-33

7-34

7-35

7-35

7-36

7-36

7-37

7-37

7-38

7-39

7-40

7-41
CONTENTS -ii

Table of Contents

k

.

9,

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

8.1. PREPARATION OF DATA

8.2. SAVE

8.3. SPILL

8.4. FLIP

DIRECT DICTIONARY INTERFACE

9.1. DEFINE

9.2. DELETE

9.3. LIST

9.4. SPILL

9.5. SYNONYM

9.6. PREADMIN

i0. STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.1. ORDER OF EXECUTION

10.2. EXAMPLE

10.3. ATACALC

10.4. ATACO

10.5. CFAC

10.5.1. ACC FLAGS

10.5.2. SPL FLAGS

10.5.3. PARA FLAGS

10.6. CHECK

10.7. CRFR

10.8. DELETE

10.9. DONE

i0.i0. ELNAME

i0.I0.i. PARAMETERS

10.10.2. CHECK

10.10.3. DELETE

10.10.4. DONE

10.10.5. LIST

10.10.6. PARAMETER INPUT

10.10.6.1. CHECK

10.10.6.2. DONE

10.10.6.3. EXIT

10.10.6.4. LIST

10.10.6.5. P*

10.10.7. QUIT

10.10.8. RENAME

i0.ii. EXCITATION

10.11.1. EXAMPLE

10.12. FPAR

8-1

8-2

8-3

8-4

8-5

9-1

9-2

9-3

9-4

9-5

9-6

9-7

10-1

10-7

10-8

10-17

i0-19

10-21

10-22

10-22

10-22

10-23

10-24

10-25

10-26

10-27

10-29

10-33

10-33

10-34

10-35

10-35

10-36

10-36

10-37

10-37

10-38

10-38

10-39

10-40

10-40

i0-41
-12 CONTENTS

v

Table of Contents

10.12.1.

10.12.2.

10.12.2.1.

i0.12.2.2.

10.12.2.3.

10.12.2.4.

10.12.2.5.

10.12.3.

10.13.

10.13.1.

10.14.

10.15.

10.16.

i0.17.

i0.17.1.

10.17.2.

10.17.3.

10.17 4.

i0.17 5.

10.17 5.1.

10.17 5.2.

10.17 5.3.

10.17 5.4.

10.17 5.5.

i0.17.6.

10.18.

10.19.

10.20.

10.21.

10.22.

10.22.1.

10.23.

i0.24.

i0.25.

10.26.

10.27.

10.28.

10.28.1.

10.28.1.1.

i0.28.1.2.

i0.28.2.

10.28.2 .i.

LIST

PARAMETER INPUT

CHECK

DONE

EXIT

LIST

P*

RANGE

FREQUENCY

EXAMPLE

LIST

MDENS

NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS

PATHNAME

CHECK

DELETE

DONE

LIST

PARAINPUT

CHECK

DONE

EXIT

LIST

P.

QUIT

POWER

QUIT

READ

RENAME

RESPONSE

EXAMPLE

SAVE

SETEXC

SETRES

TEXT

TPRD

PREDICT

EXTRAPI

EXhaLE

PROGRAMMING NOTES

EXTRAP II

EX./_IPLE

Ii. OLD SEA COMMANDS

ll.1. CNVRT

11.2. DAMO

10-42

10-42

10-42

10-43

10-43

10-44

10-44

10-45

10-47

10-47

10-48

10-49

10-50

10-52

10-84

10-85

10-86

10-86

10-87

10-87

10-88

10-88

10-89

10-89

10-90

10-91

10-92

10-93

10-94

10-95

10-95

10-96

10-97

10-99

I0-i01

10-102

10-104

10-105

10-106

10-108

10-109

10-109

ii-i

11-2

11-4
CONTENTS -13

Table of Contents

ii.2.1.

i1.2.2.

11.3.

i1.4.

ll.4.

11.4.

11.4.

11.4.

11.5.

11.5.1.

ii .6.

11.6.1.

ii .6.2.

i.

2.

3.

3.1.

PARAMETERS

NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS

DENS

PRDICT

SUMMARY

EXAMPLE

POWER INPUTS

EXAMPLE

SCALE

INPUT

TRNF

ATA CO

EXAMPLES

12. TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.1. ##ADD

12.2. ##ASK ##GET

12.3. ##CALC

12.4. ##CCHAR

12.5. ##CLOSE

12.6. ##COMMENT

12.7. ##CONTINUE

12.8. ##CYCLE

12.9. ##ECHO

12.10. ##INC ##SET

12.11. ##JUMP

12.12. ##OFF ##ON

12.13. ##OPEN

12.14. ##READ

12.15. ##VRES ##VSAV

12.16. PRECODER

13. VARIABLES AND SYMBOLS

13.1. LIST

13.2. SET

13.3. VAR

14. LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

14.1. DEFAULT

14.2. RECOVER

14.3. RUN

11-6

11-38

11-41

11-42

11-44

11-45

11-46

11-46

11-47

11-48

11-49

11-50

11-51

12-1

12-3

12-4

12-5

12-6

12-7

12-8

12-9

12-10

12-11

12-12

12-13

12-15

12-16

12-17

12-19

12-20

13-i

13-2

13-3

13-4

14-1

14-5

14-6

14-8
-14 CONTENTS

Table of Contents

15. DATABASEWORKSHEETS 15-1

16. SEMODWORKSHEETS 16-1

17. FREQUENCYTABLES 17-1

18. CONVERSIONTABLES 18-i

19. INDEX 19-I

20. SUMMARY

20.1. AC

20.2. AS

20.3. AU

20.4. EC

20.5. EF

20.6. GR

20.7. HH

20.7.1. H?

20.7.2. SKIP

20.7.3. QUIT

20.7.4. CARRIAGE

20.7.5. RCOMMANDS

20.8. IN

20.9. IO

20.10. LS

20.11. UG

20.12. UH

20.12.1. EXAMPLE

20.13. VC

20.14. VD

20.15. VP

20.16. VT

20-1

20-4

20-8

20-10

20-12

20-13

20-14

20-15

20-15

20-16

20-16

20-16

20-17

20-18

20-19

20-20

20-21

20-22

20-22

20-24

20-25

20-26

20-27
FIGURES -15

List of Figures

i0.i Type = i:

10.2 Type = 2:

10.3 Type = 3:

10.4 Type = 4:

10.5 Type = 5:

10.6 Type = 6:

10.7 Type = 7:

10.8 Type = 8:

10.9 Type = 9:

i0.i0 Type = i0:

i0.ii Type = ii:

10.12 Type = 12:

10.13 Type = 15:

10.14 Type = 16:

10.15 Type = 17:

10.16 Type = 18:

10.17 Type = 19:

10.18 Type = 25:

10.19 Type = 27:

10.20 Type = 29:

10.21 Type = 40:

10.22 Type = 41:

10.23 Type = 42:

10.24 Type = 43:

10.25 Type = 44:

10.26 Type = 45:

10.27 Type = 46:

Acoustic space to flat plate. 10-55

Acoustic space to cylinder. 10-56

Acoustic space to cone. 10-57

Acoustic space to flat plate to acoustic space. 10-58

Acoustic space to cylinder to acoustic space.

Acoustic space to cone to acoustic space.

Flat plate to flat plate. "L" connection.

Flat plate to flat plate. "T" connection.

Flat plate to cylinder. "T" connection.

Flat plate to cone. "T" connection.

Cylinder to flat plate. "T" connection.

Coneto flat plate. "T" connection.

Flat plate to truss with equivalent frame.

Flat plate to truss with rectangular frame.

Flat plate to truss with circular frame.

Flat plate to truss with tubular frame.

Flat plate to truss with general frame.

Flat plate to truss no frame.

Flat plate to truss no frame.

Flat plate to beam.

Plate to parallel beam. Point connection.

Plate to perpendicular plate. Single point.

Plate to parallel plate. Point connection.

Butt connection between two plates.

"T" connection between three plates.

Beam to parallel beam. Point connection.

"+" connection between four plates.

ll.1 5 element SEA model.

11.2 EXTA SEA acoustic space element.

11.3 SKIN SEA elements, plate and cylinder.

11.4 SKIN SEA elements, cone and EXTRAP II.

11.5 Typical SEA SKIN element.

11.6 Typical SEA SKIN element continued.

11.7 INTA SEA acoustic space element.

11.8 MONT SEA element TYPE = 1.

11.9 MONT SEA element TYPE = 2.

ii.i0 MONT SEA element TYPE = 3.

ii.ii MONT SEA element TYPE = 4.

11.12 MONT SEA element TYPE = 5. and -5.

11.13 MONT SEA element TYPE = 6.

ii.14 MONT SEA element TYPE = 7.

11.15 MONT SEA element TYPE = 8.

11.16 MONT SEA element TYPJ = i. and 2.

11.17 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 3., 4. and 5.

11.18 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 6. and 7.

11.19 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 8., 9. and 10.

11.20 MONT SEA element TYPJ = ii.

10-59

10-60

10-61

10-62

10-63

10-64

10-65

10-66

10-67

10-68

10-69

10-70

10-71

10-73

10-75

10-76

10-78

10-79

10-80

10-81

10-82

10-83

10-84

11-15

11-16

11-17

11-18

11-19

11-20

11-21

11-22

11-23

i1-24

11-25

11-26

11-27

11-28

11-29

11-30

11-31

i1-32

11-33

i1-34
-16 FIGURE5 J

List of Figures

ii.21 INST SEA element, plate and cylinder.

11.22 INST SEA element, cone and EXTRAP II.

11.23 FRAM SEA element.

11-35

i1-36

i1-37
Io INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION I-i

v

What is VAPEPS?

VAPEPS (VibroAcoustic Payload Environmental Prediction System) is a

computer program for performing vibroacoustic environmental predictions

and database management tasks. The program manages a database containing

test data from a variety of Space Shuttle and Expendable Launch Vehicle

payloads.

VAPEPS software

VAPEPS commands can be grouped into three functional categories:

* Computational operations

Including:

mathematical - add, subtract, multiply, divide, ...

statistical - average, percentile, confidence interval, max/min, ...

vibroacoustic - normalization, manipulation of vibration specifications,

shock spectra calculation,fourier transform,...

general - printing, plotting, file housekeeping, ...

* Database operations

Including:

adding to the database - data from your own test, data from another

site, ...

searching the database - for a particular test, for a "class" of tests, ...

retrieving data from the database - to support a prediction, to conduct

statistical studies, ...

* Prediction operations

Including:

Statistical Energy Analysis (SEA) based predictions - theoretical and

extrapolated

other predictions - scaling, stress, ...

VAPEPS Files

VAPEPS commands read and store data (numbers, words, etc) on specially

structured files called DAL (Direct Access Library) files.

i
1-2 INTRODUCTION

DAL files are used to store data such as:

input to calculations

* calculation results

* the global database

* your own local database

* text for interactive help

* text for runstreams

In addition the program can read and write to symbolic <text) files native

to your computer's operating system.
1.1. PURPOSE OF MANUAL

PURPOSE OF MANUAL 1-3

This manual is intended to be a reference manual for users with some basic

knowledge of the VAPEPS software. See the document "VAPEPS User's Guide"

for an introduction to VAPEPS.
1-4 INTRODUCTION

1.2. CONVENTIONS USED IN IVIANUAL

This manual is designed for reference and is entirely generated from the

help files contained in DAL unit 29. This gives the capability to quickly

update the manual when new commands are created or changes are made to the

documentation. This results in a large variation in page numbering from

manual to manual.

An attempt was made to place all the commands in alphabetic order in

chapter 3. Some commands have such lengthy documentation that they are

placed in the following chapters. Also some topics are fairly specialized

and deemed necessary to be placed in separate chapters.
ORGANIZATIONOFMANUAL 1-5

1.3. ORGANIZATION OF MANUAL

This manual is divided into several chapters as follows:

Chapter 1 - Introduction: Gives a general introduction to VAPEPS and the

use of this manual.

Chapter 2 - General Topics: Gives a complete description of DAL files,

VAPEP5 free field input, Command structure and how to use the online help

facilities.

Chapter 3 - General Commands: An alphabetic listing of the general

computation commands.

Chapter 4 - Printing and Plotting: Describes how to display your results

in the form of tables or plots.

Chapter 5 - Data Entry: Discusses how to enter data into the DAL file

structure in a form acceptable to the VAPEPS Database.

Chapter 6 - Database Preparation: Gives a description of the procedures

required to prepare data for inclusion in the VAPEPS database.

Chapter 7 - Searching the Database: Describes how to find and extract

data from the VAPEP5 database.

Chapter 8 - Database Administration: Gives commands and procedures to

correctly administer the VAPEPS database.

Chapter 9 - Direct Dictionary Interface: Describes the processor which

maintains the Data Dictionary for the VAPEPS database.

Chapter i0 - Statistical Energy Modeler: Describes the processor that is

used to build SEA models.

Chapter ll - Old SEA Commands: Contains an early version of vibroacoustic

prediction commands described in chapter i0; the commands given in chapter

i0 are now recommended.

Chapter 12 - Transparent Commands: This is a description of a set of

commands which are available at all times within VAPEPS.

Chapter 13 - Variables and Symbols: Description and use of variables and

symbols.

Chapter 14 - Loops and Runstreams: General concepts and guidelines for
i-6 INTRODUCTION

creation of high level "programs" using VAPEPScommands.

Appendix A: DatabaseWorksheets: Worksheetsdesigned to assist in the

data entry and preparation tasks. Seechapters 4 and 5.

Appendix B: SemodWorksheets: Worksheetsdesigned to assist in SEA

modeling.

Appendix C: FrequencyTables: Tables of commonlyused frequency standards.

Appendix D: Conversion Tables: Commonlyused conversions and codes used

in the VAPEPS software.

Index: Gives list of appropriate commands given a general word describing

the operation of the command.

Subject Command Summaries: Lists commands associated with different

subjects or disciplines.
GENERALTOPICS 2-1

e GENERAL TOPICS

This chapter contains information on some general topics as follows:

* General command structure.

* DAL (Direct Access Library) files.

* VAPEPS free field input.

* Description of the online help facility.

* List of menus available with the MENU command.
2-2 GENERAL TOPICS

2.1. COMMAND FORMAT

Command Format

The typical VAPEPS command is of the form

COMMAND/OPTION NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 ARGI, IARG2, .....

-Input DataWhere COMMAND is the command name, OPTION is a modifier to the basic

operation of the command, and NI,ELI,VR1 and N2,EL2,VR2 refer to DAL

elements that will be read or written during the command.

N1 - DAL unit number (1-30) (1 = DAL001, 2 = DAL002, etc.)

EL1 - DAL element name. Four characters maximum

VR1 - DAL version name. Four characters maximum

ARG1 - A floating point argument

IARGI - An integer argument

-Input Data -

- Although most commands only require the specification of the

command line to produce a result, some require additional input

data following the command line. In these cases the command

line functions to start a process and the input data is

required to finish it.

Each command string consists of a command name followed by a group of

arguments. The command name may consist of up to 12 characters. Only

enough characters to make the command unique are required. For RUN=

commands the first four characters are required.

Some commands have options which are words of up to 12 characters. Options

are specified by placing them after the conlnand preceeded by a /. These

options, if they exist, will be described in the description of the

particular command itself.

The argument list associated with each command may vary from zero to ten

or more items, depending on the command.

The argument list must be separated from the command and options by at

least 1 blank.

Arguments may be separated by coumas, spaces or equal signs.

Multiple spaces are treated as one space, but multiple commas or equal

signs are treated as blank words (hollerith).

Arguments may be of integer, real or hollerith type. Each command expects

V
COMMAND FORMAT 2-3

a certain number of arguments. Each argument is expected to be a certain

type. For some commands, trailing arguments may be omitted, resulting in

default values. It is important to note that arguments must be specified

in the order expected. Arguments may not be skipped, unless such skipping

is specifically spelled out in the description of the particular command.

Each command is described in its own section. These descriptions are

contained in this manual and will also be available on a DAL file. This

DAL file may be accessed via the HELP command during program execution.
2-4 GENERALTOPICS

2.2. DAL FILES

What is a DAL file?

A DAL file is a specially formatted data file. Each file may contain up to

1760 data sets (although 500 is a more realistic number in terms of

efficiency). Each data set may be thought of as a matrix. These data sets

will be described later. Right now we'll consider the DAL file as a whole.

Naming a DAL file

Within a given processor (eg VAPEPS), DAL files are referenced by unit

number. Up to 30 different DAL files may be referenced in a given

execution. By default, the unit number is linked to a local name, as

follows:

Unit 1 = DAL001

2 = DAL002

29 = DAL029

30 = DAL030

To equate a particular file with a DAL unit number, the user normally

equates one of the above local file names to the desired file. This is

done through commands available in your host computer's operating system.

For example:

UNISYS (aka: SPERRY (aka: UNIVAC))

@USE DAL001.,MY*MYDATA.

@USE DAL003.,DAL*MODEL.

VAX

$DEFINE DAL001

SDEFINE DAL003

etc.

DRA0:[MY.DIRECTORY]MYDATA.DAL

USERSDISK2:[MY.DATA]MODEL

or you may prefer the ASSIGN statement

SASSIGN DRA0:[MY.DIRECTORY]]MYDATA.DAL DAL001

SASSIGN USER$DISK2:[MY.DATA]MODEL DAL003

Note that on the VAX, you need not explicitly name the file

type (.DAL), as DAL is the default type.
DALFILES 2-5

CDC

ATTACH,DAL001=MYDATA, ID=ME.

ATTACH,DAL003=MODEL,ID=MINE.

CRAY

ATTACH,DN=DAL001,PDN=MYDATA,ID=ME.

FETCH,DN=DAL003,DF=TR,TEXT='$DISK MODEL.CDL'.

An alternate meansof associating a file with a DALunit numberis via the

VAPEPS'FNAME'command.The above assignments on any system could be made

as follows:

FNAMEI,'MYDATA'

FNAME3,'MODEL'

Note that the 'qualifier' has not been specified in the FNAMEcommand.On

the VAX, you could have put

FNAMEI,'DRA0:[MY.DIRECTORY]MYDATA'

Unfortunately the sameis not true on UNIVACand CDCsystems. On the

UNIVAC,the FNAMEapproach can currently only be used for files that have

your account qualifier. Similarly, CDCusers must always ATTACHtheir

files prior to entering VAPEPS.eg:

ATTACH,MYDATA, ID=MY.

VAPEPS.

FNAMEI,'MYDATA'

FNAMEmay also be used to redefine the default namingconvention.

FNAMEEAL0

causes unit 1 to be EAL001,unit 2 to be EAL002, etc. , and

FNAME 'UDI:[WHATEVER]TEST.L'

causes unit 1 to be UDI:[WHATEVER]TEST.L01, unit 2 is ...TEST.L02, etc.

The basic idea is that each name is defined as the specified name, plus 01

for unit i, 02 for unit 2, etc.

Units 28 through 30 may not be redefined in this manner. For more

information on FNAME, see the FNAME command.
2-6 GENERALTOPICS

DALData Sets

As mentioned earlier, each DALfile can contain manydata sets. Each such

data set is identified by a four word name:

ELN,VER,ICI,IC2

Where

ELN- Elementname-- Up to 4 characters long, the first of which

should be alphabetic.

VER- Version name-- Up to 4 characters long, just like ELN

ICI - First cycle number-- An integer, normally non-negative, and

less than 10000.

IC2 - Secondcycle number-- Sameas ICI.

This four word nameis always used to locate or create a data set.

In addition to their name,data sets have other attributes. These

attributes are maintained in the Table of Contents of each DALfile. The

following lists a typical Table of Contents as provided through the VAPEP5

TOC command:

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR DAL UNIT 1 USERSDISK0:[JES.TEMP]TUTORIAL.DAL;I

SEQ RR DATE TIME E WORDS NR NC T ELN VER C1 C2

1 16 840221 93156 0 i0 l0 1 1 SEQ DAT 0 0

2 20 840221 93226 0 i0 i0 1 1 LOG DAT 0 0

3 -24 840221 93315 0 i0 i0 1 1 LOG MULT 0 0

4 28 840221 93328 0 I0 i0 1 1 LOG MULT 0 0

5 32 840221 93352 0 i0 i0 1 1 LOG SUB 0 0

6 36 840221 93358 0 I0 i0 1 i DIV DAT 0 0

7 40 840221 93444 0 i00 i0 i0 1 TEN TEN 0 0

8 52 840221 93537 0 i00 i0 i0 1 TEN 5EQ 0 0

9 -64 840221 93603 0 16 4 4 1 FOUR FOUR 0 0

i0 68 840221 93618 0 16 4 4 1 FOUR FOUR 0 0

ii -72 840221 93733 0 33 33 1 5 LOOP LOOP 0 0

12 76 840221 93901 0 I00 i00 1 1 TEN EXP 0 0

13 80 840221 93942 0 27 27 1 5 LOOP LOOP 0 0

5EQ

The element sequence number. This number is not actually stored in the

table of contents. The number always starts with 1 and continues

sequentially through the last element. Some commands allow you to

identify a data set by its sequence number.

RR
DALFILES 2-7

The starting sector address of the data set. For most users this is a

meaningless number. It is useful for two reasons. First, you will

notice that a few of the data sets in the above TOChave negative

values for RR. This meansthat the data set has been disabled. A data

set will be disabled if a new data set is entered with the samefour

word name. It is not physically removedfrom the file, however it may

not be accessed unless it is 'enabled' The ENABLEand DISABLE

commandsallows users to enable/disable elements by sequencenumber.

The seconduse for RRstems from the fact that data sets are are always

written sequentially on the DALfile. Thus the RRnumbersmust always

increase as you go from one data set to the next. If two RR's are the

same, then the two data sets have been written in the sameplace, and

the first data set has been overwritten. Similarly a decrease in RR

indicates that a block of data sets have been overwritten. This should

not happen, howeverit can happen if an execution terminates

abnormally. Onceit occurs, there's nothing you can do except disable

the overwritten data sets.

The PACKcommandmaybe used to remove disabled data sets from the

file. It checks the RRentries, and will not pack a file if any enabled

data sets have been overwritten. If somehave, it indicates that some

data sets have a zero or negative length, and provides you with their

sequencenumbers. Thesemust be DISABLEdbefore the file can be packed

successfully.

DATE

Six digit integer YYMMDDindicating the date the data set was created.

TIME

Six digit integer HHMMSSindicating the time the data set was created.

Error code. A non zero value indicates that the data set is in error.

It maynot be accessed, however the error code maybe changedvia the

CHAERRcommand(see CHANGE)

WORDS

The total numberof words in the data set. Wordin this case indicates

a logical word. Ie for double precision data sets, WORDSindicates the

numberof double precision words. The numberof physical words would be

twice this number.

NR

The numberof rows in the data set.

NC

The numberof columns in the data set. Note that the use of NRand NC
_-8 GENERALTOPIC5

imply that each data set is a two dimensional matrix. This is not

always the case, but is true moreoften than not.

T

An integer type code. Legal values for type include the following:

0 - Integer (The data set contains integer data)

1 - Real (eg floating point, single precision)

2 - Double precision floating point

3 Complex(Each logical word is in reality two words, the real

part followed by the imaginary part)

4 - Hollerith (normally each word will contain a maximumof four

characters. On somesystems a word maycontain more than 4

characters, but standard PRINTwill showonly the leftmost four

characters)

5 - Packedhollerith text. This type of data set is created by SYMIN

and CSYMand read by ##READ.They mayalso be PRINTed.

6 - Fixed record length hollerith text. Theseare used just like

type 5 elements but are less storage efficient (each record is

paddedwith blanks to achieve equal length records) The default

modefor CSYMand SYMINis to create type 5 elements. This may

be reset by setting the variables NCR$and NRBS.

SETNCR$=80,NRB$=60

will cause CSYMor SYMINto create type 6 data sets. The data

sets will have 80 characters per record, and 60 records per

block. Users maychoose any combination of characters/record and

records/block. NCR$should not exceed 132.

ELN,VER,ICI, IC2

IS the data name,as described earlier.

General notes:

Data set type:

Eachdata set has a type code. Ideally all data within a given data set

will consist of values of the indicated type. Somecommandskey on the

type code and perform specialized operations depending on the type code.

The PRINTcommandis a good example. An integer type data set will be

printed using integer format. A real type via a real format, etc. If a

data set contains mixed types, the default PRINTcommandmaynot be used.

Eg. if columnone contains integers and column 2 contains reals and the

type code is 0, then column 1 will be printed correctly, and column 2 will

contain extremely large integers and probably exceedthe format and give

asterisks. The solution is to use the PRINFformat, and specify the format

v
DALFILES 2-9

that will correctly print the data set. The point is, VAPEPSallows you to

mix types however if you do, it is your responsibility to take care of any

complications that arise.

NR,NC vs. NI,NINJ

Users of other DAL type processors have probably seen several different

formats for the NR and NC columns of the DAL TOC. This can be very

confusing. In reality the NR/NC NI/NJ question has a very simple answer

and is best explained by looking at the manner in which DAL data sets are

stored on a DAL file.

(The following paragraph is not meant to scare you away. It may be

scanned, skipped or whatever)

For Advanced Users Only

First of all, all data sets have a starting address where the data exists.

This is given by the RR entry in the table of contents. The address is

called a sector address. The term sector originates from the addressing

characteristics of rotating mass storage devices. Eg. when I write to a

disk, I specify an address. If the device is word addressable, address 1

points to word i, and address 2 points to word 2. If it is sector

addressable, address 1 points to sector i, and address 2 points to sector

2, etc. In the later case, a sector corresponds to a certain number of

words.

Some disks have a sector length of 128 words, others have 256 words, etc.

What this means is that if I am writing to a disk with a sector length of

128 words, I cannot write to the 2nd word on the disk directly. I can only

begin input/output operations on words 1,129,257, etc. If I want to

change word 2, I must read all of the first sector, change word 2, and

then rewrite all of the first sector. As you can see, the simple change of

a word can involve a lot of hidden I/O. For this reason, the DAL system

was designed such that most I/O requests would automatically begin on a

sector boundary. Thus the following constraints:

l) All data sets must begin on a sector boundary.

2) Data sets are written as a sequence of blocks. Each block must also

start on a sector boundary.

and the following implications:

i) There will in general be 'wasted' space between data sets. Eg if

your data set has only 2 words and the sector length is 128, there

will be 126 unused words.

2) There will also be wasted space between blocks within a given data

set.
2-10 GENERALTOPICS

With this in mind, the best way to minimize 'wasted' space is to minimize

the numberof data sets and to minimize the numberof physical blocks per

data set. A 3x3 ,_trix stored as three separate physical blocks is going

to waste space, (unless of course the sector length is 3 or less -- which

is unlikely). For this reason, the concept of logical blocks is used. The

idea is to pack several logical records into one physical block. Eg write

our 3x3 as a 9xl (physically) and just remember that it is really a 3x3.

(You can continue reading now)

Blocking of DAL data sets

Each data set is written as a sequence of blocks. Eg

blocks 1 2 3 4

rows i ! ! ! ! !

2 t t ! i l

3 ! ! t ! i

4 i ! f ! l

5 ' ! ! i w

6 ! ! ! ! t

7 _ ! t ! !

8 ' ! t , ,

9 _ ! t ! l

i0 i ! ! ! !

ii ! ! m ! !

12 I ! ! I p

V

In the NR/NC approach, the above data set has NR=12, NC=4. In the pure DAL

approach, there is a hidden number called NI. NI is termed the logical

block length. Let NI in this case be 4, then

blocks 1 2 3 4

j i

i ! ! ! ! i

i 2 t ! ! !

3 ! ! ! w !

4 ! ! ! !

i ! ! ! ! ,

2 ! ! ! ! w

3 t ! ! ! l

4 ! ! ! !
DALFILES 2-11

1 ! I ! ! !

2 ! ! ! ! !

3 ! ! ! ! !

4 ! ! F ! t

For the above configuration, NJ=3 (eg numberof sub records) and NI = 4

(length of each sub record). The block length can be computedas NI*NJ (=

12 in this case). The above matrix can be considered a three dimensional

matrix (4,3,4) or as a two dimensional matrix (4,12). The NI/NJ form is

the basic definition of all DALdata sets. A data set is completely

described by three numbers:

NWDS = total number of words

NJ = number of logical groups per physical block

NINJ = NI*NJ = physical block length

from which, any remaining items can be calculated

NI = NINJ/NJ

NC = number of blocks = (NWDS-1)/NINJ + 1

If the above calculation of NC seems odd, it is due to the fact that there

is no requirement that the last block be completely filled. Eg consider the

following:

blocks 1 2 3 4

j i

1 ! ! ! ! !

1 2 ! i ! ! l

3 _ ! ! _

4 ! ! ! ! !

1 ! ! ! !

2 ! ! ! !

3 ! ! ! !

1 ! ! ! !

2 ! ! ! !

3 ! ! ! !

Here, NWDS = 3-12 + 4 = 40, NI = 4 (as before) and NJ = 3 (as before). In

this case it is clear that this represents a (4,10) matrix.

Hopefully the above samples have cleared up the NI/NJ issue. You may still

be wondering, however, why VAPEPS uses NR/NC. First of all, it doesn't
2-12 GENERALTOPICS

really. The true table of contents as physically stored in the file,

contains NJ and NINJvalues, as described above. Youmay list the true TOC

by resetting the TOCtype via the TTYPcommand--

TTYP2

TOCI

yields an alternate listing for the above DAL file.

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR DAL UNIT 1 USER$DISK0:[JES.TEMP]TUTORIAL.DAL;1

SEQ RR DATE TIME E WORDS NJ NI*NJ T ELN VER C1 C2

1 16 840221 93156 0 i0 1 l0 1 SEQ DAT 0 0

2 20 840221 93226 0 i0 1 i0 1 LOG DAT 0 0

3 -24 840221 93315 0 i0 1 I0 1 LOG MULT 0 0

4 28 840221 93328 0 i0 1 i0 1 LOG MULT 0 0

5 32 840221 93352 0 I0 1 i0 1 LOG SUB 0 0

6 36 840221 93358 0 i0 1 i0 1 DIV DAT 0 0

7 40 840221 93444 0 i00 1 i0 1 TEN TEN 0 0

8 52 840221 93537 0 i00 1 i0 1 TEN SEQ 0 0

9 -64 840221 93603 0 16 1 4 1 FOUR FOUR 0 0

i0 68 840221 93618 0 16 1 4 1 FOUR FOUR 0 0

ll -72 840221 93733 0 33 i0 33 5 LOOP LOOP 0 0

12 76 840221 93901 0 i00 i0 i00 1 TEN EXP 0 0

13 80 840221 93942 0 27 8 27 5 LOOP LOOP 0 0

The NJ and NINJ values show up, as promised. The problem is that you must

now do a calculation to determine NI and NC. Most VAPEPS commands

interpret data sets as unblocked, two-dimensional matrices. Thus, to

VAPEPS, all of the above data sets represent a 12x3 matrix. As a user

convenience, VAPEPS computes NC as part of the TOC process, and renames

NINJ to NR and shuffles them around to yield NR and NC. The idea is to

make life easier for the user. Unfortunately when VAPEPS operations are

used on data sets from other processors, eg SPAR, the end result is one of

confusion, not simplicity.

As a means of bridging the gap between SPAR type and VAPEPS type

conventions, VAPEPS provides the EXPAND command. The SPAR type joint

location matrix JLOC BTAB 2 5 has NJ = number of joints, NI = 3. To

VAPEPS this is a vector, NINJxl. EXPAND may be used to convert this to a

NJx3 matrix, as follows:

CYCLE 2,5

EXPAND I,JLOC,BTAB I,XYZ,MAT &NJ -1

(Note, EXPAND has recently been improved such that you can now leave off

the &NJ and -i. VAPEPS now examines the table of contents entry for NJ. If
DALFILES 2-13

NJ .NE. i, it assumesit is a SPARtype blocked data set and does the

above automatically. If NJ = I, then it reverses the process

automatically. You can override this of course, by providing the new row

length and NJ values directly in the command)
2-14 GENERALTOPICS

2.3. FORtVlAT

Dalpro Free-field Format

A free-field format is one which allows users to input a string of values

as a group of words separated by commas. It eliminates the need to place

each value in a particular location on the card image, and generally makes

life a lot easier for the user. DALPRO free-field format is an extension

of this type of format. It provides for the above format and also allows

the use of variables, implied do-loops, multiple values and indirect

strings.

2.3.1. BASIC APPROACH

The basic image is a string of words separated by commas, spaces or equal

signs. Thus

1,3,5,7,10,9,8,7,3,12

1.1, 2.2, 3.56E7, -2.61-3, 7.804

ABCD, EFGH IJK H '1234'

A=57.295, I=15, NAME=TEST ITEM=3

are all legitimate free field forms. Basic rules are that

i) Integers are numeric characters without a decimal point. Octal

values may be specified by preceding them with an exclamation point

( !200 = 128)

2) Reals are numeric characters that have a decimal point. These may

have an exponent as indicated above. Many exponent forms are

allowable. The only restriction is that spaces are not permitted

between a number and its exponent.

3) Hollerith words consist of up to four alphanumeric characters. The

first character must be alphabetic. Any words input as longer than

four characters will be truncated to the first four characters.

Other characters may be embedded in a hollerith word by enclosing

the word in single quotes. Thus

' ', '''., '.=*', '1234'
FORMAT 2-15

Are all legitimate hollerith words.

4) Types maybe mixed on one line, however, the values must correspond

to the type of data that is expected by the reading program.

2.3.2. VARIABLES

Variables are named items that refer to values contained in an internal

table. Variables may be created through the SET command or operated

algebraically in the CALC subprocessor. When used in free-field input, the

variable name must be preceeded by an ampersand (&) to distinguish it from

a regular hollerith name. Thus

SET I=5, X=5.7

SET J=&I, Y=&X

represents the use of variables. In this case, the card image is the SET

command which creates the variable I and sets it equal to 5. It then

creates J and indirectly sets it equal to 5 by referencing the variable I.

The type of variable is determined by its first character. If this

character is between I and N, the variable is assumed to be either integer

or hollerith. If not, the variable is assumed to be real. There are many

ways to trick DALPRO into not following the convention. It is not

worthwhile, however, and you are advised to break convention at your own

risk.

A special hollerith mode may be used in conjunction with integer

variables:

A&I,BBB&I,'!'&I

would result in the hollerith words:

A1 BBBI !i FOR I = 1

and

A999 BBB* !999 FOR I = 999

Note that an attempt to exceed 4 characters will result in asterisk fill.

Also note that this mode is available only with integer type variables
2-16 GENERALTOPICS

that contain non-negative values. The expression A-&I would be A-1 for

I=l, while A&I would be A*** for I=-l. If the variable is zero, the zero

is not included in the output string. Thus A&I would be A for I=0.

2.3.3. MULTIPLE VALUES

An asterisk may be used to indicate repeated values:

541.7, 3*ABCD, 2*-7

= 1.7,1.7,1.7,1.7,1.7,ABCD,ABCD,ABCD,-7,-7

The number to the left of the asterisk must be a non-negative integer.

The word on the right may be of any type.

Implied Do-Loops

Two types of implied do-loops are permitted.

Colon mode: IST:LAST:INC or FIRST:FLAST:FINC

With the colon mode, the user specifies the starting value, the last value

and the increment. Positive and negative values are permitted as long as

the string makes sense. All values must be integer or they must all be

real. The increment may be omitted. If omitted, the trailing colon must

also be dropped and the increment defaults to 1 (or i.). Note that the

last value should be interpretted as an upper limit.

1:3 = 1,2,3 i:10:4 = 1,5,9 -1:-5:-3 = -1,-4

1.:3. = 1.,2.,3. 10.7:13. = i0.7,11.7,12.7

The colon mode may also be used with hollerith strings:

A:D,ABCD:ABCF,VI:V3,XX20:XX30:3,A:F:3

would yield:

A,B,C,D,ABCD,ABCE,ABCF,Vl,V2,V3,XX20,XX23,XX26,XX29,A,D

Note that the increment defaults to l, and that the increment must always

be expressed as an integer. Also note that the hollerith portion of the

last value must equal the hollerith portion of the starting value, and

that the numeric portion must be of integer type.
FORMAT 2-17

Slash mode: IST/NUM/INCor FIRST/NUM/FINC

With the slash mode, the user specifies the starting value, the numberof

values and optionally the increment. The numberof values must always be

a non-negative integer. The starting value and increment must both be

real or both be integer.

Super slash mode

The slash modemaybe extended by adding an outer loop and an outer

increment. This form is

IST/NUM/INC/LOOP/LINC

Basically, it causes the original loop to be issued LOOPtimes. The value

of IST is incremented by LINCeach time through the loop. Both LOOPand

LINCdefault to i.

1/3/i/5/6 = 1,2,3,7,8,9,13,14,15,19,20,21,25,26,27

10./5/10./2 = I0.,20.,30.,40.,50.,ii.,21.,31.,41.,51.

Note that hollerith strings maybe formed using either the slash or super

slash mode. The approach is the sameas for the colon mode, except that

only the starting value maycontain a hollerith field. The numberof

values, numberof loops and both increments must be of integer type.

AAI/3/2/3/5 = AA1,AA3,AA5,AA6,AA8,AA10,AAll,AAI3,AA15

2.3.4. INDIRECT MODE

The whole purpose of decoding a card image is to obtain the binary values

that the characters represent. In many cases, these values are already

present on DAL files. The indirect mode allows the user the capability of

using a column of a matrix for input rather than typing the data in. The

indirect mode is keyed by the presence of an equal sign in column i. Ie,

= N1,ELI,VRI ICOL

= NI,ELI,VRI,ICI,IC2,ICOL

the value of ICOL defaults to 1 if not supplied. Cycles of MASK,MASK may

be used for ICI,IC2 if desired. Cycle numbers default to the current
2-18 GENERALTOPICS

'reading' cycles. Note that the entire column is read. Thus the program

must be expecting the amount of data that is being input. If ICOL is input

as zero, the entire matrix will be read, starting with column i.

2.3.5. ERRORS

Error messages are written when errors are encountered. The following

errors are possible:

Too much data -> you input more than was needed.

Invalid free-field format. The offending line is reprinted. This

can be caused by starting a name with a digit, having inconsistent

types in an implied do-loop, etc. Inspection of the line should

reveal the problem.

Lib read error - this will occur if the element referenced does not

exist, or exists with an error code.
HELP 2-19

2.4. HELP

HELP Command

Purpose

Provide online documentation for commands and processors.

Command

HELP (topic (subtopic ...))

or

HELPC

or

HELPM (menu (submenu ...))

Where

HELP

topic

subtopic - Subtopics to the main topic.

HELPC - List command pointers.

- Get online documentation.

- Is any main topic. In general this is the command name.

HELPM - Display menus.

menu - Same as topic except that the text is treated as a menu

control is returned immediately to the command level.

submenu - Same notes as for menu.

Main help display

The following is displayed when HELP is typed with out any arguments:

Welcome to the VAPEPS online help facility.

- For documentation about a command, type the conm_nd. (e.g. TOC)

- For lists of available commands or general information,

type in the appropriate code from the list below. (e.g. VT)

Commands by Function General Information

Arithmetics, statistics ....... AS Introduction to VAPEPS ........ IN

Advanced usage ................ AU

and

User guide (all user levels)..UG
2-20 GENERALTOPICS

Element creation/manipulation.EC

Element, file, system control.EF

Graphics...................... GR

Input/Output .................. I0

Logical, sorting .............. LS

All commands,runstreams...... SUMM_Y

Variable control .............. VC

Vibroacoustic database........ VD

Vibroacoustic prediction ...... VP

Vibroacoustic tools ........... VT

Help co,tmands{..=>Quit .=>Top level

Using HELP.................... UH

Newuser Information

* To exit HELP,type QUIT

* To terminate VAPEPSexecution

use the ENDcommand.

* Type UHto learn about HELP

?=>Current info ??=>subtopics} (see UH)

2.4.1. USING HELP

The following commands are available while in help:

QUIT - Exit help. If there is a subtopic called QUIT it will go to that

and will not exit.

- Sure exit. This will take you out of help no matter where you

are.

- Go to top level of help. Takes you to the level with the prompt

"help > "

?

??

- Redisplay current help section from the top.

- Displays the subtopics of the current section. When at the "help

>" prompt it displays the main help section. This can be used as

an argument as well. (eg. HELP ENTER ??)

SKIP - This works only when the help is stopped at the bottom of the

screen. It has the same effect as ??.

Carriage return

- This will move you up one section or out of help if you are at the

"help >" prompt. If you are in the middle of help output, it will

give you the next screen of information.
2.5. MENU UTILITY

MENU UTILITY 2-21

MENU Utility

Purpose

The menu utility provides summaries of commands by subject. This is a

good way for a new user to find commands for a specific operation. The

following is a list of the menus available. To turn menus on type MENU to

turn them off type MENU OFF.

2.5.1. ARITHMETICS COi_4ANDS MENU

Arithmetics commands.

Often used commands:

ASMD Term by term (+,-,*,/)

BUILD(X) Term by term (+,-,*,/,..etc)

CALC Calculator. (variables)

FUN Term by term (Sin,Cos,..etc)

Other useful commands:

FFT MGRATE NORM RTOI

MDIFF MTRAN RUN=ROUN TMUL

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

INVERT Matrix inversion.

MULTIPLY Matrix multiplication.

SEQUENCE Sequence of real numbers.

TRAN Matrix transposition.

TURP

(eg. HELP ASMD)

2.5.2. ADVANCED USAGE COMMANDS MENU

Advanced usage commands. Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

RUN=ADDC

RUN=BCL

RUN=BOOT

RUN=BSC

CBIT

CONTROL*

CNFG CSYM RUN=GRLT

RUN=COPS DPTOR HELP

CORE EZOUT RUN=INDE

CPU RUN=GCLS RUN=INTE

RUN=CPYS RUN=GDOC JPI

CRYPT GLOSS LOOPS*

* General information.

Type HELP command for more information.

RUN=MEZ RUN RUN=TOCO

RUN=PGLS RUN=SEND RUN=UPDS

RUN=PUTC RUN=STAC WTAPE

RECOVER 5YMIN XQT

RLJUST RUN=TCPY

RTABS TDUMP

(eg. HELP CORE)
2-22 GENERAL TOPICS

2.5.3. ELEMENT CREATION/MANIPULATION MENU

Element creationmanipulation.

Often used commands:

BUILD(X) Combine matrices.

CHOP Create sub-matrices.

ECOL Input data.

Other useful commands:

GCOL GREAD RUN=LFU MODIFY

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

FORMAT

GROUP

RANDOM

Information on formats.

Combine matrices.

Random number generator.

RUN=RRAN SEQUENCE

(eg. HELP CHOP)

2.5.4. ELEMENT, FILE AND SYSTEM CONTROL MENU

Element, file and system control. Menus: AR AU EC EF GR I0 LS ST VC VD VP VT

Often used commands:

CHANGE Change a DAL element name.

COPY Copy element to new element.

COMMAND* Typical command formats.

DISABLE Disable DAL elements.

ENABLE Enable DAL elements.

Other useful commands:

CYCLE DAL* EXPAND FILE5

* General information.

Type HELP command for more information.

FIND

FNAME

LAST

PACK

TOC

Find elements on a file.

Assign file to DAL unit.

List last element on a file.

Remove disabled elements.

Table Of Contents of DAL file.

LOCATE

(eg. HELP COPY)

2.5.5. GRAPHICS MENU

Graphics.

Often used commands:

RUN=GENP General plotting runstream.

PLOT Basic plotting command.

Other useful commands:

RUN=PGDB RUN=PGRM RUN=PCOMPARE

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

RUN=PRSP SEMOD plotting.

PSET Set plotting options.

(eg. HELP PLOT)
MENU UTILITY 2-23

2.5.6. INPUT OUTPUT MENU

Input/Output.

Often used commands:

ECOL Input data. (Free-field) PRCRN

GREAD Input data. (Psuedo-format) PRINT

RUN=NEWS List latest news item. TABLE

Other useful commands:

CSYM FORMAT* GCOL RUN=MANU SYMIN

* General information.

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO L5 ST VC VD VP VT

LiSt corners of a matrix.

Output DAL elements.

Report quality tables.

TDUMP WRITE WTAPE

(eg. HELP ECOL)

2.5.7. LOGIC AND SORTING MENU

Logic and sorting. Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO L5 ST VC VD VP VT

Often used commands:

ORDER Sort contents of an element. SEARCH Search a DAL element.

Other useful commands:

AND NOT OR

Type HELP command for more information. (eg. HELP ORDER)

2.5.8. STATISTICS COM_L%NDS MENU

Statistics commands.

Often used commands:

RUN=AVG Find row or column average.

RUN=CIMV Confidence interval.

MAXMIN Find maximums and minimums.

RUN=MVC Mean Variance & Covariance.

Other useful commands.

RUN=GVAL RUN=RRAN RUN=TSTA

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

RANDOM Random number generator.

RUN=STAS Normal & log-normal stats.

STAT Normal statistics.

RUN=TPVL Theoretical percentile value.

(eg. HELP STAT)
2-24 GENERAL TOPICS

2.5.9. VARIABLE CONTROL MENU

Variable control.

Often used commands:

CALC Calculator.

Control Transparent commands.

LIST List variables.

Other useful commands:

DEFAULT RECOVER RUN

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

SET

VAR

Set variables.

Remove variables.

<eg. HELP 5TAT)

2.5.10. VIBROACOUSTIC DATABASE MENU

Vibroacoustic database. Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO LS ST VC VD VP VT

Often used commands:

RUN=DATA Get averaged data. RUN=GMOD Get parameters and data.

DICTIONARY Direct Dictionary interface. RUN=PADMIN Prepare PREP for Dictionary.

ENTER Enter data. RUN=PICK Data from specific channels.

RUN=GLST List parameters. (RUN=GMOD) PREP Prep data.

Other useful commands:

ADMIN RUN=SAVE RUN=SPIL

Type HELP command for more information. (eg. HELP PREP)

2.5.11. VIBROACOUSTIC PREDICTION MENU

Vibroacoustic prediction. Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO L5 5T VC VD VP VT

The following menus are available.

EXTRAP I .................... VPXl Statistical Energy MODeler..VPSM

EXTRAP II ................... VPX2

- To obtain a menu listed type the code. (eg. VPXI for EXTRAP I.)
MENUUTILITY 2-25

v

2.5.11.1. EXTRAP I PREDICTION MENU

EXTRAP I prediction.

Often used commands:

CNVRT Specify units.

DAMO Input parameters.

DENS Modal density.

RUN=EQPL Equivalent plate properties.

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: VPXl VPX2 VPSM

PRDICT

PREDICT

TRNF

EXTRAP I prediction.

EXTRAP I, II and Theoretical.

Transfer functions.

(eg. HELP PRDICT)

2.5.11.2. EXTRAP II PREDICTION MENU

EXTRAP II prediction. Menus: VPXI VPX2 VPSM

Often used commands:

DAMO Input parameters. PREDICT EXTRAP I, II and Theoretical.

RUN=EQPL Equivalent plate properties. SCALE EXTRAP II prediction.

Type HELP command for more information. (eg. HELP SCALE)

2.5.11.3. SEA MODELER MENU

Statistical Energy MO__DDeler.

Often used commands:

ATACALC Coupling loss factors.

ATACO Coefficient matrix.

CFAC Specify units.

RUN=EQPL Equivalent plate properties.

Other useful commands:

RUN=CLFGET RUN=GETRESP

RUN=CLFPUT RUN=PRST

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: VPXI VPX2 VPSM

MDENS

PREDICT

SEMOD

TPRD

Modal density.

EXTRAP I, II and Theoretical.

Statistical Energy MODeler.

Theoretical prediction.

RUN=SAVG

RUN=SHIFT

(eg. HELP 5EMOD)
2-26 GENERAL TOPIC5

2.5.12. VIBROACOUSTIC TOOLS MENU

Vibroacoustic tools.

Often used commands:

CONVERT Convert units.

FREQUENCY Generate frequencies.

RUN=GRMS Generate specs.

Other useful commands:

RUN=CIMV RUN=LRM5 RUN=STA5

RUN=GP5D RUN=LTRP SHOCK

Type HELP command for more information.

Menus: AR AU EC EF GR IO L5 ST VC VD VP VT

RUN=NOML Normalize data.

RUN=OCT3 Narrow band to 1/3 octave.

RUN=OVER Calculate overall levels.

RUN=TPVL

RUN=VFIX

(eg. HELP CONVERT)

V  ̧
at GENERAL COMMANDS

GENERAL COMMANDS 3-i

This chapter contains a listing of all general commands. See the

discussion on command format in chapter 2 for more information on the

command structure. The following should give you an idea where to look if

you can't find a command in this chapter.

Chapter 2 contains the HELP and MENU commands.

Chapter 4 contains the printing and plotting commands.

Chapter 5 contains the ENTER command.

Chapter 6 contains the PREP command.

Chapter 7 contains the $ERCH command.

Chapter 8 contains the ADMIN command.

Chapter 9 contains the DICTIONARY command.

Chapter i0 contains the SEMOD command used for performing vibroacoustic

predictions.

Chapter Ii contains an early version of vibroacoustic prediction commands

described in Chapter 10; the commands given in Chapter I0 are now

recommended.

Chapter 12 contains the transparent ## commands.

Chapter 13 contains the variable and symbol manipulation commands.

Chapter 14 contains the runstream commands.
3-2 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.1. RUN ADDC

RUN=ADDC Programmer 's Command

Purpose

This command is used to add new commands to the SETCOM subroutine.

Command

RUN=ADDC OLD NEW NIN NOUT

Where

OLD = Version name of existing ABV, CALL, and EPS matrices.

NEW = Version name for new elements created here.

NIN = Unit number for input (default = i)

NOUT = Unit number for output (default = 2)

Example

Add the command ZAP to a setcom routine on DAL unit 1.

RUN=ADDC VAP VAP 1 2

YES

1

ZAP

YES

YES

-- Lists existing commands.

-- Number of commands to add.

-- Name of command to add.

-- Use first three characters for command name.

-- Decode command.

Related Commands

RUN=ADNC, RUN=BCL, RUN=BSC, RUN=GCLS, RUN=SUBC

v
RUN=ADNC 3-3

3.2. RUN ADNC

RUN=ADNC Programmer's Command

Purpose

This command will add a new style command and options to the command

options file specified.

Command

RUN=ADNC NI(,NELI (N2(,NEL2))

or

RUN=ADNC NI,NELI 'LIST'

or

RUN=ADNC NI,NELI 'SPILL' NU

Where

N1,NELI - Input data set as follows. NELl defaults to 'COMS'

NI,NELI,'NAM$' - Contains the 12 character command names.

NI,NELI,'NUM$' - Contains the 3 character command name pointers. Same

as ist 3 characters of old style commands. There is

one entry here for each entry in NAM$.

NI,NELI,'OPT$' - Contains the 12 character option names.

NI,NELI,'OPN$' - Contains two columns as follows:

Column i: Contains the 3 character command name pointer

of the corresponding option in OPTS.

Column 2: Contains the 1 character option to be passed

to the command.

N2,NEL2 - Output DAL unit and element name for new data set.

Default is NI,NELI.

'LIST' - Displays the data sets in an organized manner.

- Creates a symbolic fortran file which when ##read will

recreate the dal data sets.

- Is the fortran unit number to direct spill output to.

Example

Make the new command ENABLE be equivalent to ABLD.

RUN=ADNC 30,COM$

ENABLE

ABL,D
3-4 GENERALCOMMANDS

-blank line-

-blank lineNotes

The abovedata sets are both input and output. If they do not exist a new

set is created. The commandsand options are sorted alphabetically.

Related Commands

RUN=ADDC, RUN=BCL,RUN=BSC,RUN=GCLS, RUN=SUBC
RUN=AJNV 3-5

3.3. RUN AJNV

RUN=AJNV Command

Purpose

This command takes an input matrix and an approximate inverse and

produces a better inverse.

Command

RUN=AJNV NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 IPNT

Where

NI,EL1,VR1 - Original matrix.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Approximate inverse.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Better inverse.

IPNT - Quality check flag.

= 0 - No quality check done.

> 0 - RUN=ORTH is executed to show the quality of the

original inverse and the new inverse.

Default=0

Example

Invert then adjust the inverse of a matrix of random numbers and check the

quality of the inversion..

RANDOM 28,A,A 50,50

INVERT 28,A,A 28,B,B

RUN=AJNV 28,A,A 28,B,B 28,C,C 1

Related Commands

INVERT, RUN=ORTH
3-6 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.4. RUN ALL

RUN=ALL Command

Purpose

Prints out the header and channel information section for all sections

of all events on the specified DAL file.

Con_nand

RUN=ALL NU (IOUT>

Where

NU - DAL file to get events from.

IOUT - Optional fortran output file number. Default = 6.

Example

Print out the header and channel information for all sections of all

events on DAL unit 1 and direct the output to Fortran unit 2.

RUN=ALL 1 2

Related Commands

ENTER, RUN=ESAV, RUN=HEAD, PREP
AND 3-7

3.5. AND

AND Command

Purpose

Reduce two lists into one list that contains all items that are present in

both lists.

Command

AND NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

Where

NI,EL1,VR1 = Input vector

N2,EL2,VR2 = Input vector

N3,EL3,VR3 = Output vector of common items.

MS = Output variable set to indicate number of items in output list.

Example

Find the union of the two sets of integers (1,3,4) and (3,5,12).

ECOL 28,A,A 3,1

1,3,4

ECOL 28,B,B 4,1

3,5,10,12

AND 28,A,A 28,B,B 28,C,C

LIST MS

PRINT 28,C,C

Notes

The input vectors may be integer, real or hollerith, but both input

vectors must be of the same type. Input vectors may contain repeated

values. The output vector will contain each common item only once.

Related Commands

NOT, OR, ORDER
3-8 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.6. ASMD

ASMD Command

Purpose

Perform term by term addition, subtraction, multiplication, division of

two matrices to form a third.

Command

ASMD ITYP N1,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

or

ASMDC ITYP NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

or

ASMD ITYP NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 FAC

Where

ITYP - 1 for add, 2 for sub, 3 for mul, 4 for div

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input DAL element.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output DAL element (same size as EL1)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Optional second input element.

FAC - Constant factor to be used in place of the second

input element.

Example

Add the two vectors (1,2,3,4) and (3,8,4,9) and multiply the result

by 3.

ECOL 28,A,A 4,1

1,2,3,4

ECOL 28,B,B 4,1

3,8,4,9

ASMD 1 28,A,A 28,C,C 28,B,B

ASMD 3 28,C,C 28,D,D 3

Description

The output matrix (N2,EL2,VR2) is always the same size as the first matrix

(NI,ELI,VRI). Ie: Every input term is operated on and then output in the

same position. The following sections outline the procedure. Note that

the operator (N3,EL3,VR3) may be a matrix, a vector or a scalar. Assume

the first element is A(NR,NC), the second is B(NR,NC), and the third is

C(MR,MC). Also let ITYP be one (indicating addition). Then
ASMD 3-9

IF(MR.EQ.NR.AND.MC.EQ.NC) B(I,J) = A(I,J) + C(I,J)

IF(MC.EQ.I.AND.MR.EQ.NR)B(I,J) = A(I,J) + C(I,I)

IF(MC.EQ.I.AND.MR.EQ.NC)B(I,J) = A(I,J) + C(J,I)

If MCnot equal to one of the above, error ....

If A is square (NR=NC),and C is a vector (MR=NR=NC,MC=I), then both of

the last two conditions hold. In this case, the first rule will be applied

(ie: C is swept across A to produce B). If the second form is desired (ie:

Transpose C and sweepit downA to get B), use the commandASMDC.

ASMDmayalso be used to operate on a matrix with a scalar. In this case

the third element is not present and FACis used.

Wherethe operation

B(I,J) = A(I,J) + FAC

is performed.

Notes

In the above, the plus is replaced by the other operations for ITYP other

than i.

ASMDwill operate on single precision, double precision, complex or

integer matrices. Both input matrices must be of the same type. In the

case of complex, the scalar form may consist of a real and an imaginary

value, or just a real.

Related Commands

BUILD, CALC, FUN
3-10 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.7. RUN AVG

RUN=AVG Command

Purpose

Compute the average of a group of data by rows or columns.

Command

RUN=AVG N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 ITYP

Whet e

N1,ELI,VRI = Input array (NR,NC)

N2,EL2,VR2 = Output vector of averaged numbers.

(NR,I) for ITYP='ROW' (NC,I) for ITYP='COL'

ITYP = Character string indicating whether to average the rows

('ROW') or the columns ('COL') ITYP defaults to 'COL'

Example

Find the average of the following vector (1,3,4,5,4,6,5)

ECOL 28,A,A 7,1

1,3,4,5,4,6,5

RUN=AVG 28,A,A 28,B,B COL

PRINT 28,B,B

Related Commands

RUN=CMIV, RUN=STAS, STAT, RUN=TPVL
3.8. RUN BCL

RUN=BCL 3-11

RUN=BCL Programmer's Command

Purpose

This runstream builds a COMM/LIST element for saving the command list of a

DAL processor.

Command

RUN=BCL NI,ILI,IVl NU

Where

NI,ILI,IVl = Input command matrix (NR,3) or (NR, 4)

NU = Output Fortran unit

Example

Build a COMM/LIST element from the input matrix I,BCL,DAT and direct the

output to Fortran unit i.

RUN=BCL I,BCL,DAT 1

Related Commands

RUN=ADDC, RUN=ADNC, RUN=BSC, RUN=GCLS, RUN=SUBC
3-12 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.9. RUN BEAM

RUN=BEAM Command

Purpose

Calculate moments of inertia, centroidal distance and radius of gyration

for a given beam built up of rectangular sections.

Command

RUN=BEAM N1,NVR1 (N2,NVR2)

Where

NI,NVR1 - DAL unit and version name for output. If N1 is negative and

old set of parameters is read in from -NI,NVRI. The

parameter values for the old model can be changed by stepping

through the input sections and making changes as you go.

N2,NVR2 - Optional DAL unit and version name for output if N1 is

negative. Default is N2,NVR2 = -NI,NVRI.

Notes

There are two sections of input.

l) General parameters.

NBL =

RLEN =

ER =

RHOR =

The following parameters need to be input:

..... Number of rectangular sections in the beam.

..... Length of beam.

..... Reference Young's modulus. This is also used as the

default for the E in the following section of input.

..... Reference mass density. This is also used as the

default for RHO in the following section of input.

2) For each layer or section.

S

CENX =

CENY =

E =

RHO =

W =

- Thickness of layer.

- Distance from X reference to centroid of this layer.

- Distance from Y reference to centroid of this layer.

- Young's modulus for this layer. Default = ER.

- Mass density for this layer. Default = RHOR.

- Width of this layer.

Output

There following DAL elements are output:

NI,'GENR',NVR1 - Input general parameters RLEN, ER, RHOR. (3 x l)
RUN=BEAM 3-13

NI,'GENI',NVR1 - Input general parameter NBL. (i x i)

NI,'BEML',NVRI - Input parameters H, CENX,CENY,E, RHO,Wfor each

beamlayer. (NBLx 6)

NI,'BEAM',NVRI - Output calculated values IX, IY, CENX,CENY,RGFX,

RGFY,J, A, RGFJ.

The output parameters are:

IX - Momentof inertia about X axis.

IY - Momentof inertia about Y axis.

CENX- Distance from X reference to centroid.

CENY- Distance from Y reference to centroid.

RGFX- Radius of gyration about the centroid in X direction.

RGFY- Radius of gyration about the centroid in Y direction.

J - Polar momentof inertia. (IX + IY)

A - Cross section area.

RGFJ - Polar radius of gyration.
3-14 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.10. RUN BOOT

RUN=BOOT Programmer's Command

Purpose

Create a VAPEPS boot tape for the named system.

Command

RUN=BOOT SYSTEM (OPTI(,OPT2(,...(,OPTN))))

Where

SYSTEM - Computer system to generate tape for.

= VAX - All of the DEC VAX family of machines.

= CDC - CDC machines. Very site dependant.

= UNIVAC - ll00 series of UNISYS (aka: SPERRY (aka: UNIVAC))

machines.

= CRAY - CRAY I-S and CRAY XMP machines running COS.

= MC500 - All MASSCOMP UNIX based machines.

= SILIG - Silicon Graphics Unix based machines.

= SP7000 - Unisys Unix system. Was Sperry 7000.

= UNICOS - Cray Unix operating system.

= UNIX - General UNIX based machines. May experience some

problems depending on machine and UNIX version.

OPTI,OPT2,...,OPTN

- One or more of the following options:

= TAPE - Creates Boot TAPE. This assumes that the BOOT

files are on DAL002. When this option is not

specified with the EXTRACT option no tape is

generated.

= EASY - This option includes the EASY symbolics on the

transmittal tape. When TAPE is specified the EASY

deck must reside on DAL002.

= EXTRACT - This extracts the symbolics for the specified

system and places them on DAL002. If EASY is

specified then the EASY symbolics are placed in an

element on DAL002 as well.

= DISSPLA - Includes symbolics for linking with the DISSPLA

plotting software. This is only done when the site

requesting the tape has DISSPLA at their site

already. EXTRACT must be specified with this

option.

= NOPRIM - This will cause primitive plotting software. To not

be included. This is the default when DISSPLA is

specified. EXTRACT must be specified with this
= NOPLOT

= CSYM

RUN=BOOT 3-15

option.

- This will cause no plotting software to be

included. EXTRACTmust be specified with this

option.

- This uses the CSYMcommandto create symbolic VAX

files of the elements on DAL002. This can be used

to create files which are to be trans- mitted over

a direct connection betweena VAXand the machine

to which to symbolics are to be transmitted.

Notes

A) This stream only works from a VAXor MASSCOMP machine.

B) The file BOOTEASY.DAL must be assigned to DAL003

The file EASY.DALmust be assigned to DAL004

The file VAPEASY.DALmust be assigned to DAL005

C) The file GENERL.DALmust be assigned to DAL010

D) Whenbooting to CDCor UNIVAC,this streams writes to a tape,

identified as logical nameTAPE04.

E) Whenbooting to another VAX, this stream produces several files with

version .TRN. These maybe $COPYedto a labeled tape.

F) In each case, this stream produces a file BOOT.INSthat contains

instructions on how to use the tape on the destination machine.

Example

The following is a VAX runstream that may be used to create a BOOT tape

for the CDC. The procedure for UNIVAC, MC500, and UNIX machines is

similar.

SASSIGN ?:[?]BOOTEASY DAL003

SASSIGN ?:[?]EASY DAL004

SASSIGN ?:[?]VAPEASY DAL005

SASSIGN ?:[?]GENERL DAL010

$VAPEPS

RUN=BOOT CDC EXTRACT

END

SMOUNT MTA0:/FOREIGN

SASSIGN MTA0: TAPE04

SVAPEPS

RUN=BOOT CDC TAPE

END

SDISMOUNT MTA0:

! non VAX machines.

! non VAX machines.

For a VAX machine the following runstream can be used:

SASSIGN ?:[?]BOOTEASY DAL003

SASSIGN ?:[?]EASY DAL004

SASSIGN ?:[?]VAPEASY DAL005
3-16 GENERALCOMMANDS

SASSIGN?:[?]GENERL DAL010

SVAPEPS

RUN=BOOTVAXEXTRACTCSYM

END

SALLMTA0: ! VAX

$INIT MTA0: VAPEPS ! VAX

SMOUNTMTAO:VAPEPS ! VAX

$COPY*.TRN MTA0:*.COM ! VAX

SDEALL MTA0: ! VAX

Note: If you don't have BOOTEASY.DAL, EASY.DAL,VAPEASY.DALor

GENERL.DAL, you cannot generate a boot tape to another system.

The default boot does not include a copy of the master symbolics

(EASY). If for somereason you want to send this to another site,

SETISYM=I prior to issuing RUN=BOOT.

Related Commands

CSYM,EZOUT,RUN=SPILL,WTAPE
RUN=BSC 3-17

3.11. RUN BSC

RUN=BSC Programmer's Command

Purpose

Creates a SETCOM routine for VAPEPS.

Command

RUN=BSC NI,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 NAMI,NAM2 NOUT

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 = Input list of command abbreviations (N,I) (A3) or (N,2)

where column two contains the decode option for this

command (0==>decode, else don't)

N2,EL2,VR2 = Input list of command subroutines (N,2) (A3,A3)

NAMI,NAM2 = Program name (default = DAL PRO)

NOUT = Output Fortran unit (output may require editing)

Example

Create a $ETCOM routine from the input lists I,ABV,VAP and 1,EPS,VAP and

set the program name to VAP5.0 and direct the output to Fortran unit 2.

!

RUN=BSC I,ABV,VAP I,EPS,VAP VAP '5.0' 2

Related Commands

RUN=ADDC, RUN=ADNC, RUN=BCL, RUN=GCLS, RUN=SUBC
3-18 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.12. BUILD

BUILD Command

Purpose

Create a new element by combining portions of other elements and/or adding

constants to various portions of the element.

Command

BUILD NO,ELO,VRO NR,NC ITYP

Where

NO,ELO,VRO - DAL unit, element and version name for new element.

NR,NC - Number of rows and columns in new element.

ITYP - (Optional) type of matrix.

= 0 - Integer

= 1 - Real (default)

= 2 - Double precision

= 3 - Complex

= 4 - Hollerith

Description

BUILD is actually a sub processor. It is entered with the VAPEPS BUILD

command. This command contains information concerning the name and size of

the element to be created. When the command is read, the new element is

created as a zero array.

Sub-processor cards are then read, indicating portions of other elements

and/or constants which are to be added to the new element.

The sub processor returns to VAPEPS when the DONE command entered.

Space

After the BUILD command has been issued, you have essentially dimensioned

a matrix B(NR,NC) and filled it with zeros. You may now enter

sub-commands to modify it.

Sub commands

Each sub-command initiates a double do-loop that modifies the contents of

the BUILD buffer. The modification may either be replacing the current

value or adding something to it. The new data may be input directly as a

scalar constant or indirectly from an existing DAL _lement.

v
BUILD 3-19

Scalar type

FILL IST, IFN JST,JFN ILC,JLC LOOP

CONSTANT

ADDC IST, IFN JST,JFN ILC,JLC LOOP

CONSTANT

MULC IST, IFN JST,JFN ILC,JLC LOOP

CONSTANT

DIVC IST, IFN JST,JFN ILC,JLC LOOP

CONSTANT

Where

IST, IFN - Starting and ending rows to put constant.

Defaults to the row dimension of the matrix.

JST,JFN - Starting and ending columns to put constant.

Defaults to the columndimension of the matrix.

ILC,JLC - Amountto step for next output row and column respectively.

Defaults to i.

Fortran Equivalent

i0

DOl0 J = JST,JFN,JLC

DOi0 I = IST,IFN,ILC j

B(I,J) = CONSTANT[FILL]

B(I,J) = B(I,J) + CONSTANT [ for ADDC ]

B(I,J) = B(I,J) * CONSTANT [ for MULC ]

S(I,J) = B(I,J) / CONSTANT [ for DIVC]

CONTINUE

Note

LOOP has not been included above, since it would only serve to complicate

matters. Novice users should leave it off the command, or use a value of

i. LOOP is discussed under advanced usage.

Existing DAL element types

MIX NI,ELI,VR1 Ii,I2 Ji,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP

PLUS N1,ELI,VR1 ll,12 J1,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP

MINUS N1,ELI,VRI ll,I2 J1,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP

MUL N1,ELI,VRI Ii,I2 J1,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP

DIV N1,EL1,VRI II,I2 J1,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP
3-20 GENERALCOMMANDS

ADDXNI,ELI,VRI 11,12 Ji,J2 IST,JST IC,JC ILC,JLC LOOP

CONSTANT

Where

NI,EL1,VRI - Nameof an existing element. It has dimensions, so lets

call it E(MR,MC)

II,12,IC - Indicate the row range and increment to use from

NI,ELI,VRI.

JI,J2,JC - Indicate the column range and increment to use from

NLI,ELI,VRI

Eg: Userows Ii through I2 in increments of IC, and

columnsJl through J2 in increments of JC.

IST,JST

ILC,JLC

CONSTANT

- Starting location of the output, le: The first term

modified is B(IST,JST) [modified with E(II,JI)]. This is

where the upper left hand corner of the input matrix is to

be placed in the output matrix.

- Output row and column increment

- Constant value input by user for ADDX only.

Fortran Equivalent

JJ=JST

DO 30 J = JI,J2,JC

II=IST

DO 20 I=II,12,IC

B(II,JJ)=E(I,J) [MIX]

B(II,JJ)=B(II,JJ) + E(I,J) [PLUS]

B(II,JJ)=B(II,JJ) - E(I,J) [MINUS]

B(II,JJ)=B(II,JJ) * E(I,J) [MUL]

B(II,JJ)=B(II,JJ) / E(I,J) [DIV]

B(II,JJ)=B(II,JJ) + E(I,J)*CONSTANT

II=II+ILC

20 CONTINUE

JJ=JJ+JLC

30 CONTINUE

[ADDX]

Notes

The user can specify any number of sub-commands during one BUILD.

mistake is made, you can zero the matrix by

FfLL

0

If a
BUILD 3-21

since Ii,I2,... default to the whole matrix.

Whenyou are through, issue the command:

DONE

This returns you to VAPEPS.

The division commandsDIV and DIVCcheck for zero denominators. If one is

found, the result is set to zero.

Cycles

Note that the transparent cycle command##CYCLmaybe used in between

sub-commands.This enables the creation of an array composedof input

elements with varying cycle numbers.

AdvancedNotes

This section discusses LOOPand also the commandIAFJ. The discussion is

merely an approximation of the FORTRANcode. Note that increments of zero

are legal.

IAFJ IIAFJ,IOAFJ,IRAFJ

Means'I' as a function of 'J' If you look in the FORTRANexampleabove,

'II' is always reset to 'IST' at the start of each column loop. The

purpose of IAFJ is to allow the starting row locations to vary from column

to column, and to allow the numberof row items considered to change from

column to column.

IIAFJ - Increment of the starting input row as a function of the column

loop.

IOAFJ- Increment of the starting output row as a function of the

column loop.

IRAFJ - Increment of the numberof terms in the row loop as a function

of the column loop. IRAFJdefaults to zero. A value of 1 is for

creating upper triangular matrices, -I for lower.

IIAFJ, IOAFJ, and IRAFJdefault to zero. Once IAFJ is used, the values

remain as set until they are changedby another IAFJ command.

Fortran Equivalent

IR=I2 - I1 + 1

IF(IC.NE.0) IR=IR/IC

JR=J2-JI+I

IF(JC.NE.0)JR=JR/JC

JIN=JI

JOUT=JST

\v
3-22 GENERAL COMMANDS

DO 30 J=I,JR

IIN=II+(J-I)*IIAFJ-1

IOUT=IST+(J-I)*IOAFJ-1

DO 20 I=I,IR

DO 15 L=I,LOOP

B(IOUT+L,JOUT)=E(IIN+L,JIN)*CONSTANT [+B(IOUT+L,JOUT)]

15 CONTINUE

IIN=IIN+IC

IOUT=IOUT+ILC

20 CONTINUE

JIN=JIN+JC

JOUT=JOUT+JLC

IR=IR+IRAFJ

30 CONTINUE

The use of IOAFJ and LOOP have similar consequences for the scalar type

subcommand. The value of IIAFJ must be zero for the scalar case.

In the above sub commands, not all specifications must be given. If a

specification is not given, it will be replaced by its default value. It

is very important to include specs in their proper order. Specs may not be

skipped. A zero will not yield the spec's default value.

Quantity Default

Ii 1

I2 MR

J1 1

J2 MC

IST 1

JST 1

IC i

JC 1

ILC 1

JLC 1

IFN NR

JFN NC

IIAFJ 0

IOAFJ 0

IRAFJ 0

LOOP 1

BUILDX

If the command BUILDX is used instead of BUILD, the matrix NO,ELO,VRO is

assumed to already exist with size NR,NC. In this case the matrix is not

zeroed out, and all sub commands act to modify the original values in

NO,ELO,VRO.

Example
BUILD 3-23

Build a matrix of 2 columns from the two vectors (1, 5, 9, 10) and (8, 7,

3, 5).

ECOL28,A,A 4,1

1,5,9,10

ECOL28,B,B 4,1

8,7,3,5

BUILD28,COMB,INE4,2 0

MIX 28,A,A

MIX 28,B,B 1,4 i,i 1,2

DONE

Related Commands

ASMD,CALC,FUN,GROUP
3-24 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.13. RUN BWTH

RUN=BWTH Command

Purpose

Obsolete Use FREQUENCY/BA/qD_WIDTH)

This runstream is used to extract the standard 1/3 octave band- widths for

the standard center frequencies in the range FLO to FHI. FLO and FHI need

not be standard 1/3 octave center frequencies. However, an error message

will be generated if no standard center frequencies lie between FLO and

FHI.

Command

RUN=BWTH N,NM, IVN FLO,FHI

Where

N,NM, IVN = Name of output vector to put 1/3 octave band widths.

FLO,FHI = The 1/3 octave center frequency range for which bandwidths are to be calculated.
3.14. CALCULATOR

CALCULATOR 3-25

CALC Processor

Purpose

CALC is a sub processor which solves elementary algebraic equations. It is

very powerful in that it allows the user to define and operate on a set of

variables which may be used in subsequent VAPEPS command strings.

Description

The processor is entered when the command CALC is encountered. Equations

are decoded and solved until a blank card or the DONE subcommand is read.

Control is then returned to VAPEPS.

Equations

All equations must contain a variable name followed by an equal sign and

one or more operands separated by operators. Allowable operators are

+,-,*,/ and **(add,sub,mult,div, exp). EQUATIONS ARE ALWAYS EVALUATED FROM

LEFT TO RIGHT WITH NO REGARD TO THE HIERARCHY RULES OF FORTRAN. In

general, equations will take the following form:

NPTS=TLAST-TFRST/ DELT + 1.999

Where the difference TLAST-TFRST is divided by DELT and the result is

added to 1.999 before being truncated to integer and stored in NPTS.

Constants

Both real and integer constants may be used to the right of the equal

signs. Real constants must contain a decimal point and may have an

exponent. Embedded blanks are not permitted. Integers beginning with a

zero are assumed to be octal. Hollerith constants (4 chars max) may be

entered by enclosing them in single quotes.

Named variables

Variable names may contain up to four alphanumeric characters. The first

character determines the variable type(A-H,O-Z = real, I-N = integer) and

must be alphabetic. These variables may be referenced in any future VAPEPS

command by prefacing the variable name with an ampersand(&).

Indirect strings

Indirect strings are used to retrieve individual values from existing DAL

_r
3-26 GENERAL COMMANDS

elements. These strings can appear on the left or on the right hand side

of the equation. They must be enclosed in parentheses and must contain

five or seven words, separated by commas or blanks. The form is

INI,ELI,VRI, IROW, ICOL)

or

_NI,ELI,VRI,ICI,IC2,1ROW, ICOL)

where NI,ELI,VR1 identify the element, and IROW, ICOL pinpoint the value

inside the element. ICI,IC2 indicate the cycles of the element. If

omitted, they default to ICI,IC2 from the last CYCLE command. Note that

any element referenced in an indirect string must already exist. If named

variables are to be used inside an indirect string, they must be preceeded

by the ampersand. ANY ITEM TAKEN FROM A DATASET IS ASSUMED TO HAVE THE

SAME TYPE AS INDICATED IN THE TOC FOR THAT DATASET. Eg if you pull a value

from a real array, it will be treated as a real value. If a dataset

contains mixed types, then ##SET may be used to pull off values without

doing any conversion.

Another form of the indirect string may be used to pull information from

the table of contents of a file. In this case there must be either 4 or 6

words inside the parentheses.

(NI,ELI,VRI,ITEM)

or

(NI,ELI,VRI,ICI,IC2,ITEM)

where NI,ELI,VRI is the element whose TOC line is to be accessed and ITEM

is the item number. ICI and IC2 may be included as cycle numbers. If they

are omitted(ie: First case), the values presently set via CYCLE command

for reading elements will be used. ITEM may have values from 0 to 12, and

refer to the following quantities:

ITEM Quantity

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

-6

7

-7

8

9

i0

ii

12

element number

sector address

creation date

creation time

error code

number of words

NJ

NR

NI*NJ (or NR)

NC

type code

element name

version name

first cycle number

second cycle number
CALCULATOR 3-27

Note that the numberof columns maybe calculated as

NC= (NI,ELI,VRI 5)/(NI,ELI,VRI 7)

or

NC= (NI,ELI,VRI -7)

Indirect strings of this latter type are assumedto be of

integer/hollerith type.

Functions

The following functions are currently available in CALC:

<IABS>,<ABS>,<COS>,<SIN>,<TAN>,<EXP>,<LOG>,<LI0>,<EI0>,<ASIN>,<ACOS>

<ATAN>,<JDAT>

They operate on the current value of the expression evaluated from left to

right. As an example, the sine of the absolute value of the angle theta

(in degrees) maybe calculated as:

SINT= THTA<ABS>*PI$/180.<SIN>

ABSwill work on either integer or real numberswithout altering the type,

but the others will convert integer input to real before proceeding. Note

that <LOG>computes the natural log, and <EXP>uses base e. Ie:

X = X<LOG><EXP>

will return the original X. CommonLOGSmaybe performed using <LI0>.

Examples

1. Start time = .1 seconds, delta = .00375 seconds. Betweenwhat two

points is TIME= .286

2. Find accelerations of station ten at time = .286, If time histories are

in column i0 of 'BPLI','CASE' on DALunit one, and rows correspond to the

time description in exampleI.

3. Array starts at sector address 32, find address at start of fifth record

if records are 1024 words long

CALC

* EXAMPLE i.

TIME = .286

TST = .1

N1 = TIME-TST/.00375 + 1

N2 = N1 + 1

*THE DESIRED POINTS ARE N1 AND N2

* EXAMPLE 2.

A1 = (I,BPLI,CASE,&NI,10)
3-28 GENERALCOMMANDS

ADIF = (I,BPLI,CASEI,&N2,10) - A1

* ADIF IS THEDIFFERENCEIN ACCELERATIONS BETWEENN1ANDN2

T1 = NI-I*.00375+TST

ACC= TIME- T1/.00375 * ADIF+ A1

*ACC IS THE DESIRED ACCELERATION

*EXAMPLE 3.

LENG = 1024-1/28 + 1

*LENG IS THE LENGTH OF EACH RECORD IN SECTORS (UNIVAC SECTORS)

IPOS = 5-1*LENG+I2

Related Commands

ASMD, BUILD, FUN
3.15. CBIT

CBIT 3-29

CBIT Command

Purpose

Check each column of a 'bit' matrix to find all rows that have a given set

of bits. Save pointers to all columns that have at least one match.

Command

CBIT N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input bit configuration to check. If ELI=0, then two

elements are read.

ELT = 'CPNT' - list of columns to search.

ELT = 'BMAP' - normal input bit configuration. (above).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input bit matrix to be checked.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output list of columns that have at least one match. If

EL3=0, then two elements are output.

ELT = 'CPNT' - list of matching columns.

ELT = 'BMAP' - Sequence of bits for each matching column.

Set bits indicate which rows matched.

Related Commands

SSTRNG
3-30 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.16. CEAL

CEAL Command

Purpose

Copy EAL elements to DAL files and visa versa. This command is system

dependent and should only be used when DAL/EAL files are based on

different sector lengths. The command was written for the PRIME system,

but may be used on other systems as needed.

Command

CEAL NI,ELN,VER N2 IOP,LRAT

Where

NI,ELN,VER - Input EAL or DAL element.

N2 - Output EAL or DAL unit.

IOP - option flag

= 1 --- input is EAL element

output is DAL element

= -i --- input is DAL element

output is EAL element

LRAT = ratio of EAL sector length to DAL sector length.

default = 16 (512/32)

Optional form

CEALS NI,NSI,NS2 N2 IOP,LRAT

Where

N1

NS1,NS2

N2

IOP

LRAT

- Input EAL or DAL unit.

- sequence number range for input elements. NS2 may be input

as a large number to transfer all datasets from NSI on.

- Output EAL or DAL unit.

- option flag

= 1 --- input is EAL elements

output is DAL elements

= -i --- input is DAL elements

output is EAL elements

- ratio of EAL sector length to DAL sector length, default =

16 (512/32)

Description
CEAL 3-31

In general, DALfiles and EALfiles are compatible in that they both use

the DALdata managementsystem to create data sets on user files. On some

systems they maybe incompatible, however, due to the use of different

parameters in setting up the file structure.

On the PRIMEsystem, EALfiles use a sector length of 512 words. This is

comparedto the DALsector length of 32 words. Becauseof this difference,

EAL files maynot be referenced directly in VAPEPSand DALfiles maynot

be referenced directly in EAL (SPAR). This commandmaybe used to transfer

elements one at a time from one file type to the other.

Notes

CEALcan only modify an EALfile, not create one. Thus you must use EAL

(or EALPROif it exists) to create an EALfile before you try to CEAL

anything into it.

CEALmayonly be used whenthe EALsector length is an integer multiple of

the DALsector length. If the sector lengths are equal, this commandis

not necessary. If you are on a system other than PRIME,and notice an

incompatibility betweenDALand SPARor EAL, first check the following

table for probable sector lengths on each system. The easiest way to tell

is to examinethe RRvalue in the TOCfor the first element on file.

RR Sector length

2 512

3 256

4 128

5 112

7 64

14 32

17 28

LRATmay then be computedas the ratio of EALto DAL. If EALis smaller

than DAL, or the lengths are not integer multiples, please contact Jim

5chafer at the address given in the VAPEPSsection.

Digression

The reason for the different sector lengths is that systems operate more

efficiently if you write in multiples of their preferred sector size. Some

of these sizes are quite large (512 for prime). DAL data sets force each

column to start on new sector boundary. Eg 3x3 matrix actually occupies 3

full sectors. Use of 512 would waste a lot of disk space, so VAPEPS

'software' sectors the files at a fraction of the preferred size, and

actually performs writes at the larger size. One disadvantage of this

approach is that several disk accesses may be required to read in a given

data set (eg a 3x3 matrix may lie across a large sector boundary). Thus as

many as three reads/writes may be required to satisfy a single read/write

request. In order to minimize boundary crossing, VAPEPS has recently been
3-32 GENERALCOMMANDS

changed to start all datasets at a preferred sector boundary. Thus the

numbers in the table may be off slightly. (On VAX, preferred, size = 128,

reduced size = 32. Normal dataset starting point = 14 = 3.5 full sectors

-- this is rounded up to 4 full sectors, or 16 small sectors)

PRIME usage

EAL to DAL

l) execute VAPEPS

2) Use FNAME to set EAL unit (FNAME

3) CEAL I,ELN,VER 2,1,16

DAL to EAL

i) execute VAPEPS

2) Use FNAME to set EAL unit (FNAME

3) CEAL 2,ELN,VER 1,-1,16

I,L001)

I,L001)

Note that the 16 may be omitted on both commands, since LRAT defaults to

16.

Related Commands

FNAME, TRDAL
CHANGE 3-33

CHANGE

CHANGE Command

Purpose

Change the name of an element or change the type or NJ value without

modifying or restructuring the element.

Command

CHANGE NI,ELI,VRI (NI),EL2,VR2

or

CHANGE/TYPE NI,ELI,VRI ITYP

or

CHANGE/NJ NI,ELI,VRI NJ

Where

NI,ELI,VR1 - Name of existing element.

ELI,VR2 - New name of element. (DAL unit can't be changed.)

ITYP - New type of element

NJ - New NJ value for element

Example

Change the element I,TRAN,DAT to I,ZAP,DAT.

CHANGE I,TRAN,DAT ZAP,DAT

Notes

The full element name includes cycle numbers which are not included in the

command. The full input name uses input cycles from the last CYCLE

command. The full output name uses cycles from the last CYCLE command.

When you change the type of an element using CHANGE, you are only changing

the type flag. Thus it is not legal to change double precision to single

precision with this command. Please see DPTOR and RTOI commands. CHANGE

will let you get away with almost anything, so be careful. A common use

for CHANGE/TYPE is to Convert complex to single precision. Here the type

is changed, and the number of rows is changed. The data is not actually

changed, but it doesn't have to be. Another example is for a mixed type

matrix. In this case you might want one type for one operation, and

another type for a different operation.

The use of NJ and the need to change it is fairly involved. If you need
3-34 GENERALCOMMANDS

to, just rememberthat CHANGEwill do it. NJ is explained in the EXPAND

commandbut it really isn't used very often in VAPEPS.The finite element

program SPARuses NJ a great deal and NJ is explained in the SPARmanual.

An alternate methodof changing the TOCvalues is described in the command

LOC/LOCH.In most cases, it is preferable to use the CHANGE command.

Related Commands

COPY, FIND, LOCATE, TOC, TTYP
3.18. RUN CHKO

RUN=CHKO 3-35

RUN=CHKOUT Programmer's command

Purpose

This command is used to check out a data set for modification. The error

code for that data set is set to the users name.

Command

RUN=CHKOUT NU,NEL,NVR ICI,IC2 TYPE

Where

NU,NEL,NVR - DAL unit element and version of file being checked out.

ICI,IC2 - Cycle numbers of file being checked out.

TYPE - Type name of file being checked out.

Example

Checkout the file 30,RUN,CHKO 0,0.

CHKOUT 30,RUN,CHK0 0,0 DRS

Related Commands

CSYM, RUN=ERROR, RUN=EZDB, RUN=TRMT
3-36 GENERALCO_._4ANDS

3.19. CHL

CHL Command

Purpose

CHOLESKI decomposition of a real, positive definite, symmetric matrix. In

addition, CHL may be used to invert the decomposed matrix. This latter

feature is useful in obtaining the inverse of symmetric, positive definite

matrices.

Command

CHL N1,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 lOP

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input symmetric matrix. Only the upper triangular

terms are used.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output upper or lower triangular matrix

IOP - Option flag

= 0 - Standard decomposition (upper triangular matrix)

= 1 - The above matrix inverted and transposed (lower)

= 2 - Matrix 0 inverted, ie. matrix 1 transposed (upper)

Description

Given a real, positive definite, symmetric matrix, S, CHOLESKI

decomposition finds an upper triangular matrix, U, such that the transpose

of U, times U, will equal S. For IOP=0, the matrix U is output.

CHL i SYM MAT 1 CHL UPP 0

TMUL 1 CHL UPP 1 CHL UPP 1 NEW SYM

would produce a NEW/SYM that equals SYM/MAT.

For lOP>0, the decomposed matrix U, is inverted. Since U is upper

triangular, considerable savings are realized if this inverse is done in

two parts. The first step is the computation of the transpose of U, which

is a lower triangular matrix. This lower triangular matrix is output for

IOP=I. This lower triangular matrix is useful in computing the inverse of

the original matrix S.

CHL i SYM MAT 1 LOW INV 1

TMUL i LOW INV 1 LOW INV 1 SYM INV

will produce the inverse as SYM/INV.
CHL 3-37

For eigenvalue problems, the massmatrix must be decomposedand applied to

both sides of the stiffness matrix, in order to retain the symmetryof the

eigenvalue problem. In this case, computation is simplified if the output

decomposedinverse is in upper triangular form, ie the transpose of the

output for IOP = i. IOP=2will produce this matrix.

CHL 1,MASS,MATI,MASS,CHL 2

TMUL1,STIFF,MATI,MASS,CHL28,TMP,MAT

TMUL 28,TMP,MATI,MASS,CHL 28 GENK

Would produce a symmetric matrix GEN/K that is suitable for a symmetric

eigensolver such as the EIG commandin DALPRO.Once the modesare

computed, they must be backtransformed as

TMUL1 MASSCHL 1 EIG MODES1 REALMODES

Since CHOLESKIdecomposition is most often used as a part of an

eigensolution, the default value of IOP is 2. ie, IOP maybe omitted from

the command,in which case an upper triangular inverse matrix will be

output.

CHOLESKImaybe used with either single precision or double precision

matrices. If your matrix is symmetric and positive definite, it is much

cheaper to use CHLto invert than the INVERTcommand.Also, CHLwill work

for any size matrix, whereas the INVERTcommandis only good for matrices

that will fit in core.

Related Commands

TMUL, INVERT, MULT
3-38 GENERALCOMMANDS V

3.20. CHOP

CHOP Command

Purpose

Create a new element by selecting rows and cols from an existing element.

Command

CHOP N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 NEWR,NEWC

-row numbers-

-column numbersWhere

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input matrix, size = NR,NC

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output matrix, new size = NEWR,NEWC

NEWR - Number of rows in the new element.

NEWC - Number of columns in the new element.

-row numbers-

- Row numbers from the input element to be placed in the

output element.

-column numbers-

- Column numbers from the input element to be placed in the

output element.

Example

Given the vector (1,2,3,4,...,100) chop out rows 50-75.

ECOL 28,A,A 100,1

l:lO0

CHOP 28,A,A 28,B,B 25,1

51:75

PRINT 28,B,B

Description

CHOP is used to create a new matrix by selecting out various rows and

columns from an existing matrix. The user specifies the number of rows and

columns on the command line. The con_nand then prompts the user to enter

the list of row numbers to b selected, followed by the list of columns to

be selected. In many cases the user wants all of the rows, or all of the

columns. CHOP has been designed such that if NEWR=NR, all rows will be

selected automatically, without specifying the input data list that

normally follows the command line. Similarly, if NEWC=NC, all columns will
CHOP 3-39

be taken, without reading a list.

Other forms

In somecases, the automatic selection feature of CHOPcan get in the way.

This is especially true if you want to rearrange rows or columns. Take the

case where NEWR=NR, but you want to specify a list of numbersanyway. The

commandform CHOPXturns off the automatic selection and requires user

input for both row and column lists irregardless of the size of NEWRand

NEWC.(The only exception is whenNEWRand/or NEWCare input as negative--

below)

Notes

The input lists of row/column numbersmayconsist of integer or floating

point values. Thesevalues must be greater than or equal to zero, and less

than or equal to the numberof rows/columns of the input matrix. Zero

values result in zero filled rows or columns. Note that these lists are

read in DALPROfree-field format. Thus

1,2,3,4,5,5-0,20,18,16,14,12

1:5,0,0,0,0,0,20/5/-2

= 1 ROWLIST

are all legitimate forms of input.

Whenusing CHOP,NEWRmust be less than or equal to NR, and NEWC must be

less than or equal to NC. In CHOPX, this restriction is removed. Thus

CHOPX must be used in the case of enlarging a matrix. An enlarged matrix

can only consist of a combination of the rows and columns contained by the

input matrix.

Both command forms allow NEWR and NEWC'tO be negative numbers. This

implies that the first -NEWR rows (or first -NEWC columns) are to be

selected automatically, without user list input.

Related Commands

BUILD, GROUP
3-40 GENERALCOMMAND5

3.20.1. OPTIONAL FORMS OF CHOP

CHOPM Command

Purpose

Modifies an existing matrix. The output matrix is modified by replacing

rows and columns with the specified rows and columns in the input matrix.

If a zero is input as a row or column number then the corresponding row or

column in the output matrix is not changed.

CHOPJ Command

Purpose

Uses the input matrix as an (NI, NJ, NC) array. The number of rows refer

to the number of NJ items to be kept, and all NI values are taken. This

can be thought of as choping a three dimensional array. (e.g. A CHOPJ on

a SPAR VIBR/MODE dataset sould take all 6 deflections for the input joint

numbers)

CHOPK Command

The CHOPK command is similar to the CHOPJ command but you don't need to

keep all NI items. Instead, you add an arguement to the command line and

specify the particular items right after the row and column inputs have

been specified. For the VIBR/MODE example above, you could select only

the translational terms by including NI as 3 and specify the line 1,2,3

following the row/column inputs, if any. When the K option is used, the

list of item numbers must ALWAYS be present, even if NI is input as

negative, and even if the X option is used as well.

CHOPY Command

Purpose

Allows the selection of rows to vary from column to column.

Command

CHOPY NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 N4,NEL4,NVR4

or

CHOPY NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 -NEWC

or

CHOPY NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 -NEWR N4,NEL4,NVR4

Where
CHOP 3-41

NI,NEL1,NVR1- Input dataset, sameas for CHOP.

N2,NEL2,NVR2- Output dataset, sameas for CHOP.

N3,NEL3,NVR3- A matrix containing lists of row numbersfrom

NI,NELI,NVR1to be placed in N2,NEL2,NVR2.Eachrow in

N3,NEL3,NVR3points to a row in NI,NELI,NVRI. Each

columncorresponds to columns in the output matrix.

N4,NEL4,NVR4- A vector containing a list of column numbersfrom

NI,NELI,NVRI which will be placed in N2,NEL2,NVR2.Each

row corresponds to each column in N2,NEL2,NVR2and

N3,NEL3,NVR3.

NEWR,NEWC - Numberof rows or columns. Will take the first NEWR

rows or the first NEWCcolumns.
3-42 GENERALCOMMAND5

3.21. RUN CIMV

RUN=CIMV Command

PURPOSE:

This runstream calculates the confidence interval for a true mean of x

given a particular confidence level. 'x' is a set of measured

vibro-acoustic data (E.G. Mean square acceleration (g**2,g**2/Hz) or mean

square sound pressure (psi**2, psi**2/Hz))

Command

RUN=CIMV NI,IELI,IVR1 NUI,lVS1 CONF ITYP (IOUT)

Where

NI,IELI,IVR1 - Input vector of mean square data.

NUI,IVSI - DAL unit and version of output.

CONF - Confidence level. (e.g..95)

ITYP - Type of distribution

= 0 - Normal distribution

= 1 - Log-normal distribution

(Default = i)

IOUT - Fortran unit for printed output - use 0 for no output.

(Default = 6 - terminal screen)

NUI,'CIMV',IVSI - Contains three columns as follows:

Column 1 - Lower confidence limit.

Column 2 - Upper confidence limit.

Column 3 - Confidence interval.

Example

Find the confidence interval for the following vector (1.,2.,3.,...,20.).

ECOL 28,A,A 20,1

1.:20.

RUN=CIMV 28,A,A 28,TEST .95 0

PRINT 28,CIMV,TEST

v
3.22. RUN CLFG

RUN=CLFG 3-43

RUN=CLFGET Command

Purpose

This command is uses to get a set of ata's for a particular path from an

ata matrix and put them in an output matrix.

Command

RUN=CLFGET NI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2

Where

NI,NVR1 - The DAL unit number and version name of the model

which to extract the ata's.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - The DAL unit element and version of the matrix in

which to put the extracted ata's.

from

Example

Get the damping loss factor associated with the element SKIN in the

model TEST. The ata matrix for model TEST is assumed to exist.

RUN=CLFGET 1,TEST 28,DLF,SKIN

SKIN,SKIN

Note

There are two ata's associated with each path so both ata's will be put

into N2,NEL2,NVR2. If you specified a Damping Loss Factor (DLF) to be

extracted then N2,NEL2,NVR2 will have only 1 column. The order that you

specify for a path is the order that the ata's will be extracted.

Related Commands

SEMOD, RUN=CLFPUT
3-44 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.23. RUN CLFP

RUN=CLFPUT Command

Purpose

This command is used to put a set of ata's for a particular path into an

ata matrix.

Command

RUN=CLFPUT NI,IVRI N2,IEL2,IVR2

Where

NI,IVRI - The DAL unit number and version name for the

model.

N2,IEL2,IVR2 - The dal unit, element and version of the ata's

to be placed in the ata matrix.

Example

Put the coupling loss factors in the matrix 28,CLF,NEW into the path

EXTA,SKIN in model 1,TEST. Model 1,TEST and 28,CLF,NEW are assumed to

exist.

RUN=CLFPUT 1,TEST 28,CLF,NEW

EXTA,SKIN

Note

There are two ata's associated with each path so both ata's must be in

N2,IEL2,1VR2. If you are replacing a DLF then N2,IEL2,1VR2 has only one

column. The element order that you specify for a path is for the ata's in

the first column. The second column contains the ata's for the reverse

order.

Related Commands

SEMOD, RUN=CLFGET

V
3.24. CMOD

CMOD 3-45

CMOD Command

Purpose

Find the modulus or modulus and phase of a complex array. CMOD may also be

used to convert modulus and phase to a complex array. Note that this

process is identical to getting the length and angle of a vector in the

x-y plane. A variation of the command will go from polar to rectangular

coordinates or visa versa.

Command

CMOD

or

CMODP

NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

NI,ELI,VR1 - Input complex or real array

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output real or complex array

Example

Convert the complex matrix 28,COMP,LEX to a real/imaginary matrix.

CMODR 28,COMP,LEX 28,REAL,MAT

Description

If the first matrix is complex (type 3), the output matrix will be real

(type i), and will contain the modulus of the complex matrix. If the

command CMODP was used, the output matrix will also contain the phase in

radians. If the input dimensions are (NR,NC) the output dimensions will be

(NR,NC) or (NR,2*NC). Note that a complex array of size (NR,NC) actually

has NR*2 rows, which alternate real,imaginary,real,imaginary,...

If the input matrix is real, it must contain both the modulus and phase.

These must be stored as alternate columns

(modulus,phase,modulus,phase,...). Thus the real matrix will have an even

number of columns (eg (NR,NC*2)). The output element will be an (NR,NC)

complex matrix. Note that the conversion of modulus/phase to complex is

allowed only with the CMODP form of the command.

Additional forms
3-46 GENERALCOMMILNDS v

CMODhas several special cases, as follows:

CMODR

or

CMODR

(COMPLEX) (REAL,IMAGINARY)

(REAL,IMAGINARY)(COMPLEX)

CMODPR

or

CMODRP

(POLAR) (RECTANGULAR)

(RECTANGULAR) (POLAR)

Where

(COMPLEX) - Refers to a complex matrix.

(REAL,IMAGINARY)- Refers to a real matrix with an even numberof columns.

(e.g. REAL,IMAGINARY,REAL,IMAGINARy,...)

(POLAR) - Refers to a real matrix of polar coordinates This may

be (R,THETA,Z)OR(R,THETA)(i.e. 3 columnsor two

columns)

(RECTANGULAR) - Refers to a real matrix of rectangular coordinates. This

may be (X,Y) or (X,Y,Z).

Related Commands

DPTOR, RTOI
3.25. RUN CMPF

RUN=CMPF 3-47

RUN=CMPF Command

Purpose

Compares the TOC lines of two DAL files. The TOC's are merged, then sorted

alphabetically according to name. The result is printed to FORTRAN unit

NOUT.

Command

RUN=CMPF NI,N2 NOUT

Where

NI,N2 - DAL unit numbers of TOC's to be merged.

NOUT - Fortran unit to direct output. Default = 6.

Example

Compare the TOC's of DAL units 1 and 2.

RUN=CMPF 1,2

Notes

If N1 < 0 then file names,dates,times are compared and only datasets with

a different TOC line are kept in the list

If N2 < 0 then file names,sizes are compared and only datasets with a

different TOC line are kept in the list

Related Commands

FIND, LAST, RUN=OTOC, TOC, RUN=TOCO

! L
3-48 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.26. CNFG

CNFG Command

Purpose

CNFG creates and/or edits a configuration tree for the VAPEP5 system. It

is included as a stand alone command to aid users in creating general

configuration trees which apply to many events. This general tree may then

be modified within the CONF portion of PREP as necessary for a particular

event.

Since the configuration tree is described in detail in the users manual,

only a brief summary of the command will be included here.

Command

CNFG NI,VR1 N2,VR2

Where

Nl,VR1 - Input configuration (unit and name). If NI,VR1 are omitted,

the tree will be built from scratch.

N2,VR2 - Output configuration. This will be written unless the OMIT

command is used to terminate CNFG.

Once inside CNFG (or PREP CONF) the user is prompted for subcommands.

These serve to create, edit or list the configuration tree.

Related Commands

PREP

3.26.1. INPUT

INPUT Command

Purpose

Causes CNFG to enter input mode. User input is of the form:

LTGSME> LAST THIS GENERIC SPECIFIC MOUNT ENCLOSURE
CNFG 3-49

Where

LAST - Local nameof parent node. A dollar sign is used for the

trunk (main node) since it has no parent.

THIS - Local nameof this node. All nodes in a tree must have a

unique local name. The term local nameis used to imply

that these namesmaynot be used in later searching.

GENERIC - Generic namefor this node. (12 characters max)

Examples: SHUTTLEPALLET CARGO-BAY

SPECIFIC - Specific namefor this node. (12 chars) This nameserves

to subdivide the generic class into a numberof

subclasses. Examples: COLUMBIA6-METERCONF-43A

MOUNT - Local nameof a node which serves as a support structure

for the current node.

ENCLOSURE- Local nameof a node which serves as an enclosing

structure to the current node.

Note

Eachnode is implicitly linked to all nodes between itself and the trunk.

The MOUNTand ENCLOSUREfields allow the user to add additional linkages to

this node.

The input modeis terminated when less than three items are input on a

given line.

3.26.2. READ

READ Command

Purpose

Reads the specified configuration tree and places the new nodes at the end

of the tree. Any previous nodes having the same local node name will be

disabled.

Command

READ NU,VER

Where

NU,VER - DAL unit and version name of existing configuration tree.
3-50 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.26.3. DISABLE

DISABLE Command

Purpose

Disables nodes in the configuration tree.

Command

DISABLE I,J

Where

I,J - Node numbers in the tree to disable.

Example

Disable nodes 1,3.

DISABLE 1,3

3.26._. ENABLE

ENABLE Command

Purpose

Enables previously disabled nodes in the configuration tree.

Command

ENABLE I,J

Where

I,J - Node numbers in the tree to enable.

Example

Enable nodes 1,3.

ENABLE 1,3
CNFG 3-51

Note

Note that enabling nodes maycause other nodes to be disabled.

3.26.5. PACK

PACK Command

Purpose

Removes any disabled nodes. Nodes are renumbered accordingly.

Command

PACK

3.26.6. CHECK

CHECK Command

Purpose

Performs a consistency check and writes any applicable diagnostics.

Command

CHECK
3-52 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.26.7. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

List the current configuration tree.

Command

LIST (I,J)

Where

I,J - Node number to list. Default is all node numbers.

Example

List node numbers i through 3.

LIST 1,3

3.26.8. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

Performs

to DONE.

Command

DONE

PACK, CHECK and then saves the tree. A blank line is equivalent
CNFG 3-53

3.26.9. OMIT

OMIT Command

Purpose

Terminate CNFG without writing the tree.

Command

OMIT
3-54 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.27. RUN COG

RUN=COG Command

Purpose

Computes the coordinates of the center of gravity

about the cg.

Command

RUN=COG NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 N4,VR4

Where

Note

and the inertia tensor

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input DOF table (joints,6)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input station matrix (joints,3)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Input mass matrix or vector (DOF,DOF) or (DOF,I)

N4,'COOR',VR4 - Output coordinates (3,2)

N4,'RBMA',VR4 - Output inertia tensor (6,6)

Two columns are produced for the output coordinates. If your nodes have

the same translational mass in X,Y, and Z then both columns wili be the

same o

If the two columns come out different, then at least one node has

different masses associated with the three translational directions.

Related Commands

RUN=JTOD
L

CONVERT

CONVERT 3-55

CONVERT command

Purpose

This command is used to convert between various sets of units.

Command

CONVERT/option N1,NEL1,NVR1 N2,NEL2,NVR2 INTYP,OUTYP (F1,F2)

or

CONVERT/USER NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 INTYP,OUTYP PL,PM,(PT (ISHFL,FI,F2))

or.

CONVERT/COLUMNS NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 (FI,F2)

Where

option is:

SOUND - Sound Pressure Level data.

ACCELERATION - Acceleration data.

USER - User specified conversion.

COLUMNS - Convert each column independently depending on the flags

in N3,NEL3,NVR3.

NI,NEL1,NVRI - Input matrix to be converted.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - Output matrix to put converted data.

INTYP,OUTYP - Input and output unit types from the following lists:

SOUND option ACCELERATION option

Flag Units Flag Units

1 dB 1 dB

2 (N/M**2)**2 2 G**2

3 (DYNES/CM**2)**2 3 (M/S*,2)*-2

4 (LBF/FT**2)**2 4 (CM/S*-2)*-2

5 (LBF/IN**2)**2 5 (FT/S**2)**2

6 (N/M**2)**2/HZ 6 (IN/S**2)**2

7 (DYNES/CM)**2)**2/HZ 7 G**2/HZ

8 (LBF/FT**2)**2/HZ 8 (M/S**2)**2/HZ

9 (LBF/IN**2)**2/HZ 9 (CM/S**2)**2/HZ

I0 N/M**2 i0 (FT/S**2)**2/HZ

ll DYNES/CM**2 ll (IN/S**2)**2/HZ

12 LBF/FT**2 12 G

13 LBF/IN**2 13 M/S**2

14 CM/S**2

15 FT/S**2

16 IN/S**2
3-56 GENERALCOMMANDS

USERoption

Flag Units

1 M, KG, 5

2 CM,G, S

3 FT, SLUG(LBF-SEC**2/FT),S

4 IN, SNAIL (LBF-SEC**2/IN), S

Special units

5 dB

6 Gees**2 or Gees**2/Hz

(see ISHFL below

PM

PL

PT

ISHFL

- Power to take M to.

- Power to take L to.

- Power to take T to.

- Flag for special handling.

Flag

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Function

Nothing extra done.

Multiply input by bandwidth before converting.

Divide output by bandwidth after converting.

Square input before converting.

Take square root of output after converting.

Do both 1 and 4.

Do both 2 and 3.

F1

F2

- Lower frequency range (if required).

- Upper frequency range (if required).

N3,NEL3,NVR3 - Input matrix of flags from SOUND or ACCELERATION options.

Positive numbers indicate SOUND option. Negative numbers

indicate ACCELERATION option.

Column one - Input unit flag one for each column in

NI,NELI,NVRI.

Column two - Output unit flag one for each column in

N2,NEL2,NVR2.

Comments

Units of vibration are referenced to 8.4144E-18 G**2. Units of pressure

are referenced to 8.4144E-18 Psi**2 (2.E-5 N/M**2).

Related Commands

FREQUENCY, PREDICT, SEMOD
CONVERT 3-57

3.28.1. EXAMPLES

Example 1 - conversion from dB to Psi**2.

* Try the following sequence of commands:

ECOL 28,A,A 31,1

31-100.

CONVERT/SOUND 28,A,A 28,B,B 1,5

PRINT 28,B,B

Example 2 - Conversion from G**2 to G**2/Hz

ECOL 28,A,A 31,1

31-1.

CONVERT/ACCELERATiON 28,A,A 28,B,B 2,7 10.,10000.

PRINT 28,B,B

Example 3 - Conversion from ft**3 to in**3.

ECOL 28,A,A 1,1

i.

CONVERT/USER 28,A,A 28,B,B 3,4 3.,0.,0.

PRINT 28,B,B

Example 4 - Conversion from SLUG/IN**3 to SNAIL/IN**3

ECOL 28,A,A 1,1

i.

CONVERT/USER 28,A,A 28,B,B 3,4 -3.,1.,0.

PRINT 28,B,B

Example 5 - Conversion from Psi to N/M**2 (SNAIL/(IN*S**2) to KG/(M*S**2) )

ECOL 28,A,A 1,1

i.

CONVERT/USER 28,A,A 28,B,B 4,1 -1.,i.,-2.

or

CONVERT/SOUND 28,A,A 28,B,B 13,10

PRINT 28,B,B
3-58 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.29. RUN CONV

RUN=CONVERT Command (Obsolete - use CONVERT comJnand)

Purpose

Does conversions from one set of units to another.

Command

RUN=CONVERT N1,NEL1,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 NIN,NOUT (FI,F2)

Where

N1 NELl NVR1 - Input matrix to be converted.

N2 NEL2 NVR2 - Output _trix of converted data.

NIN NOUT - Flag referring to the input and output unit types.

F1 F2 - Frequency range to use when required.

The following conversions are supported:

FLAG units

1 DB

2 PSI**2

3 G**2

4 (N/M**2)**2

5 PSI*-2/HZ

6 G-*2/HZ

7 (N/M**2)**2/HZ

Related Commands

CONVERT
3.30. RUN COPS

RUN=COPS 3-59

RUN=COPS Command

Purpose

Writes all of the symbolic (types 5 and 6) elements from DAL unit 'NDAL'

to Fortran unit 'NSYM'

Command

RUN=COPS NDAL,NSYM, IOP

Where

NDAL - Is the DAL unit from which to get symbolic elements.

NSYM - Is the Fortran unit to direct output.

IOP - Option flag.

= 0 - All symbolic element will be written.

> 0 - Only symbolic elements in 28,TOC, LIST 0,0 will be used.

28,TOC,LIST can be formed by the following:

CYCLE 0 0

FINES &NU

28,TOC,LIST

Example

Copy all symbolic elements from DAL unit 1 to Fortran unit 1.

RUN=COPS 1,1

Output format

The general output format is as follows:

SYMEND &NU

-THE DATASEOF

'NAME' 'NAMV' 'ICl' 'IC2' ZZZZ

Related Commands

COPY, RUN=COPY, RUN=CPYS, CSYM, PRINT, RUN=SEND, RUN=SNDP, RUN=SPIN,

RUN=UPDS
3-60 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.31. COPY

COPY Command

Purpose

Copy an element from one file to another. COPY may also be used in a

'mask' mode, where a group of elements sharing a common name or cycle may

be copied. COPYF may be used to copy an entire DAL file into a DAL element

on another file.

Command

COPY NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

NI,EL1,VRI - Existing element.

N2,EL2,VR2 - New element.

Example

Copy I,ZAP,DAT to DAL unit 2 using the same name.

COPY I,ZAP,DAT 2

Notes

Times and dates of creation are updated for the new element. Disabled

elements may not be copied. Cycle names are derived from current input and

output cycles as defined by the CYCLE command.

MASK mode

The command COPYM may be used instead of COPY to transfer a group of

elements.

CYCLE 1,MASK 2,MASK

COPYM 1,MASK,DATA 3,MASK,NEWV

would transfer all elements from unit 1 that have a version name of DATA

and a first cycle of 1 to unit 3, with different version names of NEWV and

new cycle 1 = 2.

Related Commands

RUN=COPY, RUN=COPS, RUN=CPYS, PACK, TDUMP, TRDAL, WTAPE
COPY 3-61

3.31.1. COPYF

COPYF (COPY File)

Purpose

Copy file to/from DAL dataset.

Command

COPYFO NU NI,EL1,VR1

or

COPYFO NU NTAP,IFIL LENG

or

COPYFI NU NI,ELI,VRI

or

COPYFI NU NTAP,IFIL LENG,LTOT

Copy file to/from tape.

Where

NU - Is the DAL unit to be copied.

NI,EL1,VR1 - DAL unit NU is stored in this element as a type 9

element.

NTAP

IFIL

LENG

LTOT

- Tape unit number.

- File number on tape.

- For COPYFI:

Maximum number of words per tape block ( if omitted, LENG

defaults to 1000) If in doubt, specify a large number for

LENG, eg 5000

- For COPYFO:

LENG is still the length of a tape block, but this length

will be ROUNDED to an integer number of host sectors. If

the file originally came from another machine (ie Cray)

then you should set LENG such that it is a multiple of the

original sector size. (512 cray words = 1024 Vax words, so

LENG=I024 or a multiple thereof.)

- Number of sectors in the file.

If NU is a true DAL file, both LENG and LTOT should be

omitted.

DAL file to/from DAL element

COPYFI will create NI,ELI,VRI and COPYFO will recreate DAL unit NU. DAL

unit NU must be an empty file prior to the COPYFI command.
3-62 GENERALCOMMANDS

DALfile to/from Tape.

As an example, consider writing a VAXresident Cray DALfile to tape. In

this case, the file is a DALfile, but not a VAXDALfile. So, assumethe

file is OUTPUT.CDLand that if you do a SDIR/SIZEOUTPUT.CDLit showsup

with 45123blocks. Then45123blocks is 45123-128words or 45123-4 sectors

of 32 words each. (45123*4 = 180492)

$ DEFINETAPE04MTAO:

$ MOUNTTAPE04/FOREIGN

$ DALPRO

FNAMEI,'OUTPUT.CDL'

COPYFO1 4,1 1024,180492

END

would copy the file to tape. You could then use TDUMP and TRDAL on the

Univac to read the tape.

r
3.32. RUN COPY

RUN=COPY 3-63

RUN=COPY Command

Purpose

This runstream may be used to copy groups of elements from one DAL unit to

another, with different cycle numbers, if desired.

Command

RUN=COPY N1,ELI,VR1 C1,C2 N2 C3,C4

Where

C3,C4

Example

N1,ELI,VRI - DAL unit, element name and version of the element(s) to

be copied.

CI,C2 - Cycle numbers of the element(s) to be copied.

N2 - DAL unit to which to copy the element(s).

- Desired output cycle numbers.

Copy all element from DAL unit 1 to DAL unit 2.

RUN=COPY I,MASK,MASKMASK,MASK 2 0 0

Note

The word 'MASK' may be used for any of the arguments except N1 and N2 as a

match all. It is recommended that actual numbers be used for C3 and C4.

Related Commands

COPY, PACK
3-64 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.33. CORE

CORE Command

Purpose

Allows user to reset maximum data space. CORE also may be used to release

unused core after core has been expanded.

Command

CORE MAXDSP

Where

MAXDSP - Maximum data space in words.

Example

Set maximum core size to 65000 words.

CORE 65000

Notes

VAPEPS uses one large array for the storage of data in core. In addition,

on some systems, heap storage is used for arrays too large to fit in the

allocated storage area. In general, the size of this array may be

increased or decreased dynamically. When VAPEPS is executed, two

parameters are initialized for this area. The first is the actual size of

the area, the second is the maximum size for the area. The maximum

defaults to the largest size a user should be using, considering the

environment at the time (demand runs have a lower core limit than

batch,etc).

If the user has permission to exceed demand guidelines, the CORE command

may be used to adjust the maximum size to normal batch limits. Note that

a maximum size varies from system to system.

The use of CORE will never increase your core allocation. It merely allows

future commands to allocate more core if the need arises. It will,

however, physically decrease your core if the maximum specified is less

than the current physical size.

Related Commands

FNAME
3.34. CPU

CPU 3-65

CPU Command

Purpose

Print CPU (or SUP on UNISYS) time that has accumulated during various

portions of the run.

Command

CPU

Example

Find out how long it takes, in CPU seconds, to invert a i00 x 100 matrix.

RANDOM 28,TEST,MAT i00,I00

CPU

INVERT 28,TEST,MAT 28,INV,MAT

CPU

Notes

When the CPU command is encountered, three numbers will be written to unit

6. The first indicates the number of CPU seconds that have been used

since the last call to CPU. The second indicates the number of CPUs during

this execution. The third indicates the number of CPUs during the entire

run.

Related Commands

END
3-66 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.35. RUN CPYS

V

RUN=CPYS Command

Purpose

Copy all matching symbolic element from a DAL unit and create a file of

card images, with embedded 'SYMEND' cards. This file may then be written

to tape and later re-entered on a DAL file by adding (##READ) it to VAPEPS.

Command

RUN=CPYS NFOR,NDAL,ELN,VER, ICI, IC2 IDAT

Where

NFOR - Fortran unit to direct output.

NDAL,ELN,VER, ICI,IC2

- DAL unit, element, version and cycle numbers of elements to

match. DAL unit must be specified. Element, version and cycle

numbers can be MASKed.

IDAT - Date before which no items will be copied. Default = 0

Example

Copy all symbolic elements from DAL unit 27 to Fortran unit 3.

RUN=CPYS 3,27

Note

If NDAL is entered as a negative number, the element 28,ELN,VER is assumed

to contain the result of a transposed FINES operation. ICI, IC2 and IDAT

are ignored. Elements are read from DAL unit -NDAL.

Related Commands

COPY, RUN=COPY, RUN=COPS, CSYM, PRINT, RUN=SEND, RUN=SNDP, RUN=SPIN,

RUN=UPDS
CRYPT 3-67

CRYPT

CRYPT Command

Purpose

Perform conversion from one character set to another (ASCII to EBCDIC,

etc). This operation is usually done only on type 5 or type 6 DAL

elements.

CRYPT may also be used to pack or unpack bit fields, ie convert a packed

string of 12 bit integers into a string of full word integers or visa

versa.

Command

CRYPT N1,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 IBPC,JBPC IST,LST

-DATAWhere

NI,ELI,VR1 - Input DAL element.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output DAL element.

IBPC - Number of bits per input character.

JBPC - Number of bits per output character.

IST - Lowest input character value.

LST - Highest input character value.

-DATA- - A list of new character values (integers).

Example

Convert the symbolic file 1,MY,FILE from ASCII to FIELDATA.

CRYPT 1,MY,FILE 1,MY2,FILE 8,6 0,127

=30,ASCI,FLDT

Notes

CRYPT is used to convert ASCII to EBCDIC or FIELDATA, etc. The input array

consists of symbolic images as will the output array. The row length

output will be different if (JBPC.NE.IBPC).

The basic approach is to read the input data set and collect the first

IBPC bits. This forms an integer. This integer is used as a pointer into

the input table. If I is the integer, then a new integer J is found as J =

DATA(I-IST+I).
3-68 GENERALCOMMANDS

Notes on character conversion

The hardest thing about converting from ASCII to EBCDICis preparing the

appropriate cross-reference table to use as data to CRYPT.Several of

these tables have been prepared already, and exist as data elements on DAL

unit 30 (the master RUNfile>. The following namesare used:

ASCI

CYBR

EBCD

FLDT

-- ASCII code (7 bit code, 128 values>

-- CYBER(CDC)code (6 bit code, 64 values>

-- EBCDICcode (8 bit code, 256 values)

-- FIELDATA(UNIVAC)code (6 bit code, 64 values>

The element nameof the element determines the current code, and the

version namedetermines the desired code. (eg 30,ASCI,EBCDcontains the

table for ASCII to EBCDIC) The length of the element corresponds the the

numberof values in the current code (ASCII = 128). You should always set

IST=0, and LST=length-l. Ie:

CRYPTI,ASCI,DATA I,EBCD,DATA8,8 0,127

= 30,ASCI,EBCD

would convert from ASCII TOEBCDIC.Note that ASCII is a 7 bit code, and

yet 8 was used for IBPC. This is due to the fact that the data waswritten

as 8 bits per character, but the left most bit is always 0. For the

UNIVAC,ASCII characters are normally stored as 9 bit characters. This is

also true for EBCDICwhen//////Q is used to read an offsite tape.

Notes on bit manipulation

If IST and LST are omitted from the CRYPT command, CRYPT will not read a

data table, and will not do any trans- lations. In this case, it will

simply read IBPC bits, right justify them into JBPC bits, and write them.

VAX considerations

VAX is a byte addressable machine and stores character data in successive

byte addresses. If you look at a long word that contains 'ABCD' it appears

to contain CDAB. CRYPT expects this, and pulls the input bits a byte at a

time, and writes the output bits a byte at a time. This allows 8-bit to

8-bit character conversions with no problem. Sometimes (especially with

bit manipulation> it is desirable to operate on a full long word at a

time, rather than byte by byte. This may be accomplished by setting the

variables NIN$ and NOTS prior to using CRYPT.

NIN$ - Number of bytes to grab at once (default=l max = 4)

NOTS - Number of bytes to write at.once (default=l max = 4>

If you are interested, try this on a VAX
CRYPT 3-69

* CREATEA TYPE5 ELEMENT THAT HAS ONE LINE

SYMIN I,TEST,SYM

THIS IS MY ONE LINE

SEOF

* PRINT THE OCTAL CONTENTS

PRICF I,TEST,SYM 1,6

(6012)

* 5ET NIN$ AND NOTS

SET NIN$=I,NOT$=4

CRYPT I,TEST,SYM 1,NEW,TEST

PRICF 1,NEW,TEST

(6012)

PRICF 1,NEW,TEST

(IX,6A4)

Related Commands

COPY, RUN=SPILL, TDUMP
3-70 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.37. RUN CSD2

RUN=CSD2 Command

Purpose

Coupled Spectral Density calculation part 2. Gives the response of an FEM

model to some acoustic loading based on a correlation function. See 5CSD

for a SIN(kx)/kx correlation function.

Command

RUN=CSD2 NUMD,NVMD NUSD,NVSD NOUT,NVOU IDVA

Where

NUMD,NVMD - Unit and version name of input model datasets

FN - Input natural frequencies (#mode,l)

RN - Input generalized mass (#mode, l)

QN - Input generalized gain (#mode, l)

PX - Input response eigenvectors (#resp,#mode)

CSDF - Input frequencies at which responses are to be

calculated(#freq, 1).

NUSD,NVSD - Unit and version name of input spectral datasets

MSDF - Input MSD frequency vector (#msdfreq, l)

MSD - Input Modal Spectral Density matrix (#mode,#mode)

There is one MSD matrix for every frequency in

NUSD,'MSDF',NVSD. The second cycle number of the

MSD matrix corresponds with a row number in the

frequency matrix.

NOUT,NVOU - Unit and version name for saving PSD (RESP) results.

RESP - Output Power Spectral Density (#resp,#freq)

RM5 - Output RMS of PSD (RESP) (#resp,l)

IDVA - Option indicator.

= 1 - Uses a displacement transfer function.

= 2 - Uses a velocity transfer function.

= 3 - Uses an acceleration transfer function.

Summary of control variables

IC25 - For restarted runs is set to the last frequency completed.

IC35 - Maximum frequency to be calculated.

ICV$ - Conversion flag.

= 0 - Conversion is made from (in/sec**2)**2/hz to g**2/hz
RUN=CSD2 3-71

> 0 - NOconversion is done.

FDIF - Factor for determining if a frequency is equal to the input

msdmatrix frequency. Seenotes below.

Example

* 1/3 Octave Center frequencies.

FREQUENCY/CENTER 1,XFQ,PRES125.,160.

* Input SoundPressure Level in dB.

ECOLI,DBEX,EXMP2,1

2-100

* Convert to PSI**/Hz

CONVERT/SOUND I,DBEX,EXMPI,EXC,PRES1,9 125.,160.

* Prepare input for RUN=SCSD

RUN=MSDSETUP I,PRES125.,160.

I,JLOC,BTABMASK,MASK

I,VIBR,MODEMASK,MASK

I,VIBR,EVALMASK,MASK

I,EQNF,FORCMASK,MASK

* Calculate Modal Spectral Density

RUN=SCSDI,PRES2,PRES

* Joints at which responses are desired.

ECOLI,RESP,LIST 18,1

1,51,101,151,201,251,301,351 401,451

501,551,601,651,701,751,801,851

* Convert joint numbersto DOF's

RUN=JTODI,RESP,LIST I,DOF,LIST 1,2,3

* Set up input to RUN=CSD2

RUN=CSDSETUP I,PRESI,DOF,LIST 2,PRES50.,.5

I,VIBR,MODEMASK,MASK

I,VIBR,EVALMASK,MASK

* Calculate response. Results will be in G**2/HZ.

RUN=CSD2 I,PRES 2,PRES 3,PRES 3

TOC 1

TOC 2

TOC 3

Execution time

CSD2 can be very expensive, but it can be restarted, just like SCSD. In

this case, if a run maxtimes, check for the last non-zero column of the

PSD (RESP) matrix and set the variable IC25 to that column number prior to

executing the runstream. For checkout a maximum frequency number can be

set with IC35 equal to the last frequency number to be calculated.

Notes

CSD2 takes an input MSD matrix and interpolates to the MSD matrix needed

for each frequency calculated. If a frequency is closer to one of the

input frequencies than FDIF*DELTAF (where DELTAF is the difference between
3-72 GENERALCOMMANDS

two appropriate input frequencies) the MSDmatrix for that frequency will

be used. FDIF is defaulted to I.OE-6. Care should be taken in SCSDto

calculate sufficient frequencies for the accuracy desired.

Related Commands

RUN=CSDF, RUN=CSDS, RUN=MSDF, RUN=MSDS, RUN=SCSD, RUN=JTOD
RUN=CSDF 3-73

3.38. RUN CSDF

RUN=CSDFREQ Command

Purpose

This command calculates the frequencies required for the RUN=CSD2 command.

This command is executed by RUN=CSDSETUP.

Command

RUN=CSDFREQ NI,NAME N2,NVSD (Q (SPC (DZFAC)))

Where

NI,'CSDF',NAME - DAL unit and version name for output. The output

element name is NI,'CSDF',NAME.

N2,'MSDF',NVSD - DAL unit and version name for input MSD frequencies.

Q - Amplification factor.

SPC - Frequency spacing. (eg. For 1/2 power spacing SPC=.5)

Default = .5

DZFAC - Frequencies closer together than this factor are

considered to be identical. Default=l.E-6.

Example

See RUN=CSD2 for a complete example of this analysis.

Related Commands

RUN=CSD2, RUN=CSDS, RUN=JTOD, RUN=MSDF, RUN=MSDS, RUN=SCSD
3-74 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.39. RUN CSDS

RUN=CSDSETUP Command

Purpose

This command does the setup for the RUN=CSD2 command.

Command

RUN=CSDSETUP NI,NAME N2,NEL2,NVR2 N3,NVSD (Q (SPC (DZFAC))}

Where

NI,NAME - DAL unit and version name for RUN=CSD2 input.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - Input vector of response degrees of freedom desired.

Use RUN=JTOD to calculate degrees of freedom from joint

numbers.

N3,NVSD - DAL unit and version name for MSDFrequency vector.

Q - Amplification factor. Default = 50.

SPC - Frequency spacing. (eg. For 1/2 power spacing SPC=.5)

Default = .5

DZFAC - Frequencies closer together than this factor are

considered to be identical. Default=l.E-6.

Input

This runstream prompts for the following input matrices:

'VIBR','MODE' - Mode shape matrix as output by EAL.

'VIBR','EVAL' - Natural frequencies as output by EAL.

Output

The following matrices are output:

NI,'RN ',NAME - Generalized m_ss. (#modes,l) This is output as a

vector of 1.'s.

NI,'QN ',NAME - Generalized gain. This is output as a vector of Q.

(#modes,l)

NI,'PX ',NAME - Response eigenvectors. (#resp,#modes)

NI,'FREQ',NAME - Frequencies at which responses are desired.

(#freqs,l)

Example

Refer to the RUN=CSD2 command for a complete example of this analysis.
RUN=CSDS 3-75

Related Commands

RUN=CSD2, RUN=CSDF, RUN=JTOD, RUN=MSDF, RUN=MSDS, RUN=SCSD
3-76 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.40. CSYM

CZYM Command

Purpose

Read/write DAL symbolic (tlrpes 5/6) elements from/to system files or

elements. The use of this command varies between computers

Command

CSYM NDAL, ELI, VRI NAMF

or

CSYM NAMF, EL 1, VRI NDAL

Where

NDAL - Integer DAL unit (1-30)

ELI,VR1 - Element na_ne

NAMF - System file name or dunm_y.

The first form copies a DAL element to a system file. The

second form copies a system file to a DAL element.

Example

Write the sy_lic element 30,RUN,GRMS to a synIbolic file.

CSYM 30,RUN,GRMS DRS

On VAX and UNIX machines this will create the file RUNBRMS.DRS. On UNISYS

machines this will create the file DRS.RUNGRMS.

Notes

In all cases, the system file or element name is one word (max 8

characters) that is derived by combining the DAL element/version names.

On UNIVAC, NAMF is the name of a program file for reading or writing the

system element. NAMF is limited to a max of 4 characters.

On VAX, NAMF is the version (or type) name of the element. Ie. DU_UM.DAT

is a typical VAX file name. DAT is used for NAMF. CSYM DAT DUMDUM 1

reads the file and creates a DAL element. CSYM 1 DUMDUM DAT writes the

DAL element to the VAX file. Unix systems work the same as the VAX.

On PRIME, the 8 character name is the actual PRIME file name. NAMF is used

only as a key on which direction the transfer is to go. NAMF should be any
CSYM 3-77

hollerith name,or it maybe set to zero.

Currently there is no CDC version.

DAL element type

The type of DAL element produced by CSYM is controlled by the values of

the variables NRB$ and NCR$. If these variables are not set, CSYM will

produce a type 5 element (variable length records). To get a type 6

element (fixed record length), set NCR$= number of characters per record,

and NRB$= number of records per block, e.g.

SET NCR$=80,NRB$=60

CSYM .......

The use of type 5 elements is recommended, as they make the best use of

disk storage. Type 6 elements are convenient for writing symbolic files to

tape, ie. for offsite transmittals. As an example, if you have a group of

card images on DAT.DATADECK (UNIVAC) or DATADECK.DAT (VAX), the following

stream would write the deck to tape as 80 chars per record, 60 records per

block.

SET NCR$=80,NRB$=60

CSYM DAT DATA,DECK 1

WTAPE 1,DATA,DECK 4,1,1

where images are written to tape 4, starting at file i, record i.

Related Commands

PRINT, SYMIN

L
3-78 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.41. CYCLE

CYCLE Command

Purpose

Change preset cycle numbers during an execution. Recover current cycle

numbers.

Command

CYCLE ICI, IC2 JCI, JC2

or

CYCSET NAMI, NAM2, NAM3, NAM4

Where

ICI,IC2 - Cycle numbers to be used when finding elements.

JCI,JC2 - Cycle numbers to be used when creating new elements.

NAMI - Name of variable to receive current value of ICI

NAM2 - Name of variable to receive current value of IC2

NAM3 - Name of variable to receive current value of JCI

NAM4 - Name of variable to receive current value of JC2

Example

Set the input and output cycles to 1,0.

CYCLE 1,0

Notes

If either command form is used without any arguments, a message is printed

indicating the current cycle values.

If JCI and JC2 are omitted, they are set equal to ICI and IC2. The word

'MASK' may be used for any or all of the cycles which indicates that that

cycle number is to be ignored when searching for the element.

Caution is advised when input and output cycles are different (unless

input cycles are 'MASK'ed) as newly created elements may not be referenced

without modifying cycle names.

The use of cycles and thus the CYCLE command is very important in many

VAPEPS executions. The basic theory is as follows:

All DAL elements are identified by four names

k_
CYCLE 3-79

ELN,VER,ICI,IC2

The first two namesare hollerith words, the last two namesare normally

integers. All four namesmust be specified whenreading an existing

element and whencreating a new element. Contrast this statement with the

following general VAPEPScommand:

CommandN1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

Note that the user only specifies the unit, element nameand version name

of each DALdata set. The cycle namesare not specified and yet they must

comefrom somewhere.

The CYCLEcommand sets default values for cycle numbers. Two pairs of

cycle numbers are defined. The first pair is used as cycles when a VAPEPS

command is reading an existing DAL element. The second pair is used when

a VAPEPS command is creating a new element.

Related Commands

##CYCLE
3-80 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.42. RUN DATA

RUN=DATA Command

Purpose

Calls RUN=PICK to pick out selected channels from an event. Converts the

data returned by RUN=PICK from dB to PSI**2 and averages it then outputs

it in dB.

Command

RUN=DATA NU, IVNT N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 FLOW,FHI IFLG

Where

NU,VENT - Input event unit and name.

NI,ILI,IVl - Input vector of channel names to be picked.

N2,IL2,1V2 - Name of output element.

FLOW,FHI - Desired frequency range limits ( default to i0 and i0000

hz, respectively )

IFLG - Flag used to specify output units. Default is zero <output

in dB) If specified as a value other than zero, output is

in mean square values.

Example

Get the average of microphones MI, M2, M3 and M4 from the event STDI.

ECOL 28,MIC,NAMS 4,1

Ml:M4

RUN=DATA 1,SDTD 28,MIC,NAMS 28,AVG,MICS 31.5,2000.

Related Commands

CONVERT, RUN=PICK
RUN=DCON 3-81

3.43. RUN DCON

RUN=DCON command

Purpose

This runstream takes an input DAMO parameter element and converts the

specified element to a symbolic deck of var=val. This is useful as

an aid in converting DAMO data sets to SEMOD data sets.

Command

RUN=DCON NI,NAME N2,NEL2,NVR2 ELT

Where

NI,NAME - DAL unit and version name of DAMO parameter matrix.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - DAL unit element and version for symbolic output deck.

ELT - Name of SEA element to extract. Valid values are:

EXTA,SKIN,INTA,MONT, INST,FRAM.

Example

Convert the element EXTA in DAMO model 5TDI to element EXTERNAL in SEMOD

model TEST.

RUN=DCON 1,5TD1 1,5YM,EXTA EXTA

SEMOD 28,TEST

ELNAME

EXTERNAL,I

##READ I,SYM,EXTA

LIST

EXIT

DONE

DONE

Notes

The output element may require editing. Use CSYM or PRINT and SYMIN to get

to a system file so it can be edited.

Related Commands

DAMO, RUN=GMOD, 5EMOD
3-82 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.44. RUN DIAG

RUN=DIAG Command

Purpose

Create a vector which is the diagonal of the input matrix or create a

square matrix given its diagonal as a vector.

Command

RUN=DIAG NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 MBLK

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix. (Square or diagonal).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output matrix. (Square or diagonal).

MBLK - Number of terms to be taken along the diagonal,

Default = I.

Example

Create a square matrix whose diagonal is (1.,2.,8.,4.,3.).

ECOL 28,DIAG,VECT 5,1

1.,2.,8.,4.,3.

RUN=DIAG 28,DIAG,VECT 28,DIAG,MAT

Notes

For the vector diagonal mode, MBLK=I. MBLK may be set to 6, for example,

if you want all 6x6 matrices along the diagonal of a square matrix.

RUN=DIAG works for single, double, and complex matrices.

Related Commands

RUN=LFU
3.45. DISABLE

DISABLE 3-83

DISABLE Command

Purpose

Disable a group of elements in a DAL file.

Command

DISABLE NU,II(,I2)

where

NU = DAL unit

Ii = Sequence number of first element in group.

12 = Sequence number of last element in group.

If omitted, I2 = Ii.

Example

Disable the first I0 elements on DAL unit 28.

DISABLE 28,1,10

Notes

Whenever a new element is created, the TOC is examined for an element of

the same name. If found, the previous element is disabled (ie: marked

for deletion). The DIABLE command allows the user to mark a group of

elements for deletion. Note: Elements are not physically removed until

the file is PACKed.

Related Commands

ENABLE, PACK, TOC, FIND
3-84 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.46. DOC -

DOC Command

Purpose

This command will take the input help files and format them into a

printable document complete with page numbers, table of contents and other

features.

Command

DOC MAXITEM NLPP ISTP

-DATAWhere

MAXITEM - Maximum number of sections in the manual.

NLPP

ISTP

-DATAThis turns out to

be the combined total number of table of contents lines,

figures, and tables.

- Maximum number of lines per page.

- Shifts output to the right. This is the word offset where

output is to start. For example ISTP = 1 would cause output

to be shifted right 4 characters. This includes the fortran

carriage control character so it is effectivly 3 characters.

- Input lists of DAL files to include in the document.

DATA input

Input is in the following form:

LEVEL,NU,ELN,VER, ICI, IC2

Where

LEVEL - Is the section level to start this DAL element at. This may

be input as a negative integer in which case the line that

follows is read as a the section title.

NU,ELN,VER, ICI,IC2

- DAL unit, element, version and cycle numbers of the DAL

element to be used.

Control variables

The following DAL variables can be set prior to execution of the DOC

command.
DOC 3-85

ITMS- This sets the device type. The following devices are supported:

= XEROX- Output is formated for the 5END/SFONTcommand.

LVL$- This controls howpage ejects are performed on sections. All

section levels up to and including the LVL$are forced to start on

a newpage. This numbercan be appendedto the DOCcommand. (eg.

DOC2has the sameeffect as if LVL$were set to 2.) The DOC2form

superseeds the LVL$ form.

3.46.1. FORMATING OF OUTPUT

The DAL elements input above can have statements embeded in them to cause

special formatting of the output. The statements are summarized as follows:

3.46.1.1. DECK

DECK Command

Purpose

Starts a new deck.

Command

C=DECK NAME ...

Where

NAME - Text entered here is used as the title of the section unless

something else is specified via the C=TITLE command. Other text

may follow NAME. If NAME has embeded blanks it must be

surrounded by ''.

Example

The file that generated this text starts with:

C=DECK DOC VAPEPS MANUAL

Notes

This is normally the first command in a DOC deck.
3-86 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.46.1.2. KEYS

KEYS Command

Purpose

This command is used by the GLOSS processor to produce an index.

Command

C=KEYS KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 ...

Where

KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 ...

- Keys words to be put in the index.

Notes

This command must follow the DECK command and comes before the C=BLOCK

DESCRIPTION command.

3.46.1.3. DESCRIPTION

DESCRIPTION Command

Purpose

This command is used to create a summary listing of 1 line descriptions

for all commands.

Command

C=DESCRIPTION TEXT

Where

TEXT - Line of text to be put in the command summary.

Example

The C=DESCRIPTION command used in this deck is as follows:

C=DESCRIPTION DOC ......... Document formater.
DOC 3-87

3.46.1.4. BLOCK

BLOCK Command

Purpose

This command breaks up the text into sections and sub-sections etc.

Command

C=BLOCK BLOCKNAME

Where

BLOCKNAME - The name of the block that follows the command.

Notes

The C=END command ends the block that it specifies. Blocks may be nested

up to i0 levels.

Special case

When BLOCKNAME is DESCRIPTION this is taken as the outer most block in the

file. Any text before this is ignored. Any text following a C=END

DESCRIPTION is also ignored.

3.46.1.5. END

END Command

Purpose

This command ends a block that was started with the C=BLOCK command.

Command

C=END BLOCKNAME

Where

BLOCKNAME - Name of block as it appeared in the C=BLOCK command.
3-88 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.46.1.6. ON-OFF

ON-OFF Command

Purpose

This command turns on or off the DOC and HELP modes.

Command

C=ON DOC

C=OFF DOC

C=ON HELP

C=OFF HELP

Where

DOC-HELP - Refer to the DOC or HELP processors respectivly.

Notes

The command C=OFF DOC will cause all text following it to be ignored until

a C=ON DOC is encountered while in the DOC processor. The same is true

for the C=ON HELP and C=OFF HELP con_nands in the HELP processor. Commands

that are found in these sections are ignored the same as text.

T

3.46.1.7. TITLE

TITLE Command

Purpose

Provide a title for the section.

Command

C=TITLE TEXT

Where

TEXT - Is the title to be used for this section.

Notes
This commandshould follow the C=BLOCKcommand.

DOC 3-89

3.46.1.8. FIGURE

FIGURE Command

Purpose

Provides blank space to put in a figure and creates a table of contents

line for the figure.

Command

C=FIGURE LINES TEXT

Where

LINES - Number of blank lines to leave for the figure.

TEXT - Text to be used as a title for the figure.

3.46.1.9. TABLE

TABLE Command

Purpose

Provides blank space to put in a table and creates a table of contents

line for the table.

Command

C=TABLE LINES TEXT

Where

LINES - Number of blank lines to leave for the table.

TEXT - Text to be used as a title for the table.
3-90 GENERALCOMMANDS

3 •46 .1 •i0 • ENHANCE

ENHANCE Command

Purpose

Turns on or off in line enhancements such as underlining.

Command

C=ENHANCE ON

C=ENHANCE OFF

Where

ON - Turns on enhancment decoding.

OFF - Turns off enhancment decoding.

Enhancements

The following enhancement codes are available:

\ul - Text following this is underlined.

\bf - Text following is bold face.

\bl - Text following is blinking (VTI00 terminals only.)

\rv - Text following is in reverse video (VTI00 terminals only.>

\of - Turns off all of the above modes.

XEROX printer fonts.

\fl - Normal typewriter font. (Default)

\f2 - Italic font.

\f3 - Bold font. \bf gives this font.

\f4 - Special characters.

\f5 - Double high characters.

The XEROX codes assume that the SEND/DFONT command or equivalent is

available on your VAX.
DOC 3-91

3 •46 •1 •ii • EJECT-REMAIN

EJECT-REMAIN Commands

Purpose

Cause unconditional and conditional page ejects.

Commands

C=EJECT

C=REMAIN LINES

Where

LINES - Number of lines that must be left on the page for a page eject

not to be done.
3-92 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.47. DPTOR

DPTOR Command

Purpose

DPTOR performs the conversion between single and double precision

matrices.

Command

DPTOR NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 IFLAG

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output matrix.

IFLAG - Direction flag (optional).

= 1 - Implies input matrix is double precision.

= -i - Implies input matrix is single precision.

Example

Convert the single precision vector (1.,2.,5.,4.,3.) to double precision.

ECOL 28,A,A 5,1

i.,2.,5.,4.,3.

DPTOR 28,A,A 28,B,B

FIND 28,A,A

FIND 28,B,B

Notes

Double precision arrays are identified by a type code of 2 (or -2).

Single precision arrays have a type of i (or -i). DPTOR checks the type

of the input element and performs the necessary conversion to the

complement type.

If IFLAG is used, the indicated direction must match the operation that

DPTOR would have done if it were omitted. If there is a conflict, an error

is returned and the conversion does not take place.

Related Commands

CMOD, RTOI
RUN=DTAB 3-93

"4

3.48. RUN DTAB

RUN=DTABLE Command

Purpose

This command creates a table from the data set(s) specified.

Command

RUN=DTABLE

Notes

This runstream prompts for the following input:

i) N1,NVR1 ITYPE - Input DAL unit and version of data and type.

Where

NI,'RDAT',NVR1 - This contains the data. Number of frequencies

by number of channels.

NI,'RCHN',NVR1 - This contains the channel names. One for each

column in RDAT.

NI,'RFRQ',NVRI - Contains the frequencies of the data. This

should be a single vector. If it is not a

vector then the first column is used.

ITYPE - This is the first character of the element

name in the above data sets. The default is

'R'. The following are used for specific

types of data:

= M - Microphone data.

= A - Accelerometer data.

= S - Strain gauge data.

2) NC, NOUT

Where

NC - Number of data columns per output line. Default = 6.

NOUT - Fortran unit to direct output. Default = 6.

3) FTYPE, WIDTH, DIGITS

Where

FTYPE - Is the Fortran format type. (E,F,I,H,...) Default = E.
3-94 GENERALCOMMANDS

WIDTH- Numberof total digits in the output format.

Default = ii.

DIGITS- Numberof significant digits in output. Default = 4,

The above defaults yield a format of (Ell.4) for each

output column.

Related Commands

RUN=PCOMPARE
ECOL

ECOL 3-95

ECOL Command

Purpose

Enter data by columns. A rectangular matrix is created. The first column

of the matrix will contain values input on the first data records, etc.

Two basic forms are allowed: ECOL AND ECOSYM. ECOL is used to input real,

integer, or hollerith data in free field format. ECOSYM is used to read

hollerith data as card images.

Command

ECOL N1,ELI,VR1 NR,NC

- DATA -

ECOSYM NI,ELI,VRI NCHAR,NC

- DATA -

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - New element name.

NR - Number of rows per column.

NC - Number of columns.

NCHAR - Number of characters per column.

Notes

ECOL reads data using the VAPEPS free-field interpreter, and keeps track

of the type of data being entered. If all of the data is of the same type,

the matrix type will be set accordingly (0=integer, l=real, 4=hollerith).

If a mixture of types is encountered, a type of 0 is set.

Several variations of the ECOL command exist. These forms explicitly set

the type of the output element. No checking is performed internally:

ECOI - Produces an integer matrix (type 0)

ECOR - Produces a real matrix (type I)

ECOD - Produces a double precision matrix (type 2)

ECOC - Produces a complex matrix (type 3). Note that two numbers are

required per complex word.

ECOH - Produces a type 4 element.

The idea is to enter NC columns of data. The data for each column must

begin on a new card. You are allowed as many cards as necessary per

column, however, exactly NR values must be specified before moving on to
3-96 GENERALCOMMANDS

the next column. In the case of complex (ECOC),NR*2numbersare required

per column.

The commandECOSYMis different than ECOL(et al) in that free field

input is not used. Cards are read using a hollerith format such that all

words are filled. Ie., On UNIVAC = (13A6), VAX = (20A4), CDC = (8AI0),

etc. A maximum of 80 characters may be read per line (column). Thus one

line is expected per column. The VAPEPS precoder ($$ notation) may be

used to decode variables into hollerith as part of the read process.

All three commands read data until either NC columns have been filled or

an EOF is sensed. In the latter case, the output matrix size will be

adjusted to indicate the actual number of columns read.

Examples

SET NUM=100,1NC=5,F=27.3

ECOL I,INT,DATA 100,3

l:100

&NUM*20

10/&NUM/&INC

ECOL 1,MIX,DATA 5,2

1.,2,3.,4,5.

A,B,&NUM,6.7,3

ECOR 1,REAL,DATA 100,3

I./&NUM/3.

1.:100.:2.

2./50/2.

IO0*&F

- Standard integer

- Mixture of types. Note That the resulting

Element should be used carefully since its

type code does not represent its contents.

- Column 1

- Column 2 (1,3,...,99)

- Column 2 cont. (2,4 .... ,100)

- Column 3

ECOSYM 1,PLOT,TTLS 80,3

THIS IS TITLE ONE

SS FREQUENCY = &F(F5.2)

THIS IS THE LAST LINE

- Results in 'FREQUENCY = 27.30'

Related Commands

CSYM, GREAD, SREAD, SYMIN, ##READ, ##OPEN, ##CLOSE
3.50. ENABLE

ENABLE 3-97

ENABLE Command

Purpose

ENABLE a group of elements in a DAL file.

Command

ENABLE NU, II(,I2)

where

NU = DAL unit

II = Sequence number of first element in group.

I2 = Sequence number of last element in group.

If omitted, 12 = Ii.

Example

ENABLE the first i0 elements on DAL unit 28.

ENABLE 28,1,10

Notes

Whenever a new element is created, the TOC is examined for an element of

the same name. If found, the previous element is disabled (ie: marked

for deletion). The ENABLE command allows the user to enable (reinstate)

any element that has been disabled. Note: Elements are not physically

removed until the file is PACKed.

Related Commands

DISABLE, PACK, TOC, FIND
3-98 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.51. RUN ENTR

RUN=ENTR Command

!

Purpose

Duplicate ENTER output for the case where data already is in a DAL file.

Command

RUN=ENTR NU, IVNT ISEC

-DATAWhere

NU, IVNT - DAL unit and version name for output DAL elements.

ISEC - ENTER section number.

-DATA- - Input lines of data as follows:

- Four lines of description.

- Number of channels

For each channel:

- NAME,TYPE,UNITS

- CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

- 1/3 Octave Frequency Range.

- Name of DAL file containing the data.
3.52. RUN EQPL

RUN=EQPL 3-99

RUN=EQPL Command

Purpose

Use RUN=EQPL to model complex (honeycomb, beam stiffened - orthotropic)

skin structures for SEA predictions. It calculates a set of equivalent

homogeneous parameters (RHO, RHOS, H and E) given specific parameters of a

structure. Formulas and assumptions for these calculations are show under

the EQUATIONS heading.

To describe a structure for this routine, isolate a rectangular cutout of

it, then break it down by slicing it up into co-planar segments (layers)

of rectangular cross-section, and group them into the following

categories:

-bare skin layers (omni-directional stiffness) e.g. sheet

metal, honeycomb.

-lengthwise running beam layers (uni-directional stiffness)

e.g. cylinder longerons, if present.

-widthwise running beam layers (uni-directional stiffness)

e.g. cylinder stiffening rings, if present.

Command

RUN=EQPL NI,VER1 (N2,VER2)

-inputWhere

NI,VER1 - Dal unit and version name for output. If N1 is input as a

negative number, an old set of parameters is read in from

-NI,VERI (modification mode). The parameter values for the

old model can be changed by stepping through the input

sections and making changes as you go.

N2,VER2 - (optional) If N1 is negative, Dal unit and version for the

output modified parameters. Default: output is to -NI,VERI

(new replaces old).

Input

You are prompted to input parameters by section. The sections are:

1 general parameters,
3-i00 GENERALCOMMANDS

2 bare skin parameters - each layer,

3 lengthwise beamparameters - each layer (if specified)

4 widthwise beamparameters ... (if specified)

The form of input is PARAMETERI=VALUE, PARAMETER2=VALUE, etc. - the order

is not important. There are four hommandthat can be issued typed in

during parameter input, they are:

* LIST lists out the parameters and their values.

* CHECKlists out what still needs to be specified.

* DONEtakes you on to the next step.

* QUITcancels the run.

Promptedinput

1 General parameters:

NS =

NBL=

NBW=

RLEN=

WID=

ER =

RHOR=

CL =

- Numberof bare skin layers (e.g typical honeycombNS=3-

top sheet, core, bottom sheet).

- Numberof lengthwise running beamslayers (e.g a single

"L" beamNBL=2- vertical web, horizontal web).

Default: NBL=0.

- Numberof widthwise running beams(uni-directional

stiffness) layers. Default: NBW=0.

- Length of the structure.

- Width of the structure.

- ReferenceYoung's modulus (E of the most commonmaterial

of the structure - e.g. aluminumER=I0.6E+6psi).

- Referencemassdensity (RHOof the most commonmaterial

of the structure - e.g. aluminumRHOR=2.591E-4

ib*sec**2/in*,4).

- Longitudinal wavespeed of bare skin - e.g. aluminum

CL=2.01E+5 in/sec.

2 For each bare skin layer:

S

CEN =

E =

RHO =

- Thickness.

- Distance from the centroid of this layer to an arbitrary

reference point.

- (optional) Young's modulus of this layer. Defaults to

ER.

- (optional) mass density of this layer. Defaults to

RHOR.

3 For each lengthwise running beam layer (if any):

H = - Thickness.

CEN = - Distance from the centroid of this layer to an arbitrary

reference point.

E = - (optional) Young's modulus of this layer. Defaults to
RUN=EQPL 3-101

RHO=

W =

ER.

__ - (optional) mass density of this layer.

to RHOR.

__ - Width of this beam layer.

Defaults

4 For each widthwise running beam layer (if any):

- same as above -

Output

RUN=EQPL prints out what was input and the resulting equivalent

parameters.

The following DAL elements are output:

NI,'GENR',NVRI = Input parameters EREF,RHOR, LEN,WID,CL (5 x 1).

NI,'GENI',NVRI = Input parameters NS, NBW, NBL (3 x i).

NI,'BARS',NVRI = Input parameters H, CEN, E, RHO for each skin layer

(NS x 4).

NI,'BEML',NVRI = Input parameters H, CEN, E, RHO, W for each lengthwise

running beam layer, if present (NBL x 5).

NI,'BEMW',NVR1 = Input parameters H, CEN, E, RHO, W for each widthwise

running beam layer, if present (NBW x 5).

NI,'EQPL',NVRI = Equivalent parameters - H, E, RHO, RHOS, CL and TOTM

(total mass), RMBS (bare skin mass), RMBL (lengthwise

beam mass) and RMBW (widthwise beam mass) (9 x i).

Equations

The equivalent parameters derived from these methods results in SEA

predictions that correlate well with empirical data.

Equivalent parameter equations:

H - Match the critical frequency of structural panel

l/2

H = (0.551*2*pi/CL) * (D/ps)

RHO - Match the surface mass density

RHO = ps/H

E - Match the bending stiffness

3

E = 12*D / H

Where
3-102 GENERALCOMMANDS

pi = 3.1416...

CL = Longitudinal wave speed of the structural panel material

(e.g. for a honeycomb panel use the cl of the face

sheets)

!

ps = Surface mass density of the structural panel

D = Equivalent stiffness of the structural panel. The

equation for an orthotropic structure is shown below.

Equivalent stiffness calculation for beam stiffened structure:

The equivalent stiffness calculation matches the stiffness of a simply

supported orthotropic panel to that of a simply supported isotropic panel.

For cylinders, unroll it into a flat panel.

WID

b .... >

\

L \ ~bs

E /\

N \/\

\

b ..... >

T

\

\

a

IX IX

\\\\ \

\X\\ \

\\\\ \

\\\\ \

\I \I

Sections:

\

\

a

Section xx:

Lxx - width of crosssection

Exx - Young's modulus

of cross-section

Ixx - Moment of inertia

of cross-section

(about it's neutral

axis)

I_I

I_I

: aa - orthotropic section (isotropic

skin with beams)

: bb - '.....

: bs - isotropic skin without beams

(bare skin)

Calculate D using this equation:

Eaa*laa/Laa Ebs*Ibs/Lbs Ebb*Ibb/Lbb

+ 2* +

¢ 2 2 4

Lbb Laa * Lbb Laa

1 2 1
RUN=EQPL 3-103

4 2 2

Lbb Laa * Lbb

4

Laa
3-_04 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.53. RUN ERRO

RUN=ERROR command

Purpose

This command is used to keep track of errors reported for DALPRO, VAPEPS

etc.

Command

RUN=ERROR NU option

Where

NU - DAL unit of file containing error information.

option - Is one of the following:

= LIST - lists out data.

This runstream will prompt for the appropriate information.

Related Commands

RUN=EZDB, RUN=CHKOUT, RUN=TRMT
3.54. RUN ESAV

RUN=ESAV 3-105

RUN=ESAVE Command

Purpose

Writes the enter deck for event 'NAME', section 'ISEC' from DAL file 'NU'

to Fortran unit 'MU'.

Command

RUN=ESAV NU,NAME,ISEC MU

Where

NU,NAME - DAL unit and event name of event enter deck to be written.

ISEC - Section from event enter deck to be written.

MU - Fortran unit to which to write output.

If MU>O, the Fortran unit is closed after write.

If MU<0, the fortran unit is left open after write.
3-i06 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.55. EULER

EULER Command

Purpose

EULER creates 3 by 3 transformation matrices which represent successive

coordinate rotations about various axes.

Command

EULER N1,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

-DATAWhere

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input DAL element containing rotation angles Each row

corresponds to a different matrix, each column is for a

rotation about a different axis

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output DAL element. It will always have 3 columns, and

will have three times as many rows as NI,ELI,VRI

-DATA- - One card of data containing as many integers as there are

columns in NI,ELI,VR1. Each integer must be between 1 and

3, indicating rotation about X,Y and Z axis respectively.

Notes

Assume N1,ELI,VR1 is NR by NC, then you will be computing NR 3 by 3

matrices. Each matrix will correspond to NC successive rotations. The

output element (N2,EL2,VR2) will be dimensioned 3-NR by 3.

In general you can assume that EULER builds a rotation matrix such that:

X' = ROT * X

Note though that if each joint is rotated through the same angles, then

the output (eg ROT/MAT) is a 3x3, and if the original XYZ matrix is

XYZ/ORIG(20,3) then

MTRAN I,XYZ,ORIG i, ROT,MAT I,XYZ,NEW

will give the coordinates relative to the new system.

Important

Angles in NI,ELI,VRI must be in radians. If you have the angles in
EULER 3-107

degrees, use EULED for the command name.

Example

Joint one is to be rotated 30 degrees about Z axis, and 20 degrees about X

axis. Joint two is rotated 50 degrees and -45 degrees. Compute the

matrices

ECOL 1,DUM,ANG 2,2

30.,50.

20.,-45.

EULED 1 DUM ANG 1 ROT MATS

3,1
3-108 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.56. RUN EVEN

RUN=EVENT command

Purpose

This command is used to display information about various parts of an

event on the data base.

Command

RUN=EVENT EVENT options

Where

EVENT - Is the name of an event in the master file.

options - One or more from the following list:

ALL - Lists all information on the event.

BOOK - Lists all book information.

CHAN - Lists all channel information including descriptions.

CNFG - Lists configuration tree.

MODS - Lists sunm_ry of modules.

MOD=N - Lists information on module N. If N=ALL then all

module information is displayed.

MODC=N - Lists only channel information for module N.

MODP=N - Lists only parameter information for module N.

MODN=N - Lists only nondimensional parameters and descriptions.

FOR=N - Directs output to fortran unit N.

UNIT=N - Looks on DAL unit N for EVENT instead of searching

the master file first. This is useful if the

database file is already assigned to a DAL unit.

Notes

On some machines it may be necessary to assign the database file prior to

using this runstream then use the UNIT=N option. This runstream should

work fine on VAX and UNIX machines.

If ALL is used it must be the first option on the line.
EXPAND 31109

EXPAND

EXPAND Command

Purpose

Modify the structure of an existing DAL element, without changing the

contents.

Command

EXPAND NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 NEWR (NJ)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Existing element

N2,EL2,VR2 - New element

NEWR - New number of rows (block length)

NJ - Optional special purpose flag

Notes

In order to use EXPAND properly, the user must know the various data

structures that exist, and how to recognize what structure a given element

has or should have.

First of all, all elements are written one block at a time. In a SPAR

Table of Contents, an element's structure is described by the parameters

NWDS,NJ,NI*NJ. NI*NJ is the block length, NJ indicates either the number

of joints, or the number of columns packed into one block. NWDS gives the

total number of words in the array. VAPEPS commands assume that NJ is

equal to one, ie that there is only one column per block, and that the

block length is equal to the number of rows in the array. For this reason,

the VAPEPS TOC lists NWDS,NR,NC where NWDS always equals NR*NC, NR is the

block length, and NC is the number of blocks or columns. To find the

number of rows and columns using the SPAR Table of Contents, one must do

two divisions: NI = NI*NJ/NJ = NR and NC = NWDS/NI.

The rule of thumb to use is as follows. Give some thought to what matrix

the element is supposed to represent, particularly the number of rows and

columns you think the matrix should have (ie. MR and MC). If NI*NJ=MR and

NWDS/(NI*NJ) = MC, then the element is already VAPEPS compatible. If NWDS

= MR*MC, but NI*NJ is some multiple of MR (ie. NI*NJ = NJ*MR), then EXPAND

may be used to create an element with block size MR. If NWDS is much less

than MR*MC, the element is probably in sparse matrix format, and the

VAPEPS command 'SPARSE' or 'DSPAR' must be used.
3-110 GENERALCOMMANDS

Description

EXPANDis used to increase or decrease the block size of an element. In

all cases expand either combines an integer number of blocks into one

block or breaks up each block into an integer number of blocks. NEWR is

the new block length and must always be a multiple or divisor of the

original block length. Assume in the following that JC is this multiple

(or divisor), and NR is the original block size. Thus for NEWR > NR, JC =

NEWR/NR and JC blocks are combined to form one output block. For NR >

NEWR, JC = NR/NEWR and each input block becomes JC output blocks.

There are two logical ways that this blocking (or deblocking) may be done.

The first (and most obvious) occurs when NJ is omitted or set to a

non-negative number. Note that omitting NJ or setting it to zero will

yield NJ=I

NJ > 0, NEWR > NR

The first block is formed by placing the first JC input blocks one after

the other. The next JC blocks are then put in the second new block, etc.

NJ > 0, NR > NEWR

The first block is formed using the first NEWR values of the first

original block. The next output block uses the next NEWR values from the

same input block.

The second method rearranges the values in the blocks, as well as changing

the block length. This occurs when NJ is input as less that zero.

NJ < 0, NEWR > NR

The first output block is formed, by using the first value in the first

block, then the first value in the second block etc, through JC input

blocks, and then getting the second value in the first block. The second

output block is formed in the same manner, starting with input block JC +

i.

NJ < 0, NR > NEWR

The first output block will contain values 1,1+JC,l+2*JC,etc from the

first input block. Output block two contains values 2,2+JC,2+2*JC,... etc

from the first input block. Output block JC+l begins again using input

block number two.

Note

The absolute value of NJ will be used for the value of NJ in the new

element
EXPAND 3-111

Examples

1. Convert SPAR blocked matrix 'VIBR','BACK' on DAL001., to a VAPEPS

compatible matrix 'DAL','BACK' on DAL002. Assume NWDS = 9234, NJ = 20,

and NI*NJ = 1140.

First, NI = 1140/20 = 57, ie there are 57 rows in the matrix. Also, NC

= 9234/57 = 162 blocks or columns.

EXPAND 1 VIBR BACK 2 DAL BACK 57

will create a 57 by 162 matrix on DAL002.

2. Convert 'DAL','BACK' above to a packed SPAR element on DAL005., only

this time put 25 columns per block, or NEWR = 25*57 = 1425

EXPAND 2 DAL BACK 5 NEW BACK 1425,25

3. Build a DOF table for a model with i0 stations, where all nodes have

six degrees of freedom. First create a sequential vector from i. to 60.

SEQ 2 DOF VEC 60 i. 1.

If DOFs 1-10 are all the X direction DOFS, ll-20 = Y'S, etc. then

EXPAND 2 DOF VEC 1 DOF MAT i0

builds the matrix:

1. ll. 21. 31. 41. 51.

2. 12. 22. 32. 42. 52.

3. 13. 23. 33. 43. 53.

4. 14. 24. 34. 44. 54.

5. 15. 25. 35. 45. 55.

6. 16. 26. 36. 46. 56.

7. 17. 27. 37. 47. 57.

8. 18. 28. 38. 48. 58.

9. 19. 29. 39. 49. 59.

I0. 20. 30. 40. 50. 60.

If DOFs 1-6 are for the first node, etc., then use

EXPAND 2 DOF VEC 1 DOF MAT i0,-i

to get

I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9. 10. ll. 12.

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
I

l-J

oJ.oloo

_0__0

_0_

i..eJee

M

_J

L--'

0

eaatloo

0__0_
RUN=EZDB 3-113

3.58. RUN EZDB

RUN=EZDB command

Purpose

This command is used to keep track of modifications to the easy file

for DALPRO, VAPEPS etc.

Command

RUN=EZDB NU option unit

Where

NU - DAL unit of file being maintained.

option - Is one of the following:

LIST - lists out changes.

SAVE - collects changes and transposes to unit 28

unit - output fortran unit for listing changes (default=6)

This runstream will prompt for the appropriate information.
3-114 GENERALCOMMANDS

EZOUT

EZOUT Command

Purpose

Produce listings of EASY decks. The user provides a list of block names

which designate the portions of the decks that are to be listed. In

addition, the user may specify any number of headers that will be written

prior to each deck listing. Following these specifications, the user

inputs the EASY decks as data to the command. EZOUT is used to produce

compilation runstreams as well as the VAPEPS manual.

Command

EZOUT NHEAD,NOUT

BLOCK1 BLOCK2 ... BLOCKN

BLOCKI ... BLOC/L/

('FORTRAN FORMAT THAT INCLUDES ',3A4)

BLOCKK

('LAST HEADER FORMAT',A4,2X2A4)

EASY DECKS

Where

NHEAD - Number of header pairs to be read.

NOUT - FORTRAN unit for output.

BLOCKI - A block name specification. These may include up to twelve

characters.

FORMAT - Standard FORTRAN format statement, enclosed in parentheses.

Each format must provide for the writing of 3 hollerith words,

ie, 3A4.

Description - EASY

EASY decks contain card images. These images include control cards that

act to describe the deck. Each control card begins with the letters 'C=',

followed by a control command. In general, any number of commands may be

present, but EZOUT only recognizes 3 types:

C=DECK DECKNAMEI DECKNAME2 DECKNAME3

C=BLOCK SPEC-I SPEC-2 ... LAST-SPEC

C=END SPEC-I SPEC-2 ... LAST-SPEC

The C=DECK command identifies the current deck of cards and must be the
EZOUT 3-i15

first card in each EASY deck. Note that three names must be present on the

card. Each name may contain up to 12 characters.

The C=BLOCK and the C=END cards serve as dividers and provide each

internal deck section with a group of local labels. Each data card image

has a label status. Initially (after C=DECK) the label status is zero.

When a C=BLOCK card is encountered, the included specs are added to the

label status. The C=END card removes specs from the label status.

Consider the following:

C=DECK EXAMPLE1 CHECKOUT DECK

C=BLOCK ONE

ONE LABEL IS CURRENT: ONE

C=BLOCK TWO THREE

THREE LABELS ARE PRESENT:

C=END ONE THREE

ONE LABEL IS CURRENT: TWO

C=END TWO

ONE TWO THREE

Description - EZOUT

The block specifications that are input to EZOUT control which sections

will be listed. If a blank card is used, the entire deck will be listed,

including control cards. If one or more blocks are specified, then

l) At least one of these block labels must be current for the line to be

printed.

2) All block labels that are current must be among the original

specifications in order for the line to be printed.

3) Control cards are not printed.

4) If a negative block label (NOT SPEC) is encountered, the lines will be

printed as long as conditions 1 and 2 are met and SPEC was not among

the original specifications.

The printing of a header involves writing the first deck name (DECKNAMEI)

using one of the header formats. Note that the first name is composed of

3 hollerith words and thus should be printed as 3A4.

Normally, headers are printed once per deck. The approach is to detect

when the first card image is about to be printed. The label status at

this point is compared to the specs that were included with each header

definition. If all specs of a particular header are present in the

current label status, the header is printed. If not, the header is not

printed. If the label status returns to zero at any later point in the

deck, the 'detect first card' flag is reset. Thus if another 'good'

section is encountered, the appropriate header will be printed.

At times it is desirable to include a trailing line after a deck has been
3-i16 GENERALCOMMANDS

processed. The use of a header specification with only the label TRL$,

will cause EZOUT to write the line indicated by the header format. Note

that in this case, no deck names will be written as part of the write.

Examples

The following examples indicate how various features of EZOUT work.

that the above EASY deck is used in the example.

EZOUT 0,6

- BLANK -

- write the whole deck

Note

produces

C=DECK EXAMPLE1 CHECKOUT DECK

C=BLOCK ONE

ONE LABLE IS CURRENT: ONE

C=BLOCK TWO THREE

THREE LABEL5 ARE CURRENT:

C=END ONE THREE

ONE LABEL IS CURRENT: TWO

C=END TWO

ONE TWO THREE

and

EZOUT 2,6

ONE TWO

ONE

('THIS DECK IS ',3A4)

TRLS

('TRAILER'>

produces

THIS DECK IS EXAMPLE 1

ONE LABEL IS CURRENT:

ONE LABEL IS CURRENT:

TRAILER

ONE

TWO
FFT 3-117

FFT

FFT Command

Purpose

Fast Fourier Transform of a set of equal spaced vectors.

Command

FFT N1,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 NPTS DT SW

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input matrix

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output matrix

NPTS - Number of points used in transform, must be a power of

two.

DT - Time increment

SW - -1. For transform, i. For inverse transform

Notes

This FFT routine operates solely on real functions of time and their

complex transforms. If SW=-I., then each col of NI,EL1,VR1 corresponds to

a real function of time. If NPTS is less than the number of rows, only

NPTS will be used if NPTS is larger, the remainder is filled with the last

input value. The output element for SW = -i. is a complex array with

NPTS/2+I rows. Note that complex arrays have type=3 and really have twice

as many rows as indicated in the table of contents. They may be changed to

regular arrays using the CHANGT command. The resulting matrix will have

odd rows = real, and even rows = imaginary portion. The frequency

increment of the output (radians) is DW = 2*PI/(NPTS*DT).

For SW= 1., Element N1,ELI,VR1 is the complex transform to be inverted. It

must be a complex array (type 3) with NPTS/2+l rows. If fewer are input,

zeros are added. If more are input, only the first NPTS/2 + 1 words are

used. The output element will have NPTS rows and the same number of

columns as input.

Dt and SW must always be real numbers. Be sure to include the decimal

points. Typically DT will be the time step, but other factors may be used,

as discussed below.

Comparability

This command uses the Cooley-Tookey algorithm for computing FFT's. This
3-i18 GENERALCOMMANDS

does not mean,however, that results from this commandwill be compatible

with FFT's from other programs, even those which use Cooley-Tookey. The

differences, if they exist, will be in the form of multiplication factors.

For a forward transform, values are multiplied by 'DT' prior to output.

For an inverse transform, values are divided by (NPTS*DT)prior to output.

If you are comparing VAPEPS FFT's with other programs, or if you are back

transforming FFT's computed with another program, it is very important

that you are aware of the factors used in the other program. In most

cases, VAPEPS can be made compatible with other programs by using a

modified value for 'DT'. As an example, some programs give dimensionless

FFT's that may be obtained by setting DT = I./NPTS . Note that in this

case, DT nc %onger refers to the time step.
3.61. FILES

FILES 3-i19

FILES Command

Purpose

List names of all DAL units currently assigned to this execution. Note

that this includes only those DAL files that have been referenced in the

current execution of VAPEPS .

Command

FILES

Notes

The FILES command lists the following information about each active file:

l) Unit number

2) File name (QUAL*FILE) (device:[directory]filename.type;version)

3) Number of sectors in file

4) Number of writes during this execution.

5) Number of reads during this execution.
3-120 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.62. FIND

FIND Command

Purpose

Prints a TOC line for all elements that satisfy the input name.

Command

FIND NU,ELN,VER ICI,IC2 (IDAT,JDAT)

or

FINE NU,ELN,VER ICI,IC2 (IDAT,JDAT)

Where

NU - DAL unit number

ELN - Element name or MASK

VER - Version name or MASK

ICI - Cycle number 1 or MASK

IC2 - Cycle number 2 or MASK

IDAT - Optional integer date (YYMMDD). Only elements

created on or after this date will be listed.

JDAT - Optional integer date (YYMMDD). Only elements created on or

before this date will be listed.

Notes

IDAT defaults to zero, and JDAT defaults to the current date. If the dates

are to be used, all element names must be specified. IDAT may be used

without specifying JDAT.

The command FIND examines the TOC of the indicated unit and lists the TOC

line for all elements that match the input names. Note that MASKed items

are considered automatic matches. The FINE command is the same as FIND,

except that disabled elements are ignored during the search.

If fewer than 5 items are specified, trailing items will be MASK filled.

Thus the following commands are identical (both result in the entire TOC

being listed).

FIND 1,MASK,MASK,MASK,MASK

FIND 1,MASK,MASK

FIND 1

Saving TOC lines
k

FIND 3-121

Two additional options are available for FIND, which allow the user to

save a copy of the matching TOC lines:

FINDS NU,ELN,VER, ICI,IC2

NI,ELI,VRI,JCI,JC2

(IDAT,JDAT)

and

FINES NU,ELN,VER, ICI,IC2

N1,EL1,VRI,JC1,JC2

(IDAT,JDAT)

These operate in the same manner as FIND and FINE, except that the user

must specify a DAL element name following the conmmnd. The matching TOC

lines are written to this element instead of being printed.

N1,EL1,VRI(,JC1,JC2) - Name of output element JC1 and JC2 default to

current output cycles (CYCLE command)

The size of the element will be (13,N), where N = number of matching

items.

Wild card usage

Element and version names specified in the FIND (FINES,etc) command may

contain one or more asterisks. Ie.

FINE I,'A**C','***Z'

would find all enabled elements on unit 1 that have an element name

starting with A and ending with C, and a version name ending in Z. Note

that the apostrophes surrounding the names are required, since asterisks

normally imply multiple values (see FORMAT).
3-122 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.63. FIT

Purpose

Fits an mth order polynomial to an ordered set of data using the least

squares method, and writes out the approximate ordinate.

Command

FIT NX,ELX,VRX NY,ELY,VRY NO,VRO MM,MODE

- DATA -

Where

NX,ELX,VRX - Abscissa array.

NY,ELY,VRY - Ordinate array.

NO,VRO - Unit and version name of output elements.

MM - M + 1 (ie. If MM = 4, a third order approx.)

> 0 - Powers 0 through MM-1 are used.

< 0 - Program prompts for user to specify powers.

MODE - Output option flag.

= 0 - Output one polynomial per input Y column.

= 1 - Treat all columns as a population. Find average

coefficients and output one ordinate only. One RMS

value is output per column.

Example

Fit a straight line through the following set of data.

(1,1),(2,3),(3,2),(4,3),(5,8)

ECOL 28,X,VEC 5,1

1,2,3,4,5

ECOL 28,Y,VEC 5,1

1,3,2,3,8

FIT 28,X,VEC 28,Y,VEC 28,FIT 2,0

Notes

The input X and Y arrays essentially define a group of functions:

Y(I,l) = FUNCl(X(I,I))

Y(I,2) = FUNC2(X(I,2))

etc.

FIT does a least squares fit to express each function as a polynomial in

X. For MM>0 the polynomial has order MM-I (powers 0,1,...,MM-I). For MM<0,
FIT 3-123

the user inputs the powers that are to be used.

The X and Y arrays must have the samenumberof rows. They must also have

the samenumberof columns, unless the sameX vector applies to all Y

columns, in which case the X matrix maybe input as a vector. In this last

case, the user may set MODE=I.Then each Y column will be used to obtain

one best-fit polynomial. The resulting polynomial coefficients are the

average of the individual coefficients that would have resulted for

MODE=0.

For MODE=0, a set of coefficients and an expanded poly- nomial will be

output for each column. For MODE=l, only one set of coefficients and one

polynomial will be output. A seperate RMS value is output per column in

either mode.

Output

The output from FIT consists of 3 arrays:

NO,'APE',VRO - expanded polynomials (NR,MC)

NO,'RMS',VRO - root mean squares (NC,1)

NO,'COEF',VRO - coefficient array (MM,MC)

Where

NR = number of input rows

MC = number of output columns

= number of input Y columns for MODE=0

= 1 for MODE=I

Related Commands

POWER
3-124 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.64. FNAME

FNAME Command

Purpose

The default logical name associated with DAL unit 1 is DALO01. The default

for DAL unit 26 is DAL030. These may be altered, either for all units or

just a few, by use of the FNAME command.

Command

FNAME DAL000

or

FNAME NU,'AAAABB'

or

FNAME NU,'filename'

or

FNAME NU,CORE

(VAX, CRAY & UNIX machines)

In the first case, the basic logical name is set to DAL000 (which is

default). Thus unit one becomes DAL001 etc.

In the second case, the specific unit takes on the name AAAABB where BB

may be omitted if the name is four characters or less. Note that the

second form only affects the named unit.

In the third case, the filename input is assigned to DAL unit NU. This

doesn't work on the UNISYS.

In the fourth case, an "in core DAL file" is created with the number of

bytes specified by CORE. The use of this option is useful if you have a

runstream that uses a moderate amount of storage but does a lot of I/O. To

determine the number of I/O requests use the FILES cow_and. Use this

option with caution, since when execution stops all information on this

"in core DAL file" is lost.

The basic file name may be reset at any time during a run. This resetting

will affect only any new units that are referenced. The logical name of a

file is fixed once it is referenced. The second form immediately fixes the

name of the file and may not be changed.

Note

DAL units 27-30 are automatically fixed at DAL027,DAL028, DAL029, and

DAL030. They may not be changed with the FNAME command and they are not

affected by the setting of a general name through FNAME.

V
3.65. RUN FPAS

RUN=FPAS 3-125

RUN=FPASS command

Purpose

This runstream is used to combine acoustically induced and mechanically

induced loads.

Command

RUN=FPASS N1,NVR1 N2,NVR2 (SLOW,SHI (NINC (IFLG (T)))

Where

N1,NVR1 - DAL unit and version name for the following input matrices:

NI,'TRAN',NVRI - Transient response time history.

(#Time points x #DOF's).

NI,'TIME',NVRI - Time points for input time history in seconds.

(#Time points x i).

NI,'RESP',NVR1 - PSD for each DOF. (#Frequencies x #DOF's).

NI,'FREQ',NVRI - Frequencies for PSD. (#Frequencies x i).

N2,NVRI - DAL unit and version name for output. The following elements

are output:

N2,'SDOT',NVR2 - The standard deviation of the time rate of

change of the acoustically induced response.

N2,'SIG ',NVR2 - The standard deviation of the acoustically

induced response.

N2,'MXMN',NVR2 - Maximum and minimum values of the transient

response.

Column 1 contains maximum values.

Column 2 contains the time when the maximum

occured.

Column 3 contains minimum values.

Column 4 contains the time when the minimum

occured.

N2,'PASS',NVR2 - Table of predicted values. Column 1 contains

the percentile value and each following

column contains the predicted values.

N2,'NSIG',NVR2 - Table of N values of MAX+N-SIGMA

corresponding to the predictions.

SLOW, SHI - Lower and upper N sigma values for calculation of barrier

levels. Barrier levels are calculated as follows:

BLOW = MAX+SLOW*SIGMA

BHI = MAX+SHI*SIGMA

Where

BLOW,BHI - Lower and upper barrier levels.
3-126 GENERALCOMMANDS

NINC

IFLG

T

MAX - Maximumdata value.

SIGMA - Standard deviation.

Default values are (SLOW=2.,SHI=7.).

- Number of increments to calculate boundary levels between

BLOW and BHI. Default=f0.

- Integer to multiply transient by. A value of -i will give

the -95th percentile value of the lower bound. Default=l.

- Duration of phenomenon. Defaluts to total transient response

time.

Notes

The following elements must reside on DAL unit 30. These are used to

evaluate an integral:

TOTL,ALPH

TOTL,TABL

The element 30,PER,CENT in generaly is not problem peculiar. It is a list

of percentiles (eg. 1., 2., ..., I00.). This may be modified if there is

a need. Since it resides on DAL unit 30 only the some one with permission

to write to DAL unit 30 may make this modification.
3.66. RUN FREQ

RUN=FREQ 3-127

RUN=FREQ Command (Obsolete - Use FREQUENCY/CENTER Con_and)

Purpose

This runstream is used to extract the standard 1/3 octave band center

frequencies in the range FLO to FHI.

Command

RUN=FREQ N,NM, IVN FLO,FHI

Where

N,NM, IVN - Name of output vector to put 1/3 octave band frequencies.

FLO,FHI - The i/3 octave center frequency range desired.
3-128 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.67. FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY Command

Purpose

This command returns the values for the center frequencies, bandwidths and

bandedges.

Command

FREQUENCY/CENTER N1,NEL1,NVR1 F1,F2

or

FREQUENCY/WIDTH NI,NEL1,NVRI FI,F2

or

FREQUENCY/EDGE NI,NELI,NVR1 FI,F2

or

FREQUENCY/SET (IFOP,(FO))

Where

N1,NEL1,NVR1 - Dal unit, element and version to output to.

F1,F2 - Frequency range.

IFOP - Frequency calculation option as follows:

IFOP Description

1

2

3

Standard 1/3 octave frequencies. (Default)

Standard 1/6 octave frequencies.

Calculated frequencies based on 10**(N/10)

where N is the band number. (FO needed.)

Calculated frequencies based on (2**(FO))-*I

where I is the number of frequencies from 1 Hz

to the current frequency.

Calculated frequencies based on (2**(FO))**I

where I is the number of frequencies from F1 to

the current frequency.

Calculate constant bandwidth frequencies. FO is

the bandwidth.

FO

- Fractional octave. (1/3,1/6,1/lO...) This is only

needed for options 3, 4, and 5.

/CENTER Option
FREQUENCY 31129

This option returns the center frequencies for the frequency range

requested.

/WIDTH Option (BAND_WIDTH, BANDWIDTH)

This option returns the bandwidths for the center frequency range

requested.

/EDGE Option (BAND_EDGE, BANDEDGE)

This option returns the bandedges for the center frequency range

requested.

/SET Option

This sets the option requested.

If FO is omitted it will remain the same as it was.

If no arguments are input the current option will be displayed.

3.67.1. PROGRAM

PROGRAMMER'S information

There are four function subroutines that have been written to return for

the calculation of frequencies. These functions are as follows:

SETNFR(FI,F2) - Calculates the number of frequency points from F1 to F2.

FI,F2 - The center frequencies for the range requested.

SETFRQ(SF,I)

SF

I

- Calculates the Ith center frequency.

- The starting center frequency.

- A counter indicating what frequency band you

I=l then SETFRQ=SF.

want. If

SETBWT(SF, I)

SF

I

- Calculates the band width for the Ith center

- The starting center frequency.

- Counter. Same as above.

frequency.

SETLBE(SF,I) - Calculates the lower band edge for the Ith center

frequency.
3-130 GENERAL COMMANDS

SF

I

- The starting center frequency.

- Counter. Same as above.

Not e

If it is desired to get the upper band edge at a given frequency, just use

I+l when the function is called.

It is hoped that all frequency calculations in VAPEPS be done using these

functions as it will make it possible to add new frequency calculation

methods in the future and allow for other than standard i/3 octave

frequency calculations to be made.
3.68. FUN

FUN 3-131

FUN Command

Purpose

Given an abscissa vector X, generate an ordinate vector Y as some function

of X.

Ie. Y<I) = B*<FUNC<A*X(I))**C)

Where FUNC is ABS, COS, SIN, TAN, EXP, ALOG, COSH, SINH ACOS, ASIN, TANH,

LOC, El0, LI0, SKX or nothing.

Co_nand

FUNX NX,ELX,VRX NY,ELY,VRY A,B IP,JP

Where

C - FLOAT(IP/JP)

NX,ELX,VRX - Input vector or array.

NY,ELY,VRY - Output vector or array.

The X in FUNX may be replaced by ABS,COS,SIN,TAN,EXP,CSH,

SNH,ACO,ASI,TNH,LOG,EI0,LI0 as indicated. The X will yield

Y(I) = B*((A*X(I))**C)

FUNCOS would yield

Y(I) = B*(COS(A*X(I))**C)

etc.

The following is a list of operations (assuming A=l.,B=l.,I=l,J=l)

FUN Y=X

FUNX Y=X

FUNCOS Y=COS(X)

FUNSIN Y=SIN(X)

FUNTAN Y=TAN(X)

FUNEXP Y=EXP(X)

FUNLOG Y=ALOG(X)

FUNEI0 Y=I0.**X

FUNLI0 Y=ALOGI0(X)

FUNCSH Y=COSH(X)

FUNSNH Y=SINH(X)

FUNACO Y=ACOS(X)

FUNASI Y=ASIN(X)

FUNSKX Y=SIN(X)/X

Trig functions expect input in radians, and inverse trig functions return

values in radians. Please consult a FORTRAN manual for more information

about the functions.
3-132 GENERALCOMMANDS

Notes

A and B must be floating point numbers. Thus a decimal point is required,

or in the case of variables, real variables must be used. IP and JP are

integers, and decimal points may not be used.

If A,B,IP,JP are to be i, it is not necessary to include them. It is

important to remember that B cannot be omitted if IP or JP is to be

included,etc.

If X is input with more than one column, then the calculation is done for

each column and the Y element will be the same size as X.

The output dataset has the same type as the input. Input array normally is

single precision, but double precision is allowed on most machines (not

Cray). If integer array is input, it is converted to real, then function

is performed, then it is converted back to integer prior to output.

Example

If the element SYS/EVAL contains eigenvalues (omega**2), the following

commands may be used to compute the corresponding natural frequencies (in

hz.).

CALC

FAC = 1./PI$

DONE

FUNX 1,5YS,EVAL 1,NAT,FREQ .25,&FAC,I,2

°
k

3.69. RUN GCLS

RUN=GCLS 3-133

RUN=GCLS Programmer's Command

Purpose

Order command abbreviations and entry points of a DAL processor, this

stream produces the element NOUT:CLST/NAME,ICYC,JCYC it reads 'ABV' and

'EPS' elements from unit NIN.

Con_and

RUN=GCLS NAME (,NIN,NOUT, ICYC,JCYC)

Where

NAME - Version name for ABV and EPS elements. (Default = VAP)

NIN - Input DAL unit. (Default = l)

NOUT - Output DAL unit. (Default = i0)

ICYC,JCYC - Input cycle numbers. (Default = 6,1)

Related Commands

RUN=BSC, RUN=ADDC
3-134 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.70. GCOL

GCOL Command

Purpose

GCOL reads a matrix by columns. Each column consists of a fixed number of

groups. Each group is composed of a fixed number of words. The words may

be integer, floating or hollerith in nature.

Command

GCOL NU,ELN,VER NGPC,MAXC,NWPG,NCPW

-DATAWhere

NGPC

MAXC

NWPG

NCPW

NU,ELN,VER - Name of output element.

- Number of groups per column (must be specified).

- Maximum number of columns (defaults to i000).

- Number of words per group (defaults to i).

- Number of characters per word (defaults to 4).

- 0 Implies integer or floating point words, else = Number

of hollerith characters per word.

Notes

The use of GCOL essentially allows the user to input a three dimensional

matrix. NGPC represents the length of each logical column. The resulting

physical record length (NR) is the product NGPC*NWPG.

The default mode for GCOL is that each line of data causes a complete

column to be written to the output element. If fewer than NGPC groups are

read on a given line, remaining groups are zero (or blank) filled. NGPC

may be input as a negative number to allow a column to extend across

several records. In this case, make sure that the last record for each

column contains exactly the correct number of groups to complete the

column.

For hollerith input, a group is a string of characters that do not contain

a space, comma, or equal sign. They may be any length, but only the first

NWPG*NCPW characters are used. If you want to include a comma, space or

equal sign in a particular group, enclose that group in single quotes.

Sometimes it is desirable to read hollerith information without regard for

group separators (eg for titles,etc) In this case, use a negative number

for NCPW (eg -4)
GCOL 3-135

The output element will have NR= NGPC*NWPG

NJ = NGPC

NC = MAXC (unless EOF ends input

prematurely)

A super special case exists where only one line of data is expected, but

you don't know how many groups will be input on the line. Normally, the

output element will contain as many groups as were specified on the

command, with non- entered groups blank filled. If MAXC is set to -1, GCOL

will truncate the element to the actual number of groups input. (See

30,RUN, INDE for an example)
3-136 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.71. RUN GDOC

RUN=GDOC Programmer's Command

Purpose

Prepares a DOC file, using unit NG as a general file

and NH as the help unit. NTMP is a temporary Fortran unit

and defaults to 2.

Command

RUN=GDOC NG,NH,NTMP

Where

NG - DAL unit containing General file. (Default = i0)

NH - DAL unit containing Help file. (Default = 29)

NTMP - Temporary fortran unit. (Default = 2)
RUN=GENP 3-137

3.72. RUN GENP

RUN=GENPLOT Command

Purpose

This runstream allows you to plot specified items of a matrix. (eg.

certain channels out of a set of data)

Command

RUN=GENP

Input

This runstream prompts user for

i) Name of abscissa array.

2) Name of ordinate matrix.

3) Name of name vector -- must contain names of items in ordinate

matrix (one name per ordinate column)

4) The items that you wan plotted.
3-138 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.73. RUN GETR

RUN=GETRESP Command

Purpose

This command gets the specified responses for a given SEMOD model.

Command

RUN=GETRESP NI,IVR1 N2,1EL2,IVR2 (lOP)

Where

NI,lVR1 - The DAL unit and version name of your model.

N2,1EL2,1VR2 - DAL element to place output in. One column for each

response.

IOP - The number of response elements that you wish to

extract. Excitation elements can be extracted as well

as response elements. If this parameter is omitted then

up to l0 elements can be specified.

= 'ALLR' all response elements are extracted. Excitation

elements are not extracted.

= 'ALLE' all excitation elements are extracted. Response

elements are not extracted.

= 'ACRO' all acoustic response elements.

= 'ACEO' all acoustic excitation elements.

= 'ACER' all acoustic excitation and response elements.

= 'STRO' all structural response elements.

= 'STEO' all structural excitation elements.

= 'STER' all structural excitation and response elements.
GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY 3-139

GLOSSARY Command

Purpose

Compares input list (N1,ELI,VRI) with the glossary (N2,EL2,VR2). The

variables 'MS' and 'N$' are returned indicating the number of matches and

non-matches. The element N3,EL3,VR3 may be omitted, but if it is not, a

vector will be written indicating the glossary numbers associated with

each item on the input list.

Command

GLOSS N1,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 NWPG

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input list.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input glossary.

N3,EL3,VR3 - List of glossary items.

NWPG - Number of words per group (optional). Its default value

depends on the value of NJ for input element i. If

(NJ.EQ.I) NWPG=I. If (NJ.NE.I) NWPG=NI.

Notes

When the command GLOSS is used, the glossary is updated to include any new

items encountered during processing. If the command GLOCHK is used

instead, the glossary is not updated, and is accessed in a 'read-only'

mode.

GLOSS is part of VAPEPS's word processing capability. It will normally be

used in conjunction with GCOL and PREP. These will be documented in a

special section. At present, this special section is not available.
3-140 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.75. RUN GLST

RUN=GLST Command

Purpose

Lists output data elements from RUN=GMOD.

Command

RUN=GLST HU,NAME NOUT 199F

Where

NU - DAL unit number containing output elements from RUN=GMOD.

NAME - DAL version name associated with output elements from RUN=GMOD.

NOUT - Optional Fortran output unit. If not specified, output is to the

output device. Otherwise output is to Fortran unit NOUT.

I99F - Non-zero value prints out parameters with a value of -99.

Default is to not print out these parameters.
RUN=GMOD3-141

3.76. RUN GMOD

RUN=GMOD Command

Purpose

Retrieves data from a module in the master file.

Command

RUN=GMOD MOD,NIN NOUT,NAME F1,F2 NAV

Where

MOD - Absolute module number as returned by SERCH.

NIN - DAL unit where actual event is located.

NOUT - DAL unit where information is to be written.

NAME - Version name to be associated with output data.

F1 - Low frequency value.

F2 - High frequency value.

NAV - Option code. If not specified, spectral data are averaged for

output. If specified as a value other than zero, the data are

not averaged.

Output Elements

NOUT,'PARA',NAME - Parameter matrix (30,6)

NOUT,'DATA',NAME - Averaged spectral data (NFRQ,6)

NOUT,'FREQ',NAME - Frequency matrix (1/3 octave) (NFRQ, 3)

Note

Each column of the output data matrix contains the averaged measurements

for all channels in that section. Section 1 corresponds to EXTA, 2 to

SKIN, etc. Data values are in dB.

If output spectral data are not averaged, NOUT,'DATA',NAME is replaced by

up to six elements, one for each sea element which has channels attached

to it in the module. Element names are:

NOUT,SEANAM,NAME

Where SEANAM is replaced by the actual sea element name in each case (Eg.,

NOUT,'SKIN',NAME).
3-142 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.77. RUN GPSD

RUN=GPSD Command

Purpose

Get PSD from time history. This runstream calculates the power spectral

density in the frequency domain of a function in the time domain.

Command

RUN=GPSD NUI,NVI NU0,NVO NPRT

Where

NUI,NVI - DAL unit number and version name for input data.

NUO,NVO - DAL unit number and version name for output data.

NPRT - +i if rms values and analysis frequency bandwidth are to be

printed, 0 if not. (Default = I)

Input element names (&NUI,XXXX,&NVI)

i) TIME - Vector of N equally spaced time points corresponding to function

data points, seconds (N,1)

Note - Number of time points N must equal an integer power of 2,

I.E. N=2**M, M=l,2,3,...,etc.

2) DATA - Matrix of function data points corresponding to time vector time

points, usually in g's (N equal functions)

Output elements (&NOU,XXXX,&NVO)

l) PSD

2) HZ

3) RMS

- Matrix of power spectral densities in frequency domain, usually

g*-2/Hz (N/2+l,=functions)

- Vector N/2+I equally spaced frequency points corresponding to

PSD row values, Hz (N/2+l,l)

- Vector of RM5 values of each function, usually g's,

(=functions,l)

Comments

The method of computation used is as follows:

l) The input time history functions in the data matrix are multiplied by a

i0 per cent cosine taper window. (Ref. Bendat and Piersol 'Random Data:

Analysis and Measurement Procedures', pp. 322,327

2) The VAPEPS FFT routine is used to take the Fourier Transform of the

modified data set.
k

RUN=GPSD 3-143

3) The square of the Fourier transform moduli are computed and multiplied

by (2./.875-T) to give the power spectral densities.
3-144 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.78. GREAD

GREAD Command

Purpose

GREAD is used to read card image data into a DAL element. It is similar

to ECOL except for the following:

i) Each column need not start on a separate line.

2) You specify a 'pseudo format'. This allows you to skip portions of

each data card. It may also be used to separate two fields that run

together. Eg if two 15 type numbers appear as 1234554321 (12345 and

54321), ECOL would see only one number whereas the pseudo format of

5,5 would limit each field to 5 characters.

Command

GREAD NI,ELI,VR1 NR,NC

- PSEUDO FORMAT -

- DATA CARDS -

ITYP

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Name of data set to be created.

NR,NC - Desired number of rows and columns. NC may be input larger

than you expect to read. NC may also be input as a

negative number, which fills the matrix a row at a time,

rather than the default column at a time.

ITYP - Desired type of output matrix. If omitted, the data type

is set automatically. Allowable types are:

0 = Integer

i = Single precision floating

2 = Double precision floating

3 = Complex

4 = Hollerith

Pseudo Format

- List of integers. Each integer represents a field length

on the input card images. Consider the following examples:

= 80 (eg, just one number input) GREAD does a free-field

read for the first 80 characters on each card. Commas

and/or blanks are used to separate numbers.

= 16-5 (or 5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5,5) GREAD again

uses 80 characters, however it internally places a blank
GREAD 3-145

character (see notes) between every 5th character. Now

the free field reader will separate each 5 character field

into separate words.

= -12,68 Negative values indicate fields that are to be

skipped. Thus the first 12 characters on each card will be

ignored. The next 68 characters will be interpreted

according to DALPRO free-field format rules.

Data Cards

This section contains the actual data to be read. Several possibilities

exist.

l) Data immediately follows the command in the runstream.

2) You can access a FORTRAN file via transparent commands -

##READ 1,0 (Read FORTRAN unit i, return EOF when done)

3) You can access a DAL symbolic element (type 5 or 6) via

##READ 1,MY,DATA 0 (The trailing 0 again requests EOF return when

done)

4) The ##READ feature of DALPRO can be used to full advantage by

preceeding your reads with

##READ 1 DATA or ##READ 1,MY,DATA DATA

The trailing DATA identifies the unit (or dataset) as the data unit.

Once identified, you can read the unit in sections via

* READ NUMBER OF ROWS, COLUMNS

GREAD I,NUM,RC 2,1

2*5 (eg 215 )

##READ DATA AUTO

* NOW RECOVER NR AND NC

##SET NR=I,NUM,RC, I,I

##SET NC=I,NUM,RC,2,1

.

* AND READ THE ACTUAL MATRIX

GREAD I,MAT,RIX &NR,&NC

##READ DATA AUTO

(for example)

(get NR from row i, column i)

(get NC from row 2, column l)
3-146 GENERALCOMMANDS

Here the AUTO'simply that there is more on the DATA unit than will

be read by GREAD. DALPRO will automatically stop reading from the

alternate source as soon as GREAD has read NR*NC words. It will the

DATA unit open to the next card, so that subsequent GREAD's or

whatever may take off from where this read stopped. (Note: The DATA

and AUTO technique is not limited to use with GREAD)

Notes

In the normal mode, GRKAD will separate your input line into fields, by

inserting a blank character between the fields. In some cases you may have

blank fields. Thus the free field reader will not pick up the blank field.

You can force it to pick up the blank field by using the command GREADC in

which case GREAD will insert commas instead of spaces. Note that a blank

field yields a word of all blanks (NOT A ZERO).
RUN=GRLT 3-147

3.79. RUN GRLT

RUN=GLRT Command

Purpose

Updates the READ ELTS element in the EASY file.

Command

RUN=GRLT NU, ICI,IC2 JOUT,JOT2

Where

NU - Dal unit assigned to the EASY file.

ICI,IC2 - Cycles to be read.

JOUT,JOT2 - Cycles of output READ ELTS.
3-148 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.80. RUN GRMS

RUN=GRMS Command

Purpose

This program computes the Overall GRMS value of a spec given the corner

points of the spec or the slope and corner points. It also allows you to

modify a spec up or down by a constant dB value.

Command

RUN=GRMS (NI,VR1 (N2(,NOUT))))

Where

NI,VRI - Output dal unit and version for results.

NI,'DATA',VRI contains all intermediate data.

Column 1 and 2 contain starting and ending frequency for each

segment.

Column 3 and 4 contain starting and ending G**2 values

Column 5 contains the slope of the segment.

Column 6 contains the area in G**2/HZ for each segment.

NI,'GRMS',VRI contains the overall level

NOTE: For N1 < 0 an already existing data set created by

RUN=GRM5 is expected for input. This allows you to obtain a

listing, plots or modify the spec up or down by a constant dB.

N2 - Maximum number of corner points in curve. (default = 20)

NOUT - Fortran unit for printed output. Default is 6.

Notes

This runstream is fully interactive and prompts for all input. NOTE: To

obtain overall levels for 1/3 octave data use RUN=OVER

Equations

This program is based on the following.

For a given line on a log-log plot.

y = a*x**b

a = the y intercept

b = the slope = log(y2/yl)/log(x2/xl)

a = y/x**b

Area = integral of a*x**b = a*/(b+l)*(x2**(b+l)-xl**(b+l))

GRM5 = summation of the areas**.5
RUN=GRMS 3-149

SLOPE(dB/OCTAVE)=10*LOGI0(G2/GI)/(LOG(F2/FI)/LOG(2))
3-150 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.81. GROUP

GROUP Command

Purpose

Build one element from several other elements. This is a simplified

alternative to BUILD where input elements are stacked one after the other

rather than being overlayed. It was designed for use with plotting several

curves on one plot but has applications in other areas as well.

Command

GROUP NI,ELI,VRI (N2,EL2,VR2) (MAXG(,MAXC))

Where

N1,ELI,VRI - Name of element to be created.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Name of optional output group directive vector (for plots)

MAXG - Maximum number of groups per output column (default=10)

MAXC - Maximum number of output columns (default=f0)

-DATA- - Input data cards which provide the names of the input

elements to be included. These cards take the following

form:

Ml,Ihl,IVl

M2,IL2,1V2

MN,ILN, IVN

DONE

(JCI(,ICI(,IDI)))

(JC2(,IC2(,ID2)))

(JCN(,ICN(,IDN)))

Where

MI,ILI,IVI - Name of ith input element.

JCI - Column in output matrix where leftmost

column of ith input matrix should be

placed. (default=l) A dollar sign may

be used to indicate the next empty

column.

ICI - Input column number to be included (

default = 0, which implies that all

columns are to be included)

IDI - Group descriptor for this element

(default = i)

Notes
GROUP 3-151

As each input data card is read, GROUP keeps track of the number of output

columns and the number and length of groups in each column. Every time an

input column is placed in a given output column, the next available row

position is used as the starting location.

The output group directive vector always corresponds to the groups in

column 1 of the output matrix. Three numbers are output per group:

II,I2,1D. Ii is the starting row location for the group. I2 is the last

row position for the group. ID is the group descriptor.

Uses

Plotting

Suppose you have 3 elements that contain xy pairs that are to be

plotted on the same graph: (XY,ONE XY,TWO XY,THRE). Also assume that

each has two columns but different lengths.

GROUP I,XY,TOT

I,XY,ONE 1,0,5

I,XY,TWO 1,0,5

I,XY,THRE 1,0,5

DONE

1,DIR,TOT

would create I,XY,TOT as a two column matrix with points from ONE

followed by those from TWO, etc. They may be plotted using:

PLOM03 I,XY,TOT 1,XY,TOT 0,2

= 1,DIR,TOT

Note that ID=5 causes each plot group to be connected with every fifth

point marked.

General

Suppose you have N vectors that are separate elements. They have the

same name except for CI, which are numbered from i to N. It is desired

to put these in one matrix, with each vector becoming a separate

column.

First create a loop element for the GROUP data cards:

SYMIN 28,GROP,LOOP

##INC ICI,I

##CYCLE &ICI,0

I,INPT,VEC &ICI

SEOF

Now initialize IC1 and start GROUP
3-152 GENERALCOMMANDS

SET ICI=0

GROUP 1,FULL,MAT &N

##READ 28,GROP, LOOP &N

DONE

CYCLE 0,0
3.82. RUN GVAL

RUN=GVAL 3-153

RUN=GVAL Command

Purpose

This command looks up values in the distribution named distribution table°

Command

RUN=GVAL NAME=NTAB N,CONF

Where

NAME - Name of variable to store result.

NTAB - Name of the distribution table.

N - Sample size.

CONF - Confidence level.

Example

Get the 95th percentile CHI squared distribution for a sample size

of 15.

GVAL XXX=CHIS 15,.95
3-154 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.83. RUN HEAD

V

RUN=HEAD Command

Purpose

Print the header and channel information section for a single section of

an ENTERed event.

Command

RUN=HEAD NU,VENT,ISEC

Where

NU,VENT - DAL unit and event name.

ISEC - Section of ENTERed event which is to be printed.

Related Commands

RUN=ESAV
3.84. RUN INDE

RUN=INDE 3-155

RUN=INDEX Command

Purpose

Provides a way of locating commands that server a given function.

Command

RUN=INDEX

Notes

For instance if you are looking for commands that perform multiplication,

use RUN=INDEX, and enter the string MULTIPLICATION when it asks for items.

It will give you a list of VAPEPS commands that are concerned with

multiplication.
3-156 GENERALCOMMANDS

INDEX

INDEX Command

Purpose

Indexing scheme where data values from a matrix are compared with an index

vector. If the value is found in the index, then the value in the matrix

is replaced with the index identifier.

Command

INDEX NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 (N4,EL4,VR4) (NOFIND)

or

INDX N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 (N4,EL4,VR4) NOFIND

Whet e

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input matrix of data values A(NR,NC).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input INDEX element B(MR,1) or B(MR,2).

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output modified data matrix C(NR,NC).

N4,EL4,VR4 - Optional output 'lump' matrix (MR,NC). This keeps track of

how many times each index item is matched, on a per column

basis.

NOFIND - Optional 'no-match' number--see below.

Notes

Basically, each item in the first matrix is compared to the values

contained in column i of the second element. If an item matches a value,

then the item is reset either to the index row number of the match or to

the contents of the second column of the index element for that row. If a

no-match condition occurs, the value is either left unchanged or set to a

NOFIND value. The rules are discussed below. The variable N$ is initially

set to zero. It is incremented by one for each no-match condition. This

variable may be used after the command to determine the success of the

INDEX operation.

Each item A(I,J) is compared with the index items in first column of B. If

l) A(I,J) = B(K,I) then

a) If B has two columns then C(I,J) is set to B(K,2)

b) If B has one column, then C(I,J) is set to K

2) A(I,J) does not match any B(K,I), then

a) If NOFIND is present, C(I,J) is set to NOFIND.

b) If NOFIND was not included on the command, C(I,J) = A(I,J).

c) If NOFIND is present on the command and the command was issued as

INDX instead of INDEX, and the input index element has two
INDEX 3-157

columns, the C(I,J) = B(NOFIND,2).

Examples

If you have a matrix where each column refers to some item, eg. Jl, J5,

Xl5, B47, XI0,... and you want to be able to select a group of columns by

name, then

a) Construct the index vector

ECOL I, IND,EX i0,i (i.e. matrix has ten columns)

JI,J5,X15,B47,XI0,...

b) Create a name vector for each group of columns you want:

ECOL I,GRP,ONE 3,1

J1,X15,J5

c) INDEX the list

INDEX I,GRP,ONE I,IND,EX 1,CHOP,ONE 0

d) See if any names didn't match

##JEQZ &N$ OKAY

##ON COMMENT

$$* WARNING, &N$(I3) ITEMS WEREN'T FOUND

* THEY WILL BE SET TO ZERO.

>>OKAY

e) Use CHOPX to chop out desired values from matrix

CHOPX I,ORIG,MAT I,SEL,ONE -&NROW, 3

= 1,CHOP,ONE

The use of NOFIND=0 will cause any non-existent names to result in

zeros in the output selected matrix.

If you want to change selected values within a matrix, ie. change all ones

to fives, threes to twos, etc

ECOL I,CHNG, SPEC 2,2

1,3

5,2

INDEX I,ORIG,MAT I,CHNG,SPEC I,CORR,MAT

Special case -- NJ,MJ

In general, the first element will have size NR,NC and the second element
3-158 GENERALCOMMANDS

will have size MR,MC,where MC= 1 or 2. All DALelements maybe further

partitioned such that each column is considered a collection of logical

blocks. The numberof logical blocks per columnis NJ. Normally NJ = i.

INDEXchecks NJ for both input elements, and computes the quantities

NI=NR/NJ and MI=MR/MJ. If NI=MI and MJ.NE.I, then INDEX assumes that the

user really wants to consider NI words at a time in doing the indexing.

The result is straight forward except for the following notes. For this

case, MC must = 2. If NOFIND is specified, it must be used with the INDX

form of the command, and it will always imply that non-matches should be

set to the NOFINDth logical record in the second element.
INTERPOLATE

INTERPOLATE 3'159

INTERPOLATE Command

Purpose

Given X,Y, and X', find Y' using LINEAR , LAGRANGIAN, CUBIC SPLINE, or

SINE interpolation.

Command

INTERPOLATE NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 N4,EL4,VR4 NTYPE

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Original abscissa vector or matrix (X) (*)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Original ordinate vector or matrix (Y)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Desired abscissa vector or matrix (XP) (*)

N4,EL4,VR4 - Output ordinate matrix or vector (YP)

NTYPE - Type of interpolation.

= 2 or omitted, LINEAR

= 6, 6 point LAGRANGIAN

= -2, SINE interpolation

= l, CUBIC SPLINE - Parabolic end condition

= -1, CUBIC SPLINE - Linear end condition

Notes

Normally X and XP must be vectors. Either may be a matrix as long as all

other input datasets are vectors. If Y is a matrix then each column is

considered as a separate ordinate vector with X as the common abscissa.

The output dataset YP will have a many columns as Y (or X or XP, whichever

is input as a matrix) and as many rows as XP. X and Y must have the same

number of rows. X must be monotonically increasing.

(The command INTERPOLATE/TRANSPOSE may be used instead of INTERPOLATE. In

this case, the X and XP datasets must be vectors. Y may be a matrix, and

must have as many columns as X has rows. In this case, YP will be output

with as many rows as Y, and as many columns as XP has rows.)

The following rules govern points in XP not covered by points in X.

IF(XP(I).LE.X(1)) THEN YP(I,J) = Y(I,J)

IF(XP(I).GE.X(N)) THEN YP(I,J) = Y(N,J)

where N is the number of rows in X and Y
3-160 GENERAL COMMANDS

Special case

If you have an array which has times as the odd columns, and values as the

even columns, leave off NI,EL1,VRI and input only three element names. The

only restriction on this is that if some time-value pairs do not have the

full number of points as the rest, make sure the last valid abscissa value

for that pair is followed by a zero. (This method is not legal for the

Transpose mode)
3.87. RUN INTE

RUN=INTE 3-161

RUN=INTE (Programmer's Command)

Purpose

Provides a way to interactively obtain input that is not passed in the

argument list of a runstream.

Command

See RUN=FREQ, RUN=BWTH, RUN=NORM, or RUN=5TT5 for examples of it's use.
3-162 GENERALCOMMANDS

INVERT

INVERT Command

Purpose

Matrix inversion (single precision or double precision or complex).

Command

INVERT N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

Where

N1,ELI,VRI = Element to be inverted.

N2,EL2,VR2 = Inverse.

Notes

The input element must be square. Since the array is loaded into core for

the inversion, difficulty may arise with very large matrices.

The type of the matrix is checked prior to inversion. The type of the

output inverse will be the same as the input.

For single and double precision mats, the variable DEF$ is set to the

value of the determinant. For complex, DTR$ and DTI$ give the real and

imaginary parts to the determinant respectively. If the exponent of the

determinant exceeds that which is allowed for VAPEPS variables, it is set

to zero, and a warning is printed.
3.89. JPI

JPI 3-163

JPI Command

Purpose

Provide job process information for the user. This command is machine

dependent. On the UNIVAC, it accesses the PCT table and returns one or

more values. On the VAX, it uses the system service routine SYSSGET JPI.

Command

JPI ITEM

Where

On UNISYS (aka: SPERRY, UNIVAC)

ITEM - An offset from the start of the PCT table. Consult UNISYS

manuals for a definition of offsets.

On VAX

ITEM - The value of SJPIDEF item. See the VAX system services manual

for values and what they represent. Item 1034 is the page-fault

count and can be monitored to see how badly the execution is

thrashing.

The contents of the items will be printed in octal.

Alternate form for UNISYS usage

JPI N1,ELI,VRI LENG, IOFF

Will cause LENG values to be taken from the PCT table (words IOFF to

IOFF+LENG-I) and written to the element NI,ELI,VRI. Note that the first

item in the PCT has IOFF=0.
3-164 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.90. RUN JTOD

RUN=JTOD Command

Purpose

This coE_nand is converts joint numbers to the appropriate degree of

freedom numbers.

Command

RUN=JTOD NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 IDI(,ID2(,ID3(,ID4(,ID5(,ID6)))))

Where

NI,NELI,NVR1 - Input i_ t of joint numbers.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - Output _-_t of degree of freedom numbers.

ID1,...,ID6 - Degrees of freedom desired at each joint.

The following variable can be preset if needed.

IDF$ - Actual number of degrees of freedom per joint. Default=6

Example

Compute the degree of freedom numbers for the rotational degrees of

freedom of joints 1,5,10,70 for a model with 6 degrees of freedom per

joint.

ECOL 28,JOIN,TS 4,1

1,5,10,70

RUN=JTOD 28,JOIN,TS 28,DOF,VEC 4,5,6
3.91. LAST

LAST 3-165

LAST Command

Purpose

Print the last table of contents line in a DAL file.

Command

LAST NU

Where

NU = DAL unit

Notes

LAST is most often used to find the number of elements in a DAL file.

The type of TOC line written depends on the current TTYP (as set by the

command TTYP).
3-166 GENERAL COMMANDS

RUN LFU

RUN=LFU Command

Purpose

Create a lower triangular, upper triangular or full matrix from a lower

triangular, upper triangular or full matrix.

Command

RUN=LFU NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 ILFU,JLFU

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input square matrix.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output square matrix.

ILFU - Input matrix type.

= -i Input matrix is lower triangular.

= 0 Input matrix is full.

= 1 Input matrix is upper triangular.

JLFU - Output matrix type.

= -1 Output matrix will be lower triangular.

= 0 Output matrix will be full.

= 1 Output matrix will be upper triangular.
L

LOCATE

LOCATE 3-167

_v

LOCATE Conm_nd

Purpose

To print a TOC line, change it, or write the TOC line to an element as

desired.

Command

LOCATE N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

or

LOCH NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input DAL element.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Optional output DAL element for TOC line.

Notes

Cycles for the element to be located are taken from the current input

cycles. If the second element is specified, it will be written as a

vector of length 13. Since it is obtained directly from the TOC, items 7

and 8 are NJ, NINJ irregardless of the value of TOCTYP.

The command LOCH locates the element, and then prompts the user to enter

changes to the TOC line. Changes start with the value of NWDS, and

continue through CYC2. If a particular item is not to be changed, use a

single '$' in its place.

Example

Change the value of NJ and ITYP for the element TEST/MAT[5,5] on unit 3

CYCLE 5,5

LOCH 3,TEST,MAT

$,&NEWJ,$,&NTYP

LOCH lets you change any or all four element names. This can be dangerous_

since it does not check to see if the new names are unique.

The preferred method for changing element names, type codes, and NJ values

is through use of the CHANGE command, as described earlier in this manual.
3-168 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.94. LOOK

LOOK processor

Purpose

This processor is intended to provide a quick way of looking at a data set

via listing or plotting in a meaningful fashion on a terminal.

Command

RUN=LOOK NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NVR2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 N4,NEL4,NVR4

Where

NI,NELI,NVRI - Dal unit version and element name of data to be worked

on.

N2,NVR2 - Dal unit and version name to keep working files_

N3,NEL3,NVR3 - Range of values for each row. (eg. Frequency range.)

N4,NEL4,NVR4 - Range of values for each column. (eg. Channel names.)

3.94.1. EXIT

EXIT command

Purpose

This command exits the LOOK processor.

Command

EXIT
3.94.2. HELP

HELP command

Purpose

This command provides help for the LOOK processor.

Command

HELP

LOOK 3-169

3.94.3. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command displays 1 screen of the input data set.

Command

LIST

Notes

This command will display the portion of the matrix starting at the

location specified by the WINDOW command. The WINDOW command specifies

the upper right hand corner of the block of data to be displayed. LIST

will then display up to 16 rows and 6 columns of the data. The default

location for window is i,i.
3-170 GENERAL COMMANDS

3 •94.4. MENU

LOOK Processor menu

LOOK processor

Misc. Tables Plottin@ Choping

EXIT LIST PLOT SELECT

HELP WINDOW PLOT LABELS

STATUS TITLES PLOT RANGE

PLOT TYPE

TITLES

IO

READ

WRITE

3.94. S. PLOT

PLOT command

Purpose

This command is used to plot the entire data set on one plot frame or plot

a specific column of the data set.

Command

PLOT (NC)

Where

NC - The single column to be plotted. If omitted the entire data set

is plotted.

Note

If there are a lot of columns in your data set plot may not be able to

handle them all and could cause an error. As a rule of thumb don't use

more than 20 columns per plot.
LOOK 3-171

3 • 94 • 5 • 1. LABELS

PLOT LABELS command

Purpose

This command is used to input plot labels.

Cowmand

PLOT LABELS

The program prompts for input of two plot labels ( 1 for each axis.)

3.94.5.2. RANGE

PLOT RANGE command

Purpose

This command allows the input of ranges for the data to be plotted.

Conmmnd

PLOT RANGE

The program prompts for input of a range for the X and Y axes. If a value

of 0.,0. is input then automatic scaling will be done for that axis.

Default is 0.,0. for each axis.

3.94.5.3. TYPE

PLOT TYPE command

Purpose

This command allows the specification of a plot type.

allowed are DB and ACCL.

Comma_

The two types
3-172 GENERAL COMMANDS

PLOT TYPE=IPTYP

Where

IPTYP - The plot type. The valid values are:

= DB - Sets the plot to Linear Y and Logarithmic X.

= ACCL - Sets the plot to Logarithmic Y and Logarithmic X.

Default is ACCL.

3.94.6. READ

READ command

Purpose

This command is used to read a new data set in.

Command

READ NEL

or

READ NU, NVR

or

READ NU, NEL, NVR

Where

CASE I -- 1 argument.

NEL - The data set N2,NEL,NVR2 replaces your current working data set.

See the command line input for N2 and NVR2

The new data set must have the same dimensions as the old data

set.

CASE II -- 2 arguments.

NU,NVR - The following data sets replace your current working set.

This data set could have been created with the WRITE command.

NU, 'DATA' ,NVR - Data set.

NU, 'ROW ',NVR - Frequency range.

NU, 'COL ',NVR - Channel names.

CASE III -- 3 arguments.

NU,NEL,NVR - This data set replaces your current working data set. The
LOOK 3-173

new data set must have the same dimensions as the old data

set.

3.94.7. SELECT

SELECT command

Purpose

This command is used to select a subset of the current working file to

replace the current working file. Similar to the CHOP conm_nd.

Command

SELECT

The command prompts for the number of rows and columns to be selected.

Then prompts for individual row and column numbers. These numbers can be

input using the free-field input rules. (eg. i:i0 )

3.94.8. STATUS

STATUS command

Purpose

This command displays the status of the LOOK processor.

Command

STATUS

The £ollowing items are displayed:

Default working DAL unit and version name.

Title lines.

Labels.

Plot type.

Ranges for plotting.

Window status.
3-174 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.94.9. TITLES

TITLES command

Purpose

This con_mand allows the input of three title lines for use in plotting and

the LIST command.

Command

TITLES

The program then prompts for three title lines.

3.94.10. WINDOW

WINDOW command

Purpose

This command sets the upper left hand corner location for use in the LIST

command.

Command

WINDOW IWR, IWC

Where

IWR,IWC - Is the upper left hand corner of the portion of the matrix to

be displayed using the LIST command.
3.94.11. WRITE

WRITE command

Purpose

This command is used to save a data set in a DAL file.

Command

WRITE NEL

or

WRITE NU,NVR

or

WRITE NU,NEL,NVR

Where

CASE I -- 1 argument.

NEL - The data set N2,NEL,NVR2 created.

CASE II -- 2 arguments.

NU,NVR - The following data sets are created.

read by the READ command.

NU,'DATA',NVR - Data set.

NU,'ROW ',NVR - Frequency range.

NU,'COL ',NVR - Channel names.

CASE III -- 3 arguments.

NU,NEL,NVR - This data set is created.

LOOK 3 - 17 5

This data can now be
3-176 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.95. RUN LOOK

RUN=LOOK Processor

Purpose

This command is used to look at a data set, give it a range of rows and a

range of columns, and give it a default working dal unit and version name.

A set of commands are then set up to work on this data set.

Command

This command is documented in the main help section. See LOOK for more

information.
RUN=LRMS 3-177

3.96. RUN LRMS

RUN=LRMS Command

Purpose

This runstream will calculate a root-mean-square (rms) value for a

function whose log-log plot is piecewise linear (see example plot).

Command

RUN=LRMS NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,VR3

Wher e

N1,ELI,VRI - Input abscissa vector.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input ordinate vector.

N3,VR3 - Output unit and element name. The following elements

are output:

N3,VR3,'AREA' - Area of each segment (segments X 1).

N3,VR3,'TOTA' - Total area under curve (i X I).

Example plot

L

0

G

Y

/

/

/

/

/

\

\

\

\

\

LOG X

Notes

The first input vector contains the abscissa coordinates of the end points

of the linear segments (i.e. frequency points). The second vector

contains the corresponding ordinate values (i.e. mean square spectral

density).

The output will consist of two vectors, the one named 'AREA' will contain

the areas underneath the individual linear segments. The one named 'TOTA'

will contain the RM5 value for the entire function.

Related Commands
3-178 GENERAL COMMANDS

RUN=GRMS, RUN=OVER
3.97. RUN LTRP

RUN=LTRP 3-179

RUN=LTRP Command

Purpose

This runstream interpolates an input spec level to create an element

containing the spec levels at standard 1/3-octave center frequencies. It

is assumed that the spec level was derived from 1/3 octave vibration data

and so was not really intended to be a continuous spectrum, so no

integration is done, only interpolation.

Command

RUN=LTRP N1,Ll,Vl N2,L2,V2 N3,L3,V3 F1,F2

Where

N1,LI,Vl - This element contains the spec to be interpolated.

N2,L2,V2 - This element contains the frequencies that go with the

values in NI,LI,Vl.

N3,L3,V3 - This is the output element. A frequency element,

N3,'FREQ',V3, is also produced.

FI,F2 - Values will be interpolated at standard 1/3 octave center

frequencies between F1 and F2 inclusive.
3-180 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.98. RUN MANU

RUN=MANUAL Command

Purpose

This command interrogate the VAPEPS HELP and RUN files to produce a VAPEPS

user's Manual.

Con_and

RUN=MANUAL NLPP (ITYP)

Where

NLPP - Is the number of lines per page.

ITYP - Is one of the following:

= XEROX - Generates output suitable for a XEROX printer. If this

option is omitted no special formating will be done.

Notes

Output is directed to Fortran unit 6. THE MANUAL IS ABOUT 600 PAGES SO USE

THIS COMMAND WITH CARE.
MAXMIN 3-181

MAXM N

MAXMIN Command

Purpose

Get maximum and minimum values for a set of time functions. Times of

occurrence may also be saved,

Command

MAXMIN NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input array. Max-min values are found for each column.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output max-min array. Output number of rows = input number

of columns. Number of cols is either 2 or 4, depending on

whether times are saved.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Optional input time vector. If input, times are read and

saved on output array.

Notes

If input times are not included (ie. 7 Words in command), the output array

will have two columns, maximums and minimums. If input time vector is

included in command (ie. i0 Words in command), then output array will have

four columns: max,max times,min,min times, if input, the time vector must

have as least as many rows as the input array.

MAXABS

If absolute value max-mins are desired, use MAXABS instead of MAXMIN. The

format is the same except tests are made on absolute values. Output

max-mins reflect input signs.

MAXT

Since the output from many response programs is stored as one column per

time point (ie the transpose of what MAXMIN needs), MAXMIN has been

modified to operate on this type of matrix. To initiate this mode, use the

command

MAXT NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

where maxmins are found on each ROW of NI,ELI,VRI, and the number of rows

output for N2,EL2,VR2 will equal the number of rows of NI,ELI,VR1. Note
3-182 GENERAL COMMANDS

that if times are to be included, the third element must still be a

vector, but its length must be at least as big as the number of columns of

NI,ELI,VRI.

This transpose feature can also be used with MAXABS, by using the command

MAXAT, or MAXTA
3.100. MDIFF

MDIFF 3-183

MDIFF Command

Purpose

Differentiate an ordered function using either straight line techniques or

by first fitting it with a cubic spline.

Command

MDIFF N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 IOP

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input abscissa vector or array ie (X) Each abscissa vector

must be monotonically increasing.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input ordinate vector or array ie (Y)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output vector or array of derivatives ie (A)

lOP - Differentiation type

=-l

= 0

> 0

= 1

=2

=3

- (or omitted) use straight line method

- (or omitted) use IOP=-i

- Cubic spline, IOP determines end condition

- Linear end condition

- Parabolic end condition

- Extrapolated end condition (dangerous)

Notes

MDIFF operates in normal and transposed modes. For the normal mode, the

number of rows of X must equal the number of rows of Y. The number of

columns in X must either = i, or equal the number of columns in Y. Each

column in Y is treated as a separate function.

For the transpose mode, X must be a vector. The number of rows in X must

equal the number of columns in Y. le for a time function, each column in Y

corresponds to a time point and each row of Y corresponds to a separate

function. Note that the number of rows in X must not equal the number of

rows in Y, or else the normal mode (above) will be used.

In either mode, the output matrix (A) will be the same size as the matrix

Y. In the normal mode A(I,J) will be the derivative of the Jth function at

the Ith point. In the transpose mode, A(I,J) will be the derivative of the

Ith function at the Jth point.

Transposed differentiation will always be done using straight line

techniques.
3-184 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.101. RUN MEZ

RUN=MEZ Programmer's Com_nand

Purpose

This streams reads the files generated by the MEZ$ option of EZOUT. Its

purpose is to construct a matrix which relates routine names to C=BLOCK

references.

Command

RUN=MEZ NUNIT,NAME

where

NUNIT - Is the Fortran unit that EZOUT output was directed to.

NAME - Is the version name for the output DAL file.

v
3.102. MGRATE

MGRATE 3-185

MGRATE Command

Purpose

Integrate an ordered function using either trapezoidal method or by first

fitting it with a cubic spline.

Command

MGRATE N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 IOP

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input abscissa vector or array ie (X) Each abscissa vector

must be monotonically increasing.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input ordinate vector or array ie (Y)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output integral vector or array ie (A)

IOP - Integration type

=-i

= 0

>0

= 0

= 1

= 2

= 3

- (or omitted) use trapezoidal method

- (or omitted) use IOP=-i

- Cubic spline, IOP determines end condition

- (or omitted) use IOP=2

- Linear end condition

- Parabolic end condition

- Extrapolated _end condition (dangerous)

Notes

MGRATE operates in normal and transposed modes. For the normal mode, the

number of rows of X must equal the number of rows of Y. The number of

columns in X must either = l, or equal the number of columns in Y. Each

column in Y is treated as a separate integral.

For the transpose mode, X must be a vector. The number of rows in X must

equal the number of columns in Y. Ie for a time function, each column in Y

corresponds to a time point and each row of Y corresponds to a separate

function. Note that the number of rows in X must not equal the number of

rows in Y, or else the normal mode (above) will be used.

In either mode, the output matrix (A) will be the same size as the matrix

Y. In the normal mode A(I,J) will be the integral of the Jth function at

the Ith point. In the transpose mode, A(I,J) will be the integral of the

Ith function at the Jth point.

Transposed integration will always be done using trapezoidal method.
3-186 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.103. MODIFY

MODIFY Command

Purpose

MODIFY the contents of an element by specifying the row, column and new

value for each change.

Command

MODIFY NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 MAX

-DATAWhere

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input element (real, integer or hollerith)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Optional output element. If omitted, the input element

will be corrected in place.

MAX - Combination size parameteroption flag

> 0 - Maximum changes per line - Mode 1

< 0 - Total number of changes - Mode 2

Notes

Mode 1

Modify the element by entering as many combinations of changes as desired.

The general format ks:

IROW, ICOL,VALUE,IROW, ICOL,VALUE,...

As many as MAX sets may be entered per line. Max defaults to l0 (ie 30

numbers). Cards will be read until a blank card is read or until a card

with fewer than three items is read.

Mode 2

In this care , -MAX indicates the total number of changes that will be

made. This time the data will be read as a list of row numbers followed by

a list of column numbers, followed by a list of new values. Each list must

begin on a new line although each list may occupy more than one line.

Example

The first form is more handy for a few changes:
MODIFY 3-187

MODIFY

l,l,10.

DONE

1,SAM, PLE

MODIFY

1

1

10.

I,SAM,PLE -1

But for many changes mode 2 is better. For example the following use will

zero out all diagonal terms

MODIFY 1,SAM, PLE

I:&NR

I:&NR

&NR*0.

- &NR

Special form

The conmmlnd MODSUM may be used in place of MODIFY. In this case, all input

items will be added to the current value rather than replacing it.
3-188 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.104. RUN MPNT

RUN=MPNT Command

Purpose

Print a summary of master file information for the specified event numbers.

Command

RUN=MPNT (If,(12))

Where

II,I2 - The first and last event number to be printed. Default is all

events.
3.105. MSAP

MSAP 3-189

MSAP Command

Purpose

Perform multiplication of a NEPSAP stiffness matrix by a standard VAPEPS

matrix. The stiffness matrix may be single or double precision, while the

other input and the output matrix will always be single precision.

Command

MSAP NSEP, ITEM N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

Where

NSEP - DAL unit where 'KEMX' and 'BIGK' reside.

> 0, stiffness matrix is single precision

< 0, stiffness matrix is double precision

ITEM - first cycle number of 'BIGK' element

= 0, use K matrix -- BIGK,NEPI,0,1

= i, use K' matrix -- BIGK,NEPI,I,1

=-i, use KG matrix -- BIKG,NEPI,I,I

N2,EL2,VR2 - input multiplicand, size = (NDOF,NVEC)

where NDOF = size of stiffness matrix

NVEC = any number of columns

N3,EL3,VR3 - output matrix, size = (NDOF,NVEC)

Notes

The sign of NSEP indicates the precision of the input stiffness matrix.

The other matrices are always single precision.

Stiffness extractions

If N3,EL3,VR3 is omitted, then N2,EL2,VR2 will be output as the full

VAPEPS type single precision stiffness matrix, ie. size = (NDOF,NDOF).

Warning, this process can be time consuming.

Cycles

The VAPEPS 'CYCLE' command has no effect on the NEPSAP matrices that are

processed by this command. The cycles do control the VAPEPS matrices that

are input and output.
3-190 GENERAL CO_nM/tNDS

3.106. RUN MSDF

RUN=MSDFREQ con_nand

Purpose

This command calculates the frequencies for input into RUN=SCSD at which

the MSD matrix will be calculated.

Command

RUN=MSDFREQ NI,N_4E FL,FH (FBMX (BFAC))

Where

NI,NAME - DAL unit and version name for output.

name is NI,'MSDF',NA/4E.

FL,FH

FBMX

BFAC

The output element

- i/3 octave frequency range.

- Maximwn allowable frequency range between calculations.

Default is to use only the band edges.

- Factor to calculate band edge frequencies. At each band edge

two frequencies are calculated. One is slightly lower than

the band edge and the other is slightly higher. The amount

is:

10**(L_10(bar_ edge) +- BFAC)

BFAC defaults to .0001

Notes

In many cases it is sufficient to use only the band edges in the MSD

calculation. RUN=CSD2 uses a linear interpolation to determine

frequencies other than those calculated here.
RUN=MSDS 3-191

3.107. RUN MSDS

RUN=MSDSETUP Command

Purpose

This command does the setup for RUN=SCSD.

Command

RUN=MSDSETUP NI,NAME FL,FH (FBMX (BFAC) (ZFAC))

Where

N1,NAME - DAL unit and version name for SCSD input.

FL,FH - 1/3 octave frequency range.

FBMX - Maximum allowable frequency range between calculations.

Default is to use only the band edges.

BFAC - Factor to calculate band edge frequencies. At each band edge

two frequencies are calculated. One is slightly lower than

the band edge and the other is slightly higher. The amount

is:

10**(LOG10(band edge) +- BFAC)

ZFAC

BFAC defaults to .0001

- Equivalent nodal forces below this absolute value will be

assumed to be zero. Default = .01

This runstream prompts for the following input matrices:

'JLOC','BTAB' - Joint location matrix as output by EAL.

'VIBR','MODE' - Mode shape matrix as output by EAL.

'VIBR','EVAL' - Natural frequencies as output by EAL.

'EQNF','FORC' - Equivalent nodal forces for 1 psi pressure, as output

by _L.

The following matrices are assumed to already exist:

NI,'EXC ',NAME - Excitation acoustic field (#frequencies,#Force nodes)

or (#frequencies,l). In this case this matrix is

expanded to (#frequencies,#Force nodes) Input is in

psi**2/hz

NI,'EXFQ',NAME - Frequency vector for acoustic field (#frequencies,l)

Notes
3-192 GENERAL COMMANDS

In many cases it is sufficient to use only the band edges in the MSD

calculation. RUN=CSD2 uses a linear interpolation to determine

frequencies other than those calculated here.
MSPAR 3-193

3.108. MSPAR

MSPAR Command

Purpose

Standard matrix multiplication (C = A-B), where A is a 'SPAR' sparse

matrix. The sparse matrix may be single or double precision.

Con_nand

MSPAR NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 FAC

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input sparse matrix. This is a special matrix, and is not

subject to the regular 'VAPEPS' conventions. First of all,

its version name must be 'SPAR' (ie VRI = 'SPAR').

Secondly, the first cycle number must indicate the number

of DOF per joint squared. Thus the current input cycles

from the cycle command are not used. Instead, the element

is read with 'MASKED' cycles. I repeat, the use of the

CYCLE command has no effect on the reading of this

element. The matrix may be single precision or double

precision. In either case, it must follow SPAR's

convention for matrix type. For single precision, the type

must be l, for double precision, the type must be 2, and

the number of words and number of rows, must indicate the

number of double precision words, not the number of single

precision words.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input second matrix. This is a standard VAPEPS matrix.

Here the cycles from the last CYCLE command are used to

read the element. It must be of the same precision as the

sparse matrix above. For this element, double precision

must be type 2 with NWDS = number of double precision

words.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output matrix. It will be of the same type as the above

two matrices. Its cycle numbers will be as indicated in

the last CYCLE command. In the case of double precision,

the type will be 2.

Description

Matrix multiplication is fairly straight forward. The only thing to be

added is that the dimensions of the arrays must be compatible. A sparse

matrix is always a square array, but its dimension is not always obvious.

If it is a genuine 'SPAR' sparse matrix, the size is NR = NC =
3-194 GENERAL COMMANDS

NJ*SQRT(C1). This will be the output number of rows for C, and must also

be the number of rows for B. The output number of columns for C will be

equal to the number of input columns for B.

This command is not meant to replace the 'PROD' command in SPAR's AUS. For

one thing, it is more expensive. The reason for the expense, is that the

intermediate products are always su_ed in double precision, even in the

single precision case. The other reason is that 'PROD' does not allow the

input of double precision mode shapes (ie. matrix B), and it does not

yield a double precision answer. Thus AUS's PROD command should be used

unless you want more precision.
3.109. MTJ

MTJ 3-195

MTJ Command

Purpose

Multiply a matrix with 3 dimensions by a matrix with two dimensions. Eg.

A(NI,NJ,NC) * B(NC,NI) = C(NC,NJ)

or

A(NI,NJ,NC) * B(NC,NJ) = C(NC,NI)

Command

MTJ N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

or

MTJT NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

N3,EL2,VR2

N3,EL3,VR3

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input 3d matrix: A(NI,NJ,NC)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input 2d matrix: B(MR,MC)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output 2d matrix: C(LR,LC)

Notes

The value of NJ for the first matrix is used to determine the length of

its first dimension - NI = NR/NJ

For MTJ MR must = NC

MC must = NJ

and LR will = NC

LC will = NI

For MTJT MR must = NC

MC must = NI

LR will = NC

LC will = NJ
3-196 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.1 10. MTRAN

MTRAN Command

Purpose

Perform the matrix multiplication

t

AB =C

without having to transpose B first.

Command

MTRAN N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 (FAC)

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input matrix. (A)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input matrix. (B)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output matrix. (C)

FAC - Optional multiplication factor which is carried along at

no extra cost.

Notes

If the dimensions of A are (NR,NC) and the dimensions of B are (MR,MC),

then NC must equal MC and Dimensions of C are (NR,MR)

MTRAN will handle virtually any size matrix, however batch mode is advised

for large matrices (>200 by 200), since more core is available.

MTRAN works with single or double precision matrices as well as complex.

Single matrices may be mixed with either double or complex, but double may

not be multiplied with complex. If any matrices are double, output is

double. If any matrices are complex, output is complex.

If the FAC option is used with complex multiplication, the factor is still

assumed to be strictly real and thus multiplies both real and imaginary

portions of the answer.
MULTIPLY 3-197

3.111. MULTIPLY

MULTIPLY Command

Purpose

Matrix multiplication.

Command

MULT N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 (FAC)

Where

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input matrix. (ie. A(NR,NC))

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input matrix. (ie. B(NC,MC))

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output matrix. (ie. C(NR,MC))

FAC - Optional multiplication factor which is carried along at no

extra cost.

Notes

Where A, B and C are indicated above, the following operation is

performed:

DO l0 I=I,NR

DO l0 J=I,MC

C(I,J) = 0.

DO I0 K=I,NC

i0 C(I,J) = C(I,J) + A(I,K)*B(K,J)

(10 C(I,J) = C(I,J) + A(I,K)*B(K,J)*FAC)

An error message is printed if dimensions of the input arrays are not

compatible. Large matrices are broken into chunks. Chunk size depends on

the maximum data space allowed (see CORE command).

If FAC is used with double precision or complex multipli- cation, FAC is

still assumed to be a real number, and is used to multiply both the real

and imaginary parts.

Single precision*complex and single*double products are allowed, but

double*complex are not. If A or B is double, C will be double. If A or B

is complex, C will be complex.
3-198 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.112. RUN MVC

RUN=MVC Command

Purpose

Calculate mean, variance and covariance of a data set.

Command

RUN=MVC NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 IOP

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix (NR = # of variables, NC=#of cases)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output average (NR=#of variables, NC=I)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output co-variance matrix (#VAR,#VAR)

IOP - Option flag as follows:

= 0 - Division by number of variables. (Default = O)

= 1 - DIVISION BY #VAR-I
RUN=NEWS 3-199

3.113. RUN NEWS

RUN=NEWS Command

Purpose

Display the latest news bulletin.

Command

RUN=NEWS

Notes

The element 30,'NEWS','NEWS' will be printed if it exists.

message will be printed.

Otherwise a
3-200 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.114. RUN NOML

RUN=NOML Command

Purpose

RUN=NOML linearly normalizes your baseline response/excitation data to a

new excitation.

Command

RUN=NOML N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 N4,EL4,VR4 (UDAT)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input element containing the baseline excitation,

size: (# of frequencies x i).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input element containing the baseline response,

size: (# of frequencies x # of responses).

N3,EL3,VR3 - Input element containing the new excitation,

size: (# of frequencies x i).

N4,EL4,VR4 - Output element containing the normalized response,

size: (# of frequencies x # of responses).

UDAT - (optional) Data units:

= 0 - (default) input and output units are linear,

= 1 - input and output units are dB.

Notes

If NI,ELI,VR1 or N3,EL3,VR1 have more than one column, only the values in

column 1 will be used in the calculations.

Equations

For linear data:

Rn= En*Rb/Eb

For dB data:

Rn/10

Rn= 10xLog[basel0](10

Rb/lO Eb/lO

xlO / i0 )

Whet e

Rn - Response normalized to the new excitation.

En - New excitation.

Rb - Baseline response.
RUN=NOML 3-201

Eb - Baseline excitation.
3-202 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.115. NORM

NORM Command

Purpose

Normalize an array such that the maximum value in each column is equal to

i.

Command

NORM NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input integer, real, or double precision array.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output normalized array.

Notes

NORM treats each column separately. Each term in the column is divided by

the value of the term with the largest absolute value.

Alternate form

NORMABS NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

May be used instead of NORM. In this case, each column is divided by the

absolute value of the term with the largest absolute value in the column.

This may produce a normalized maximum of -i.
3.116. RUN NORM

RUN=NORM 3-203

RUN=NORM Command

Purpose

Normalize data from the VAPEPS data base to a different input spectrum.

Command

RUN=NORM NCAS NUI,VSNI FI,F2

Where

NCAS - Number of separate cases.

NUI,VSNI - Output will go here.

FI,F2 - Frequency limits.

General

This runstream is fully interactive.

Each case pertains to particular excitation and normalization spectra.

When either or both of these spectra change, a new case must be

considered. For each case, the runstream will prompt for the event name

and dal unit for the data to be normalized. Both excitation and response

data must be from a single event for any given case. The runstream will

then prompt for the names of excitation transducers. If there are more

than one, the average will be used as excitation. Next, the runstream

prompts for the names of data channels to be normalized. Lastly, the

runstream prompts for the normalization spectrum. This process is

repeated for the number of cases specified by ncas.

Input restrictions

Only one line of input is allowed for response to any of the prompts. If

your response to any prompt might possibly require more than one line of

input, store the response in an element ahead of time using the command

ECOL. Then, in response to the prompt, type an equal sign followed by the

unit, element name and version associated with the ele- ment containing

the response.

Output

Output from this runstream consists of three elements. The first contains

the normalized data. Each row represents a frequency band and each column

represents a data channel. The data channels are entered into the element
3-204 GENERALCOMMANDS

in the order in which they were specified. The units of the normalized

data are db. The secondoutput element is a list of channel names,the

order is the sameas input. The third element contains the overall

levels. The namesof these elements are:

i) NUI,'NORM',VSNI Normalized data (dB)

2) NUI,'CHAN',VSNI Channelnames

3) NUI,'OVRL',VSNI Overall levels (GRMS)

4) NUI,'NMGS',VSNI Normalized data (g**2/Hz)

5) NUI,'FREQ',VSNI i/3 octave frequencies (Hz)

These elements are used by the statistics runstream and the plot command

STPLT.

Special Case

A special case exists when data is used that does not come from the

database. In that case put in the actual unit,element,version for the

data instead of the unit and event name of the database event.

Input is different in that channel names are not asked for.

Output is the same except that NUI,'CHAN',VSN1 will not be there.
NOT 3-205

3.117. NOT

NOT Command

Purpose

Create a vector which contains all numbers in a given range (or list)

which are not in the input vector.

Command

NOT N1,ELI,VR1

or

NOT N1,ELI,VR1

or

NOT NI,ELI,VR1

N2,EL2,VR2 IST,IFN,INC

N2,EL2,VR2 FST,FLST,FINC

N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

Whet e

N1,ELI,VR1 - Input vector containing a list of values. For command

type 1 above, the values must be integers, for 2, they

must be real. For type 3, they may be integer, real or

hollerith. See notes.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output vector. The values will be of the same type as

those input in NI,ELI,VRI.

IST,IFN,INC - First value, last value and increment of a sequence of

integer numbers.

FST,FLST,FINC - First value, last value and increment of a sequence of

real numbers.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Input vector (used instead of a sequence). Note that

the values in this vector must be of the same type as

N1,ELI,VR1.

Notes

The basic approach is to construct the item pool, either as a sequence of

numbers for types 1 and 2, or by reading dataset N3,EL3,VR3 for type 3.

Then, take each item in the pool and try to find it in the dataset

NI,EL1,VRI. Any pool items not found in N1,ELI,VRI are added to the output

list

NOT sets the variable N$ to the number of terms that weren't found (eg

the length of the output vector). If all input values are found in the

sequence, N$=0, and no output element is produced. THUS YOU SHOULD USE N$

TO TEST FOR SUCCESS OR FAILURE AFTER 'NOT'. (If you check the size of the

output element, and none was produced, you could accidentally pick up a

previously generated element)
3-206 GENERALCOMMANDS

L_

If INC (or FINC) is omitted from the command, it defaults to 1 (or 1.). If

only one sequence definition term is present, it is assumed to be IFN (or

FLST). In this case, IST (or FST) defaults to 1 (or 1.).

The type of input vector (real or integer only) determines the type of

output vector. The choice of sequence terms (IST, IFN, INC or FST,FLST,FINC)

must be consistent with this type.

For command type 3, either integer, real, or hollerith comparisons may be

made. Note that elements 1 and 3 must be of the same type.

CAUTION --- Floating point comparisons

NOT may be used to compare floating point values, however it is highly

unlikely (in general) for two floating point numbers to be exactly equal.

Therefore, command type 2 uses the test

if ABS((XI(1)-XS(J))/XI(I)) .LE. 1.E-5 then

for all intents and purposes they are equal, and Xl(I) will not be put in

the output list. (it does protect against XI(I) being zero). (XS(J) = jth

term in sequence)

Conmmlnd type 3, on the other hand, insists that Xl(1) must exactly equal

some X3(J). Choose your method according to your needs.
NTOW 3-207

3.118. NTOW

NTOW Command

Purpose

Convert narrow band data to wide band data.

Command

NTOW NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 FI,F2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 N4,NEL4,NVR4

or

NTOW N1,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2 FI,F2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 CBAND

Where

NI,NELI,NVRI - Input narrow band center frequencies.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - Input narrow band data.

F1,F2 - Input wide band center frequencies.

These may be set using the FREQUENCY/SET con_nand.

Default is standard i/3 octave.

N3,NEL3,NVR3 - Output data set to store wide band data.

N4,NEL4,NVR4 - Input narrow band band widths.

CBAND - Constant narrow band band width. Used in place

of N4,NEL4,NVR4.

Example

Given the input data sets:

I,FREQ,PSD - Narrow band center frequencies.

1,DATA,PSD - Narrow band data.

And knowing that the data has a constant bandwidth of 1.5259 hz.

Assuming that the data covers 1/3 octave freqeuncy bands from

20. to 2000. hz. Calculate the 1/3 octave psd for the data.

NTOW I,FREQ,PSD I,DATA,PSD 20.,2000. I,THRD,OCTV 1.5259

PRINT I,THRD,OCTV

Related commands

RUN=OCT3, INTEGRATE, INTERPOLATE

Discussion

This command will output zeros if there is no narrow band data in
3-208 GENERAL COMMANDS

a band. Also if there is not a full band of data the level is

averaged with zero for the rest of the band.

Moral: Make sure that the narrow band data covers the entired band

width for each of the wide bands desired.
3.119. RUN OCT3

RUN=OCT3 3-209

RUN=OCT3 Conxnand

Purpose

This runstream takes a narrow band psd and converts it to a standard 1/3

octave band psd.

Command

RUN=OCT3 NUI,NEL1,NVRI FI,F2 (NU2,NEL2,NVR2 (NU3,NEL3,NVR3))

Where

NUI,NELI,NVRI - Input narrow band psd (# FREQS X # RESP)

F1 ,F2 - Frequency range for 1/3 octave output

NU2,NEL2,NVR2 - Output unit and version, defaults to: NUI,NELI,NVRI

NU3,NEL3,NVR3 - Non-standard input frequency vector defaults to:

NUI,'FREQ',NVR1 or if the number of columns in NU1

NELl NVRI is equal to 2 then the frequency vector is

taken from column one of NUI NELl NVRI and the psd

vector is taken from column 2.

NU2,NEL2,NVR2 - Output i/3 octave PSD (# FREQS X # RESP)

NU2,'FOC3',NVR2 - 1/3 octave center frequencies.

Notes

If other than 1/3 octave frequencies are desired use the FREQUENCY/SET

command to set the frequencies used. (eg. FREQUENCY/SET 2 will cause the

routine to use standard i/6 octave frequencies.) For more information see

the documentation for the FREQUENCY command.
3-210 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.120. OR

OR Command

Purpose

Combine two lists into one list that contains all items from each list.

Command

OR NI, ELI, VRI N2, EL2, VR2 N3, EL3,VR3

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input vector

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input vector

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output vector of all items.

MS - Output variable set to indicate number of items in output

list.

Notes

The input vectors may be integer, real or hollerith, but both input

vectors must be of the same type. Input vectors may contain repeated

values. The output vector will contain each item only once.

v _
3.121. ORDER

ORDER 3-211

ORDER Command

Purpose

Order the rows of a matrix by arranging the values of a particular column

in ascending order. ORDER may also be used to 'pack' a data set by

eliminating zeros, duplicate values or values within a certain range of

each other.

Command

ORDER NI,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 ICOL

- column numbers (for negative ICOL)

- FACTOR(s) (for F option)

N3,EL3,VR3 N4,EL4,VR4

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix to be sorted.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output sorted matrix.

ICOL - Sort flag.

> 0 - ICOL = Column number to be sorted. (default = i)

= 0 - Sort all columns independently.

< 0 - -ICOL = Number of columns to be used during sort

procedure.

N3,EL3,VR3 - Optional output integer dataset which contains resulting

sort pointers. First output value is the number of the row

that contains the smallest value. This will always be a

vector unless the input matrix has more than one column

and ICOL = 0.

N4,EL4,VR4 - Optional output integer dataset which contains the index

for determining which rows were removed/kept as the result

of a NoTie, Factor, or NoZero operation. This will always

be a vector, with as many rows as the input matrix. If no

ties or zeros occur, the vector will be 1 through NR. If

20th item matched 14th, and T option was used, then row 20

would contain a 14.

Notes

In its basic form, ORDER reads the column indicated by ICOL, and forms a

list of pointers indicating which row is lowest, second lowest etc. It

then reads the input matrix column by column, reorders it, and writes the

reordered columns to the second matrix. For ICOL<O,the order process is to

first read -ICOL numbers directly following the command. The first column

indicated is ordered. If there are any ties, then the second column number
3-212 GENERAL COMMANDS

input is used to break the ties. If there are still ties, the next column

is used, and so on.

The last option is sort each column independently.

The third element is a list of pointers. This will be a vector except for

the case where ICOL=0, in which case a column of pointers will be produced

for each column in the input matrix.

The type of sorting is determined by the type of the element input. (Type

0=integer, l=floating, 2,3=error >3 = logical sorting).

Additional forms

ORDNT NI,ELI,VRI .....

ORDNZ NI,ELI,VRI .....

ORDNTZ NI,ELI,VRI .....

ORDF NI,ELI,VRI .....

- FACTOR(s)

The NT option stands for 'No Ties'. Any duplicate values will result in

only one of the values being output. In the case of a multiple column

(ICOL < 0) ORDNT, all specified columns must match before a 'tie' is

indicated. The NZ option stands for 'No Zeros'. Any rows that contain a

zero will bedropped. Again in the multiple column case, all specified

columns must be zero for a row to be dropped. ORDNTZ is a combination of

the two forms. Note: These options may not be used with a column by column

ORDER (ICOL = 0), since it could result in different row lengths for each

column. The F option loosens the definition of a 'tie'. You must input a

factor or factors which define how close two values must be in order to be

considered the same. For multiple column ORDERS (ICOL < 0), you may enter

a different FACTOR for each column (all FACTORS must be input on the same

line) or you can enter 1 FACTOR that will then apply to all columns.
3.122. RUN ORTH

RUN=ORTH 3- 213

RUN=ORTH Conm_nd

Purpose

Check the orthogonalitY of a matrix.

Command

RUN=ORTH NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

N1,ELI,VRI - Input matrix to be checked.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output normalized matrix.

Notes

This runstream normalized the input matrix, prints the diagonal of the

resulting matrix and prints the value of the maximum off diagonal term as

well as it's location.
3-214 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.123. RUN OTOC

RUN=OTOC Command

Purpose

Prints an ordered table of contents that contains all datasets that match

the input spec. Eg OTOC 1 would produce an ordered TOC of the whole file.

Command

RUN=OTOC NU,ELN,VER, ICI, IC2 IDATE NOUT

Where

NU,ELN,VER, ICI,IC2 - Are the input DAL unit, element, version and

cycle numbers of data sets to match. DAL unit

must always be input. Element, version and cycle

can use the word MASK as in the FIND conm_nd.

IDATE - Any elements created before this date will be

ignored. Default = 0

NOUT - Fortran unit to direct output. Default = 6

Notes

The output format will not have the sector address. Instead, it will

include NWDS,NI,NJ,NR,NC instead of just NJ,NINJ or NR,NC
3.124. RUN OVER

RUN=OVER 3-215

RUN=OVER Command

Purpose

Compute the overall level of the input matrix.

Command

RUN=OVER NI,ILI,IVl N2,IL2,IV2 (FI,F2)

Where

NI,ILI, IVl - Input matrix (NFRQ,NCHN)

N2,IL2,IV2 - Output overall matrix (NCHN,I)

FI,F2 - Frequency limits (if frequency limits are present then

input is assumed to be in G**2/HZ and output is overall in

GRMS )

Notes

This runstream assumes that the input element is in dB unless frequency

limits are present then it assumes that input is in G**2/Hz.
3-216 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.125. PACK

PACK Command

Purpose

Physically compact a DAL file by removing all disabled elements, or copy a

group of elements from one file to another.

Command

PACK N1

PACK NI,N2

PACK NI,N2,II,I2

Where

N1 - DAL unit to be packed or DAL unit that contains elements to be

transferred.

N2 - Output DAL unit.

II,I2 - Range of sequence numbers. All non-disabled elements from

sequence number Ii through I2 on DAL unit N1 will be copied to

the end of DAL unit N2.

Example

Remove all disables elements from DAL unit 1.

PACK 1

Notes

DAL files have a tendency to collect disabled elements. PACK removes these

elements. Note that the first form of PACK physically overwrites itself.

This can be disastrous if the process is interrupted (max-time error,

etc.). For this reason, the second method is preferred. In this case,

the method is to 'PACK N1,N2' and then exit VAPEPS and copy the second

file back to the first using available system processors.

The third method provides an easy method of copying a block of elements

from one file to another. Note that only non-disabled elements will be

transferred.

Related Commands

ENABLE, DISABLE, TOC, COPY, FIND
3.126. RUN PADM

RUN=PADM 3-217

RUN=PADMIN command

Purpose

This command extracts all words to be defined from the specified event an_

creates a list for input to the DICTIONARY/PREADMIN command..

Command

RUN=PADMIN NU, VENT

Where

NU,VENT - DAL unit and event name.

Notes

This conmm%nd creates a list of all the words (NU, 'WORD',VENT) in an event

which are to be entered into the Data Dictionary.
3-218 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.127. RUN PCOM

RUN=PCOMPARE Command

Purpose

This runstream plots the specified inputs on the same plot.

Command

RUN=PCOMPARE

Input

1 - Number of curves.

2 - Channel numbers of curves to compare. (#Channels X #Curves) This

matrix must be integer or hollerith (Type 0 or 4 respectively)

3 - For each curve:

NI,NVRI MARKER FLAG TYPE

Where

N1, NVRI

MARKER

FLAG

TYPE

- DAL unit and version of input data sets.

- Curve marker flag.

< 0 - Mark every MARKER curves with no lines

connecting each marker.

= 0 - Connect each point with a solid line no curve

markers.

> 1 - Mark every MARKER curves and connect each

marker with a solid line.

= lO000 - Connect each point with a dashed line no

curve markers.

- Special purpose flag.

= 0 - Input data sets are as follows:

NI,'RDAT',NVR1 - Data.

NI,'RFRQ',NVRI - Frequencies.

NI,'RCHN',NVR1 - Channel names.

= i - Input data set has the form:

NI,'N'I,NVR1

Data set contains two columns of data.

The first column contains frequencies.

The second column contains data.

Where I is an integer input in the Channel

numbers matrix. If I=l then 'N'I = N1

- For FLAG = 0:

Character to replace the 'R' in RDAT, RCHN, and RFRQ
RUN=PCOM 3-219

data sets. The represents the type of the DATA. The

conventions used are:

M - Microphone data.

A - Acceleration data.

5 - Strain gauge data.

R - Raw data. This data can be of any type

desired.

The default is R.

- For FLAG = l:

Character to replace the 'N' in 'N'I element name.

Default is N.

4 - Abscissa label.

5 - Ordinate label.

6 - Three title lines.

7 - Lower and upper limits for ordinate axis. The default is 0.,0. which

gives automatic scaling. If YMIN is input as negative then an

approximately square 3 x 3 cycle log log plot will be produced. If

both YMIN and YMAX are negative then a normal -YMAX x 3 cycle log log

plot will be produced.

8 - Type of plot.

SPL - Data is in dB units and will be plotted on a linear - log plot.

ACC - Data is in linear units and will be plotted on a log - log plot.

Default is ACC.

Labels

For normal curves the label is set to the channel number identifier as it

is input in 2 above.

At this time labels for specs are set to &ITYP&I where &ITYP is the

character input for the first character of the spec curve number.

Titles

At this time only one set of titles per plot set can be input. This will

change in the future.

Examp ie

* First set up some data sets.

ECOL 1,RDAT,TAPZ 10,3

10-.002

10-.005

10-.2

ECOL I,RDAT,SQZ 10,3

10-.015

10-.025

10-.003

FREQUENCY/CENTER I,RFRQ,TAPZ 50.,315.

FREQUENCY/CENTER I,RFRQ,SQZ 50.,315.
3-220 GENERAL COMMANDS

ECOL I,RCHN,TAPZ 3,1

AI,A2,A3

ECOL I,RCHN,SQZ 3,1

A9,AI2,A34

* NOW create a spec.

ECOL I,NI,SPEC 4,2

31.5 ,i00. ,250. ,500.

.01, .2, .2, .001

* Now create the channel pointers.

ECOL I,CHAN,PNT 3,3

I,i,i

A2,AI,A3

A34,A9,AI2

* NOW select plot device

PSET TEK

* Now do comparisons.

RUN=PCOMPARE

3 -- Number of curves

I,CHAN,PNT -- Data set containing appropriate channel pointers.

I,SPEC, 0, I,N -- Information for curve i.

I,TAPZ, 1,0,R -- Information for curve 2.

I,SQZ ,10000,0,R -- Information for curve 3.

Frequency, (Hz)

G**2/Hz

This

is an

example

.001,I.

ACC

-- Abscissa label.

-- Ordinate label.

-- Three title lines.

-- Ordinate limits.

-- Type of plot.

Solid line, no markers.

Solid line with markers.

Dashed line, no markers.
3.128. RUN PDBG

RUN=PDBG 3-221

RUN=PDBG Command

Purpose

Does plots of data in g**2/Hz, dB or delta dB. Prompts you for titles and

ordinate range

Command

RUN=PDBG NI,IELI,IVR1 N2,IEL2,IVR2 DTYP

Where

NI,IELI,IVRI - Frequency vector

N2,IEL2,IVR2 - Data matrix

DTYP - Type of data

= G2 for g**2/Hz

= DB for dB

= DDB for delta dB.

= USER prompts for all plot parameters.

When this runstream is executed you will be asked to input three title

lines.
3-222 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.129. RUN PGLS

RUN=PGLS Command

Purpose

Sort a glossary alphabetically then print it.

Command

RUN=PGLS NU,ELN,VER

Where

NU,ELN,VER - DAL unit, element and version of glossary.

Related Commands

GLOSSARY

k.._4
RUN=PGRM 3-223

3.130. RUN PGRM

RUN=PGRMS Con_and

Purpose

Plot output matrix of RUN=GRMS command.

Command

RUN=PGRM NI, VRI DEVI

Where

NI,VR1 - Dal unit and version of data created by RUN=GRMS

DEVI - Device to send plot to. Defaults to TEK.

Related Commands

RUN=GRMS
3-224 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.131. RUN PICK

RUN=PICK Command

Purpose

Extract selected channels from an event stored in the VAPEPS database.

Command

RUN=PICK NU,VENT NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 FLOW,FHI

Where

NU,VENT - Input event DAL unit and name.

NI,ILI,IV1 - Input vector of channel names to be extracted.

N2,IL2,IV2 - Name of output element.

FLOW, FHI - Desired frequency range (default = I0.,i0000.)

Related Commands

RUN=DATA, RUN=NORM, RUN=GMOD
3.132. RUN PMDS

RUN=PMDS 3-225

RUN=PMDS con_nand

Purpose

This command finds the modes of a simply supported rectangular plate.

Command

RUN=PMDS N1,NVR1

Where

N1,NVR1 - DAL unit and version name to store output. If N1 is input as

a negative value then NI,NVRI is assumed to exist and all the

variables are preset to their previous values.

Notes

The following variables are to be input at the "Input parameters >"

prompt:

A = Length of plate

B = Width of plate

E = Young's modulus

H = Thickness.

RHO = Mass density.

ANU = Poisson's ratio.

M = Mode number (default=l)

N = Mode number (default=l)

The following commands are available at the "Input parameters >" prompt:

LIST - List the values of the above variables.

DONE - Terminate input and calculate frequency.

equivalent to DONE.

QUIT - Exit runstream and save input.

CHECK - Checks for missing variables.

A blank line is
3-226 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.133. POW

POW Command

Purpose

Raise a vector to successive powers. This may be used to construct

polynomials.

Command

POW N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 MM

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input DAL element, a vector (NR,I).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output DAL element, an array (NR,MM).

MM - Number of powers to use.

If MM > 0, use powers 0 through MM-I

If MM < 0, read -MM powers from card immediately following

command.

Notes

The POW command works as follows:

Given an input vector X and a list of integer powers, compute the output

matrix Y as

Y(I,J) = x<I)**IP0W(j)

V
3.134. RUN POWE

RUN=POWE 3-227

RUN=POWER Command

Purpose

This command is used to find the power flow between any two elements via

the specified connection.

Command

RUN=POWER NI,NAME N2,NEL2,NVR2

-DATAWhere

NI,NAME - Name of SEMOD model.

N2,NEL2,NR2 - Name of output vector with power flow. Flow is in

direction specified by order that the path is input.

Output units are consistent with the units the user

specified in CFAC.

1 - Meters, Kilograms, and seconds

2 - Centimeters, Grams, Seconds.

3 - Feet, Slugs, Seconds.

4 - Inches, Snails, Seconds.

(Watts)

(Ergs/sec)

(Ft Lbf/sec)

(In Lbf/sec)

Power = Mass * Length**2 / Time**3

-DATA- - Path for which power flow is to be calculated.
3-228 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.135. RUN POWI

RUN=POWI Command

Purpose

Create or modify power inputs into an SEA theoretical or EXTRAP I model.

Command

RUN=POWI NI,NAME N2,NEL2,NVR2 (IOP)

-ELEMENTWhere

NI,NAME - DAL unit and version name of SEA model for power input.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - DAL unit, element and version name of power input.

IOP - Option to determine mode for existing power input.

= REPLACE - Totally replaces any power inputs into the

specified element. Default.

= ADD - Adds the value of this power input to any

existing power input to the specified element.

= NEW - Will cause any exiting power inputs to

any elements to be replaced.

-ELEMENT- - Element name where power is to be input.

Example

Put a constant power input of i0. into the SEA element SHROUD in SEA

model TEST. i/3 octave frequency range is i0. to 10000. hz.

ECOL I,POWE,R 31,1

31"i0.

RUN=POWIN 1,TEST I,POWE,R

SHROUD

Notes

If a multiple number of power inputs were ADDed together for a single

power input and only one of them is to be replaced then the others will

have to be reADDed to that input.

Related Commands

RUN=TBLP, SEMOD, PREDICT/THEORETICAL, PREDICT/EXTRAP/I
3.136. RUN PRSP

RUN=PRSP 31229

RUN=PRSP Command

Purpose

This runstream is designed to take input SEA element names from a SEMOD

model and plot the names you specified in the units that you specify.

Command

RUN=PRSP NI,NVRI (IOP)

Where

N1,NVR1 - Dal unit and version name of SEMOD model.

IOP - The number of elements that you wish to plot. Excitation

elements can be extracted as well as response elements.

this parameter is omitted then up to l0 elements can be

specified.

= 'ACRO' all acoustic response elements.

= 'ACEO' all acoustic excitation elements.

= 'ACER' all acoustic excitation and response elements.

= '5TRO' all structural response elements.

= 'STEO' all structural excitation elements.

= 'STER' all structural excitation and response elements.

If

Input

The following elements must be present:

NI,'FREQ',NVRI = 1/3 octave center frequency vector.

NI,'RESP',NVR1 = Output from PRDICT. These are the responses of each

element in your model. (#freqs X #resps)

NI,'MNAM',NVR1 = This is a vector of element names.

NI,'IDES',NVRI = This is the descriptor matrix which tells which

elements are excitation and which are response.

NI,'DBFG',NVRI = Unit flag matrix. Output by CFAC.
3-230 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.137. RANDOM

RANDOM Command

Purpose

Creates an array of uniformly distributed random numbers between 0. and 1.

Command

RANDOM NI,ELI,VR1 NR,NC

or

RANC N1,ELI,VRI NR,NC

Where

NI,ELI,VR1 - Name of output vector.

NR,NC - Number of rows and number of cols. (default NC = l)

RANC creates an array of random complex numbers.

Notes

RANDOM creates a unique set of random numbers every time it is called. If

a sequence is desired that can be repeated, enter NR as a negative number,

and the same sequence will always be written.
3.138. RLJUST

RLJUST 3-231

RLJUST Command

Purpose

This command will right justify or left justify (and blank fill) a matrix

containing four character hollerith words.

Command

RLJUST NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 IOP

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input DAL element containing hollerith data.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output DAL element containing right or left justified

hollerith data.

IOP

Related Commands

ORDER

- Operation code. i to right justify and 2 to left justify°
3-232 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.139. RUN ROUN

RUN=ROUND Command

Purpose

Convert floating point elements to integers by rounding to the nearest

integer.

Command

RUN=ROUND NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

N1,ELI,VRI - Input floating point array.

N1,EL2,VR2 - Output integer array.

Related Commands

RTOI
3.140. RUN RRAN

RUN=RRAN 3-233

RUN=RRAN Command

Purpose

Generate a matrix of random numbers that lie between the specified values_

Command

RUN=RRAN NI,ELI,VR1 NR,NC XL,XU

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Name of array to store random numbers.

NR,NC - Number of rows and columns in matrix.

XL,XU - Values between which to generate random numbers.

Related Commands

RANDOM
3-234 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.141. RTOI

V

RTOI Command

Purpose

Real to integer conversion and visa versa.

Command

RTOI NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 IFLG

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input element.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output element.

IFLG - Conversion indicator (optional).

< 0 - Implies integer to real conversion.

> 0 - Implies real to integer conversion.

Notes

RTOI allows the truncation of floating point, or lets the user convert

reals to integers for I/O purposes.

Single precision real arrays are identified by a type code of 1 or -1.

Integer arrays have a type code of 0. RTOI checks the type of the input

element and performs the necessary conversion to the complement type.

If IFLAG is used, the indicated direction must match the operation that

RTOI would have done if it were omitted. If there is a conflict, an error

is returned and the conversion does not take place.
3.142. RUN SAVE

RUN=SAVE 3-235

RUN=SAVE Command

Purpose

Save all PREPed events on the specified DAL file to the master file.

Conmmnd

RUN=SAVE NPRP MAST

Where

NPRP - DAL unit containing PREPed events. (Default = l)

MAST - DAL unit containing master file. (Default = 13)

Note

This stream looks for all elements CFDF/MASK on unit NPRP to determine

which events are worthy of saving. This means that any events that do not

contain a CONFiguration section will be ignored.
3-236 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.143. RUN SAVG

RUN=SAVG Command

Purpose

This command is used to average two input responses from a SEMOD model.

Command

RUN=SAVG N1,NVRI N2,NVR2 N3,NVR3

Where

NI,NVRI - First model of which responses are to be averaged.

N2,NVR2 - Second model of which responses are to be averaged.

N3,NVR3 - Output model to put averaged responses.
RUN=SCSD 3-237

3.144. RUN SCSD

RUN=SCSD Command

Purpose

Calculate Modal Spectral Density based on a SIN(KX/KX) correlation

function.

Command

RUN=SCSD NUFD,NVFD NURD,NVRD SPEED

Where

NUFD,NVFD - DAL unit and version name of input data sets

PF - Input force eigenvectors (#forces,#modes)

JLOC - Input force locations (#forces,3)

SIGN - Input signs (#forces,l)

PSD - Input force PSD (#forces,#frequencies)

MSDF - Frequencies for PSD (#frequencies,l)

NURD,NVRD - DAL unit and version name of output data sets

MSD - Modal Spectral Density matrix (modes,modes)

Second cycle number ranges from 1 to #frequencies.

SPEED - Propagation speed for coupling (Speed of sound). (Default

= air = 13548. in/s) Coupling equation between forcesis:

SQRT(P5D(I)*PSD(J) ) * SIGN(I) * SIGN(J) * SIN(KX)/KX

Where

K - 2*PI*FREQ/SPEED

X - distance between force locations

Notes

This runstream presents an alternate approach to RUN=PSD. It is useful

when you have a large number of coupled forces, as well as a large number

of response points. This runstream is normally used in conjunction with

RUN=CSD2 which essentially back transforms the Modal Spectral Density into

the Response Spectral Density as produced by RUN=PSD.

Warning

This routine uses PF, but it requires that PF be dimensioned FORCES by

MODES which is the transpose of RUN=PSD.
3-238 GENERAL COMMANDS

Execution time

This run can really eat up CPU time, especially if you have a large number

of forces. The good news is that it can be restarted. The output MSD

matrix is initialized to 0. If your run errors off for max time, check MSD

for the last non-zero column. Set the parameter ISC$ to this column number

and the loop will start there.
3.145. SEARCH

SEARCH 31239

SEARCH Command

Purpose

Find locations in a matrix where values lie within a given range or match

an input list of values. SEARCH may also be in a search and change mode.

Command

SEARCH NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

-DATA- (If ICOL < 0)

or

SEARCH NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2

-DATA- (If ICOL < 0)

or

SEARCH NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

-DATA- (If ICOL < 0)

-DATAICOL LOW,HIGH (IBUF, ISCAL)

ICOL HIGH,LOW (IBUF,ISCAL)

ICOL NUM (IBUF, ISCAL)

(Num values, or other, as discussed below)

Wher e

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix to be searched.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output list of matching items.

ICOL - Column search indicator.

> 0 - The particular column to search.

= 0 - Search all columns

< 0 - Search -ICOL columns. User is prompted to enter

column numbers as a single line of data following the

command.

LOW - Values must be .GE. LOW to match

HIGH - Values must be .LE. HIGH to match

NUM - Number of specific values to look for.

> 0 - User will be asked to input NUM values. This data is

read until NUM values have been read. For ICOL < 0,

this data follows the column number data, and applies

to all columns searched.

= 0 - Valid for ICOL < 0 only. The user must enter a

separate LOW,HIGH or HIGH,LOW pair for for each

column searched. Each pair must be entered on a

separate llne.

< 0 - Valid for ICOL < 0 only. The user must enter -NUM

values for each column searched. The values for a

particular column may take as many lines as needed,

but the list for each column must start on a new

line.
3-240 GENERALCOMMANDS

IBUF,ISCAL- Special buffering factors that control the type of data

that is output. Theseare normally omitted from the

command.Note: either both values must be present, or both

values must be omitted. These items are discussed below

under 'Output'.

-DATA- - All data discussed above is entered in VAPEPSfree-field

format. In interactive mode, the user is promptedfor this data.

Notes

The following lines explain the basic search conditions:

MODE1 (LOW,HIGH) LOW.LE.HIGH

Find all values in input matrix A, such that

LOW .LE. A(I,ICOL) .LE. HIGH

MODE 2 (HIGH,LOW) LOW.LE.HIGH

Find all values in input matrix A, such that

A(I,ICOL) .LE. LOW .OR. HIGH .LE. A(I,ICOL)

ie. find all values outside the exclusive range LOW-HIGH

MODE 3 (NUM)

User inputs a list of values ie: VAL(J) J=I,NUM Find all values in input

matrix A such that

A(I,ICOL) = VAL(J) for any J

Output

The basic output item is the element N2,EL2,VR2, which is discussed below.

In addition, SEARCH keeps track of the number of matches as the variable

MCH$. This variable is available following the SEARCH command for use with

other commands.

If ICOL > 0, only one column of A will be searched. In the default output

mode (IBUF,ISCAL not present), only the row numbers of matches will be

returned. These will be output as the vector N2,EL2,VR2.

If ICOL = 0, then all columns will be searched. In the default output mode

(no IBUF,ISCAL), 3 items will be returned for each match: ROW #, COL #,

VALUE. The output element will be a vector with length = 3*number of

matches.

Rows 1,4,7,... contain row numbers

J
SEARCH 3-241

Rows 2,5,8,... contain column numbers

Rows 3,6,9,... contain values

If ICOL < 0, -ICOL columns will be searched. In the default mode, matches

are considered on a row by row basis. Thus all columns must match their

appropriate condition at a given row in order for that row to match. The

matching row numbers will be output as the vector N2,EL2,VR2.

IBUF,ISCAL

The use of these arguments force the output to contain all items

(row,col,value) for each match. For the ICOL < 0 case, it changes the

match condition so that each column is treated separately. I.e. matches are

no longer on a row by row basis. In addition to changing the basic match

condition, it limits the maximum row length of the output element to IBUF

rows. If this length is too small to contain all matches, additional

columns will be used rather than extending the row size.

If ISCAL > 0, then the matching row/col pairs are converted to an integer

pointer as IPOINT = IROW*ISCAL + ICOL In this case only two items are

output per match, eg IPOINT and VALUE.

SPAR buffs will find this latter form very useful in creating SPAR

STRP-type elements -- ie:

* FIRST ZERO LOWER TRIANGULAR HALF

BUILD

IAFJ

MIX

DONE

1,TEMP,MAT &NR,&NC

0,0,i

1,K,MAT 1,1 1,&NC

* NOW SEARCH FOR TERMS WITH ABS-VAL > I.E-6

SET FILT=I.E-6

SEARCH I,TEMP,MAT I,K, STRP 0 &FILT,-&FILT i000,i0000

Search and change mode

SEARCH may also be used to find all values within a certain range, and

change them to a new value. The command SEACHG may be used to initiate

this mode:

SEACHG NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 0 LOW,HIGH NEW

Note that ICOL must be a zero. N2,EL2,VR2 will have the same size as

NI,ELI,VR1. All values of NI,ELI,VRI between LOW and HIGH will be reset to

NEW, before being output to N2,EL2,VR2. The variable MCH$ is set to

indicate the number of values changed.

/

l

i
3-242 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.146. RUN SEND

RUN=SEND Command

Purpose

Finds all the type 5 and 6 elements specified and prints them.

Command

RUN=SEND NU,ELI,VRI,ICI,IC2,IDAT,IDS$

Where

NU,ELI,VRI,ICI, IC2 - DAL unit, element, version and cycles of elements

to print. DAL unit must be specified. Element,

version and cycle numbers can be MASKed.

IDAT - All elements created before this date are

ignored. (Default = 0)

IDS$ - ?????

Notes

If NU is input as negative, then the element

-&NU,&EL1,VR1

is assumed to contain the elements that are to be sent furthermore, this

element is the transposed version of normal 'FINES' elements. The

elements themselves are assumed to be on unit ICI.
3.147. SEQUENCE

SEQUENCE 3-243

SEQUENCE Command

Purpose

Generate an equal spaced linear or logarithmic vector given number of

points, starting value and increment or final value.

Command

SEQUENCE NI,ELI,VRI NPTS START FINC

or

SEQM NI,EL1,VRI NPTS START FINC

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Name of new vector.

NPTS - Length of new vector.

START - Starting value.

FINC - Increment.

Notes

The FORTRAN code for SEQ is

DO i00 I=I,NPTS

100, V(I) = START + (I-I)*FINC

If NPTS < 0, then the value input after START is really the final desired

value and FINC is calculated internally as

FINC = (FINC-START)/(-NPTS-I)

For logarithmic vectors, use SEQM instead of SEQ, which results in the

following code:

DO i00 I=I,NPTS

V(I) = START

i00 START = START*FINC

If NPTS < 0, FINC is recalculated as

FINC = (FINC/START)**(I/(-NPTS-I))
3-244 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.148. RUN SGET

RUN=SGET Command

Purpose

This command is used to extract SEMOD models from an event. It can also

list the names of semod models in an event.

Command

RUN=SGET NI,IVNT (N2,NAME)

Where

NI,IVNT - DAL unit and version name of database event.

N2,NAME - DAL unit number of an empty DAL file and name of the

model to be extracted. I£ omitted the names of the models

on the event are listed out.
RUN=SHIF 3-245

3.149. RUN SHIF

RUN=SHIFT command

Purpose

This runstream takes a model generated by SEMOD and shifts the valid

frequency range for frequency dependant parameters up or down by the

specified amount.

Command

RUN=SHIFT NI,NVRI (N2,NVR2 (SHIFT))

Wher e

N1,NVR1 - DAL unit and version name of your model.

N2,NVR2 - DAL unit and version name of output shifted model.

SHIFT - Fraction of an octave to shift frequency ranges by.

= +l. octave)

(Default

Related Commands

RUN=SAVG
3-246 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.150. SHOCK

SHOCK Command

Purpose

Compute absolute or relative shock spectra for equal spaced time

transients. Output frequency spectrum need not be equal spaced.

Command

SHOCK NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 (ISV(,IREL))

-DATAWhere

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input transient array, one column per transient. #rows =

#time points. All transients must correspond to the same

equal spaced time history.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output shock spectra. #rows = #freqs There will be one or

two columns per transient, depending on ISV.

ISV - Option flag.

= 0 - or omitted. Do not save maximum response times. Output

only maximum values at each frequency (one column

output per transient).

= 1 - Save response times as well as response values. Output

two columns per transient. First column contains

spectra, second contains times.

IREL - Option flag.

= 0 - or omitted. Compute absolute shock spectra.

= 1 - Compute relative shock spectra.

Note

ISV and IREL are optional, but if IREL is present, ISV must be included

even if it is zero.

Data

The following card of data is read in VAPEPS free format.

Q,FI,F2,NF,T0,DT(,MAX,COND)

Where

Q

F1

- Gain factor = l./(2.*critical damping)

- Starting frequency
SHOCK 3-247

F2 - Final frequency

NF - # of frequency points

TO - Time corresponding to first values of transients

DT - Time increment of transients

MAX - Maximum number of time points to use in computation. If MAX >

# input time points, the transient is assumed constant at the

last transient value. If omitted, MAX is set to 10000.

COND - Value of input transients prior to time = T0. If omitted,

COND is set to the value of each transient at time = TO.

Note

MAX and COND are optional, but if COND is used, MAX must be included even

if MAX = i0000

Uneven Frequencies

The above data card will yield spectra for an equal spaced frequency

domain. If desired, the user may create his own frequency vector and

replace

FI,F2,NF

above with

N3,EL3,VR3

where N3,EL3,VR3 is the element containing the desired frequency vector.

In this case the output array will have as many rows as this input

element.

Notes

The SHOCK command uses the same Z-transform technique as SHOCK2 and its

derivatives. Lagrange six point interpolation is used to pinpoint maximums

to DT/5. This is done whenever the maximum lies between time points 4 and

MAX-3 inclusive.

At present the actual response time history at each frequency is not

available to the user.
3-248 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.151. RUN SMAX

RUN=SMAX Command

Purpose

Find the principal stresses and maximum shear given a matrix containg

the x,y and shear stresses.

Command

RUN=SMAX NI,NELI,NVRI N2,NEL2,NVR2

Whet e

NI,NELI,NVRI - Input matrix containing stresses.

Column I - Contains the x stress.

Column 2 - Contains the y stress.

Column 3 - Contains the shear stress.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - Output matrix containing stresses.

Column i - Minimum principal stress.

Column 2 - Maximum principal stress.

Column 3 - Maximum shear stress.

Column 4 - Orientation of principal axes, relative

to x and y. (Degrees)

V
3.152. RUN SNDP

RUN=SNDP 3"-249

RUN=SNDP CoE, nand

Purpose

Finds all elements that have been changed since IDAT and sends them. Note

that elements are grouped according to the first cycle number. Each group

is prefaced by a list of elements in that group.

Command

RUN=SNDP NU, IDAT

Where

NU - DAL unit to find elements on.

IDAT - All element created before this date are ignored.

Notes

If IDAT is input as a negative number, the element 28,TOC,LIST is assumed

to already exist. In this case, only those elements contained in the list

will be sent.
3-250 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.153. RUN SNPV

RUN=SNPV Command

Purpose

This command is used to calculate the percentile value for responses from

a SEMOD model.

Command

RUN=SNPV NI,NAMI N2,NAM2 (PERC (IOP))

Where

NI,NAMI - DAL unit and name of your model.

N2,NAM2 - DAL unit and name to output data to.

PERC - Percentile value. Default = .95

IOP - Option to input Standard deviations or skew factors.

= 'SDO' - Prompts for a vector of values for the standard

deviation. One value for each frequency.

= 'SFO' - Prompts for a vector of values of the skew factor.

One value for each frequency. It can be input as a

single number which will be used for the entire

frequency range.

= 'SDSF' - Prompts for both the skew factor and the standard

deviation.

If IOP is omitted then the Standard deviation is calculated

based on Std. Dev / Mean = 1.57 The skew factor is set to

1.225

Input

The following elements must be present.

NI,'RESP',NAMI = Response matrix output from TPRD.

NI,'DBFG',NAMI = Conversion flag matrix output from CFAC.

NI,'IDES',NAMI = Descriptor matrix output from ATACO.

NI,'FREQ',NAMI = Frequency vector output from MDENS.

NI,'MNAM',NAM1 = Model name matrix output from ELNAME.

Output

The following elements are output.

N2,'RESP',NAM2 = Percentile value of prediction.

N2,'DBFG',NAM2 = Conversion flag matrix.
RUN=SNPV 3-251

N2,'FREQ',NAM2 = Frequency vector.

N2,'MNAM',NAM2 = Model name matrix.

This output is setup so that you can use LIST in 5EMOD or RUN=PRSP to plot

your results.

Notes

This runstream uses the RUN=TPVL command to calculated percentile values.

Related Commands

RUN=TPVL, RUN=STAS
3-252 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.154. RUN SPIL

RUN=SPILL Command

Purpose

Spill all events from the specified DAL unit to a symbolic form which is

suitable for transmittal to other sites.

Command

RUN=SPILL NU NOUT,NAME,NAMV, ICI,IC2

Where

NU - DAL unit to get events from.

NOUT,NAME,NAMV,ICI,IC2 - DAL unit, element, version and cycle numbers

of output symbolic element.

Transferring the VAPEP5 data base

This document contains instructions on

l) How to create a VAPEPS SPILL tape from your system

2) Notes on how the destination site may read the tape.

Creating the SPILL tape

Creation of the tape involves two main steps.

I) Using the RUN=SPILL command to convert binary data base files to DAL

symbolic datasets. One symbolic dataset is produced per data base

file.

2) Using WTAPE to write the symbolic datasets to the tape.

Assume there are three files to be copied to tape. The first step is to

define these files as DAL units 1,2, and 3 respectively. (Any DAL units

may be used, i-3 are used here as an example)

Univac

@ASG,A DATABASE*ONE.

CDC

ATTACH, DAL 001=DBONE.
RUN=SPIL 3-253

@USE DAL001.,DATABASE*ONE.

@ASG,A DATABASE*TWO.

@USE DAL002.,DATABASE*TWO.

@ASG,A DATABASE*THREE.

@USE DAL003.,DATABASE*THREE.

ATTACH,DAL002=DBTWO.

ATTACH,DAL003=DBTHREE.

VAX

$DEFINE DAL001 [DATABASE]ONE

$DEFINE DAL002 [DATABASE]TWO

SDEFINE DAL003 [DATABASE]THREE

The next step is to SPILL each file onto one temporary DAL file.

execute VAPEPS ( @XQT V.VAPEPS, VAPEPS, or $VAPEPS)

* SET BLOCKING INFORMATION (# RECORDS/BLOCK, # CHARS/RECORD)

* 60 80

SET NRB$=60, NCR$=80

* SPILL each file to a different data set name

RUN=SPILL 1,20,SPIL,DECK, I,0

RUN=SPILL 2,20,SPIL,DECK,2,0

RUN=SPILL 3,20,SPIL,DECK, 3,0

* Copy these files to tape. Note that a tape unit must be

* assigned prior to the following commands. They assume tape

* unit 4 is being used. (VAX -- TAPE04, CDC -- TAPE04,

* UNIVAC -- 4 )

CYCLE 1,0

WTAPE 20, SPIL, DECK 4,1

CYCLE 2,0

WTAPE 20, SPIL, DECK 4,2

CYCLE 3,0

WTAPE 20,SPIL,DECK 4,3

END

Note

AS written above, the tape will contain info in whatever language your

system uses. Eg a VAX will produce an ASCII tape. CDC will produce CYBER

data, Univac will produce FIELDATA info. The documentation below indicates

that the tapes are in ASCII, so you may use CRYPT before writing the tape

if you want.

a) If you have a CDC, and are transmitting to another CDC, you might as

well leave the code in CYBER. You should amend the following
3-254 GENERAL COMMANDS

documentation accordingly.

b) If you want to convert your data to ASCII, CRYPT may be used:

* UNIVAC

CYCLE 1,0

CRYPT 20,SPIL,DECK

= 30,FLDT,ASCI

* CDC

CYCLE 1,0

CRYPT 20,SPIL,DECK

= 30,CYBR,ASCI

20,NEW, DECK 6,9 0,63

20,NEW,DECK 6,8 0,63

Installing the data base from tape

Once VAPEPS has been successfully loaded on your system, you can start

loading up the data base. Typically you will have one or more 'spill'

tapes that contain events from other sites. Each tape may contain several

different events.

The data on tape consists of symbolic records that comprise a PREP

runstream. The runstream may be 'added' to VAPEPS and will create a DAL

data file. The naming of the DAL file is left up to the receiving site.

Once the DAL files are created, the ADMIN processor must be used to save

the files on the master DAL file.

Tape Formats

In general, you may receive data base 'spill' tapes from any other site

that uses VAPEPS. The standard tape is unlabeled with blocked fixed-length

records. Normally there will be 80 characters per record, and 60 records

per block. The standard encoding language is Ascii.

The tape may be read with the TDUMPS command in VAPEPS. On some systems it

will be necessary to convert the ASCII characters to a native code. The

CRYPT command may be used to perform this task.

VAX stream to read tape

The following runstream will read the tape on a VAX.

$@VAPEPS:INIT ! Add standard VAPEPS initialization

SMOUNT MTA0:/FOREIGN

SDEFINE TAPE04 MTA0:

$SET DEFAULT [wherever.the.DAL.files.are.to.be.created]

SVAPEPS

* FIRST, READ ALL FILES FROM TAPE TO A TEMPORARY FILE
RUN=SPIL 3-255

TDUMPS 4,1,100 28, TAPE, DUMP 5000 6

,

* THEN, EXIT VAPEPS, AND FREE TAPE

END

SDISMOUNT MTA0 :

$!

S f NOW, ASSIGN A NAME FOR EACH OUTPUT FILE

SDEFINE DAL001 name-for-first-file

$DEFINE DAL002 name-for-second-file

$VAPEPS

* FIRST FILE FROM TAPE

CYCLE i, 1

CHANGJ 28,TAPE,DUMP 60

SET NPRP = 1

##READ 28, TAPE, DUMP

* SECOND FILE FROM TAPE

CYCLE 2,1

CHANGJ 28, TAPE, DUMP 60

SET NPRP = 2

# #READ 28, TAPE, DUMP

* AND SO ON

RUN=SAVE 1

RUN=SAVE 2

END

@ 60 RECORDS PER BLOCK

@ DEFINE OUTPUT DAL UNIT

@ ADD'S THE CARDS

THE FILES MAY BE ADDED TO MASTER FILE BY USING THE SAVE RUNSTREAM

NOTE THAT YOU MUST HAVE WRITE ACCESS TO THE MASTER FILE IN ORDER

TO 'SAVE' THE NEW EVENTS.

UNIVAC stream to read tape

The following will read a tape on the UNIVAC.

@ADD VAPEPS*VAPEPS.INIT

@ASG,T TAPE.,U9,reel number

@USE 4.,TAPE.

@XQT V.VAPEPS

* FIRST, READ ALL EILES FROM TAPE
3-256 GENERAL COMMANDS

TDUMPS 4,1,100 28,TAPE,DUMP 5000 6

* EXIT VAPEP5, AND FREE TAPE

* THEN PREPARE AN OUTPUT FILE FOR EACH FILE READ FROM TAPE

END

@FREE 4.

@ASG,UP NAME-OF-FIRST*OUTPUT-FILE.

@U5E DAL001.,NAME-OF-FIRST*OUTPUT-FILE.

@ASG,UP NAME-OF-SECOND*OUTPUT-FILE.

@USE DAL002.,NAME-OF-SECOND*OUTPUT-FILE.

@XQT V.VAPEPS

* NOW, LOOP ON FILES

* FIRST FILE FROM TAPE

.

CYCLE i,i

CHANGJ 28,TAPE,DUMP 60

* CONVERT TO FIELDATA

CRYPT 28,TAPE,DUMP

= 30,ASCI,FLDT

* NOW, ADD FILE

SET NPRP = 1

##READ 28,FLDT,DUMP

* SECOND FILE FROM TAPE

CYCLE 2,1

CHANGJ 28,TAPE,DUMP 60

.

* CONVERT TO FIELDATA

CRYPT 28,TAPE,DUMP 28,FLDT,DUMP

= 30,ASCI,FLDT

* NOW, ADD FILE

SET NPRP = 2

##READ 28,FLDT,DUMP

* AND SO ON

@ 60 RECORDS PER BLOCK

28,FLDT,DUMP 8,6 0,127

@ DEFINE OUTPUT DAL UNIT

@ ADD'S THE CARDS

8,6 0,127

THE FILES MAY BE ADDED TO MASTER FILE BY USING THE SAVE RUNSTREAM

NOTE THAT YOU MUST HAVE WRITE ACCESS TO THE MASTER FILE IN ORDER

TO 'SAVE' THE NEW EVENTS.
RUN=SPIL 3-257

RUN=SAVE 1

RUN=SAVE 2

END

CDC stream to read tape

The control cards needed on a CDC system will depend on the particular

system you have. In some cases you will have to stage the tape, in other

cases, you can access the tape directly. In either case, TDUMPS may be

used to read the tape (it uses BUFFER IN)

The following stream may be used once in VAPEPS

* FIRST, READ ALL FILES FROM TAPE

TDUMPS 4,1,i00 28, TAPE, DUMP

* EXIT VAPEPS, AND FREE TAPE

* THEN, RE-ENTER VAPEPS

END

* NOW, LOOP ON FILES

*

* FIRST FILE FROM TAPE

CYCLE i, 1

CHANGJ 28,TAPE,DUMP 60

* CONVERT TO CYBER CODE

CRYPT 28, TAPE, DUMP 28, CYBR, DUMP

= 30,ASCI, CYBR

* NOW, ADD FILE

SET NPRP = 1

FNAME I, 'FILENAM'

##READ 28, CYBR, DUMP

* SECOND FILE FROM TAPE

CYCLE 2,1

CHANGJ 28, TAPE, DUMP 60

* CONVERT TO CYBER

CRYPT 28, TAPE, DUMP

5000 6

@ 60 RECORDS PER BLOCK

8,6 0,127

@ DEFINE OUTPUT DAL UNIT

@ GIVE THE FILE A NAME

@ ADD'S THE CARDS

28,CYBR,DUMP 8,6 0,127
3-258 GENERAL COMMANDS

= 30, ASCI, CYBR

* NOW, ADD FILE

SET NPRP = 2

FNAME 2, 'NEWNAME'

##READ 28, CYBR, DUMP

* AND SO ON

*

* THE FILES MAY BE ADDED TO MASTER FILE BY USING THE SAVE RUNSTREAM

* NOTE THAT YOU MUST HAVE WRITE ACCESS TO THE MASTER FILE IN ORDER

* TO 'SAVE' THE NEW EVENTS.

RUN=SAVE 1

RUN=SAVE 2

END

After the second execution of VAPEPS, you should include appropriate

control cards that will save the files as permanent files, or write the

created DAL files to a save tape.

L_
3.155. RUN SPIN

RUN=SPIN 3-259

RUN=SPIN Command

Purpose

Finds all elements and writes them in a manner they can be reentered into

VAPEPS.

Command

RUN=SPIN NU, ILI,IVI,ICI,IC2 NOUT

Where

NU, ILI, IVl,ICI,IC2 - DAL unit, element, version and cycles of elements

to be written. DAL unit must be specified.

Element, version and cycles can be MASKed.

NOUT - Fortran unit to direct output.

Notes

If NU is negative, the element 28,ILl,lVl,ICI,IC2 is assumed to contain

the result of a FIND operation transposed.
3-260 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.156. RUN SPRE

RUN=SPREP Command

Purpose

This command is used to put a SEMOD model into an already existing event.

It also asso.ciates channels with each element in the SEMOD model.

Command

RUN=SPREP NI, IVNT N2,NAME

Where

NI,IVNT - DAL unit and event name of PREPed event.

N2,NAME - DAL unit and model name of SEMOD model.

Notes

Only the information input in ELNAME, PATHNAME, FPAR, FREQUENCY, SETEXC,

and TEXT is saved.
3.157. SREAD

SREAD 3-261

SREAD Command

Purpose

Read data images from file. Records may be up to 132 characters long.

Increments may be input which enable the reading of upper and lower

triangular matrices. The only restriction of SREAD is that matrices must

be read a column at a time.

Command

SREAD NI,ELI,VR1 NR,NC NU IST,IFN, INC JST,JFN,JNC

(FORMAT)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Name of output element.

NR - Number of rows in output element.

NC - Number of columns of output element.

NU - FORTRAN unit where card images are read.

> 0 - Unit is rewound after read.

< 0 - Unit is not repositioned after read.

IST, IFN,INC - Starting row, final row and increment for first column.

JST,JFN,JNC - Increments of above quantities for each successive

column.

FORMAT - Format to be used when reading file. The format must be

enclosed in parentheses.

Description

SREAD always reads column by column. The default is to produce a real type

dataset (type i). Alternate forms may be used for integer or double

precision:

SREADD - Matrix will be double precision (type 2) Be sure to use

FORTRAN 'D' type format.

SREADI - Matrix will be integer (type 0). On most systems you may input

mixed hollerith, real and integer using this type.

The following FORTRAN statements indicate exactly how the matrix is read.

DIMENSION A(NR,NC)

CALL MOVER(0,0,A,I,NR*NC)

DO i00 J=I,NC

READ(NU,1000) (A(I,J),I=IST, IFN, INC)
3-262 GENERAL COMMANDS

IST = IST + JST

IFN = IFN + JFN

INC = INC + JNC

i00 CONTINUE

i000 FORMAT(FORMAT)

If you are unsure about how to set 15T, IFN, INC,JST,JFN,JNC simply sketch

out a FORTRAN program which would read the data you have. If your data is

really set up to be read row by row, then you may still use this command,

but the resulting matrix should be transposed.

You may not skip over any of the command items, but only the first six

quantities are essential. The remaining items have preset values and need

not be included unless items later in the list need to be changed.

Preset values

NU = 5

IST = 1

IFN = NR

INC = 1

JST = 0

JFN = 0

JNC = 0

(records may not exceed 80 chars.)
3.158. SSTRNG

SSTRNG 3-263

SSTRNG Command

Purpose

Given a list of integers, find all columns of an input matrix that contain

all of the integers. Output a list of column numbers and optionally a bit

map for each matched column, which indicates which rows were matched.

Command

SSTRNG NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 N4,EL4,VR4

Where

N1,ELI,VRI - Input integer vector (NR, I)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input integer matrix to be searched (MR, I)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output integer vector of column numbers (MS,l)

N4,EL4,VR4 - Optional output bit map vector (MS*LB,I)

MS - # of matching columns

LB - length of each bit map = (MR-I)/30 + 1

The number of matches is returned as the variable MS.

No output elements are produced if there are no matches.
3-264 GENERAL COMMAND5

3.159. RUN STAC

RUN=STACK Conm_nd

Purpose

Print element from DAL unit 1 to a Fortran unit in such a way that they

can be transmitted to another machine and reread into VAPEPS.

Command

RUN=STACK NI,ELI,VR1 NOUT

Where

NOUT

Related Commands

RUN=SPIN

NI,EL1,VRI - Input matrix containing element names -- size = (N,4)

Column 1 = Element name.

2 = Version name.

3 = First cycle number.

4 = Second cycle number.

- Output Fortran unit (Default = i)
3.160. RUN STAS

RUN=STAS 3-265

RUN=STAS Command

Purpose

RUN=STAS calculates the following statistical quantities for each row of

your input matrix:

Normal distribution Log-normal distribution

-mean,

-standard deviation,

-ninety-fifth percentile,

-and maximum (envelope).

-mean,

-standard deviation,

-fiftieth-percentile,

-ninety-fifth percentile,

-and maximum (envelope).

The command also displays a tabular listing of the results.

Command

RUN=STAS N1,EL1,VR1 N2,VR2 (PRIN)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input data element, size: (#rows x #columns).

N2,VR2 - Dal unit and version name of the OUTPUT elements

containing the statistical results, see OUTPUT.

PRIN - (optional) Print option.

= 6 - (default) tables of normal and log-normal statistics

are printed on your terminal's screen.

= 0 - Tables are not printed.

> 0 - Tables are printed to FORTRAN unit PRIN.

Output

N2,STAN,VR2 - Element containing normal distribution statistics, size:

(#rows x 4), arranged as follows:

Col Statistic

1 - arithmetic mean

2 - standard deviation

3 - ninety-fifth percentile

4 - maximum (envelope)
3-266 GENERALCOMMANDS

N2,STAL,VR2- Element containing log-normal distribution statistics,

size: (#rows x 5), arranged as follows:

Col Statistic

1 - mean, sameas STAN

2 - fiftieth percentile

3 - standard deviation

4 - ninety-fifth percentile

5 - maximum,sameas STAN

Equations

For normal distribution statistics:

m = (sum of x)/n

sn = ((for i=l,n: (x - m)**2)/(n-l))**.5

n95% = m+(sn*l.645/gf)

gf = (l.0212-((.89447*n)**(-.5848))-.0033sin(pi,log,base10,n))

For log-normal distribution statistics:

im = (sum of logx)/n

sl = ((for i=l,n: (logx - Im)**2)/(n-1))**.5

in50% = antilog(Im)

ins = antilog(sl)

in95% = antilog(im+(sl*l.645/gf))

Whet e

n - Number of samples.

x - Sample value.

m - Arithmetic mean (part of 0UTPUT).

sn - Standard deviation, normal distribution (part of OUTPUT).

n95% - Ninety-fifth percentile (50% confidence), normal

distribution (part of OUTPUT).

gf - Gumbel factor (corrects standard deviation for small sample

sizes).

im - Mean of logged data,

sl - Standard deviation of logged data.

in50% - Fiftieth-percentile in original units, log-normal

distribution (part of OUTPUT).

ins - Standard deviation of logged data in original units (part of

OUTPUT).

In95% - Ninety-flfth percentile (50% confidence) in original units,

log-normal distribution (part of OUTPUT).

V
3.161. STAT

STAT 3-267

STAT Command

Purpose

Compute the mean and standard deviation of a set of numbers. Stat will

also compute mean + or - 3 sigma values for a series of maxmin arrays.

Command

STAT NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 NCASE,SIG, ICASE

Where

N1,EL1,VRI - Name of input element(s)

N2,EL2,VR2 - Name of output element

NCASE - Number of cases considered

SIG - Option flag.

<= 0 - Compute mean and standard deviation (Default = 0)

> 0 - Compute mean + or - SIG*sigma

SIG must be a real number (ie., Use decimal point)

ICASE - Optional starting case number for evaluation of max-min

tables (default = I).

Notes

STAT may be used in two completely different instances. The first is when

you have one array or vector to be analyzed. Here your sample size is

equal to the number of rows, and you evaluate the mean and standard

deviation for each column. The number of rows output will equal the number

of columns input. There will be two columns output, for means and standard

deviations respectively. To use this mode, set NCASE equal to 1 and SIG

equal to zero.

The second type of problem involves the statistical analysis of a group of

max-min tables. Here NCASE is set to the number of max-min tables

involved. Your sample size is equal to the number of cases. The output

element will have as many rows as there were in the input elements. Note

that all input elements must have the same dimensions. The number of input

columns will usually be four, but STAT can handle two columns as well. In

fact, if your arrays have four columns, STAT assumes the second and fourth

columns are times and ignores them.

All elements input will have the name NI,ELI,VRI. They are distinguished

by the presence of a non-zero first cycle number. The second cycle number

must be 0. It is important to note that the input cycles as set by the
3-268 GENERALCOMMANDS

CYCLEcommandhave no effect on the reading of these elements. If NCASE is

i0 (for example), then ten elements will be read. These elements will

have first cycle numbers of 1 - i0 resp. If ICASE were entered as 4, then

cycles 4 - 13 would be accessed.

Now that the reading of these elements is taken care of, consider what the

output element will look like. This depends on the value of SIG.

If SIG is .LE. 0, Then four columns are output. The first will contain the

means of the input maximums and the second will contain the standard

deviations of the input maximums. The next two columns will contain the

same quantities for the input minimums.

If SIG > 0, then only two columns will be output. The first column will be

mean plus SIG times the standard deviation of the maximums, and the second

will be the mean minus SIG times the standard deviation of the input

minimums. Ie: If SIG = 3, then mean + 3 sigma and mean - 3 sigma values

are calculated for maximums and minimums respectively.

The following example should help those who are lost (count me in this

group):

STAT i XNA RUN1 1 SIGA RUN1 27 3

would read 27 elements and produce one element called 'SIGA'/ 'RUN1' on

DAL unit I. This element would have two columns and as many rows as there

were on the 27 'XNA'/'RUNI' elements.

There are two main ways of evaluating the standard deviation of a set of

data. One method (biased) involves the division by the square root of the

number of samples. The other method (unbiased) divides by the square root

of n-l. Because the latter gives a larger (more conservative) value for

the standard deviation, it is used in this command.
RUN=STAT 3-269

3.162. RUN STAT

RUN=STAT Command

Purpose

Calculate statistics on input data sets.

Command

RUN=STAT NORM NUI,IVl NU2,IV2 NU3,NM3,1V3 FI,F2 IOUT, ITYP,ITIT, IRU

Where

NORM - Indicates type of data in NUI,IV1. If 'NORM' = 0,

NUI,IVl is assumed to refer to PREPed data. If 'NORM' >

0, NUI,IVl is assumed to refer to output from RUN=NORM.

NUI,lVl - DAL unit and event name.

NU2,IV2 - Unit and version for output.

NU3,NM3,IV3 - Element containing channel names.

FI,F2 - Frequency range.

IOUT - Fortran output unit. Printed output is suppressed if

IOUT is not specified.

ITYP - Element name for output elements.

ITIT - 'EXC' or 'RESP' for excitation data and response data,

respectively.

IRU - Type of data. i for acoustic, 2 for random vibration.

Related Commands

RUN=STTS, RUN=STAL, RUN=NORM
3-270 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.163. STORE

STORE Command

Purpose

Modify the value of one term in an array.

Co,_nand

STORE VAL N1,ELI,VR1 IROW, ICOL

STORE VAL N1,ELI,VRI ICI,IC2 IROW, ICOL

STORI IVAL N1,ELI,VR1 IROW, ICOL

STORI IVAL NI,ELI,VRI ICI,IC2 IROW, ICOL

Wher e

VAL - Floating point number.

IVAL - Integer.

NI,ELI,VRI - DAL element to be modified.

ICI,IC2 - Optional cycle numbers of element to be modified. If

omitted, IC1 and IC2 default to last input cycles defined

through CYCLE command.

IROW, ICOL - Array location to be modified.

Notes

Store is 'dumb' in that it does not know the type of value you are

inserting. Thus if the value is a floating point number, you must use

STORE. If the value is an integer, you must use STORI.

If STORE is used and the array is real, the value is stored without

conversion. If the array is not real, a real to integer conversion is

done on VAL prior to insertion.

If STORI is used and the array is real, a conversion takes place.

Otherwise there is no conversion.
3.164. STRESS

STRESS 3-271

STRESS Command

Purpose

This command calculates a theoretical spatial average mean-square stress

for flat plate, curved plate, cylinder or a user defined ratio of

mean-square stress to mean-square displacement based on an input

mean-square acceleration response.

Command

STRESS N1,NAME F1,F2 IOP

Where

N1,NAME - DAL unit and version name of stress model.

F1,F2 - Frequency range.

IOP - Case from the following:

= 1 - Simply supported isotropic flat plate.

= 2 - Simply supported isotropic cylinder.

= 3 - User defined ratio of mean-square stress to mean

displacement.

= 4 - Simply supported isotropic curved plate.

square

Input

The following elements are required for input.

NI,'RESP',NAME - Mean-square acceleration response. Required for all

options. Units of acceleration must be consistent with

the desired output units of stress, eg. acceleration

units = (IN/SEC**2)**2 stress units = (PSI)**2 Use the

CONVERT command to convert accelerations to the

desired units.

NI,'FRMN',NAME - Modal frequencies. Required for IOP=3 only. These

modes must be in sequential order. Use the ORDER

comma_ to sort the modes if needed.

NI,'RATO',NAME - Ratio of mean-square stress to mean-square response

as defined by user. Required for IOP=3 only. The

rat_o's are to be in the same order as the modal

frequencies.

Output

The following elements are output.
3-272 GENERALCOMMANDS

NI, 'STRS',NAME- Stress at each band.

NI, 'NMPB' ,NAME - Number of modes in each band.

Notes

The calculation of mean-square stress is based on a derived value of the

ratio of mean-square stress to mean square displacement. The following

three cases are provided. In case 1), 2), and 4) the ratio is calculated

for you. In case 3) you provide the ratio at each modal frequency and the

stress is averaged over each band.

l) The calculation of the ratio of spatial average mean-square stress to

spatial average mean square displacement for a plate and associated

frequencies over a frequency band.

2) The calculation of the ratio of spatial average mean-square stress to

spatial average mean square displacement for a cylinder and associated

frequencies over a frequency band.

3) The calculation of the mean-square stress over the frequency band

based on input of a user defined ratio of spatial average mean-square

stress to spatial average mean-square displacement and associated

frequencies.

4) The calculation of the ratio of spatial average mean-square stress to

spatial average mean square displacement for a curved plate and

associated frequencies over a frequency band.

The cases i), 2), and 4) prompt for parameter input from the following

list of parameters:

Type 1 Type 2 Type 4 Description

E

NU

H

L

W

RHOS

EA

ZC

E

NU

H

L

R

RHOS

EA

ZC

E

NU

H

L

R

RHOS

EA

ZC

THETAO

Equivalent Young's modulus.

Poisson's ratio.

Equivalent thickness.

Length of plate or cylinder.

Width of plate.

Radius of cylinder.

Equivalent surface mass density.

Actual Young's modulus of material at the

location of the stress.

Distance from the centroid to the desired

stress location.

Angle subtended by panel in radians.

No parameters are required for case 3.
STRESS 3-273

If other than 1/3 octave frequencies are desired use the FREQUENCY/SET

command.

Refer to NASA Contractor Report 180783 "VAPEPS IMPROVEMENT WITH STRESS

ESTIMATION AND PROGRESSIVE WAVE EXCITATION", Y. A. Lee, D. Crowe, and W.

Henricks, June 1987, for more information including derivation of

equations and verification.
3-274 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.165. RUN STTS

RUN=STTS Command

Purpose

Calls RUN=STAT to produce a printed listing of assorted statistical

information and create output elements required to compute statistical

information for predicted responses.

Command

RUN=STTS NORM NI,IVl N2,1V2 F1,F2 lOUT MODE IXM N3,NM3,IV3 IRM N4,NM4,IV4,IV5

Where

NORM - Integer code indicating source of data.

= 0 - Data will be extracted directly from the event file (

no normalization ).

> 0 - Output from run=norm will be used to compute

statistics.

< 0 - User input data set. Will prompt for input element

na_ne.

NI,IVI - DAL unit and version of the element containing 'prepped'

data for 'NORM'=0, or DAL unit and version containing

output from RUN=NORM for 'NORM' > 0.

M2,IV2 - DAL unit and version for output elts. If MODE=3, IV2 is

the version for excitation output elements.

FI,F2 - Lower and upper i/3-octave frequencies.

lOUT - Fortran unit for printed output. Printed output is

suppressed if out=0.

MODE - Mode of operation.

= 1 - Excitation data only.

= 2 - Response data only.

= 3 - Both excitation and response data.

IXM - Type of data in channels specified in N3,NM3,1V3.

= 1 - Acoustic data.

= 2 - Random vibration data.

N3,NM3,IV3 - DAL unit, name and version of element containing channel

names. For MODE=I or MODE=3, these are excitation

channels. For MODE=2, these are response channels. If

NORM=l, this element is the CHAN element created by

RUN=NORM. Using any other source for the channel names

could result in improper identification of the channels in

the listing.

IRM - Type of data in channels specified by names in N4,NM4,IV4.

Required only if MODE=3.
RUN=STTS 3-275

= 1 - Acoustic data.

= 2 - Random vibration data.

N4,NM4,IV4 - Required only if MODE=3. Then, N4,NM4,IV4 specify the DAL

unit, name and version of the element con- taining the

names of the response channels.

IV5 - Required only if MODE=3. IV5 is the version for response

output elements when both excitation and response data are

specified.

Output

NI,'FREQ',IVl - Contains 1/3 octave frequencies. (#freqs X l)

NI,'STAT',IVl - Contains four columns as follows: (#freqs X 4)

1 - Average of data - g**2/Hz.

2 - Antilog of average of logs of data.

3 - Antilog of 95th percentile level of logs of data.

4 - Maximum values of data.

NI,'SOVR',IVl - Overall levels of columns 1-4 of 'STAT' (4Xl)

NI,'PROB',IVl - Ordered data (low to high) (#accels X #freqs)

When IV5 is input there is another set of data the same as

above with an output version of IV5.

Interactive mode

If no arguments are input then the user is prompted for input.
3-276 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.166. RUN SUBC

RUN=SUBC Programmer's Command

Purpose

Allows you to remove commands in a setcom subroutine

Command

RUN=SUBC OLD NEW NIN NOUT

Where

OLD = Version name of existing ABV, CALL, and EPS matrices

NEW = Version name for new elements created here

NIN = Unit number for input (default = l)

NOUT= Unit number for output (default = 2)

Related Commands

RUN=ADDC, RUN=BSC, RUN=GCL5
3.167. RUN SUM

RUN=SUM 3-277

RUN=SUM NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 ITYP

RUNSTREAM COMPUTES THE SUMMATION OF A GROUP OF DATA BY ROWS OR COLUMNS.

DEFAULT MODE IS AN SUMMATION OF COLUMNS.

N1,ELI,VRI = INPUT ARRAY (NR,NC)

N2,EL2,VR2 = OUTPUT VECTOR OF SUMMED NUMBERS

(NR,I) FOR ITYP='ROW' (NC,1) FOR ITYP='COL'

ITYP = CHARACTER STRING INDICATING WHETHER TO SUM

THE ROWS ('ROW') OR THE COLUMNS ('COL')

ITYP DEFAULTS TO 'COL'

AUTHOR: D M PARK 9/9/83
3-278 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.168. SYMIN

SYMIN Command

Purpose

Write card images to a type 5 or type 6 DAL element.

Command

5YMIN NU,ELN,VER ICI,IC2 NOUT

CARD 1

CARD 2

LAST CARD

SEOF

Where

NU,ELN,VER - Output DAL element.

ICI,IC2 - Cycle number.

NOUT - FORTRAN unit for reading card images. (Default NOUT = 5)

Notes

Cards are read until either an EOF is sensed, or until the word SEOF is

read as the first four characters of a line. In some cases (embedded

SYMIN's) it is desirable to use a different word than SEOF to terminate

the read. The command form 5YMEND allows the specification of any name as

follows:

SYMEND NU,ELN,VER ICI,IC2 NOUT NAME

Where

NAME - Is the new terminator word. The convention is that the last

word entered on the command is taken as the terminator, and

the command is essentially reissued. Thus any or all of

ICI,IC2 NOUT may be omitted prior to NAME.

DAL element types (5 or 6)

SYMIN may create either type 5 or type 6 DAL elements. The type created

depends on the value of the variables NCR$ and NRB$. If these variables

are not set, SYMIN will produce a type 5 element (variable record length).
SYMIN 3-279

If set, NCR$ = number of characters per record (ie 80) and NRB$ = number

of records per block (ie 60), and SYMIN will produce a fixed record length

element (type 6) according to the defined conventions.

Editor (5YMED)

SYMIN may be used as a batch type editor, by using the command

SYMED N1, ELI,VR1

- correction cards

SEOF

Correction cards are of the form

-2,3 (delete lines 2 through 3)

NEW LINE (insert after original line l)

-6

NEW LINE (insert after original line 6)

--* (change correction indicator to *)

*7,7 (delete original line 7)

Notes

Correction cards must be specified in order. You cannot go back to the top

of the element.
3-280 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.169. RUN TBLP

RUN=TBLP Command

Purpose

Calculate the power input for an SEA model which has aerodynamic noise

caused by the unsteady pressure fluctuations in the turbulent boundary

layer (TBL) which evelopes a cylinder or flat plate.

Command

RUN=TBLP NI,NAME N2,NEL2,NVR2 N3,NEL3,NVR3 ITYPE

Where

NI,NAME - The DAL unit and name of a 5EMOD model.

The only required input matrix is &NI,'FREQ',&NAME.

N2,NEL2,NVR2 - DAL unit, element and version of excitation vector.

Units must be consistent to parameters.

N3,NEL3,NVR3 - Output DAL unit, element and version which contains

the power input.

ITYPE - Type of structure.

= CYLINDER - Cylinder.

= PLATE - Flat plate.

Parameters

Cylinder

RHO

H

R

AREA

CL

VEL

TBLT

RATU

Mass density of cylinder.

Thickness of cylinder.

Radius of cylinder.

Area of turbulent boundary layer.

Longitudinal wave speed of cylinder.

Free stream velocity.

Turbulent Boundary Layer Thickness.

Ratio of turbulent boundary layer velocity to free

free stream velocity. Default = .75

Flat plate

H

RHO Mass density of plate

Thickness of plate
RUN=TBLP 3-281

AREA

CL

VEL

TBLT

RATU

Area of turbulent boundary layer.

Longitudinal wave speed of plate

Free stream velocity.

Turbulent Boundary Layer Thickness.

Ratio of turbulent boundary layer velocity to free

free stream velocity. Default = .75
3-282 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.170. RUN TCPY

RUN=TCPY Command

Purpose

Copy all enabled elements from the specified DAL unit to the specified

tape unit.

Command

RUN=TCPY NU,NTAP

Where

NU - DAL unit to copy from.

NTAP - Tape unit to copy to.

Notes

The first file on tape is a table of contents for all transferred

elements. This TOC is a matrix (NELT,13)

This runstream does not do any conversion between machines.
3.171. TDUMP

TDUM9 3-283

TDUMP Command

Purpose

Dump a tape (or portion thereof) to a DAL file. All records need not be the

same length, and the record lengths and the number of records do not have

to be known before the read.

Command

TDUMP NTAPE,IF,JF NU,ELN,VER MXLENG, ITYPE

Whet e

NTAPE

IF

JF

NU

ELN

VER

- Logical unit number of the tape.

- First file to be read.

- Last file to be read.

- DAL unit for output.

- Output element name.

- Output version name.

MXLENG - Maximum record length. MXLENG is default to 1000 words, and

may be omitted if this is acceptable.

ITYPE - Type of matrix that will be produced. The default is ITYPE = 0

Notes

The tape is first rewound and positioned to the starting file (IF). Then,

a binary read is done of MXLENG words. The actual number of words

transmitted will be less than or equal to MXLENG. A DAL element is opened

on DAL unit NU with ELN,VER as the element/verslon name. The first cycle

number is set to the file number, and the second cycle number is set to 1

• The number of rows in this element is equal to the number of words

transmitted, ie the actual record length. The data that was read is

written to the first column of the element, and another binary read is

performed. If the new number of words read is the same as before, this

data is written to the second column. If a different number of words is

read, then the first element is closed, and a new element is opened. The

name of the new element will be the same as the first, except the second

cycle number is incremented by one. This process is repeated until an end

of file is encountered.

When an end of file is sensed, the current element is closed. If the next

file is to be read, the first cycle number is incremented and the second

cycle number is reset to i before repeating the above process•
3-284 GENERALCOMMANDS

Whenthe co,_nandis over, you will have at least one element per tape

file. If a given tape file has unevenrecord lengths, then an additional

element is openedevery time the record length changes.

Warning

On the UNIVAC system, caution should be used when using TDUMP to read

offsite tapes. Since a UNIVAC word is 36 bits long, it is not evenly

divisible by the 8 bit bytes that normally are read from 9 track tapes. In

some instances, TDUMP will drop a trailing byte. This can be avoided by

assigning your tape with a hardware translator -- eg

@ASG,T TAPE.,U9////FLDATA/EBCDIC/6,tape #

or

@ASG,T TAPE.,U9//////Q,tape

In the latter case, you may have to translate the characters yourself (ie

via CRYPT). If so, remember that there are now 9 bits per character.

Alternate forms

TDUMPS NTAPE,IF,JF NU,ELN,VER MXLENG, ITYPE

Allows each file on tape to have a 'short' record as the last record in

the file. This trailing record is included in the output element for the

file as opposed to the normal method of creating a new element for the

short record. Blocked symbolic decks (ie 80 characters per record, 60

records per block) may be read from tape using TDUMPS and ITYPE=6. Once

read, they may be printed directly via the PRINT command.

TDUMPR NTAPE,IF, IR NU,ELN,VER MXLENG,MXREC

Allows a tape to be dumped for a specified range of records, rather than

doing a whole file. In this case, IF is still the starting file number,

but JF is set to IF and is not read (only one file may be accessed in R

mode). The variable IR is used in its place. IR is the record number in

file IF where reading is to start. ITYPE is no longer input. A type of 0

will always be used for R mode. The variable MXREC is input instead of

ITYPE. MXRECindicates the maximum number of records to read. The default

is i00 .

TDUMPR 4,3,5 I,REC,DUMP 5000 i0

will read tape unit 4, starting at file 3, record 5. A maximum of l0

records will be read. The output element will be I,REC,DUMP,3,5 . Note

that cycle numbers correspond to file number and starting record number

respectively. One additional note: Reading stops when an end-of-file is

encountered, the record length changes, or when MXREC records have been
TDUMP 3-285

read.
3-286 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.172. RUN TEMP

RUN=TEMPLATE con_nand

Purpose

This command applies the specified SEMOD template to the specified model.

Command

RUN=TEMPLATE=TMPL ARGI,ARG2,...

Where

TMPL - Is the name of a template.

ARGI,ARG2,... - The input arguments required by the template.
RUN=TGLS 3-287

3.173. RUN TGLS

RUN=TGLS Command

Purpose

Prepare index from KEYS/DECK.

Command

RUN=TGLS NI,ELI,VR1 NOUT

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - DAL unit, element and version of input KEYS/DECK.

NOUT - Fortran unit to direct output.
3-288 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.174. TMUL

TMUL Command

Purpose

Perform the matrix multiplication

t

A B = C

without having to transpose A.

Command

TMUL NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3 (FAC)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input matrix (A).

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input matrix (B).

N3,EL3,VR3 - Output matrix (C).

FAC - An optional multiplication factor that is carried along at

no extra cost.

Notes

If the dimensions of A are (NR,NC) and the dimensions of B are (MR,MC),

then NR must equal MR Dimensions of C = (NC,MC)

TMUL will handle matrices of virtually any size, but for matrices larger

than 300 by 300, batch mode is advised due to larger allowable core size.

TMUL works with single or double precision matrices as well as complex.

Single matrices may be mixed with either double or complex, but double may

not be multiplied with complex. If any matrices are double, output is

double. If any matrices are complex, output is complex.

If the FAC option is used in complex multiplication, FAC is still

considered as a real number, multiplying both real and imaginary portions.
3.175. TOC

TOC 3-289

TOC Command

Purpose

Print the table of contents of DAL unit NU for sequence numbers Ii through

I2.

Command

TOC NU Ii,I2

Where

NU = DAL unit.

I1,I2 = Sequence numbers. Ii and I2 may be omitted, in which case the

entire TOC will be printed.

Example

Get the table of contents for DAL unit 1.

TOC 1

Related Commands

FIND, LAST, TTYP
3-290 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.176. RUN TOCO

RUN=TOCO Command

Purpose

Order a TOC listing by cycle numbers then by element and version name.

Also creates a READ/ELTS element if cycle numbers are present.

Command

RUN=TOCO NI,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 (ICI,IC2)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Input TOC listing from FINES conlnand.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Output ordered TOC listing in same format. If ICI and

IC2 are present this is in a READ/ELTS format. (ie. ##READ

nu, eln, vrn icl ic2)

Related Commands

RUN=OTOC, RUN=GRLT, TOC, FIND
3.177. RUN TPVL

RUN=TPVL 3-291

RUN=TPVL Command

Purpose

Calculate a theoretical percentile value for a Log Normal Distribution

given the linear mean value and standard deviation.

Command

RUN=TPVL NI,IELI,IVR1 NUI,IVSI PERC N2,IEL2,IVR2 N3,(IEL3,IVR3)

Where

NI,IELI,IVRI - Input matrix of linear mean values.

NUI,IVS1 - DAL unit and version of output.

PERC - Desired Percentile Value (e.g. 0.95).

N2,IEL2,IVR2 - Input matrix of Standard Deviation values. (Default o

use standard deviation values calculated based on

Variance / Mean Square = 4.1)

N3,IEL3,IVR3 - Input matrix of Skew Factors or if only N3 is present

a single Skew Factor. (Default N3 = 1.225)

NUI,'TPVL',IVSI - Output Theoretical Percentile Values.

Equations

x% x%

P = [LN(m) - 0.5LN((sd/m)**2 + 1)] + SF(K )(LN((sd/m)**2 + 1))*-0.5

Where

LN

m

sd

SF

x%

K

x%

P

- Natural Log

- Linear Mean

- Standard deviation for normal distribution

- Skew Factor

- Constant relating the desired X percentile value to a multiple of

the standard deviation for a normal distribution.

- Log(base e) of X percentile value.

The output vector (NUI,'TPVL',IVSI) gives the X percentile value.
3-292 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.178. TRANSPOSE

TRANSPOSE Command

Purpose

The TRANSPOSE command performs matrix transposition. As an option, you may

'chop' the matrix prior to the transpose, either by specifying a range of

rows/columns or by providing an explicit list of rows and columns.

Command

TRANSPOSE N1,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 II,I2

or

TRANSPOSE NI,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 NR,NC

row numbers

column numbers

Ji,J2

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - Matrix to be transposed.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Transpose.

Ii,I2 - Row limits.

Ji,J2 - Column limits.

NR,NC - Number of rows and number of columns to be selected prior

to transpose.

Notes

If Ii,I2,Ji,J2 are not entered, TRANSPOSE will do a normal matrix

transposition. If only II,I2 are entered, they are assumed to be NR and

NC, and TRANSPOSE will then prompt you to enter the desired row and column

numbers.

If Ii,I2,Ji,J2 are all entered, only a portion of the input matrix is

considered. Thus the input matrix is reduced in size and then transposed.

TRANSPOSE will work for virtually any size matrix, however for large

matrices (>200x200), batch mode is recommended. If you are transposing a

time history array just so you can use MAXMIN, don't bother. MAXMIN has

been modified to operate on either rows or columns.

Example

i) Input matrix is real 57 by 33
TRANSPOSE 31293

TRANSPOSE 1,INPUT,MATRIX 1,OUTPUT,MATRIX 14,37 i,i0

Chops matrix to a 24 by 10 using rows 14-37 and cols 1-10 then

transposes to a 10 by 24
3-294 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.179. TRDAL

TRDAL Command

Purpose

TRDAL converts a binary DAL file from one system to another. Currently

this conversion is limited to

i) UNIVAC to host

-I) Old DALPRO type UNIVAC to host

2) VAX to host

4) CRAY to host

5) FP5 to host (VAX host only)

where host may be UNIVAC,VAX,CRAY or FPS.

Command

TRDAL NOUT, NIN,LENBUF,LAST INTYPE

or

TRDAL NOUT, NI,ELI,VRI INTYPE

Where

NOUT

- Output DAL unit. Upon completion of the command you should be

able to do a TOC NOUT, etc. Eg TRDAL produces a normal DAL

file.

INTYPE - Type of input binary file. The following types are

supported:

-i -- Old DALPRO type from UNIVAC

1 -- New DALPRO type from UNIVAC

2 -- VAX

4 -- CRAY

5 -- FPS

currently

and NI,ELI,VRI or NIN,LENBUF,LENGTH are two different ways of specifying

the input binary file.

V

NI,ELI,VRI - The binary file is in the form of a DAL dataset. Typically

this is from tape, via TDUMPS command:

TDUMPS NTAP, IFL,JFL NI,ELI,VRI

CYCLE i,i (eg)

TRDAL NOUT NI,ELI,VRI INTYPE

5000 9
TRDAL 3-295

NIN,LENBUF,LENGTH

- The binary file is read directly. Use this method when

translating files that have been transmitted across a

network. It may also be used when a file was created from

a COPYFI operation.

NIN - DAL unit number of the binary file. Note that NIN is NOT a

legitimate DAL file. The DAL unit number is used only to

access the file.

LENBUF - Approximate block length to use when reading the input

file. Originally the user had to input the exact block

length. Currently TRDAL (ala DALPRO version 5.0+) will

compute the correct length that is nearest LENBUF. If you

are using an old version of DALPRO the discussion under

MAGIC may be of some use.

LENGTH - Number of sectors in the input file. If 0 is used, the

length is computed internally.

Notes

TRDAL uses the type codes from the input DAL file to determine what kind

of conversion is necessary on an element by element basis. It is important

that the type codes are correct, and that each element only contains one

type of binary data. Ie: DON'T MIX REALS WITH INTEGERS in the same

element, etc.

There are some exceptions to the above rule, although they do not

necessarily work with all types of systems.

i) Generally you can mix integers and hollerith, as long as the type

code is 4 (hollerith).

2) For CRAY translation, you can mix real and integers as long as the

type code is 1 or -i. This exception will probably be extended to

the UNIVAC form as well, but it is not available yet. It will never

apply to the translation of VAX files.

Options

Several options are available for TRDAL

TRDD Will allow TRDAL to translate disabled datasets.

TRDP Writes a TOC line for each dataset as it is converted. Each line

will always come out as a TTYP 2 toc-line.

TRDS Lets you specify the sector length that was used on the foreign

machine. On some systems, DAL files may exist in two forms, a DAL

form and an EAL form. TRDAL assumes that you are translating a

DAL file. If this isn't the case, use the S option, which

requires an extra value on the command line. This value is the
3-296 GENERALCOMMANDS

sector length of the binary file as it existed on the original

machine. For Cray EAL files, the sector length is 512. For Vax

EAL files, the length is 128.

TRDX Allows you to limit the translation of datasets to those that you

specify. The X option requires input immediately after the TRDX

command. Up to i00 lines of the form

ELN,VER, ICI,IC2

may be entered. A blank line will terminate input. If fewer than

4 items are specified on a line, the remaining items will be set

to MASK which is an automatic match. You may also use the form

'A***' which would match an item that starts with A. Note that

these items must be enclosed in single quotes, and that an * must

appear for each character.

TRDZ Writes the TOC line before conversion, then asks if you want to

skip it. You may enter Y to skip, N to process, G to process it

and all remaining datasets, or Q to quit.

up to three options may be used at a time. Eg TRDZSD would turn on the Z,S

and D options.

More notes - variable sensitivity - IBF$, LNG$, IZP$

IBF$

TRDAL is sensitive to the value of the variable IBF$. The value

represents the number of bits to skip at the start of each block of

input data. It was designed to read @COPY,G tapes from the Univac (when

someone accidently used @COPY,GM instead of @COPY,M). In the @COPY,G

case, IBF$ should be set to 72 prior to invoking TRDAL. This skips the

two words that COPY,G adds.

LNGS

TRDAL reads the input binary unit in blocks. The block length is always

given in terms of an integral number of host words. From this, the

number of foreign words per block is calculated as LENG*JBPW/IBPW

where LENG is the block length, JBPW is the number of bits per host

word and IBPW is the number of bits per foreign word. LNG$ is used to

override this calculation. As an example, consider a VAX generated DAL

file that has been COPY'ed to tape. The DCL command COPY uses a block

length of 512 words. 512-32 = 16384 bits, which is 455 and i/gth

Univac words. When you read the tape on the Sperry, it either reads 455

words and discards the extra 4 bits (which is what TDUMP defaults to)

or it will read all the info and produce 456 words. The calculation

456*36/32 comes out to 513, which is wrong. To cure this, you must SET

LNG$=512 prior to running TRDAL. (For more info on the TDUMP problem,
TRDAL 3-297

see TDUMP)

IZP$

Turns on the debug mode for TRDAL. Basically it prints a status of all

requests that are made to the translator. IZP$ defaults to 0, if set

non-zero the debug mode is turned on.

3.179.1. MAGIC

LENBUF refers to the number of HOST words that will be read at a time. If

the file came from tape, then LENBUF must be set to the number of HOST

words per tape block. TRDAL reads the input file as a sector addressable

file. Thus LENBUF should be divisible by the number of host words in a

host sector. In addition, LENBUF 'host' words must parlay into an integral

number of 'foreign' words. Eg if your host has N bits per word and the

foreign machine has M bits per word, then LENBUF*N must be some multiple

of M. (On really old versions of DALPRO (prior to 4.0) the number had to

parlay into an integral number of foreign sectors) Some MAGIC numbers are

as follows (you can use any multiple. The larger the number the fewer I/O

operations required):

Smallest

Foreign Host LENBUF

CRAY DAL VAX any 128

CRAY EAL VAX any 1024

CRAY DAL UNIVAC 7168

CRAY EAL UNIVAC 57344

UNIVAC CRAY DAL 4032

UNIVAC CRAY EAL 32256

UNIVAC VAX DAL 2016

UNIVAC VAX EAL 8064

VAX DAL UNIVAC 1792

VAX EAL UNIVAC 7168

VAX any CRAY DAL 64

VAX any CRAY EAL 512
3-298 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.179.2. HASP

A special mode of TRDAL was created especially for VAX/CRAY interfaces,

where CRAY binary files were shipped down a communications line using HASP

protocol. The mode is no longer used, but still is an available option for

TRDAL. The command form is

TRDAL NOUT NIN 4

(only on VAX, and input must be from CRAY). HASP creates binary files

that contain embedded byte-counts. TRDAL reads unit NIN (ll = DAL011) and

creates the element 28,CRAY,DUMP. It then continues as if the command

TRDAL NOUT 28,CRAY,DUMP 4 had been issued. Note that NIN is not a

legitimate DAL file although a DEFINE, ASSIGN statement must be used to

attach it to a DAL unit number. Eg

SDEFINE DAL003

SDEFINE DAL001

$ DAL PRO

TRDAL 1,3,4

TOC 1

END

CRAY.PUN

CRAY.DAL

(where CRAY.PUN is the HASP generated

binary punch file)

(desired output DAL file)
3.180. RUN TRMT

RUN=TRMT 3-299

RUN=TRMT command

Purpose

This command is used to keep track of tapes transmitted to other sites for

DALPRO, VAPEPS etc.

Command

RUN=TRMT NU option

Where

NU - DAL unit of file containing transmittal information.

option - Is one of the following:

= LIST - lists out data.

This runstream will prompt for the appropriate information.

_r
3-300 GENERAL COMMANDS

3.181. RUN TSTA

RUN=TSTAT NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

TRANSPOSE VERSION OF STAT COF_IAND

N1,ELI,VRI = INPUT MATRIX (NR,NC)

N2,EL2,VR2 = OUTPUT MEAN AND STANDARD DEVIATION (NR,2)

FIRST OUTPUT COLUMN IS MEAN. SECOND IS SIGMA
3.182. TTYP

TTYP 3-301

TTYP Command

Purpose

Selects the type of table of contents listing. TTYP=I is for NR-NC TYPE,

TTYP=2 is for NI-NJ TYPE.

Command

TTYP N

Where

N - Type code.

= 1 - Displays NWDS,NR,NC in TOC listings.

= 2 - Displays NWDS,NJ,NINJ in TOC listings.

Notes

TOC listings include the table of contents as listed by TOC, and the

one-liners output by LOCAT, FIND, and LAST.
3-302 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.183. RUN UPDS

RUN=UPDS Command

Purpose

Copy all symbolic elements from a DAL unit to a Fortran unit.

Command

RUN=UPDS NIN,NOUT

or

RUN=UPDS NIN NOUT,ELN,VER

Where

NIN - Input DAL unit.

NOUT - Output Fortran unit.

NOUT,ELN,VER - DAL file to write output to instead of Fortran unit. NOUT

may not be the same as NIN or 28.

Notes

This command uses a marking technique to transfer only those elements that

have been changed since the last update. As part of the command, the user

is prompted for one line of symbolic information that is meant to identify

the transfer.
3.184. RUN VFIX

RUN=VFIX 31303

RUN=VFIX Command

Purpose

This runstream is used to develop a test spec for a component based on a

test fixture vibration survey. The survey should include triaxial

accelerometer measurements at each component mounting location. The

survey should be performed with the component mounted on the fixture and

with all wiring harnesses attached. The survey should be performed 6dB

down from the spec level. This runstream computes a test spec for each

surveyed location such that the average response of the fixture at all

surveyed locations is equal to the spec level, with the following

exceptions: The envelope of the normal test specs, as calculated, will

not be allowed to exceed the the upper tolerance, as defined by the user,

and the envelope of the lateral responses will not be allowed to exceed

the spec level for the lateral axes.

Command

RUN=VFIX NI,Vl N2,V2 N3,L3,V3 N4,L4,V4 N5,L5,V5 N6

Where

NI,VI - Unit and version of output from RUN=NORM for the normal

accels. If you don't use RUN=NORM, then use 'NMGS' as the

element name when you create this element. It should

contain the data from the nor- mal accels, one row per

frequency and one column per accel. The units of the data

are G**2/HZ, in 1/3 octaves.

N2,V2 - This is the same as NI,Vl except that this element contains

data for the lateral accels. All other comments from NI,Vl

apply.

N3,L3,V3 - This element contains the spec level ( qual or acceptance )

for the axis normal to the fixture. RUN=LTRP may be used to

create this vector. If you don't use RUN=LTRP, create a

• vector containing the spec level at the i/3-octave center

frequencies which correspond to the frequencies in the data

elements. The units of the spec level values must be

G**2/HZ.

N4,L4,V4 - This element contains the upper tolerance for the spec level

in the axis normal to the fixture. RUN=LTRP may be used to

create this element, otherwise, see comments with N3,L3,V3.
3-304 GENERALCOMMANDS

N5,L5,V5 - This element contains the lateral spec level in 1/3 octave

bands. Use RUN=LTRP to create this element or create it

yourself following the guidelines presented under N3,L3,V3.

N6

- This is the unit for output elements. Three elements will

be created. The first, N6,NMGS,NORM, will contain the new

test spec at each accel position, each location is in the

same column as in NI,Vl. the second element, N6,NMGS,LAT,

contains the lateral response at each accel position which

will result from testing to the new test spec. Again, each

channel is in the same column as it was in N2,V2. The

third, N6,NMGS,AVG, contains the average of the computed

test specs.
RUN=WLSQ 3-305

3.185. RUN WLSQ

RUN=WLSQ Command

Purpose

Weighted Least SQuares. Solves the equation

D = Z*C

for C, where D and Z are known.

Command

RUN=WLSQ NI,EL1,VRI N2,EL2,VR2

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - input Z matrix (N,M)

N2,EL2,VR2 - input D vector (N,I)

N3,EL3,VR3 - output C vector (M,I)

N3,EL3,VR3 N4,EL4,VR4

N4,EL4,VR4 - Optional input weighing matrix (N,I)

Choleski Decomp. is used for inversion. If this is not desirable, SET

ICD$=0 prior to issuing command.
3-306 GENERALCOMMANDS

3.186. WTAPE

WTAPE Command

Purpose

Writes element to tape.

Command

WTAPE NI,ELI,VRI NTAP

Where

Notes

IFL IREC

NI,ELI,VRI - Input DAL element, size=NR,NC.

NTAP - Tape unit.

IFL - File on tape where writing is to start.

IREC - Record where writing is to start.

Writing is done in 'NC' blocks of 'NR' words each IFL and IREC will

default to 1 if not input.

End of File (EOF)

After the write, two EOFs are written after the data, and the tape is

backspaced one EOF. This marking may be turned off by using the command:

WTAPNE NI,ELI,VR1 NTAP, IFL,IREC
PRINTING AND PLOTTING 4-1

e PRINTING AND PLOTTING

This chapter gives the commands used in displaying output. These include

tabular as well as graphical displays.
4-2 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

4.1. PLOT

PLOT Command

Purpose

PLOT linear, semi-log, or log-log graphs of ordered data contained in DAL

elements. This command is only available on the UNIVAC and VAX.

Command

PLOT NX,ELX,VRX NY,ELY,VRY IFLG (Ii,I2) J,K

Where

NX,ELX, ELY- Abscissa array

NY,ELY,VRY - Ordinate array

IFLG - Option flag for TITLES, GRIDS, SCALES, etc.

Ii,I2 - Row limits for both abscissa aD_ ordinate. If omitted,

II=l, and I2=minimum row dimension of abscissa or ordinate

array.

J - Ordinate column to be plotted. If PLOTC is used instead of

PLOT, both columns J and J+l will be plotted on the same

frame. Column J will be a solid curve, J+l a dashed curve.

K - Abscissa column to be used as abscissa. Only one column is

used, even in the case of PLOTC.

IFLG IFLG is in general a 5 digit number, where each digit

represents a different data flag. The meaning of each digit is

explained below:

ONES

TENS

XXXX0 - Linear plot

XXXXl - Semi-log plot (Logarithmic X)

XXXX2 - Semi-log plot (Logarithmic Y)

XXXX3 - Log-log plot

XXXX4 - Linear plot, with the axes crossing at (0.,0.)

XXXX5 - Linear plot, axes cross at (0.,0.), and equal X and Y

axis lengths, according to whichever has the larger

range.

XXXOX - Use previous abscissa and ordinate labels, or use

element names if labels have not been read.

XXXlX - Read abscissa label

XXX2X - Read ordinate label

XXX3X - Read abscissa and ordinate label respectively.
PLOT 4-3

i00 XX0XX - Use previous abscissa and ordinate limits or scale the

data automatically if limits have never been read.

XXlXX - Read abscissa limits as XMIN,XMAX these limits remain

fixed until they are reset. To resume automatic

scaling, use limits of 0.,0.

XX2XX - Read ordinate limits as YMIN,YMAX The same conditions

apply as above.

XX3XX - Read abscissa and ordinate limits respectively.

XMIN,XMAX / YMIN,YMAX (Two cards)

i000 XOXXX - Use previous title. Initial title is blank.

XIXXX - Read title

X2XXX - Read two titles

X3XXX - Read three titles

10000 0XXXX - Use previous grid information. The initial value is no

grids.

_XXXX - Enter IX, IY as number of grids per major X axis and Y

axis respectively.

-IXXXX - Same as above, but use dashed grid lines instead of

solid ones.

Any data that is required from the flags above is entered in the order

they are described above. As an example, the flag 11230 would require

the following data:

THIS IS THE ABSCISSA LABEL

THIS IS THE ORDINATE LABEL

0.,100. @ THIS IS YMIN,YMAX

THIS IS THE TITLE

1,2 @ ONE GRID PER MAJOR X, TWO FOR Y

Plot types

The PLOT command may be used to generate COMP80 plots, TEKTRONIX plots,

VERSATEC plots, or plots on other devices. Device selection is

accomplished through the command PSET. Please see the documentation on

PSET for more information.

VAPEPS uses DISSPLA as the heart of its plotting software. If your system

does not have DISSPLA your plots will be severely limited. This will

eventually be improved.

Command variations

PLOMXX NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 IFLAG,...

II,I2,ICOD II,I2,ICOD II,I2,ICOD,...

- Pair of integers (03,05,10,etc) indicating the number of

distinct curves to draw for this plot. Each curve is taken from
4-4 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

a particular block of values from the input X and Y vectors.

The values II,I2,ICOD must be input for each curve. Thus

exactly NCURVE*3 values must be input immediately following the

command.

XX - XX if you actually use PLOMXX, then the plot command will

look for the variable NPL$, and use that value to get the

number of curves. Eg

SET NPL$=3

PLOMXX .................

would do the same as

PLOM03 ............

Ii,I2 - Row limits for this curve, ie 1,100 mean that rows 1 through

I00 will be used to draw this curve. The row limits apply to

both the X and Y vectors.

ICOD - Draw code

= 0 use a solid line to connect points.

= -I Don't connect points, but mark every Ith point.

= +I Connect points with solid line and mark every Ith point.

= i0000 Connect points with a dashed line.

Examp ie

PLOM03 I,X,VEC 1,Y,VEC

1,100,10 101,200,I0

201,300,10

Would draw three curves. Each would be a solid line but would have every

tenth point marked with a symbol. A different symbol is used for each

curve. Note: A maximum of twenty curves can be plotted on one plot. Curve

one would consist of points I-i00, two would consist of points 101-200,

etc. This implies that both X and Y elements must have at least 300 rows.

PLOPXx NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 .....

ICOD ICOD ICOD ...

This is essentially the same as PLOM, except that each curve is taken from

successive columns. This implies that all curves have the same number of

points. ICOD has the same meaning as for PLOM. You may se XX explicitly,

and then the number of curves will be taken from the variable NPLS.

Example

PLOP03 I,X,VEC I,Y,MAT 11030 i0,50 3
PLOT 4-5

i0,I0,i0

ABSCISSA LABEL

ORDINATE LABEL

Would plot columns 3,4 and 5 from I,Y,MAT versus columns 1,2 and 3 from

I,X,VEC. If I,X,VEC is really a vector, then column 1 would be used for

each curve's abscissa. Note that only rows 10-50 would be used for each

curve.

PLOTB NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 IFLAG,...

WIDTH

Would plot a histogram (bar graph). WIDTH is a floating point number that

determines the width of the bars. A positive number gives the width in

inches, a negative number gives the ratio of bar width to point spacing.

See the DISSPLA manual for details.

PLOT3D NI,ELI,VRI (XV,YV,ZV XMN,XST,YMN,YST IX, IY)

Produces 3D surface plots of a rectangular array. (VAX only)

XV,YV,ZV - View point in coord, system of resp. axis

Default = (-1.5,-1.5,-1.5)

XMN,XST - X minimum and step size for generating X axis

Default = l.,1.

YMN,YST - Y minimum and step size for generating Y axis

Default = 1.,l.

IX, IY - Use every IXth row and IYth column.

Default = (1,1)

You can now label each axis by using the command PLO3DL. It will then

prompt for three LABEL lines. They are X, Y and Z labels respectively.

You can use the 'trapped' title approach to get titles. The FLAG

sub-command in PSET can be used to read the title(s), then use PPF to

specify the number of trapped titles you want.

The PPF subcommand (in PSET) can also be used to change the scale of your

3D plot. Eg

PPF 1,0,3

AX,AY,X0,Y0> 1. .9 0. .05

will allow up to three 'trapped' titles, and increase the size of the plot

so that it pretty much fills up the page.

Related Commands
4-6 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

PSET
L .

4.2. PRCRN

PRCRN 4-7

PRCRN Conm_nd

Purpose

Print the corners of a matrix. (Single precision only)

Command

PRCRN NU,ELN,VER

Where

NU,ELN,VER - The DAL element to be printed.

Description

Output from PRCRN is to unit 6 and usually is a four by four matrix that

includes the first two columns and last two columns of the first two rows

and the last two rows. If the matrix under consideration has fewer than

four rows or columns, the output is reduced accordingly.
4-8 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

4.3. PRINT

PRINT Conunand

Purpose

Print all or a portion of a DAL element. The DAL element may be a vector,

a matrix, or a symbolic (types 5,6) element. PRINT enables the user to

list parts of an element in virtually any format. The PRINT section may be

entered via several com- mands. The major difference between commands is

the output format.

General form for symbolic elements

PRIXXX NU,ELN,VER LINi,LIN2 NOUT

Allowable forms: PRINT, PRIND, PRINZ

Formats are not allowed (currently) for printing of symbolic elements.

LINI, LIN2 correspond to range of lines to be printed. If LINI,LIN2 are

omitted, the entire symbolic element is printed. NOUT is optional, an

indicates the FORTRAN unit where dataset is to be written. NOUT defaults

to 6.

PRINT - Counts lines and writes a header at top of each page. Number of

lines per page may be set via '##SET NLP$=xx' prior to issuing

command. Lines are numbered in the output listing.

PRIND - Numbers lines, but does not do page ejects nor does it write

any header. Suitable for demand terminal usage.

PRINZ - Does not number lines or do any page ejects, etc.

General form for matrix elements

PRIxxx NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 JI,J2 IC,JC NOUT

(format) in some cases

Allowable forms: PRINT, PRIND, PRINZ, PRINZF, PRIZ*, PRIZF* PRICF*,

PRINF*, PRITF*, PRINX**

Indicates forms which require an input format, note that * should

NOT be entered as part of the command

** Indicates forms that require additional data

Matrix commands:
PRINT 4-9

PRINT NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 Ji,J2 IC,JC }/OUT

Prints ten cols per line, labels row and col numbers.Vectors are printed

with one value per line.

PRIND NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 J1,J2 IC,JC NOUT

Same as PRINT, except only 6 cols per line. The D stands for Demand (eg 80

column terminal).

PRINX NU,ELN,VER Ii, I2 Jl/J2 IC,JC NOUT

NCPL,IFI,IF2,KR,KC>

FORMAT: (iff IF1 .NE. 0)

FORMAT: (iff IF2 .NE. 0)

ROW IDS> (iff KR .NE. 0)

COL IDS> (iff KC .NE. 0)

Same as PRINT and PRIND except that you specify the number of columns per

line, and can modify the format for printing the heading and the format

for printing the main body of the dataset. You can even substitute values

for the row and column numbers (eg use names and specify A4 for the

format, etc)

NCPL - Number of data columns per line (must be specified)

IF1 - If non-zero you are prompted to enter the format for the header

(default = 0)

IF2 - If non-zero you are prompted to enter the format for the rest of

the printing (default = 0)

KR - If non-zero you are asked for NR IDs that will be used instead

of the row numbers. On most systems you may specify integer,real

or hollerith data, as long as you provide for it in the format

statements.

KC - If non-zero you are asked for NC IDs that willlbe used instead

of the column numbers.

PRICF NU,ELN,VER Ii, I2 Ji,J2 IC,JC NOUT

(FORMAT)

Print by columns, one FORTRAN write per column. Matrix is printed

according to specified FORMAT. It is convenient to think of PRICF as

printing the transpose of a matrix. Eg a vector will be printed across the

page, as opposed to one value per line.

PRITF NU,ELN,VER ii,I2 Ji,J2 IC,JC NOUT

(FORMAT)

Print entire matrix by rows using one FORTRAN write statement. Matrix is

printed according to specified FORMAT.

PRINF NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 Ji,J2 IC,JC NOUT

(FORMAT)

Print by rows, one FORTRAN write per row. Matrix is printed according to

specified FORMAT.
4-10 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

PRINZ NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 J1,J2 NOUT

Print non-zero terms only. The format is (3(214,G15.7))

PRINZF NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 J1,J2 NOUT FAC

Print terms whose absolute values exceed FAC. The same format is used as

with PRINZ

PRIZ NU,ELN,VER Ii,I2 J1,J2 NOUT

(format)

Print non-zero terms only. The format must be input, and must be of the

form (3(2Ix,Fxx.x)) where F may be replaced by E, G or D. The x fields

should be replaced with digits of your choice.

PRIZF NU,ELN,VER II,I2 Ji,J2 NOUT FAC

(format)

Print terms whose absolute values exceed FAC. Format requirements are the

same as PRIZ above.

General Notes

IC, JC indicate row and col increment, respectively. If IC, JC are not

given, default is 1,1. If NOUT is specified, print is to FORTRAN unit

NOUT. If NOUT is input as positive, FORTRAN unit is rewound after write.

If negative, unit is left open (for later writes)

Some of the above forms require input of a format. This FORMAT must be

enclosed by parenthesis and may be up to 60 words long. On the UNIVAC, 60

words gives you 360 characters. On the VAX, you may use 240 characters.

The format reader is smart, in that it keeps reading format lines until

the parentheses are balanced or until you exceed the maximum character

count. Parentheses within hollerith fields are ignored (eg. '((' or 2H((

)

A special format feature is available, as follows: Assume you input a

format as xx(10IL) where xx is a two digit number. Later in the execution

you may just type xx and the (i015) format will be recalled from an

internal table.

If matrix size is NR by NC, then the following are default values:

II,I2 I,NR

Ji,J2 I,NC

IC,JC i,i

NOUT 6

If J1 is specified, then Ii,I2,J2 must also be specified If ll is

specified, then I2 must also be specified. Etc.

The FORTRAN logic for PRICF is:
PRINT 4-11

DOi0 J=I,NC

WRITE(NOUT,FORMAT)

i0 CONTINUE

(A(I,J),I=I,NR)

PRINF prints according to the following logic:

DO I0 I=I,NR

WRITE(NOUT,FORMAT)

i0 CONTINUE

(A(I,J)J=I,NC)

PRITF does not use a do-loop, but prints according to:

WRITE(NOUT,FORMAT) ((A(I,J),J=I,NC),I=I,NR)

Advanced notes

Some elements (eg JLOC BTAB) are special in that they use NJ to logically

break each column into sub-records. The above print commands pretty much

ignore this field. You can make the print commands pay attention to the

field, by use of the variable NJ$.

If NJ$ = 0 - Ignore NJ. (default)

= 1 - Read NJ, and treat input row limits as NI limits,

treating each new logical record as a new column.

= 2 - Mode shape type elements. Use NJ as for NJ$=I, but treat

each new physical column (eg mode shape) as a new block.

If you don't understand the above paragraph, SET NJ$=x prior to some

prints (of elements with NJ.ne.l) and see what happens.
4-12 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

4.4. PSET

PSET Command

Purpose

PSET is the plot interface to VAPEPS. It controls the plot device

selection and contains many sub-commands associated with plotting.

Introduction

VAPEPS can be mapped in one of three plot configurations: No plots,

primitive plots or DISSPLA plots. The latter is by far the nicest although

all systems may not have access to DISSPLA software. This system

dependence is also seen in the number and type of allowable plot devices.

A partial list of devices is contained at the end of this description.

Hopefully your devices are contained in this list.

Command

PSET

Enters PSET and prompts for sub-commands. PSET exits on receipt of DONE or

a blank record.

PSET DTYPE ARGI,ARG2,..

Sets the device type. This is the same as

PSET

PSET> DEVICE

PSET> DONE

DTYPE ARGI, ARG2, . .

PSET 0

Closes current plot frame. It is used when less than N*M plots are desired

with PPF N,M. This usage is equivalent to

PSET

PSET> EPL

PSET> DONE
PSET 4-13

4.4.1. COLOR

Color plots (DISSPLA only)

Colors may be used on some devices (eg Tek 4105). See the "CURVE COLOR"

command for more info.

4.4.2. COPY

COPY Command

Purpose

Turns on automatic copy mode for Tektronix devices. It may or may not work

for your system.

Command

COPY

4.4.3. CURVE

CURVE MARKERS Command (DISSPLA only)

Purpose

Sets marker symbols that will be used in multiple curve plots. Up to 15

integers may be specified (MI-MI5). Currently this is available only for

DISSPLA plots. See DISSPLA manual (A4.6) for table relating numbers to

symbols.

Command

CURVE MARKERS MI,M2,M3,M4,...

Where

M1,M2,M3,M4,...

- Curve marker numbers as defined in the DISSPLA manual.
4-14 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

CURVE COLORS Command (DISSPLA only)

Purpose

Turns on the color mode. From 0 to 15 colors may be used. Zero colors

turns off the mode. The first color is used for the first curve on all

plots. For multiple curves per plot (PLOMxx or PLOP)u{), the curves are

drawn in the colors specified. If you have more curves than specified

colors, WHITE will be used. BLACK is invisible (at least on a Tek 4105)

and probably shouldn't be used.

Command

CURVE COLORS RED,BLUE,GREEN,YELLOW,MAGENTA,CYAN,WHITE,BLACK

Where

RED,BLUE,...

- Color of each curve. The order above is the default.

CURVE SHADES Command (DISSPLA only)

Purpose

Allows you to use different shade patterns for each curve in a multiple

curve plot. The pattern numbers correspond to DISSPLA's call to $HDPAT.

(Note that shades will only be used if the SHADE command is also called).

Command

CURVE SHADES IPATI, IPAT2,IPAT3,...

Where

IPATI,IPAT2,...

- The pattern numbers to be used for shading as defined in the

DISSPLAManual.
PSET 4-15

4.4.4. DELAY

DELAY Command

Purpose

Sets a delay factor (in milliseconds) for the Tektronix copy mode. On

older scopes, plot information can be lost if sent to the terminal while a

copy is in progress. The delay is initiated after a copy, so that nothing

is sent to the terminal during this period.

Command

DELAY MSEC

Where

MSEC - Is the delay time in milliseconds.

4.4.5. DEVICE

DEVICE Command

Purpose

Sets the device to be used for plotting. This command must precede the use

of any plot command. The legal devices will vary from site to site. The

current devices (for your system) can be listed by using DEVICE HELP . A

list of devices and their arguments appears later in this documentation.

Command

DEVICE DTYPE (ARGI,ARG2,ARG3,...)

Where

DTYPE - Is four characters specifying the device type.

(ARG1,ARG2,ARG3,...)

- Optional arguments for some devices.

Notes

DEVICE may be executed as a one liner from regular VAPEPS mode by using

the command PSET DTYPE where DTYPE is the device type desired.
4-16 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

DEVICE implicitly causes an IPP (Initialize Plot Parameters) This means

that any PSET sub-commands that were issued prior to DEVICE may be

overwritten (eg. PPF,PAGE,COPY,etc) Thus it is a good idea to use DEVICE

as the first PSET sub-command.

4.4.S.i. LIST

Devices

The following is a partial list of devices.

--Tektronix--

DEVICE TEK ITYP,ICPS,IOPT, IRES,IADDR

ITYP - Tektronix type (4014,4051,...)

ICPS - Characters per second (default=120)

IOPT - Option (use 0, which is default)

IRES - Resolution (default = 0, small screen) use 1 for large

screen.

IADDR - Plot station (use 0, which is default)

--Megatek--

DEVICE MEGA IDEV

IDEV = device number (i or 2, 1 is default)

--Regis--

DEVICE REGIS

Uses REGIS commands for output to VT240's, etc.

--Save--

DEVICE SAVE

Uses DISSPLA's COMPRS routine to write plots to PLT2.DAT

--Versatec--

DEVICE VERS

For systems without DISSPLA the above list may be severly truncated.

r
Normally only TEK plots are supported.

PSET 4-17

4.4.6. DOME

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminates the PSET processor and returns to regular VAPEPS control mode.

A carriage return will serve the same purpose.

Command

DONE

4.4.7. EPL

EPL Command

Purpose

End plot directive. If you are plotting several plots per frame (ie using

PPF), you can terminate the current frame by issuing the EPL sub-command.

For example if PPF 2,2 was used, you are plotting 4 plots per frame. If

you only have 3 plots (or only want 3 plots on a particular frame) you

should end the frame with EPL. The command PSET 0 can be issued directly

from VAPEPS control mode to accomplish the same purpose. This one-liner

mode will leave you in VAPEPS rather than continuing with PSET.

Command

EPL
4-18 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

4.4.8. FLAG

FLAG Command

Purpose

Activates the label reader. XXXXX is a five digit integer. Each digit

pertains to a particular function, as follows:

Command

FLAG XXXXX

-DATAWhere

XXXXX - Option flag from following list:

XXXX0 - linear X, linear Y

XXXXI - log X, linear Y

XXXX2 - linear X, log Y

XXXX3 - log X, log Y

XXX0X - use previous labels for X and Y axis. Default

= no axis.

XXXIX - read new X label. Use old Y label.

XXX2X - read new Y label. Use old X label.

XXX3X - read new X label, then read new Y label.

XX0XX - use previous maxmins for X and Y. (Default =

automatic scaling)

XXlXX - read XMIN,XMAX for abscissa scale. Note: 0,0

implies that automatic scaling should be turned on.

XX2XX - read YMIN,YMAX for ordinate scale.

XX3XX - read XMIN,XMAX then read YMIN,YMAX

XOXXX - use previous title(s). Default = no titles.

XIXXX - read one title

X2XXX - read two titles

X3XXX - read three titles

-DATA0XXXX - use previous grid definition (default = no grids)

IXXXX - read IGX, IGY to define grids.

-IXXXX - same as above except use dashed lines for grids.

Flag reads £he appropriate data i_mediately following the flag command. The
PSET 4-19

order for reads corresponds to the order the items are discussed above.

The input items are stored in an internal table. Subsequent plot commands

can use this data or overwrite portions through individual use of XXXXX if

it is available with the particular plot command being used.

4 •4 •9• GRACE

GRACE Command

Purpose

Sets the grace margin for the plot. The default margin is 0, which means

that if a data point (or part of a symbol) falls off of the plot, it will

not be plotted. GMARG is the distance in inches that a point may be off

the plot and still be plotted.

Command

GRACE GMARG

Where

GMARG - Distance in inches that a point may be off the plot and still

be plotted.

4.4.10. HGT

HGT Command

Purpose

Sets the scale factor for plotting characters in DISSPLA. Scale must be a

positive real number (decimal point) that is less than or equal to 1.

Command

HGT SCALE

Where

SCALE - A positive real number that is less than or equal to 1.
4-20 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

4.4.11. IPP

IPP Command

Purpose

Initialize Plot Parameters. This resets all parameters to their default

values.

Command

IPP

4.4.12. LEGEND

LEGEND Command (DISSPLA Only)

Purpose

Provides for specification of legends for multiple curve plots. Legends

appear on right side of plot area. Default location allows room for up to

6 characters.

Conm_nd

LEGEND

or

LEGEND

ICURVE, 'Legend'

-LINES,MAXCH,X0,Y0

Where

ICURVE - Curve number.

'Legend' - Text to be plotted next to legend.

-LINES - Set the maximum number of legend lines to LINES.

MAXCH - Maximum number of characters per legend.

X0,Y0 - X and Y location of legend.

Notes on Option 2

Sets maximum number of legend lines, and maximum characters per legend.

(For some reason, the size calculation doesn't work to well, so be

generous on max chars per line) Defaults are I0 lines of 20 characters

each. X0,Y0 control location of legend. X0,Y0 are expressed in terms of

graphs size. Defaults are 1.01 and .25 which places legend just to the
PSET 4-21

right of the plot, starting 1/4 of the way down the plot.

4.4.13. MIXALF

MIXALF Command (DISSPLA Only)

Purpose

Sets up mixed alphabets in DISSPLA. Up to 6 character sets may be in use

at one time. ISET is the set number (1 - 6). CHAR is the character that

triggers a particular alphabet (should be enclosed in single quotes)_ TYPE

indicates the particular alphabet and may be STAND,L/CSTD,GREEK, INSTR,

etc. See DISSPLA manual (under MXALF) for details. Most forms can be

abbreviated to four characters. If more than 4 characters are used, or the

TYPE name includes a slash, you must enclose TYPE in single quotes.

Command

MIXALF ISET 'CHAR' 'TYPE'

Where

ISET - Character set number.

'CHAR' - Character that triggers the particular alphabet.

'TYPE' - Alphabet.

4.4.14. PAGE

PAGE Command

Purpose

Sets the page size. A border is drawn around each frame. PX gives the

length (inches) of the horizontal lines. PY gives the length (inches) of

the vertical lines. The default is 11.,8.5

Command

PAGE PX, PY

Where
4-22 PRINTING AND PLOTTING

PX,PY - Page size. PX give length in inches of horizontal lines.

PY give length in inches of vertical lines.

4.4.15. PPF

PPF Command

Purpose

Plots Per Frame. NX = number of plots on a horizontal line. NY = number of

plots on a vertical line. NX*NY = total number of plots per frame. NTT =

number of trapped titles. A trapped title is essentially a frame title.

NTT=I means that the first title for your plot will be trapped. If the

current plot is the first on the frame, the title will be used as the

frame title. If the current plot is not the first on the frame, the title

will be completely ignored. NTT may be 0,1,2,3 (omitted=0), but should

not exceed the number of titles (ie as set through flag). If it exceeds

the number of titles, all titles will be considered frame titles.

Command

PPF NX,NY,NTT

Where

NX,NY - Number of plots in X and Y directions.

NTT - Number of trapped title lines.

The plots are plotted top-to-bottom, left-to-right, starting in the upper

left hand corner. If you want them left-to-right and then top-to-bottom,

use a negative number for either NX or NY (not both).

A special case exists where you can position your own plots. PPF 3,0,&NTT

tells PPF that you want 3 plots per frame, but that you wish to place them

yourself. It will then prompt for AX,AY,X0,Y0 for each plot.

AX,AY - Axis length for X and Y respectively. These are in

non-dimensional units. A value of 1. sets the length equal to

the page length for that direction. A value of .5 Sets it to

half the page length, etc.

X0,Y0 - Offset to lower left corner of plot. These are also input as

non-dimensional values with respect to the page lengths.

Note that the non-dimensional form allows you to set your plot locations

and then change the page size without messing everything up.
P5ET 4-23

4.4.16. ROT

ROT Command

Purpose

Rotate plots.

Command

ROT IOP

Where

lOP - Rotation specification.

= 0 - No rotation of plot fram

= 1 - Rotate frame 90 degrees

= MOVIE - Y direction corresponds with paper direction

= COMIC - X direction corresponds with paper direction

= AUTO - Biggest axes placed in direction with most room.

4.4.17. SHADE

SHADE Command (DISSPLA Only)

Purpose

Turn shading on or off.

Command

SHADE IPATTERN METHOD1 METHOD2

Where

IPATTERN - Sets the default shade pattern. It is an integer number that

corresponds to DISSPLA's patterns. (See a DISSPLA manual

under SHADPAT) A pattern of zero turns off shading. If

IPATTERN is entered as a negative number, then the pattern

for each curve is taken from the CURVE SHADE list. (See

documentation under PSET's CURVE command)

METHOD1 - Sets the shading method for the first curve on each plot.

Allowable methods are
4-24 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

METHOD2

ABOVE,BELOW,LEFT,RIGHT,XAXIS, or YAXIS

- If entered as non-zero, will cause shading to occur between

curve 1 and 2, 2 and 3, etc. for as manycurves as there are

(eg PLOPand PLOMcommandsonly) Note that METHOD2defaults

to zero, meaningthat all shading will be done according to METHOD1.

4.4.18. STYLE

STYLE Command (DISSPLA Only)

Purpose

Sets default style for DISSPLA plots. Allowable styles are SIMPLX, COMPLX,

DUPLX, GOTHIC. This option is only available on VAX DISSPLA installations.

TOP-STYLE indicates style to be used for top title. SUB-STYLE indicates

style for titles 2 and 3, if present. LABEL-STYLE indicates style for

labels.

Command

STYLE TOP-STYLE SUB-STYLE LABEL-STYLE

Where

TOP-STYLE - Style for top title line.

SUB-STYLE - Style for title lines 2 and 3.

LABEL-STYLE - Style for labels.

4.4.19. WAIT

WAIT Command

Purpose

Turns off the automatic copy mode for Tektronix.

Command

WAIT
4.4.20 • ADVANCED USAGE

PSET 4-25

One of the driving forces behind X-Y plotting in VAPEPS is to make

plotting easy. As you become more familiar with the plot capability you

will probably get pickier with the plot layouts. With some combinations of

N,M plots per frame and page orientations and character heights, you will

get less than desirable layouts. The truly adventurous users will place

each sub-plot individually, using PPF -N,0,NTRAP but quite often it is

sufficient to use equal sized sub-plot areas, and simply tweek some of the

sub-plot parameters. The following variables may be set prior to using PPF

or prior to PLOTting to influence some of the layout dimensions.

The 'page' is a rectangle with dimensions PX and PY (from PSET's PAGE

command) All other dimensions are scaled by these values. Eg the sub-plot

Y axis length may be specified as SYY$, but the true size in inches will be

SYY$*PY.

PPF parameters

DXS,DY$ - Dimensions of each sub-plot area. Eg for a PPF 2,1 setup,

the upper plot is DY$*PY inches above the lower plot.

SXX$,SYY$ - Axis lengths.

X0$,Y0$ - Offsets from lower left of sub-plot area to lower left of

axis corner.

PLOT parameters

Trapped titles are plotted by defining a sub-plot area. The length of the

Y axis of this imaginary sub-plot determines the Y offset to the trapped

title. This length may be set by setting SYT$ ( which defaults to .7) The

character height of the trapped titles are controlled by the variable HGT$

which defaults to i.
4-26 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

4.5. RITE

RITE Command

Purpose

Print a matrix along with a vector that identifies the rows. This ks

useful for printing functions of time or responses as a function of

vehicle station, etc.

Command

RITE NI,EL1,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 ITH NAME N3,EL3,VR3

Where

N1,EL1,VR1 - Input abscissa vector. It may be a matrix, but only the

first column will be printed. This may be of real, integer

or hollerith type.

N2,EL2,VR2 - Input matrix to be printed. This matrix must be of real

type (-1 or i).

ITH - Print every ITH row. Note that if the elements have a

different number of rows, the smaller dimension will be

used. Also, if every ITH value doesn't come out even, the

last row will still be printed.

NAME - Optional hollerith name (4 chars) that will be used as the

heading for the abscissa vector (ie: NI,ELI,VR1)

N3,EL3,VR3 - Optional heading vector (or matrix). The first column must

contain one hollerith word for each column of N2,EL2,VR2

that ks to be printed. If this vector has fewer rows than

N2,EL2,VR2 has columns, the lesser dimension will be used.

If N3,EL3,VR3 has 2 columns, the second column must

contain integers which indicate which columns of

N2,EL2,VR2 will be listed.

Notes

The purpose of RITE is to print a matrix in a minimum amount of space and

with minimum effort. If you are on a terminal it will print 72 characters

per line. If not, it will use all 132 characters. Either mode can be

forced, by using the command RITER for 132 chars or RITED for 72 chars.

Examples

For a quick and dirty listing of time responses use:

RITE 1,TIME,VEC 1,RESP,MAT l0

v
RITE 4-27

and every 10th time step will be listed. If you want to label responses,

use

ECOL 1,LABL,VEC 6,1

X,Y,Z,TX,TY,TZ

RITE I,TIME,VEC I,RESP,MAT i0 TIME 1,LABL,VEC

If you want to select particular columns to list, use

ECOL I,LABL,MAT 6,2

XI,X2,X3,X4,X5,X6

11616

RITE I,TIME,VEC I,RESP,MAT i0 TIME I,LABL,MAT

For Vibroacoustic use, you can list all channels in a 'PREP'ed event by:

RITE 30,FREQ,FREQ I,DBDT,VENT 1 FREQ I,PCHN,VENT

where VENT is the name of the event on the local event file.
4-28 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

4.6. TABLE

TABLE Command

Purpose

Provide report type listings of many types of DAL elements.

Command

TABLE N1,ELI,VR1 N2,EL2,VR2 NLPP,NPG, ITAB

-DATAor

TABLE IFLAG N2,EL2,VR2 NLPP,NPG, ITAB

-DATAWhere

NI,ELI,VRI - First DAL element

N2,EL2,VR2 - Second DAL element

NLPP

NPG

ITAB

IFLAG

-DATA-

(size MR,MC)

(size NR,NC)

- #data lines per output page

- Starting page number

- Integer table number

- Option flag from the following:

= 'NONE' - Set MC to zero. Print only second element.

= 'RSEQ' - Set MC to one and build a vector NR long composed

of real numbers i. though NR.

= 'ISEQ' - Set MC to one and build a vector NR long composed

of integer numbers from 1 to NR

- Five lines of data as follows:

i. APP,DATE, PROJ

Where

APP - 4 character word to be placed infront of

page number.

DATE - 8 character date field.

PROJ - 16 character project name.

This line ks read using fortran format. This means

that the first 4 columns contain APP the next 8

columns contain DATE and the next 16 columns contain

PROJ. Spaces and/or commnas are treated as part of

the input text.

2. TITLE
TABLE 4-29

- Title of the table. 72 characters maximum.

3. HEAD1

- First header line. 72 characters maximum.

4. HEAD2

- Second header line. 72 characters maximum.

5. FORMAT

- FORTRAN format for each column in the output table.

Description

First the two DAL elements are read into core, and one matrix is formed

with NR rows and MC + NC columns. If the first element is specified, MR

must be greater than or equal to NR. Typically the first element will

contain only one column, giving station descriptors for the rows in the

second element. This element may be omitted by replacing NI,EL1,VR1 by

IFLG as described above.

After the full matrix is formed, a header is written (see example). Then

the first part of the matrix is written using the following FORTRAN WRITE

statement:

WRITE(6,FORMAT) ((A(I,J),J=I,MC+NC),I=I,NLPP)

If NR > NLPP a new page is started with the same heading, except the page

is incremented by one. This continues with NLPP lines printed per page

until the entire matrix has been listed.

(The above example shows a FORTRAN write to unit 6. You may have TABLE

write to unit 7 instead, by using a negative value for NPG. You may

override these by setting the variable NTB$ equal to any other FORTRAN

unit. In this last case, you may set NTB$ to a negative number which will

leave the unit open and positioned for subsequent writes. The default for

unit 7 (NPG < 0) is to close the file.

TABTDY

If the command TABTDY ks used instead, the date specified An the first

data card is ignored (although it must still be specified), and the

present date ks substituted.

Notes

NLPP,NPG, ITAB are optional and default to 42,1,1 respectively. If one is

included, they all should be.

The data cards are read as hollerith, and no decoding is performed.

Therefore variables may not be used in these five lines unless the '$$'
4-30 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

notation is used. See the PLOT command write-up for details of '$$'

Although not indicated above, the format statement may consist of up to 4

lines. Lines are read until the last non blank character is a ')'

Examples

Print MAX-MIN tables of acceleration for 15 stations. MAX-MIN values are

on 'XNA' '5734' on DAL unit 3, dimensioned 15 by 4

TABLE ISEQ 3 XNA $734

A- 8/23/76EM SSD NO. 734

ACCELERATION MAX-MINS CASE 734

STATION MAX TIME MAX

NO. VALUE VALUE

(II0,4E13.7)

TIME

yields

EM SSD NO. 734

DATE 8/23/76

PAGE A-I

TABLE 1

ACCELERATION MAX-MINS CASE 734

STATION MAX TIME MAX

NO. VALUE VALUE

TIME

1 .1577612+01 .6380000+00 -.4750813+01 .2600000-01

2 .7838695-01 .3740000+00 -.6513848-01 .4980000+00

3 .2901360-02 .4000000+00 -.3321168-02 .3620000+00

4 .2008276+00 .4880000+00 -.2122634+00 .4540000+00

5 .1612680-02 .7180000+00 -.1584313-02 .6840000+00

6 .4509538+01 .2000000-02 .9846635-01 .7380000+00

7 .1882007+00 .4880000+00 -.1946676+00 .4560000+00

8 .1384610-02 .7180000+00 -.1411408-02 .6860000+00

9 .4510252+01 .4000000-02 .8885011-01 .7380000+00

i0 .6775055-05 .6700000+00 -.5264160-05 .6840000+00

ll .8695986-03 .4500000+00 -.7007983-03 .5920000+00

12 .8953631-04 .i000000+01 -.9314436-04 .9700000+00

13 .1359705+00 .4920000+00 -.1412006+00 .4600000+00

14 .1196683-02 .6600000+00 -.1074888-02 .6900000+00

15 .4511631+01 .4000000-02 .7622536-01 .7380000+00

If stations were available on DAL002 as 'PXID' 'M734', then change format

to FI0.2 (instead of If0), and

TABLE 2 PXID M734 3 XNA $734

A- 8/23/76EM SSD NO. 734
TABLE 4-31

ACCELERATION MAX-MINS CASE 734

STATION MAX TIME MAX

NO. VALUE VALUE

(II0,4E13.7)

TIME

yields

TABLE 1

ACCELERATION MAX-MINS CASE 734

EM SSD NO. 734

DATE 8/23/76

PAGE A-1

STATION MAX TIME MAX TIME

NO. VALUE VALUE

1.00 .1577612+01 .6380000+00 -.4750813+01 .2600000-01

2.00 .7838695-01 .3740000+00 -.6513848-01 .4980000+00

3.00 .2901360-02 .4000000+00 -.3321168-02 .3620000+00

1.10 .2008276+00 .4880000+00 -.2122634+00 .4540000+00

2.20 .1612680-02 .7180000+00 -.1584313-02 .6840000+00

3.30 .4509538+01 .2000000-02 .9846635-01 .7380000+00

13.10 .1882007+00 .4880000+00 -.1946676+00 .4560000+00

14.20 .1384610-02 .7180000+00 -.1411408-02 .6860000+00

15.30 .4510252+01 .4000000-02 .8885011-01 .7380000+00

16.40 .6775055-05 .6700000+00 -.5264160-05 .6840000+00

17.50 .8695986-03 .4500000+00 -.7007983-03 .5920000+00

18.60 .8953631-04 .1000000+01 -.9314436-04 .9700000+00

31.10 .1359705+00 .4920000+00 -.1412006+00 .4600000+00

32.20 .1196683-02 .6600000+00 -.1074888-02 .6900000+00

33.30 .4511631+01 .4000000-02 .7622536-01 .7380000+00

Advanced notes ..... 132 character wide tables

With the advent of the XEROX printer, it is very convenient to get report

quality listings 8.SXll that have a full 132 characters per line. As

documented above, the TABLE command will always start the PROJECT, DATE

and PAGE headings in column 57. Similarly, the table heading will always

start in column 9. It is possible to alter these tabs, by including two

more arguments on the command.

TABLE NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 NLPP,NPG, ITAB ISP,JSP

Where

ISP = Number of spaces to skip before 'TABLE' (line 4)

JSP = Number of spaces to skip before 'DATE', 'PAGE', etc.

Their default values are 7 and 55 respectively. Ie, there is one space for

carriage control, and then 7 (or 55) spaces, which puts the tabs at 9 (and
4-32 PRINTINGANDPLOTTING

57, resp).

In addition, the above documentation limits the titles to 72 characters

apiece. If ISP is entered as a negative number, two cards of 60 characters

each are read for each title, le, data lines 2,3 and 4 now become

2A,2B,3A,3C,4A,4B, With only 60 characters per line (ie (10A6)). Note that

the titles always begin immediately after the carriage control space, ie

column 2. Also note that the format you input must include the carriage

control space as well as any other spacing you may have in mind.

i
WRITE 4-33

4.7. WRITE

WRITE Command

Purpose

Formatted FORTRAN write of variables and/or constants.

Command

WRITE NUNIT VALI,VAL2,&VARI,&NVAR, .....

(FORMAT)

Where

NUNIT - Fortran unit for write

> 0 - Rewind file after write (eg. so it can be read)

< 0 - Leave file open so that subsequent writes will follow

it.

VALI,VAL2 - Constants in free-field format

VARI,NVAR - VAPEPS variables

FORMAT - Legal Fortran format, enclosed in parenthesis ().

Examp ie

WRITE 6, I.,2.,&FAC,&I,NAME

(1HI,3FI0.5,I5,3XA4)

Note that 1., 2. and NAME are constants. FAC and I are variables.
V
So DATA ENTRY

DATA ENTRY 5-1

ENTER Processor

Purpose

The ENTER command reads the following vibroacoustic test event information

into the database:

* Event description.

* Frequency analysis information.

* Channel descriptions.

* Acoustic and/or vibration spectral data.

The information is stored in DAL elements in the file you specify.

!
5-2 DATA ENTRY

5.|. FEATURES OF ENTER

Overview

ENTER stores your event's information on a DAL file. This enables the

data to be operated on by other VAPEPS commands. Your event's data must

be processed by ENTER before you can put it into the standardized VAPEP5

database with the PREP processor.

Features

* You can change the name of the data channels to new ones. The new

names will be used to identify the channels in the database (e.g. if a

channel is labelled 001 in your spectral data, you can change it to MICI

for the database).

* ENTER will accept data processed in non-standard frequency bands.

* If you are working with card data and you get the cards out of order,

ENTER will be able to unscramble and read it.

* If your data is not available all at once but you want to input what you

have, or you want it divided into sections (e.g. one for microphones,

one for accelerometers), ENTER allows you to input the data in sections.

v

Restrictions

ENTER can only read spectral data in fiaed field FORTRAN format.

Each line of input data must contain data as well as a channel identifier

and a sequence number.
5.2. EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE 5-3

A simple ENTER session is shown below. Some general comments about this

example are:

* The output is to DAL unit 1 and SAMP is the database

event name.

* Data channels: 2 microphones, and 1 accelerometer.

* Data frequency analysis: 4 bands, bandwidth = i0 Hertz

starting center frequency = 50 Hz.

* A line of comment will be input for each channel.

* Frequencies are embedded in the spectral data.

(Hz),

Example

Prompt Input Description

? ENTER 1 SAMP Command.

DESC: MASS LOAD EFFECT ON EQUIP. Event

DESC: MOUNTING STRUCTURE. CASE i: Description.

DESC: 20#/FT**2. TEST CONFIG:

DESC: MASS & C.G. SIMULATORS.

NCHN,NFRQ,ITYP, ITCH>

NDV, IFOR, IFRQ,ISEQ, IOVR>

FORMAT: (2EI2.4,A4,I4)

START,DF> 20.,I0.

ID,TYPE,UNITS,RMS:

DESC:

ID,TYPE,UNITS,RMS:

DESC:

ID,TYPE,UNITS,RMS:

DESC:

MI,MIC,DBSP

REVERBERANT CHAMBER MIC.

M2,MIC,DBSP

REVERBERANT CHAMBER MIC.

VI,NNAC,G2PH

X AXIS ACCEL, MOUNTING FOOT 1

2.0000E+01

3.0000E+01

4.0000E+01

5.0000E+01

2.0000E+01

3.0000E+01

4.0000E+01

5.0000E+01

1.1000E+02MI

1.1700E+02MI

1.2000E+02MI

1.2700E+02MI

1.0900E+02M2

1.2000E+02M2

1.2100E+02M2

1.2800E+02M2

Data

Parameters.

FORTRAN Format.

Freq. Definition.

Channel

Description.

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Spectral Data.
5-4 DATA ENTRY

2.0000E+01 7.5000E-04V1 1

3.0000E+O1 5.2300E-02Vl 2

4.0000E+01 7.2200E-01V1 3

5.0000E+01 9.2300E-OIVI 4

-blank lineA more complex ENTER example is shown in the VAPEPS SAMPLE PROBLEMS

manual.
STEPSTOPERFORM ENTER 5-5

5.3. STEPS TO PERFORM ENTER

Before you start

a. Initialize VAPEPS

b. Assign a permanent mass storage file to the DAL unit specified for

the output.

c. Execute VAPEPS.

Perform ENTER

d. Issue the ENTER command.

e. Input four lines of Event Description.

f. Input two lines of Data Parameters which describe the frequency,

channel, and spectral data information to follow.

g. Input the FORTRAN Format of the Spectral Data.

h. Input the Frequency Definition information.

i. Input the data Channel Descriptions.

j. Input the Spectral Data.

You're done. Now you can:

- terminate the execution,

- use VAPEPS commands and runstreams to manipulate and display the

data,

- continue the database process by using the processor PREP to

standardize and further describe the event.
5-6 DATAENTRY

5.4. EXECUTION

The ENTER process is performed in two ways:

a. Fully interactive - once you issue the ENTER command, prompts appear

for the required input, you respond from the keyboard. This mode is

normally used to get a feel for the way ENTER works. It is not the

recommended mode due to the high probability of typographical

errors, and the need to redo the entire process if an error is

encountered.

b. Batch (recommended) - you create a runstream file on you host

system and place in it the input required to execute VAPEP5 and

perform ENTER. YOU perform the ENTER session by 'adding' the

runstream file to the system. If errors are encountered, you edit

the runstream file, correct you mistakes, and 'add' it again - you

do this until the ENTER session completes successfully.
COMMANDFORMAT 5-7

5.5. COMMAND FORMAT

Conmmnd

ENTER NU,VENT(,ISEC NIN, IPNT, IFAT)

-DATAWhere

NU - DAL unit in which to store the output.

VENT - Event name (up to four characters) which you use to identify the

event in the database; all DAL elements created by the ENTER

session will have the version name VENT.

ISEC -\

NIN - \ (Optional) - see more information.

IPNT - /

IFAT -/

-DATA- Six sections of input that follow the ENTER command line.

They are input in the order show below.

l) DESC ............. Event Description.

2) PARAMETERS ...... Data Parameters.

3) FORMAT ........... FORTRAN Format.

4) FREQUENCY ........ Frequency Definition.

5) CHANNEL .......... Channel Description.

6) SPECTRAL ......... Spectral Data.

- see more information.

5.5.1. ISEC (OPTIONAL ARGblMEMT)

ISEC - Section number. All DAL elements created by ENTER will have

cycle numbers (CI,C2): ISEC,O. If ISEC = 0 (default) the event

is processed as a single section and you cannot add any

additional data to it in the future.

If you want tO ENTER the data in parts (that is, your event's data is not

available all at one time or the data set is too large to be ENTERed in

one section), each part must be ENTERed with a unique section number; the

first part of your data being entered with section number ISEC = i, the

following parts with section numbers ISEC = 2,3 etc. You must specify the

section numbers starting at i and continuing in increments of 1 in order

for the DAL elements output by ENTER to be successfully processed by PREP.
5-8 DATA ENTRY

5.5.2. NIN (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

NIN - FORTRAN unit number from which the Channel Description and/or

the Spectral Data will be read. Default: NIN=5; FORTRAN unit 5

usually being your terminal, card reader, etc.

> 0 - all inputs required by ENTER are read from FORTRAN unit

NIN.

< 0 - all inputs required by ENTER are read from FORTRAN unit 5

except the spectral data which _s read from FORTRAN unit

-NIN.

5.5.3. IPNT (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

IPNT - Output print option.

= 0 - all specifications and general event description will be

printed out.

= 1 - (default) same as IPNT = 0 plus channel and frequency

summaries.

= 2 - same as IPNT = 1 plus a tabular listing of the spectral

data.

5.5.4. IFAT (OPTIONAL ARGUMENT)

IFAT - Fatal error option flag.

= 0 - ENTER will save those channels that are without error.

Channels that are noted as being in error would have to be

corrected and processed by ENTER as another section.

= 1 - (default) data will not be saved if any errors are encountered.
COMMAND FORMAT 5-9

5.5.5. EVENT DESCRIPTION

Input four lines of Event Description following the ENTER command line.

The Event Description should include details of the event such that other

users can understand its general nature. Each line may be up to 72

characters long.

Example

desc:

desc:

desc:

desc:

Purpose: To measure the effect of different mass loading

conditions on xxx vehicles equipment mounting structure.

Case one: mass load = 20#/ft**2. Test config: All up

dynamic test vehicle with mass and c.g. simulators.

5.5.6. DATA PARAMETERS

Input two lines of Data Parameters following the Event Description. This

section defines the characteristics of the remaining input.

Parameters

NCHAN,NFRQ, ITYP, ITCH

NDVPC,IFORM, IFREQ, ISEQ, IOVER

5.5.6.1. NCHAN (DATA PARAMETER)

NCHAN - The number of channels (accelerometers and/or

the Spectral Data section.

Example

NCHAN,nfrq, ityp,itch

ndvpc,iform,ifreq,iseq, iover

NCHAN = 2

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

microphones) in
5-10 DATAENTRY

I.IO00E+02 M1 1

1.1700E+02M1 2

1.0900E+02M2 1

1.2000E+02M2 2

Spectral Data.

5o5o6.2. NFRQ (DATA PARAMETER)

NFRQ - The number of frequency bands used to analyze the data.

Example

nchan,NFRQ, ityp,itch

ndvpc,iform, ifreq, iseq,iover

NFRQ = 2

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 M1 2

5.5.6.3. ITYPE (DATA PARAMETER)

ITYP

Example

- The type of frequency band used to analyze the data.

= 3 - i/3 octave (ANSI standard).

= 1 - whole octave (ANSI standard).

= 0 - constant bandwidth.

< 0 - user specified bands.

nchan,nfrq, ITYP, itch

ndvpc,iform,ifreq, iseq, iover

ITYP = 0

... for this sample data ...

£req data ID seq
2.0000E+01 1.1000E+02 M1 1

3.0000E+01 1.1700E+02 M1 2

4.0000E+01 1.2000E+02 M1 3

COMMAND FORMAT 5-11

Spectral Data.

5.506.4. ITCH (DATA PARAMETER)

ITCH - The number of lines of description per channel to be input in

the Channel Description section.

= 0 - input one line describing the measurement type and units

to apply to all channels. Note: Use this option only when

all data channels are the same in this respect.

= 1 - input one line per channel of data describing the

measurement type and units, and rename the channel.

= -i - same as ITCH = I, except that the channels will not be

renamed.

= 2 - input two lines per channel: the first being the same as

ITCH=I, the other is a line of comment.

= -2 - same as ITCH = 2, except the channels will not be

renamed.

Example

nchan,nfrq, ityp,ITCH

ndvpc,iform, ifreq,iseq, iover

ITCH = -2

... for this sample description ...

MI,MIC,DBSP

REVERBERANT CHAMBER MIC.

Channel

Description.

5.5.605. NDVPC (DATA PARAMETER)

NDVPC - The number of data values per line in the Spectral Data

section. Data values can include the spectral data, the

overall level, and the frequencies. The channel ID, and

sequence number are not considered data values.

Example

nchan,nfrq,ityp,itch
5-12 DATA ENTRY

NDVPC,iform, ifreq,iseq, iover

NDVPC = 2

... for this sample data ...

freq data ID

2.0000E+01 1.1000E+02 M1

3.0000E+01 1.1700E+02 M1

seq

1

2

Spectral Data.

5.5.6.6. IFORM (DATA PARAMETER)

IFORM - The order the information on each line in the

section.

Examp ie

IFORM

1 -

2 -

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

order

DATA, ID,SEQUENCE

DATA,SEQUENCE, ID

ID,DATA,SEQUENCE

ID,SEQUENCE,DATA

SEQUENCE,DATA, ID

SEQUENCE, ID,DATA

nchan,nfrq,ityp,itch

ndvpc,IFORM,ifreq,iseq,iover

IFORM = 1

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 l Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 M1 2

Spectral Data
COMMAND FORMAT 5-13

5.5.6.7. IFREQ (DATA PARAMETER)

IFREQ - The pattern of frequency vs spectral data as it appears in the

Spectral Data section.

= 0 - frequencies are not embedded in the data.

= i - frequencies and data alternate: FREQ,DATA,FREQ,DATA, ....

= -i - data and frequencies alternate: DATA,FREQ,DATA,FREQ, ....

Example

nchan,nfrq, ityp,itch

ndvpc,iform, IFREQ,iseq,iover

IFREQ = 1

... for this sample data ...

freq data ID seq

2.0000E+01 1.1000E+02 M1 1

3.0000E+01 1.1700E+02 M1 2

Spectral Data.

5.5.6.8. ISEQ (DATA PARAMETER)

ISEQ - Indicates the starting value of the sequence number for each

channel in the spectral data.

= 0 - sequence number begins at 1 and continues sequentially.

> 0 - sequence number begins at ISEQ and continues sequentially.

Example

nchan,nfrq,ityp,itch

ndvpc,iform,ifreq, ISEQ,iover

ISEQ = o

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 MI 2
5-14 DATA ENTRY

5.5.6.9. IOVER (DATA PARAMETER)

IOVER - Indicates where the overall level for each channel appears in

the spectral data if at all.

< 0 - no overall level is included in the data , but it is input

as part of the channel description - ITCH cannot be zero.

= 0 - no overall level is included in the data.

= 1 - the overall level is included in the data as the first data

value for each channel.

= 2 - the overall level is included in the data as the last data

value for each channel.

Example

nchan,nfrq,ityp,itch

ndvpc,iform, ifreq,iseq, IOVER

IOVER = 2

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1

1.1700E+02 M1

1.1779E+02 M1

1 Spectral Data.

2

3 <= overall

5 •5 •7. FORTRAN FORMAT

Input a one line FORTRAN format following the Data Parameters. The FORTRAN

format is used to read the spectral data. The format must be enclosed by

parenthesis. Refer to the table below for allowable format types.

Data type Format

Data values ........ E,F

Channel ID ......... A,I

Sequence number .... I

where

A - alphanumeric, I - integer, E - floating point,
and F - fixed point.

Example

FORMAT: (2EI2.4,1X,A4,I4)

... for this sample data ...

data ID

2.0000E+01 1.1000E+02 MI

3.0000E+01 1.1700E+02 MI

seq

1

2

Spectral Data.

COMMAND FORMAT 5-15

5.5.8, FREQUENCY DEFINITION

The frequency definition section of ENTER follows after the FORTRAN

format. It defines the frequency bands used for the spectral analysis.

The input for this section is controlled by the parameter ITYP. All

frequencies are in units of Hertz.

Input

* For standard whole or i/3 octaves (ITYP = 1 or 3):

START - starting center frequency.

* For constant bandwidths (ITYP = 0):

5TART,DF - starting center frequency, bandwidth.

* For other bands (ITYP < 0):

CF(1), .... ,CF(NFRQ) - center frequencies NFRQ number of values.

BE(l), .... ,BE(NFRQ) - beginning (lower) band edges.

TL(1), .... ,TL(NFRQ) - trailing (upper) baD_ edges.

Note: CF, BE, and TL values can be entered on multiple lines in free-field

format.
5-16 DATA ENTRY

5.5.8.1. FREQUENCY DEFINITION EXAMPLE

* Third octave data.

ITYP= 3

NFRQ= 17

START> 50.

Frequency range 50 to 2000 Hertz:

* Constant i0 Hertz band data. Frequency range 50 to 2000 Hertz:

ITYP= 0

NFRQ= 1996

START, DF> 50., i0.

* Non-standard band data. Frequency range 50 to 2000 Hertz:

ITYP= -i

NFRQ= 8

CF= 50.,80.,140.,220.

CF= 400.,700.,1200.,2000.

BE= 40.,65.,110.,180.,310.

BE= 550.,950.,1600.

TL= 65.,110.,180.,310.,550.,950.

TL= 1600.,2850.

5 . 5 • 9 • CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

The channel description section of ENTER follows the frequency definition

section. The input to this section is controlled by the ITCH parameter.

Input types

* If ITCH = 0, one line is input:

TYPE,UNITS

* If ITCH = + or - i, one line is input per channel:

ID,TYPE,UNITS(,RMS) - if ITCH = -1

or

ID,NAME,TYPE,UNITS(,RMS) - if ITCH = 1
COMMANDFORMAT 5-17

* If ITCH= + or - 2, two lines are input per channel:

ID,TYPE,UNITS(,RMS)

DESC - if ITCH= -2

or

ID, NAME, TYPE, UNITS (,RMS)

DESC - if ITCH = 2

_J

5.5.9.1. ID (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

ID - The channel ID is it appears in the spectral data. If the

channel is not renamed, then the ID will be used for any postENTER references to the channel. Restriction: if the channel

ID is an integer, the channel must be renamed to a hollerith

name.

Example

ID,type,units: MI,MIC,DBSP

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 M1 2

5.5.9.2. NAME (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

NAME - New channel ID. A hollerith word (up to four characters long)

that will be used for any post-ENTER references to the channe]_

Example

id,NAME,type,units: 001,M1,MIC,DBSP

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 001 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 001 2
5-18 DATA ENTRY

5.5.9.3. TYPE (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

TYPE - Measurement type:

= MIC - microphone

= SMIC - surface microphone

= NSMC - not surface microphone

= ACC - accelerometer

= VIB -

= NACC - normal accelerometer

= NNAC - not normal accelerometer

Example

id,TYPE,units: M1,MIC,DBSP

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 M1 2

5.5.9.4. UNITS (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

UNITS - Units of measurement:

= P2PH - psi**2/Hz

= PA2H - Pa**2/Hz

= G2PH - g**2/Hz

= IA2H - (in/(sec**2))**2/Hz

= FA2H - (ft/(sec**2))**2/Hz

= MA2H - (m/(sec**2))**2/Hz

= DBSP - lO*log(psi**2/8.4144E-18)

= VLSP - lO*log(g*,2/8.4144E-18

= DBVL - lO*log((m/(sec**2))**2/1.OE-lO) or equivalent

Example

id,type,UNITS: MI,MIC,DBSP

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.
COMMAND FORMAT 5-19

1.1700E+02 M1 2

5.S.9.5. RMS (CHANNEL DESCRIPTION PARAMETER)

RMS - (optional) Root mean square or overall level.

only if the parameter IOVER < 0.

Example

IOVER= -1

id,type,units,RMS: M1,MIC,DBSP, 117.79

... for this sample data ...

data ID seq

1.1000E+02 M1 1 Spectral Data.

1.1700E+02 M1 2

RMS is specified

5.5.9.6. CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

DESC

Example

ITCH = -2

- Channel description (up to 72 characters) used identify

location, etc.

id,type,units: M1,MIC,DBSP

DESC: REVERBERANT CHAMBER MICROPHONE, QUADRAh"r 2
5-20 DATA ENTRY

5.5.9 • 7. NOTES

Note

The order of the descriptions does not have to match the order of the

channels in the spectral data section.

(optional) This section can reside, along with the spectral data, on a

mass storage file designated as a FORTRAN unit. The choice is controlled

by the NIN argument of the ENTER command line.

5.5.10. SPECTRAL DATA

The spectral data section follows the channel description section and is

the last part of the input to ENTER. The contents, internal form, and

arrangement of the information in this section has been specified in the

previous sections.

Each line in this section must contain three types of data:

-an integer card sequence number,

-a channel ID, and

-numeric data.

Numeric data can include spectral, frequency, and overall values.

The last line of the spectral data section must be a blank (a carriage

return will do if the user is performing ENTER interactively).

Example

data ID seq

2.0000E+01 1.1000E+02M1 1

3.0000E+01 1.1700E+O2M1 2

2.0000E+01 1.0900E+02M2 1

3.0000E+01 1.2000E+02M2 2

-blank line-

•.. for these sample specifications ...

NCHN,NFRQ,ityp,itch> 2,2,0,-2

NDVPC, IFORM, IFREQ, ISEQ,iovr> 2,1,1,0,0

FORMAT: (2EI2.4,A4,I4)

Note
COMMANDFORMAT 5-21

(optional) This section can reside on a mass storage file designated as a

FORTRAN unit. The choice is controlled by the NIN argument of the ENTER

command line.
5-22 DATAENTRY

5.6. OUTPUT DAL ELEMENTS

unit,element,version - description (size - rows x columns)

NU,EVNT,NAME - Event description. The element is one column

containing the four 72 character lines of event

description (288 x i).

NU,FREQ,NAME - Frequency table. The element is a three

column matrix; each column has one value per input

frequency band; the first column contains the

center frequency of the band; the second and third

contain the upper and lower band limits respectively

(#frequencies x 3).

NU,CHAN,NAME - Channel description. The element is a matrix

with one column per channel; each column contains

the channel name, channel type, units type, and

72 characters of description (23 x #channels).

NU,SPDT,NAME - Spectral data. The element is a matrix with one

column per channel and one row per frequency band;

each row contains the spectral data value for

the corresponding frequency band (#frequencies x

#channels).

NU,RMSI,NAME - RMS or overall data - created only if this

information was input during ENTER. The element

is a vector containing one value per channel

(#channels x i).

A more detailed description of the output of ENTER can be found in the

VAPEPS PROGRAMMERS MANUAL.
o DATABASE PREPARATION

DATABASE PREPARATION 6-1

PREP Processor

Purpose

The PREP processor is used to define a database event and standardize raw

data (input from the ENTER processor) associated with an event. PREP is

divided into sections which are accessed by issuing subcommands within

PREP. The sections of PREP allow the user to input or modify book-keepin9

information (see the BOOK subcommand), channel descriptions (see the

CHANnel subcommand), a configuration tree (see the CONFiguration

subcommand), and data modules (see the MODUles subcommand) as well as

perform data standardization (see the CHECK subcommand). PREP is the

phase of the database entry process where key words and physical

parameters are input that will later be searched on by users operating in

the database query mode.

Command

PREP NU,VENT,(NSEC)

Whet e

NU - The DAL unit where a previously PREPed event resides or where

raw data read in during the ENTER processor resides.

VENT - The event name defined during the ENTER process.

NSEC - Optional flag indicating the status of the raw data read in

during the ENTER process. This argument need only be specified

when the PREP command is issued for the first time following the

processing of an event by ENTER. For a description of the

conversions performed on the raw data from ENTER, see the CHECK

subcommand.

> 0 - Indicates that 1 through NSEC sections of raw data were

created during the ENTER process.

= 0 - Only one section (section 0) was input during ENTER.

< 0 - (default) The event has been previously processed by PREP
6-2 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.1. BOOK

V

BOOK Subprocessor

Purpose

The book-keeping section of the PREP is entered by issuing the BOOK

subcommand. This section allows for the entry into the database of basic

book-keeping information for the event being PREPed. The entry of

book-keeping information has been limited to fields describing key aspects

the event. The descriptive fields are input through the specification of

subcommands within BOOK. Subconm_lnds to input, list, and edit these

fields are described in the additional HELP information available below.

Command

BOOK

6.1.1. APROPOS

APROPOS Command

Purpose

This command displays the words which have been used in the BOOK section

in previous events. It also allows you to list the definitions of those

words as defined in the Data Dictionary.

Command

APROPOS
6.1.1.1. _S

WORDS Command

Purpose

This command redisplays the list of words.

Co_and

WORDS

BOOK 6-3

6.1.1.2. DEFINITIONS

DEFINITIONS Con_nand

Purpose

This command will display a single definition or all the definitions of

the words listed by the WORDS command.

Command

DEFINITIONS

or

DEFINITION WORD

Where

WORD - Is the word for which a definition is desired. This is not

limited to the words displayed. It can access any word in the

dictionary.

Notes

The use of the DEFINITIONS command is discouraged because it is quite

slow.
6-4 DATABASEPREPARATION

6.1.2. INIT

INIT Command

Purpose

The INIT subcommand of BOOK has no arguments. It's purpose is to clear

out all sections of BOOK.

Command

INIT

l

6.1.3. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subcommand of BOOK has no arguments. It's purpose is to list out

all sections of BOOK that have been defined.

Command

LIST

6.1.4. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

The DONE (or a blank line) subcommand of BOOK has no arguments. It's

purpose is to save changes and exit BOOK.

Com_nand

DONE

A carriage return is equivalent to typing DONE.
BOOK 6-5

6.1.5. OMIT

OMIT Command

Purpose

The OMIT subcommand of BOOK has no arguments. It's purpose is to exit

BOOK without saving any changes.

Command

OMIT

6.1.6. PROCESSING

PROCESSING Command

Purpose

The PROCessing subcommand of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve

characters each) that defines the event as seen by the agency who

processed the data. These particular four arguments will be saved as the

event global name in the master file by the database administrator and

cannot be changed once the event has gone through the ADMINistration

operation.

Con_nand

PROC AGENCY,PROGRAM, PROJECT, ID

Where

AGENCY - Processing agency name.

PROGRAM - Program name as seen by the processing agency.

PROJECT - Project name .... .

ID - Identifier. Restrictions: the first four characters of ID

must match those of the event name VENT created during the

ENTER process.

Example

PROC WYLE,SPACE-TEL,MIRROR,MDTV
6-6 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.1.7. CONTRACTING

CONTRACTING Command

Purpose

The CONTracting subcommand of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve

characters each) that defines the event as seen by the contracting

agency.

Command

CONT AGENCY,PROGRAM, PROJECT, ID

Where

AGENCY - Contracting agency name.

PROGRAM - Program name as seen by the contracting agency.

PROJECT - Project name ....

ID - Other identifier.

Example

CONT LMSC,SPACE-TEL,MIRROR,MDTV

6. i. 8. COGNIZANT

COGNIZANT Con_nand

Purpose

The COGNizant subcoummlnd of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve

characters each) that defines the event as seen by the cognizant agency.

Command

COGN AGENCY,PROGRAM, PROJECT, ID

Where

AGENCY - Contracting agency name.

PROGRAM - Program name as seen by the contracting agency.

PROJECT - Project name ....

ID - Other identifier.
BOOK 6-7

_r

Examp i e

COGN NASA, ASTRONOMY, SPACE-TEL, MDTV

6.1.9. DATE

DATE Con_nand

Purpose

The DATE subconmmm%d of BOOK has one argument (up to two characters for

MM, DD, and YY) that defines the date the event took place.

Command

DATE MM/DD/YY

Where

MM - Month

DD - Day

YY - Year

Example

Nov, l 1982 = DATE 11/1/82

6.1.10. TIME

TIME Command

Purpose

The TIME subcommand of BOOK has one argument (up to two characters for

HH, MM, SS, and up to three characters for FRAC) that defines the time the

event began place.

Command

TIME HH:MM:SS.FRAC
6-8 DATABASE PREPARATION

Where

HH - Hour (24 hour clock)

MM - Minute

SS - Second

FRAC - Fraction of a second

Example

l:00:ll.0 P.M = TIME 13:00:ll.0

6.1.11. EVENT

EVENT Command

Purpose

The EVENT subcommand of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve characters

each) that defines the type of event.

Command

EVENT CLASS,TYPE,IDI,ID2

Where

CLASS - A word to describe the general class of test

(see recommendations below).

TYPE - The type of test (see recommendations below).

IDI - Other identifier (see recommendations below).

ID2 - Other identifier. A free creation of the user.

Recommended words

For the CLASS,TYPE pair:

GROUND,REVERBERANT

GROUND,DIRECT

GROUND,PROGRESSIVE

GROUND,CAPTIVE

GROUND,DIR-REV

FLIGHT,LIFTOFF

FLIGHT, LANDING

FLIGHT,ASCENT

FLIGHT,REENTRY

k_
BOOK 6-9

For ID1 :

DEVELOPMENT

QUAL

ACCEPTANCE

PROTOF L IGHT

PROTOTYPE

6 •1 .12 • LOCATION

LOCATION Command

Purpose

The location subcommand of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve

characters each) that defines the location where the event took place.

Command

LOCA GLOBAL,LOCAL,IDI, ID2

Where

GLOBAL - Global location (i.e. city name)

LOCAL - Local " (i.e. site name)

IDI - Other identifier (i.e. test area name)

ID2 - Other identifier

Example

LOCA GREENBELT GSFC 40KCELL

6.1.13. VEHICLE

VEHICLE Command

Purpose

The VEHicle subcommand of BOOK has four arguments (up to twelve

characters each) that defines the vehicle that will fly the item tested.

Con_and
6-10 DATABASE PREPARATION

VEHICLE CLASS,TYPE,CONF,ID

Where

CLASS - Vehicle classification. (see recommendations)

TYPE - " type. (see recommendations)

CONF - " configuration

ID2 - Other identifier

Recommended words

For the CLASS,TYPE pair:

SHUTTLE,ENTERPRISE

SHUTTLE,COLUMBIA

BOOSTER,TITAN

BOOSTER,ATLAS

BOOSTER,THOR

BOOSTER,TAT

BOOSTER,SCOUT

Example

VEHI BOOSTER,TITAN,T3C,SSLV5-17

6.1.14. DESC

DESCRIPTION Command

Purpose

The DESCription subcommand of BOOK is an optional subcommand where the

user can input four lines of general information (up to 72 characters per

line) that will help future users identify the event above and beyond that

which has already been described in the other sections of PREP. If DESC

is not specified in PREP, then these four lines of description are a copy

of those specified in the Event Description section of ENTER.

Command

DESC

1 line one

2 " two

3 " three

4 " four
Where

A descriptive string is entered next to each number 1 through 4

Example

DESC

1 Purpose: To determine the effect of different mass loading conditions

2 in bay 5 of the xxx vehicles equipment mounting structure. This is

3 case one: mass load = 20#/ft**2. Test config: All up dynamic test

4 vehicle with mass and c.g. simulators.

6.1.15. EXAMPLE

BOOK example with prompts shown in lower case. It demonstrates the use of

BOOK subcommands: PROCessing,CONTracting, COGNizant, DATE, TIME, LOCAtion,

VEHicle, DESCription, and DONE. The long names for the subcommands will

be used to make the example more readable.

prep>BOOK

book>PROCESSING WYLE,SPACE-TEL,MIRROR,MDTV

book>CONTRACTING LMSC,SPACE-TEL,MIRROR,MDTV

book>COGNIZANT NASA,ASTRONOMY,SPACE-TEL,MDTV

book>DATE 11/1/82

book>TIME 13:00:i1.0

book>LOCATION GREENBELT GSFC 40KCELL

book>VEHICLE BOOSTER,TITAN,T3C, SSLV5-17

book>DESC

desc>l Purpose: To determine the effect of different mass loading condition

desc>2 in bay 5 of the xxx vehicles equipment mounting structure. This is

desc>3 case one: mass load = 20#/ft**2. Test config: All up dynamic test

desc>4 vehicle with mass and c.g. simulators. Duration 60 sec.

book> DONE

book data saved

prep>
6-12 DATABASEPREPARATION

6.2. CHECK

CHECK Command

The CHECK subcommand of PREP collects and converts data and descriptor DAL

elements created by the ENTER process to create a set of DAL elements

containing data of a standard format with consistent pressure and

acceleration units over fixed frequency bands. Standard units are defined

in comment section below. The CHECK process is performed automatically

the first time an event is PREPed and is not normally executed as a

separate subcommand. CHECK is only executed if a modification or an

additional section has been added to the ENTER information for an event

that has already been PREPed.

Command

CHECK NSEC

Where

NSEC - The number of ENTER sections for the event.

= 0 implies only one section (section 0)

> 0 implies sections 1 through NSEC.

Commen t s

Standard units that data from ENTER is converted to are:

i) Acoustics - DBSP (101og(psi**2/PREF))

PREF = 8.4144E-18 psi**2

2) Vibration - VLSP (101og(g-*2/GREF))

GREF = 8.4144E-18 g**2

3) Frequency - 1/3 Octave bands from l0 to i0,000 Hertz
6.3. CHANNEL

CHANNEL 6-13

CHANNEL Subproces sot

Purpose

The channel section of PREP is entered by issuing the CHANnel subconmm-und.

This section allows for additionsand/or modifications to the event's

channel table. The channel table contains information for each channel

such as the channel name, the type of transducer, the valid frequency range

of the data from that channel, etc. Part of the the channel table

includes descriptions originally input during the ENTER process. The

table is created when the PREP command is executed for the first time for

a new event. The table is updated each time the CHECK subcommand of PREP

is issued. Descriptive information in addition to that input during the

ENTER process can be added in the channel section. Subcommands within

CHANnel allow for the definition of coordinates, for changing a channels

type, and for changing the valid frequency range for each channel in the

channel table. The full description for a given transducer in the channel

table looks like this:

CHAN,ITYPE,FLOW,FHIGH,X,Y,Z,SYSTEM

DESC

Where

CHAN - A channel name which exists in the channel table.

ITYPE - An integer code indicating the following transducer type:

= -i : any microphone

= -2 : surface microphone

= -3 : not surface microphone

= 1 : any accelerometer

= 2 : normal accelerometer

= 3 : not normal accelerometer

FLOW,FHIGH

- Center frequencies defining the range of valid data.

X,Y,Z - Coordinates for the transducer (real numbers).

SYSTEM - Reference system for the coordinates (up to 4 characters ).

DESC - One line of general description (72 characters max).

The fields CHAN,ITYPE,FLOW,FHIGH and DESC in the description for a given

transducer are originally created from descriptions input for each

transducer during the ENTER process. These descriptions were collected

into the channel table when the event is first PREPed. The remaining

fields X,Y,Z,SYSTEM of the channel description can only be input in this

section.
6-14 DATABASEPREPARATION

Command

CHAN

6.3 .I. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subconmmnd of CHAN allows for listing of all or part of an

event's channel table. The forms and functions of LIST are shown below.

Command

LIST ALL (DESC)

Lists the channel table. (Optional) If DESCription is specified, the

general channel descriptions are included in the listing.

LIST DESC

Lists the channel descriptors.

LIST RANGE I1,I2 (DESC)

Lists items I1 through I2 of the channel table. (Optional) DESCription is

as described above.

LIST TYPE ITEM (DESC)

Lists the channel table for all channels of type ITEM. (Optional)

DESCription is as described above.
6.3.2. C_GE

CHANNEL 6-15

CHANGE Command

Purpose

The CHANGE subcommand of CHAN allows the user to change specific

descriptive fields for specified transducers in the channel table.

Command

CHANGE ALL

Change all values in the channel table by accepting input following the

command. The input lines must be of the following form:

CHAN, ITYPE, FLOW, FHIGH, X, Y, Z, SYSTEM

CHANGE TYPE

Change the ITYPE field in the channel table.

subconmmnd and have the form:

Input must follow the

CHAN, ITYPE

CHANGE FREQuency

Change the FLOW,FHIGH fields in the channel table.

subcommand and have the form:

CHAN FLOW,FHIGH

Input must follow the

CHANGE COORdinates

Change the X,Y,Z,SYSTEM fields in the channel table. Input must follow

the subcommand and have the form:

CHAN X,Y,Z,SYSTEM

Notes

The channel name CHAN must match a channel name already in the table.

Input is accepted until a blank card is encountered or until a card with

only one item (such as the word 'END') is read.
6-16 DATABA5EPREPARATION

6.3.3. DONE

DONECommand

Purpose

The DONE(or a blank line) subcommandof CHANnelhas no arguments. It's

purpose is to exit CHANnel.

Command

DONE

6.3.4. 0MIT

OMIT Command

Purpose

The OMIT subcoE_and of CHANnel has no arguments. It's purpose is to exit

CHANnel without saving any changes.

Command

OMIT

6.3.5. EXAMPLE

CHANnel example with prompts shown in lower case. The subcommands LIST,

CHANGE, and DONE will be demonstrated. The commands are shown in their

long form for clarity.

prep>CHANNEL

chan>LIST ALL DESCRIPTION

CHANNEL TYPE FLOW FHIGH X Y Z

1 M5

2 A3

-i 25.0 I0000.0 0.00 0.00 0.00

M5 INTERNAL MIC BETWEEN LIGHT SHIELD AND OTA FWD

1 25.0 10000.0 0.00 0.00 0.00

SYST
CHANNEL 6-17

3 A4

A3 PRIMARY MIRROR

1 25.0 i0000.0

A4 PRIMARY MIRROR ON MIRROR

0.00 0.00 0.00

chan>LIST ALL

CHANNEL TYPE FLOW FHIGH X Y Z S¥ST

1 M5 -i

2 A3 1

3 A4 1

25.0 i0000.0

25.0 10000.0

25.0 10000.0

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

chan>LIST DESCRIPTION

i M5 M5

2 A3 A3

3 A4 A4

INTERNAL MIC

PRIMARY MIRROR

PRIMARY MIRROR

BETWEEN LIGHT

ON MIRROR

chart>LiST RANGE 1 2

CHANNEL TYPE FLOW FHIGH

SHIELD AND OTA FWD

1 M5 -i 25.0 I0000.0

2 A3 1 25.0 10000.0

chan>LIST TYPE -i

CHANNEL TYPE FLOW FHIGH

X Y Z

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

i M5 -1 25.0 10000.0

chan>CHANGE ALL

M5, -1,100. ,2000. ,i0. ,0. ,0. ,BOOS

END

chan>CHANGE TYPE

A3,2

END

chan>CHANGE FREQUENCY

A3,100. ,2000.

END

chan>CHANGE COORDINATES

A3, Ii., 17., i0., BNEW

A4,11., 12.5,0. ,BNEW

END

chan>L IST ALL

CHANNEL TYPE FLOW FHIGH

X ¥ Z

0.00 0.00 O. 00

1 M5 -1 100.0 2000.0

2 A3 2 100.0 2000.0

SY.%T

S¥ST

X Y Z SYST

i0.00 0.00 0.00 BOOS

ii.00 17.00 i0.00 BNEW
6-18 DATABASE PREPARATION

3 A4

chan>DONE

prep>

1 25.0 i0000.0 ii.00 12.50 0.00 BNEW
6.4. CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION 6-19

CONFIGURATION Subprocessor

The vehicle configuration section of PREP is entered by issuing the

CONFiguration subcommand. This section allows for the entry of a vehicle

configuration tree to define the hierarchy of subsystems that make up the

vehicle as it was tested or flown. The configuration tree is composed of

branches. These branches are related to one another by showing which

branch is the parent branch to the current branch. Branches are described

by local names end global names. The local names are use to establish the

hierarchy amongst the branches. The global names describe the branch. The

global names are key words that will be later be searched on by users

operating in the database query mode. A branch of the configuration is

represented by line made up of six fields as shown below:

LAST,THIS,GENERIC, SPECIFIC,(MOUNT),(ENCLOSURE)

Where

LAST - Local name (up to 4 characters) of the parent branch of

the current branch . Restriction: The first branch of a

configuration tree ,the trunk, must be designated as a $.

THIS - Local name (up to 4 characters) for the current branch.

GENERIC - Global generic name for the current branch (up to 12

characters).

SPECIFIC - Global specific name for the current branch (up to 12

characters).

MOUNT - (Optional) The branch (specified by the local branch

name) which is connected to the current branch but not in

a tree like manner.

ENCLOSURE- (Optional) The branch (specified by the local branch

name) which encloses the current branch.

Command

CONF (NU,NAME)

Where

NU,NAME - (Optional) DAL unit and event name for an existing database

event. The configuration tree for that event is read in to

this event.

Subcommands to create, delete, and list the branches of the configuration

are described in the additional HELP information below.
6-20 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.4.1. APROPOS

APROPOS Command

Purpose

This command displays the words which have been used in the CONFIGURATION

section in previous events. It also allows you to list the definitions of

those words as defined in the Data Dictionary.

Command

APROPOS

6 • 4.1.1. WORDS

WORDS Command

Purpose

This command redisplays the list of words.

Command

WORDS

6.4.1.2. DEFINITIONS

DEFINITIONS Command

Purpose

This comm_nd will display a single definition or all the definitions of

the words listed by the WORDS compound.

Command

DEFINITIONS

or

DEFINITION WORD
CONFIGURATION6-21

Where

WORD- Is the word for which a definition is desired. This is not

limited to the words displayed. It can access any word in the

dictionary.

Notes

The use of the DEFINITIONScommandis discouraged because it is quite

slow.

6.4.2. INPUT

INPUT Command

Purpose

The INPUT subcommand of CONFiguration allows the user to create or add

branches to the event's configuration tree by accepting input following

the command. The lines following INPUT must have the form:

LAST,THIS,GENERIC,SPECIFIC,(MOUNT),(ENCLOSURE)

Command

INPUT

branch one

branch two

END

Notes

Input is accepted until a blank card is encountered or until a card with

one item (such as the word 'END') is read.

Example

INPUT

$,BOOS,BOOSTER,T34D

BOOS,BSTG, BASESTAGE,T34D

BOOS,USTG,UPPERSTAGE,CENTAUR

USTG,FAIR,FAIRING, ISOGRID

USTG,ADAP,ADAPTER,TYPE3,*,FAIR
6-22 DATABA5EPREPARATION

USTG,PAYL,PAYLOAD,CSAT,ADAP,FAIR

END

k j

6.4.3. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subcommand of CONFiguration allows for listing of all or part of

an event's configuration tree.

Command

LIST

Lists out the entire configuration tree.

LIST ll

Lists line ll of the configuration tree.

LIST ll,12

Lists lines Ii through I2 of the configuration tree.

6.4.4. DISABLE

DISABLE Conmmnd

Purpose

The DISAble subcommand of CONFiguration allows the user to disable (mark

for deletion) branches of an event's configuration tree. Once a branch

has been disabled it will be deleted upon exit from the CONFiguration

section. A disabled branch can also be deleted from the configuration

tree by the PACK subcommand.

Command

DISA Ii
CONFIGURATION 6-23

Disables the branch in the configuration tree listing with line number Ii.

DISA Ii,12

Disables branches in the configuration tree listing with line numbers II

through I2.

6.4.5. ENABLE

ENABLE Command

Purpose

The ENABle subcoum_lnd of CONFiguration allows the user to enable branches

of an event's configuration tree that have become disabled (marked for

deletion) by the subcommand DISAble or by the input of branches with the

same local name.

Command

ENAB I1

Enables the branch in the configuration tree listing with line number I1.

ENAB Ii,I2

Enables branches in the configuration tree listing with line numbers Ii

through 12.

6.4.6. PACK

PACK Command

Purpose

The PACK subcommand of CONFiguration physically removes all disabled

configuration tree branches.

Command

PACK
6-24 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.4.7. READ

READ Command

Purpose

The READ subcommand of CONFiguration allows the user to add an entire

configuration tree from another database event to the tree being built.

Command

READ NU,NAME

Where

NU,NAME - DAL unit and event name for an existing database event with

the desired configuration tree.

6.4.8. CSECK

CHECK Command

Purpose

The CHECK subcommand of CONFiguration examines the current configuration

tree for errors. CHECK will look for errors such as:

l) The local name of the configuration trees trunk (LAST=S) occuring

more than once).

2) A parent branch local name LAST that was never defined by a current

branch local name THIS.

3) A MOUNT or ENCLOSURE that was never defined by a current branch

local name THIS.

CHECK will also check the global names GENERIC and SPECIFIC against the

database master file and warn the user if global names used for the

current tree are not in the master file. That means these names have

never previously been used to describe branches of a configuration tree

and the user should make sure that these names are what he really wants to

use.

Command

CHECK
6.4.9. DONE

CONFIGURATION 6-25

DONE Command

Purpose

The DONE (or a blank line) subcommand of CONFiguration has no arguments.

It's purpose is to check for errors (see the CHECK subcoE_nand), eliminate

any branches that were marked for deletion (see the PACK subcommand), save

changes, and exit CONFiguration.

Command

DONE

6.4.10. OMIT

OMIT Command

Purpose

The OMIT subcommand of CONFiguration has no arguments. It's purpose is to

exit CONFiguration without saving any changes.

Command

OMIT

6.4.11. EXAMPLE

CONFiguration example with prompts shown in lower case. A configuration

tree will be built for one event (event ONE) and then a tree will be built

for a second event (event TWO) starting with the tree from the first

event. The subcommands INPUT, LIST, PACK, and DONE will be demonstrated.

All commands are shown in their long form for clarity.

?PREP 1,ONE

prep>CONFIGURATION

conf>INPUT

Itgsme>$,BOOS,BOOSTER,T34D
6-26 DATABASEPREPARATION

Itgsme>BOOS,BSTG,BASESTAGE,T34D

Itgsme>BOOS,USTG,UPPERSTAGE,CENTAUR

Itgsme>USTG,FAIR,FAIRING, ISOGRID

Itgsme>USTG,ADAP,ADAPTER,TYPE3,USTG, FAIR

Itgsme>USTG, PAYL,PAYLOAD,CSAT,ADAP,FAIR

itgsme>END

conf>LIST

i: $ BOOSBOOSTER T34D

2: BOOSBSTGBASESTAGE T34D

3: BOOS USTG UPPERSTAGE CENTAUR

4: USTG FAIR FAIRING ISOGRID

5: U5TG ADAP ADAPTER TYPE3

6: USTG PAYL PAYLOAD CSAT

conf>DONE

prep>DONE

?PREP 1,TWO

prep>CONFIGURATION 1,ONE

conf>LIST

1: $ BOOS BOOSTER T34D

2: BOOS BSTG BASESTAGE T34D

3: BOOS USTG UPPERSTAGE CENTAUR

4: USTG FAIR FAIRING ISOGRID

5: USTG ADAP ADAPTER TYPE3

6: USTG PAYL PAYLOAD CSAT

conf>INPUT

Itgsme>USTG,ADAP,ADAPTER,TYPE2,USTG,FAIR

Itgsme>USTG, PAYL,PAYLOAD,LANDSAT,ADAP,FAIR

Itgsme>PAYL,CAM, SUBSYSTEM,CAMERA

itgsme>END

conf>LIST

i: $ BOOS BOOSTER

2: BOOS BSTG BASESTAGE

3: BOOS USTG UPPERSTAGE

4: USTG FAIR FAIRING

-5: USTG ADAP ADAPTER

-6: USTG PAYL PAYLOAD

7: USTG ADAP ADAPTER

8: USTG PAYL PAYLOAD

9: PAYL CAM SUBSYSTEM

conf>PACK

conf>LIST

i: $ BOOS BOOSTER

2: BOOS BSTG BASESTAGE

3: BOOS USTG UPPERSTAGE

4: USTG FAIR FAIRING

5: USTG ADAP ADAPTER

6: USTG PAYL PAYLOAD

7: PAYL CAM SUBSYSTEM

conf>DONE

prep>

T34D

T34D

CENTAUR

ISOGRID

TYPE3

CSAT

TYPE2

LANDSAT

CAMERA

T34D

T34D

CENTAUR

ISOGRID

TYPE2

LANDSAT

CAMERA

USTG FAIR

ADAP FAIR

USTG FAIR

ADAP FAIR

USTG FAIR

ADAP FAIR

USTG FAIR

ADAP FAIR

USTG FAIR

ADAP FAIR
6.5. MODULES

MODULES 6-27

MODULES Subprocessor

Purpose

The MODUles subcommand of PREP allows the user to create data modules

which are used to further define a branch (subsystem) of an event's

configuration tree (see the CONF subcommand for information on

configuration trees). Data modules can be assembled to represent one or

more subsystems within the general system" that was tested. Data modules

are stored in a module table.

Data modules define a subsystem by allowing inputs that create collections

of transducer names, key descriptions, and acoustic/structural parameters.

The transducer names in the data module are the specific channels used for

the instrumentation of the subsystem (the transducer names are a subset of

those contained in the event's channel table - see the CHANnel subcommand

of PREP). The physical characteristics of the subsystem are defined by

the input of key descriptions and acoustic/structural parameters. The

acousticstructural parameters form a statistical energy analysis (SEA)

model.

By including SEA models with acoustic/structural parameters in the

database information for an event, predictions can be made on new systems

by extrapolating from systems saved in the database. The user can find an

appropriate data module in database by using the SERCH command, extract

the data module (establishing a baseline model with corresponding

empirical data), model the new system, and predict the response of the new

system by extrapolating from the baseline system (see the PREDICTION

section of VAPEPS).

Subcommands of MODUles allow the user to build data modules (see the DAMO

subcommand), associate data modules with the appropriate branch of the

configuration tree (see the ATTACH subcommand), manipulate the module

table (see the PACK, SAVE, REMOVE, DISABLE, ENABLE, CHANGE, CHECK, LIST,

and DUMP subcommands), manipulate individual modules (see the EDIT, and

READ subcommands), and exit the modules section (see OMIT, and DONE

subcommands).

A data module appears in the module table in this form:

MODULE,CONF,ZONE(,SYSTEM,X,Y,Z)

Where

MODULE - Local module name (up to 4 characters) created by the DAMO
6-28 DATABASE PREPARATION

subco.E, and

CONF - Local branch of the event's configuration associated with

this module (the branch it is attached to).

ZONE - Other name (up to 4 characters) created by the ATTACH

subcommand which intended to indicate the general area in

the configuration tree associated with this module.

SYSTEM - (Optional) Other name designating a global coordinate

system or zone associated with this module.

X,Y,Z - (Optional) Integer coordinates (in the coordinate system:

SYSTEM) to define the position of this module.

Command

MODU (MXMOD,MXCT,MXCPS)

Where

MXMOD - (Optional) The maximum number of modules for this event.

Default = 20, or 5 more than currently exist, whichever is

greater.

MXCT - (Optional) The maximum number of channels used for all modules

for this event. Default = twice the number of channels in the

event's channel table, or 20 more than are currently attached,

whichever is greater.

MXCPS - (Optional) The maximum number of channels per SEA element.

Default = 15.

6.5.1. APROPOS

APROPOS Command

Purpose

This command displays the words which have been used in the MODULES

section in previous events. It also allows you to list the definitions of

those words as defined in the Data Dictionary.

Command

APROPOS
6.5.1.1. _S

WORDS Command

Purpose

This command redisplays the list of words.

Command

WORDS

MODULES 6-29

6.5.1.2. DEFINITIONS

DEFINITIONS Command

Purpose

This command will display a single definition or all the definitions of

the words listed by the WORDS command.

Command

DEFINITIONS

or

DEFINITION WORD

Where

WORD - Is the word for which a definition is desired. This is not

limited to the words displayed. It can access any word in the

dictionary.

Notes

The use of the DEFINITIONS command is discouraged because it is quite

slow.
6-30 DATABASE PREPARATION

6. S. 2. DAMO

DAMO Subprocessor

Purpose

The DAMO subcommand of MODUles creates a data module in the event's module

table. Subcommands within DAMO allow the user to describe the module (see

the DESCription subcommand), define up to six types of elements to to form

a SEA model (see the EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST and FRAM subcommands),

input structural parameters (see the P* subcom_m%nd), associate channels

with the module (see the C* and REMOVE subcommands), list the module (see

the LIST subcommand), read other modules (see the READ subcommand), save a

module to DAL elements not associated with the event (see the SAVE

subcommand), check a module (see the CHECK subcommand), and exit DAMO (see

the DONE suh, zomm_).

Command

DAMO (NU,NAME,)NEW

Where

NU,NAME - (Optional) DAL unit and name of a DAL elements containing a

module previously created by the SAVE subcommand of DAMO or

by DAMO issued from VAPEPS. If NU,NAME is omitted, the

module is built from scratch. If NU,NAME is specified and NEW

is omitted the local module name will be NAME.

NEW - Local data module name

6.5.2.1. DESC

DESCRIPTION Command

Purpose

The DESCription subcommand of DAMO has three arguments (up to 12

characters each) that describe the module as a whole. These arguments

will be saved in the database master file as part of the descriptions that

can be searched on by users operating in the database query mode.

Command

DESC NAME1,NAME2,NAME3
MODULES 6-31

6.5.2.2. EXTA

EXTA ConTnand

EXTA is a SEA element used to physically describe an acoustic volume that

communicates with the SEA elements SKIN (acousticstructural transmission

path) and INTA (non-resonant transmission path through SKIN).

The EXTA subcommand of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe this SEA element. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the EXTA subcommand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and

save the contents of the SEA element as well as move over to another SEA

element or exit DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST,

CHECK, READ, SAVE, DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.

Command

EXTA (NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3)

6.5.2.3. SKIN

SKIN Command

Purpose

SKIN is a SEA element used to physically describe a structure that

communicates with the SEA elements EXTA (structuralacoustic transmission

path), INTA (structural/acoustic transmission path), and MONT (structural

transmission path).

The SKIN subcommand of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe this SEA element. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the SKIN subcommand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and

save the contents of the SEA element as well as move over to another SEA

element or exit DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST,

CHECK, READ, SAVE, DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.

Command

SKIN (NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3)
6-32 DATABASEPREPARATION

6.5.2.4. INTA

INTA Command

Purpose

INTA is a SEA element used to physically describe an acoustic volume that

communicates with the SEA elements SKIN (acoustic/structural transmission

path), EXTA (non-resonant transmission path through SKIN), MONT

(acoustic/structural transmission path - when MONT has significant surface

area), and INST (acoustic/structural transmission path).

The INTA subconmmnd of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe this SEA element. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the INTA subcon_nand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and

save the contents of the SEA element as well as move over to another SEA

element or exit DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST,

CHECK, READ, SAVE, DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.

Command

INTA (NAME1,NAME2,NAME3)

6.5.2.5. MONT

MONT Command

Purpose

MONT is a SEA element used to physically describe a structure that

communicates with the SEA elements INTA (structuralacoustic transmission

path), SKIN (structural transmission path), and INST (structural

transmission path).

The MONT subcommand of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe this SEA element. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the MONT subcommand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and

save the contents of the SEA element as well as move over to another SEA

element or exit DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST,

CHECK, READ, SAVE, DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.
MODULES 6-33

Command

MONT(NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3)

6.5.2.6. INST

INST Command

Purpose

INST is a SEA element used to physically describe a structure that

communicates with the SEA elements INTA (structuralacoustic transmission

path) and MONT (structural transmission path).

The INST subcommand of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe this SEA element. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the INST subcommand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and

save the contents of the SEA element as well as move over to another SEA

element or exit DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST,

CHECK, READ, SAVE, DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.

Command

INST (NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3)

6.5.2.7. FRAM

FRAM Command

Purpose

FRAM is an optional structure use to define the physical connection

between SKIN and MONT (only useful if MONT is a truss).

The FRAM subcommand of DAMO has three optional arguments (up to 12 each)

that describe the structure. These arguments will be saved in the

database master file as part of the descriptions that can be searched on

by users operating in the database query mode. Once the FRAM subcommand is

issued other subcommands can be issued to input, modify, delete, list, and
6-34 DATABASE PREPARATION

save the contents of FRAM as well as move over to a SEA element or exit

DAMO. These subcommands are: P*, C*, REMOVE, LIST, CHECK, READ, SAVE,

DONE, DESC, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, and FRAM.

Command

FRAM (NAME1,NAME2,NAME3)

6.5.2.8. F*

P* Command

Purpose

The P* subcommand of DAMO (actually of EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or

FRAM only) is followed by arguments that set the values of named physical

parameters which are used to describe the SEA element. See the PREDICTION

section of the VAPEPS USER'S MANUAL for parameter lists and descriptions

of the allowable types of SEA elements.

Command

P* NAME=VALUE,NAME=VALUE

Where

NAME - An allowable parameter name.

VALUE - The value of that parameter. The value must be represented as

a real number (eg. 1042.02 or 1.04202E+3 or 1.04202+3)

6.5.2.9. C*

C* Command

The C* subcommand of DAMO (actually of EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or

FRAM) is followed by arguments that define channel names to be associated

with the SEA element. These channel names must exist in the channel table

of the event (see the CHANNEL section for information on and event's

channel table).

Command
C* CI,C2,C3.... ,Cn

Where

CI,C2... - Channel names.

MODULES 6-35

6 • 5 • 2 • 10 . RI'_IC)VE

REMOVE Command

Purpose

The REMOVE subcommand of DAMO (actually of EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or

FRAM only) is followed by arguments that define channel names (input by

the C* subcon_and) to be deassociated with the SEA element.

Command

REMOVE C1,C2,C3 .... ,Cn

Where

CI,C2... - Channel names.

6.5.2.11. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, or FRAM allows

the user to list out the contents of the module/SEA element.

Command

LIST (PARA)

or

LIST (CHAN)

Where

PARA - (Optional) List out parameters only.
6-36 DATABASEPREPARATION

CHAN- (Optional) List out channels only.

6 • 5.2.12. READ

READ Command

Purpose

The READ subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST and FRAM allows

for the user to read in a data module that has been previously stored in

DAL elements by the subcommand SAVE or by DAMO issued from VAPEPS.

Command

READ NU,VER(,ZONE)

Where

NU,VER - DAL unit and version of the DAL elements which contain the

module.

ZONE - (Optional) SEA element to read in. Otherwise READ will read

in all SEA elements.

6.5.2.13. SAVE

SAVE Command

Purpose

The SAVE subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, or FRAM allows

the user to save the data module in DAL elements not associated with the

event.

Command

SAVE NU,NAME

Where

NU,NAME - DAL element and version name of the DAL elements where the

module will be stored. The names of these elements will be:
6"$.2.13 .

in all

S_ elements"

_he SAv_

the User SUbcon_.__

even t. to o_ _d

C°_mand _ve the 0£dataDAMO_ _XTA,

Ule in SKI2_, IN_

DA& e" "_'_" MOm_

"Ler_ents "'_, I_rS_, or _'RAhl allo_s

Where ass°c_ated With the

_& eleven t

Will be:

/

(
r

__,_ _._.o_s

o_ _e O_ _;_0 _

o_e_ _se

,_ eleme_ _o _e_C_ _"
C* CI,C2,C3 .... ,Cn

Where

CI,C2... - Channel names.

MODULES 6-35

6 . 5 • 2 . 10 • REMOVW

REMOVE Command

Purpose

The REMOVE subconm_nd of DAMO (actually of EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or

FRAM only) is followed by arguments that define channel names (input by

the C* subcommand) to be deassociated with the SEA element.

Command

REMOVE C1,C2,C3 .... ,Cn

Where

C1,C2... - Channel names.

6.5.2.11. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, or FRAM allows

the user to list out the contents of the module/SEA element.

Command

LIST (PARA)

or

LIST (CHAN)

Where

PARA - (Optional) List out parameters only.
6-36 DATABASE PREPARATION

CHAN - (Optional) List out channels only.

6.5.2.12. READ

READ Command

Purpose

The READ subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST and FRAM allows

for the user to read in a data module that has been previously stored in

DAL elements by the subconmm%nd SAVE or by DAMO issued from VAPEPS.

Command

READ NU,VER(,ZONE)

Where

NU, VER - DAL unit and version of the DAL elements which contain the

module.

ZONE - (Optional) SEA element to read in. Otherwise READ will read

in all SEA elements.

6.S.2.13. SAVE

SAVE Co_and

Purpose

The SAVE subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, or FRAM allows

the user to save the data module in DAL elements not associated with the

event.

Command

SAVE NU,NAME

Where

NU,NAME - DAL element and version name of the DAL elements where the

module will be stored. The names of these elements will be:
MODULES 6-37

NU,PARA,NAME- Physical parameters.

NU,DCHN,NAME - Channels associated with the module.

NU,DMDC,NAME - Module descriptions.

6.5.2.14. CHECK

CHECK Command

Purpose

The CHECK subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or FRAM checks

over the data module for errors, calculates non-dimensional parameters,

and lists out a summary of the module. CHECK will look for errors such

as:

i) Incomplete physical parameters specified for given types of SEA

elements.

2) Channels associated with a module that do not exist in the event's

channel table.

Command

CHECK

6.5.2.15. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

The DONE (or a blank line) subcommand of DAMO, EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT

INST, or FRAM checks over the module (see the CHECK subcommand) and exits

DAMO.

Command

DONE
6-38 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.5.3. ATTACH

V

ATTACH Command

Purpose

The ATTAch subcommand of MODUles creates an entry in the module table.

Modules formed by the DAMO operation must be associated with a branch of

the event's configuration tree. The ATTAch subcommand defines this

relationship. ATTAch also allows for associating a coordinate system and

integer coordinates with the module. The arguments of the ATTAch

subcommand are discussed in MODUles.

Command

ATTACH MODULE,CONF,ZONE,SYSTEM,X,y,z

Each entry in the module table created by ATTAch must have a unique

MODULE,CONF,ZONE name. If not, other modules with the same three name

combination will be disabled (marked for deletion) and will be lost is a

PACK or DONE subcommand is given from MODUles.

6.5.4. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

The LIST subcommand of MODUles allows for listing of all or part of an

event's module table.

Command

LIST

Lists out the entire module table.

LIST Ii

Lists line I1 of the module table.

LIST Ii,I2

Lists lines Ii through I2 of the module table.
MODULES 6-39

6.5 • 5. DUMP

DUMP Command

Purpose

The DUMP subcommand of MODUles produces a long listing of all or part of

an event's module table.

Command

DUMP

Lists out the entire module table.

DUMP Ii

Lists line II of the module table.

DUMP If, I2

Lists lines Ii through I2 of the module table.

6.5.6. EDIT

EDIT Command

Purpose

The EDIT subcommand of MODUles allows the user to editexisting modules or

copy existing modules into new modules and then edit. EDIT puts the user

on the DAMO level.

Command

EDIT NUM (short hand mode)

Where

NUM - The module number as listed in the module table.

When EDIT is executed An the short hand mode, the three argument module

name is not changed in the module table.
6-40 DATABASE PREPARATION

Other form

EDIT MODULE,CONF,ZONE (NEW)

Where

MODULE,CONF,ZONE - Full three argument module name as it appears in

the event's module table. If edit is issued in

this form with out the optional new name NEW, the

three argument module name in the module table is

not changed.

NEW - (Optional) Specifies a new local module name where

the resulting module output of the edit session

will reside. To become a part of the module table,

the new module NEW must be associated with a branch

of the configuration tree (see the ATTA

subco_mand).

6.5.7. CHANGE

CHANGE Con_nand

Purpose

The CHANGE subcommand of MODUles allows the user to modify the name of a

data module as At is listed in the module table.

Command

CHANGE MODULE,CONF,ZONE NEWMOD,NEWCONF,NEWZONE,NEWSYSTEM,NEWX,NEWY,NEWZ

Where

MODULE,CONF,ZONE - Three argument module name.

NEWMOD,NEWCONF,NEWZONE

,NEWSYSTEM,NEWX,NEWY,NEWZ - (Optional) New names and values of the

module. The last of new names and values

may be truncated at any point, leaving the

remaining names and values unchanged.
6.5.8. READ

MODULES 6-41

READ Command

Purpose

The READ subcommand of MODUles allows the user to add an entire module

table (this includes the data module's contents) from another database

event to the module table for this event.

Conmmnd

READ NU, NAME

Where

NU,NAME - DAL unit and event name for an existing database event.

6.5.9. CHECK

CHECK Command

Purpose

The CHECK subcommand of MODUles examines the modules in the module table

and checks for errors. CHECK will look for errors such as:

i) Modules associated with non-existent branches of the event's

configuration tree.

2) Channels associated with modules that are not in the event's

channel table (see the CHANNEL section of PREP).

Command

CHECK
6-42 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.5.10. REMOVE

REMOVE Command

Purpose

The REMOVE subcommand of MODUles allows the user to disable (mark for

deletion) a module in the module table.

Command

REMOVE MODULE,CONF,ZONE

Where

MODULE,CONF,ZONE - The three argument module name as it appears in the

module table listing.

6.5.11. DISABLE

DISABLE Command

Purpose

The DISAble subcommand of MODUles allows the user to disable (mark for

deletion) modules of an event's module table. Once a module has been

disabled it will be deleted upon exit from the modules section. A disabled

module can also be deleted from the module table by the PACK subcommand.

Command

DISA Ii

Disables the module in the module table listing with line number I1.

DISA II,I2

Disables modules in the module table listing with line numbers I1 through

I2.
MODULES 6-43

6.5.12. ENABLE

ENABLE Command

Purpose

The ENABle subconunand of MODUles allows the user to enable modules in an

event's module table that have become disabled (marked for deletion) by

the subcommand DISA or by the attachment of modules with the same three

argument module name.

Command

ENAB II

Enables the module in the module table listing with line number I1.

ENAB Ii,I2

Enables modules in the module table listing with line numbers I1 through

I2.

6.5.13. PACK

PACK Command

Purpose

The PACK subcommand of MODUles physically removes all disabled modules in

the module table.

Command

PACK
6-44 DATABASE PREPARATION

6.5.14. SAVE

v

SAVE Command

Purpose

The SAVE subconmuand of MODUles saves the current module table (unpacked)

on the current event DAL file using the current event name. This

operation is automatically performed as part of the DONE subcommand.

Command

SAVE

6.5.15. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

The DONE (or a blank line) subcommand of MODUles has no arguments. It's

purpose is to exit MODUles while saving any changes. The operations

described for the PACK, CHECK, and SAVE subcommands of MODUle are also

performed when DONE is issued.

Command

DONE

6.5.3.6. OMIT

OMIT Command

Purpose

The OMIT subcommand of MODUles has no arguments. It's purpose is to exit

MODUles without saving any changes.

Co_unand
MODULES 6-45

OMIT

SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE 7-1

To SEARCHING THE DATABASE

SERCH Processor

Purpose

The SERCH Processor is used to interrogate the VAPEPS data base. Through

various sub-commands and sub-processors you may locate all events and/or

data modules that satisfy certain criteria.

Command

SERCH

This command has no arguments.

Overview

There are three basic types of sub-commands.

Searching commands - These form lists of events/data modules that match

input conditions.

BOOK,EVENT,CONFIG,MODULE,GENERAL

Printing commands - These write the contents of the lists or portions

of the data base to the screen.

LIST

List operations - These perform operations on the lists. Operations

include logical functions AND,OR,NOT as well as

the ability to save lists on file and restore

them.

FIND,NAME,SAVE,RESTORE,STATUS
7-2 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.|. NAME

V

NAME command

Purpose

The purpose of the name command is to set what the input and output event

number lists are set to.

Command

NAME IN,0UT (CIRC)

Where

IN,OUT - Input and output list names. Default is 'ALL','0UT'

CIRC - Is the optional string 'CIRC' which causes the output list to

become the input list.

Overview

While in SERCH there will always be an input list name and an output list

name. Originally these are set to 'ALL' and 'OUT'. When using a primary

command, the searching constraints are applied to all events contained in

the input list. Those events that match are then placed in the output

list.

The basic form of primary commands is

BOOK INPUT OUTPUT (CIRC)

where INPUT is the name of desired input list and OUTPUT is the name of

the desired output list. Both names may be omitted in which case the INPUT

and OUTPUT names are not changed. To change only the output name, a $ may

be used as a the INPUT name.

Each subsequent search operation will examine events in the INPUT list

placing matching events in the output list. The second such operation will

overwrite the current output list, unless the output list name is changed.

Each primary section provides the NAME sub command (NAME INPUT OUTPUT

CIRC) to enable the names to be changed between operations.

The CIRC argument may be included to set the 'circular' mode. When this

mode is set, the input list no longer remains fixed from operation to

operation. After each operation, the output list from that operation

becomes the input list for the next operation.
7.2. BOOK

BOOK 7-3

BOOK command

The BOOK sub-co_d provides the interrogation of the BOOK section. It is

entered via the command:

Command

BOOK INPUT,OUTPUT,CIRC

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

7.2.1. AND

AND Command

Purpose

Finds all events from the list of input events that have all of the

specified specs in the appropriate book section, and writes the event

numbers to the output list.

Command

AND BOOKSEC SPECI,SPEC2,...

or

AND BETWEEN TIMEDATE START END

Where

BOOKSEC - Section of BOOK to search.

= PROCESSING - Searches the processing agency field.

= CONTRACTING - Searches the contracting agency field.

= COGNIZANT - Searches the cognizant agency field.

= VEHICLE - Searches the vehicle field.

= EVENT - Searches the event field.

= LOCATION - Searches the location field.

= TIME - Searches for the specified time.
7-4 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

= DATE - Searches for the specified date.

SPEC1,SPEC2,...

- List of descriptions to search for. All descriptions must be

found in the particular field in order for an event to match.

Each SPEC may contain up to 12 characters. The SPECs may

contain one or more question marks (?) which are used as wild

cards. (?AB?D? would match ABCDE or XXABYYD)

BETWEEN - Keyword that triggers a search for a specified time or date

range.

TIMEDATE - Either TIME or DATE as described under BOOKSEC.

START - Starting time or date.

END - Ending time or date. All events that have DATE or TIME values

between START and END will be found.

Example

Search for all events between the dates 10/03/65 and 05/15/81.

AND BETWEEN DATE 10/03/65 05/15/81

Search for all events between the times 12:30:00 and 15:45:00.

AND BETWEEN TIME 12:30:00 15:45:00

Find all events whose cognizant agency is NASA.

AND COGNIZANT NASA

7.2.2. OR

OR Conm_and

Purpose

Finds all events from the list of input events that have at least one of

the specified specs in the appropriate book section, and writes the event

numbers to the output list.

Command

OR BOOKSEC SPECI,SPEC2,...

or

OR BETWEEN TIMEDATE START END

Where
BOOK 7-5

BOOKSEC - Section of BOOK to search.

= PROCESSING - Searches the processing agency field.

= CONTRACTING - Searches the contracting agency field.

= COGNIZANT - Searches the cognizant agency field.

= VEHICLE - Searches the vehicle field.

= LOCATION - Searches the location field.

= TIME - Searches for the specified time.

= DATE - Searches for the specified date.

SPECI,SPEC2,...

- List of descriptions to search for. At least one description

must be found in the particular field in order for an event to

match. Each SPEC may contain up to 12 characters. The SPECs may

contain one or more question marks (?) which are used as wild

cards. (?AB?D? would match ABCDE or XXABYYD)

BETWEEN - Keyword that triggers a search for a specified time or date

range.

TIMEDATE - Either TIME or DATE as described under BOOKSEC.

START - Starting time or date.

END - Ending time or date. All events that have DATE or TIME va]ues

between START and END will be found.

Example

Search for all events between the dates 10/03/65 and 05/15/81.

OR BETWEEN DATE 10/03/65 05/15/81

Search for all events between the times 12:30:00 and 15:45:00.

OR BETWEEN TIME 12:30:00 15:45:00

Find all events whose cognizant agency is NASA or AEROSPACE.

OR COGNIZANT NASA AEROSPACE
7-6 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.2.3. NOT

NOT Command

Purpose

Finds all events from the list of input events that do not contain any of

the specified specs in the appropriate book section, and writes the

event numbers to the output list.

Command

NOT BOOKSEC SPECI,SPEC2...

Where

BOOKSEC - Section of BOOK to search.

= PROCESSING - Searches the processing agency field.

= CONTRACTING - Searches the contracting agency field.

= COGNIZANT - Searches the cognizant agency field.

= VEHICLE - Searches the vehicle field.

= LOCATION - Searches the location field.

= TIME - Searches for the specified time.

= DATE - Searches for the specified date.

SPECI,SPEC2,...

- List of descriptions to search for. None of the descriptions

must be found in the particular field in order for an event to

match. Each SPEC may contain up to 12 characters. The SPECs may

contain one or more question marks (?) which are used as wild

cards. (?AB?D? would match ABCDE or XXABYYD)

BETWEEN - Keyword that triggers a search for a specified time or date

range.

TIMEDATE - Either TIME or DATE as described under BOOKSEC.

START - Starting time or date.

END - Ending time or date. All events that have DATE or TIME values

not between START and END will be found.

Example

Search for all events not between the dates 10/03/65 and 05/15/81.

NOT BETWEEN DATE 10/03/65 05/15/81

Search for all events not between the times 12:30:00 and 15:45:00.

NOT BETWEEN TIME 12:30:00 15:45:00

Find all events whose cognizant agency is not NASA or AEROSPACE.

=
NOT COGNIZANT NASA AEROSPACE

BOOK 7-7

7.2.4. NAME

NAME Command

Purpose

Changes the input and output list names. If CIRC is specified, the

circular mode is enabled.

Command

NAME INPUT,OUTPUT (CIRC)

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

7.2.5. INTERSECT

INTERSECT Command

Purpose

Forms intersection of current input list with the named list, and writes

the resulting list to the output list.

Command

INTERSECT NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be intersected with the input list.
7-8 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

7.2.6. INCLUDE

INCLUDE Command

Purpose

Combines the input list with the named list, and writes the result to the

output list.

Command

INCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be combined with the input list.

7.2.7. EXCLUDE

EXCLUDE Command

Purpose

Finds all events on the input list which are not present in the named

list, and writes those event numbers to the output list.

Command

EXCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to remove from the input list.
7.2.8. SYNONYMS

BOOK 7-9

SYNONYMS Command

Purpose

This command turn on and off synonym matching from the data dictionary.

Command

SYNONYMS (IOP)

Where

IOP - Option to turn on or off synonym matching.

= ON - Turns synonym matching on.

= OFF - Turns synonym matching off.

If not input then the current status is displayed.

General

With this option on all input words are expanded to include their synonyms.

The search logic works something like this:

Given the following command:

AND A,B,C

The following is implied:

A.OR.(One of it's synonyms).AND.

B.OR.(One of it's synonyms).AND.

C.OR.(One of it's synonyms)

Given the following command:

OR A,B,C

The following is implied:

A.OR.(One of it's synonyms).OR.

B.OR.(One of it's synonyms).OR.

C.OR.(One of it's synonyms)

Given the following command:

NOT A,B,C

The following is implied:

.NOT.(A.OR.(One of it's synonyms)).AND.

.NOT.(B.OR.(One of it's synonyms)).AND.

.NOT.(C.OR.(One of it's synonyms))

This process can become quite time consuming if the combined number of

words and synonyms gets very large, it can also have some undesirable

side effects if a synonym that you don't wish to use has been input in
7-10 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

the data dictionary. On the other hand it can be quite useful if you

are unsure of exact word for which you are looking.

7.2.9. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminate execution of the current processor and returns control to the

main level of 5ERCH.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return.

There are no arguments to this command. A carriage return is equivalent

to the command DONE.
7.3. EVENT

EVENT 7-11

EVENT Command

Purpose

The EVENT section is used to search the PROC portion of the BOOK data. The

major difference between EVENT searches and BOOK searches are that

searches are done on 4 character words, as opposed to the full 12

character words that are used in BOOK.

Command

EVENT INPUT,OUTPUT,CIRC

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

Search command

There is only one search command in this section. It is an implied OR

command. Wild cards (?'s) are not supported in this section. The OR is not

specified as part of the command.

Command

SPECI,SPEC2, ....

Where

SPECI,SPEC2,... - List of descriptions in the PROCESSING agency section

of book. If an event contains at least on of the

descriptions then a match occurs.

_r
7-12 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.3.1. NAME

NAME Command

Purpose

Changes the input and output list names. If CIRC is specified, the

circular mode is enabled.

Command

NAME INPUT,OUTPUT (CIRC)

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

L .

7.3.2. INTERSECT

INTERSECT Command

Purpose

Forms intersection of current input list with the named list, and writes

the resulting list to the output list.

Command

INTERSECT NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be intersected with the input list.
EVENT 7-13

7.3.3. INCLUDE

INCLUDE Command

Purpose

Combines the input list with the named list, and writes the result to the

output list.

Command

INCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be combined with the input list.

7.3.4. EXCLUDE

EXCLUDE Command

Purpose

Finds all events on the input list which are not present in the named

list, and writes those event numbers to the output list.

Command

EXCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to remove from the input list.
7-14 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.3.5. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminate execution of the current processor and returns control to the

main level of SERCH.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return.

There are no arguments to this command. A carriage return is equivalent

to the command DONE.
CONFIGURATION7-15

7.4. CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION Command

Purpose

The CONF section is used to search the configuration trees of events

listed in the input list. The target of the search is the generic and

specific qualifiers that may be used to identify each branch in the tree.

Conmmnd

CONFIGURATION INPUT,OUTPUT,CIRC

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

7.4.1. MODE

MODE Command

Purpose

Set one of three search modes.

Command

MODE MODSPEC

Where

MODSPEC - Search mode.

= GENERIC - Only generic names are searched. (default mode)

= SPECIFIC - Only specific names are searched.

= BOTH - Both generic and specific names are searched.
7-16 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

7,4.2. AND

V

AND Command

Find all events which have all of the specified descriptions. The search

is performed as specified by the MODE command.

Command

AND 5PEC1,SPEC2,...

Where

SPEC1,SPEC2,... - List of names in either the generic or specific

sections or in both. See the MODE command for

details on how to set this.

For generic mode, the SPECs are generic names (12 chars max), for specific

mode, the SPECs are specific names (12 chars max), and for BOTH, the SPECs

must be entered in pairs, as

AND GENI,SPEC1 GEN2,SPEC2

NODE Command

A special form of the AND conunand is NODE:

NODE SPECI,SPEC2, ....

where a given event must have a branch that contains all of the listed

specs in order to match. (Remember that for AND, the specs may exist

anywhere in the tree)

7.4.3. OR

OR Command

Find all events which have at least one of the specified descriptions.

The search is performed as specified by the MODE command.

Command

OR SPECI,SPEC2,...
CONFIGURATION7-17

Where

SPECI,SPEC2,... - List of names in either the generic or specific

sections or in both. See the MODE command for

details on how to set this.

For generic mode, the SPECs are generic names (12 chars max), for specific

mode, the SPECs are specific names (12 chars max), and for BOTH, the SPECs

must be entered in pairs, as

OR GENI,SPECI GEN2,SPEC2

7.4.4. NOT

NOT Command

Find all events which do not have any of the specified descriptions. The

search is performed as specified by the MODE command.

Command

NOT SPECI,SPEC2,...

Where

SPECI,SPEC2,... - List of names in either the generic or specific

sections or in both. See the MODE command for

details on how to set this.

For generic mode, the SPECs are generic names (12 chars max), for specific

mode, the SPECs are specific names (12 chars max), and for BOTH, the SPECs

must be entered in pairs, as

NOT GENI,SPECI GEN2,SPEC2
7-18 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.4.5. TREE

TREE Command

Purpose

List the configuration tree for the specified event.

Command

TREE IVENT

Where

IVENT - Absolute number of the event. Normally you look for some item

on a tree to get a list, then list the contents of the list to

get the event numbers. These numbers may be used in the TREE

command.

7.4.6. SAVE

SAVE Command

Purpose

Save a specified list on a DAL file So that it can be accessed later.

Command

SAVE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to save.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list is to be saved.
CONFIGURATION7-19

7.4.7. RESTORE

RESTORE Command

Purpose

Restore a previously SAVEd list from the specified DAL file.

Command

RESTORE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to create.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list was saved.

7.4.8. LIST

LIST Conm_nd

Purpose

List events contained in the specified lists.

Command

LIST LSTI,LST2, ... LSTI4

Where

LSTI,LST2,...LSTI4

- Up to 14 list names. If none are specified then the output

list used.

Notes

The entry for each event includes all of the information from the PROC

section of the BOOK information, plus the name of the file which contains

the data for the event. If no lists are specified, the current output

list is listed.
7-20 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.4.9. STATUS

STATUS Command

Purpose

This command will return the names of the current input and output lists.

If CIRC was set, STATUS will so inform the user.

Command

STATUS

7.4.10. NAME

NAME Command

Purpose

Changes the input and output list names. If CIRC is specified, the

circular mode is enabled.

Command

NAME INPUT,OUTPUT (CIRC)

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.
CONFIGURATION7-21

7.4.11. DOME

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminate execution of the current processor and returns control to the

main level of SERCH.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return.

There are no arguments to this command. A carriage return is equivalent

to the command DONE.
7-22 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.5. MODULE

MODULE Command

Purpose

Search the modules section of the data base for the specified items.

Command

MODULES INPUT,OUTPUT,CIRC

where INPUT,OUTPUT, and CIRC control the list names for subsequent

operations. These names may be omitted, in which case they retain their

current values.

7 .5 •1 • MODE SETTING C0t, gqANDS

Purpose

Turn on or off certain modes of searching.

Command

ON ITEM

OFF ITEM

Whet e

ITEM - Mode from the following list:

= PARAMETERS - Turn on or off parameter searching mode.

= DESCRIPTIONS

= CHANNELS

See

element searching for information on it's

affect.

- Turn on or off description searching mode. This

has the opposite effect of the PARAMETERS mode.

- Turn on of off channel searching mode. When on

only those modules with channels will be

searched. When off all modules will be

searched.
7.5.2. MODULE SEARCHING SUBCOI_qANDS

MODULE 7-23

SYSTEM Command

Purpose

Find all modules from the input list that have the indicated coordinate

system and lie within the indicated coordinate range.

Command

SYSTEM SYST X=IX,JX Y=IY,JY Z=IZ,JZ

Where

SYST - Name of the coordinate system desired. Must always be input.

A dollar sign ($) may be entered to match all coordinate

systems.

X=IX,JX Y=IY,JY Z=IZ,JZ

- X, Y, and Z refer to the three axes of a three dimensional

cartesian coordinate system. (IX, JX), (IY,JY) and (IZ,JZ)

are the lower and upper bounds respectively in each axis.

Only modules that fall within these limits will be considered

a match. Any or all of the ranges may be omitted.

Example

Find all systems which have a Y coordinate range from 1 to 10.

SYSTEM $ Y=l,10

Notes

This command is not affected by the DESCRIPTIONS/PARAMETERS mode. The

CHANNELS mode does effect it. If the CHANNELS mode is on then at least

one element in a model must have channels associated with it before the

module will be considered in the search.

DESC Command

Purpose

Search the module descriptions.

Command

DESC NAMEI(,NAME2(,NAME3))
7-24 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

Where

NAMEI(,NAME2(,NAME3))

- Up to three descriptions to search for. All name

must be in a module for a match to occur.

specified

Notes

This command is not affected by the DESCRIPTIONS/PARAMETERS mode. The

CHANNELS mode does effect it. If the CHANNELS mode is on then at least

one element in a model must have channels associated with it before the

module will be considered in the search.

7.5.3. ELEMENT SEARCHING COI,g,IANDS

The element searching commands are similar to the module searching

commands, except that the search is performed on individual SEA elements

within the modules, rather that on the modules as a whole.

EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST, FRAM Commands

Purpose

Search for information in one of the six elements of a 5 element SEA

model.

Command

SEANAM NAMEI(,NAME2(,NAME3))

or

SEANAM ITYPE,A=IA,JA B=IB,JB C=IC,JC D=ID,JD

Where

SEANAM - IS one of EXTA, SKIN, INTA, MONT, INST or FRAM. This

designates what element is to be searched.

NAMEI(,NAME2(,NAME3))

- Up to three descriptions to search for. All name specified

must be in a module for a match to occur. This mode works

only if DESCRIPTIONS is on.

ITYPE - Type of SEA element to search for. A dollar sign ($) will

match all types.

A=IA,JA B=IB,JB C=IC,JC D=ID,JD

- Indicates which nondimensional parameter (A, B, C or D) to

search on and the range in which to search for each (IA,JA
MODULE 7-25

IB,JB ...). Any or all of these maybe omitted. This mode

works only whenPARAMETERS modeis on.

 ̧ ̧-.__I

7.5.4. MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS

LIST Command

Purpose

Lists the modules in the OUTPUT list.

Con_nand

LIST

DUMP Command

Purpose

Produces a long list of the specified module or the output list.

Command

DUMP

or

DUMP NUM

Where

NUM - IS an absolute module number to be listed. If omitted then all

modules in the output list will be listed.

NAME Command

Purpose

Changes the input and output list names. If CIRC is specified, the

circular mode is enabled.

Command

NAME INPUT,OUTPUT (CIRC)

DONE Command

Purpose
7-26 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

Exit the MODULES subprocessor.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return
7.6. GENERAL

GENERAL 7-27

GENERAL Search processor

Purpose

This processor searches the entire Master File for the input list of words.

Co_d

GENERAL IN,OUT (CIRC)

Where

IN,OUT - Input and output lists.

CIRC

Default is 'ALL','OUT'

- Is the optional string 'CIRC' which causes the output list

to become the input list.

7.6.1. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

List events contained in the specified lists.

CoEmmnd

LIST LST1,LST2, ... LST14

Where

LST1,LST2,...LST14

- Up to 14 list names. If none are specified then the output

list used.

Notes

The entry for each event includes all of the information from the PROC

section of the BOOK information, plus the name of the file which contains

the data for the event. If no lists are specified, the current output

list is listed.
7-28 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.6.2. SAVE

SAVE Command

Purpose

Save a specified list on a DAL file so that it can be accessed later.

Command

SAVE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to save.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list is to be saved.

7.6.3. RESTORE

RESTORE Com/_and

Purpose

Restore a previously SAVEd list from the specified DAL file.

Command

RESTORE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to create.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list was saved.
GENERAL 7-29

7.6.4 • STATUS

STATUS Command

Purpose

This conm_lnd will return the names of the current input and output lists.

If CIRC was set, STATUS will so inform the user.

Command

STATUS

7.6.5. NAME

NAME command

Purpose

The purpose of the name conm_nd is to set what the input and output

event number lists are set to.

Command

NAME IN,OUT (CIRC)

Where

IN,OUT - Input and output list names.

CIRC

Default is 'ALL','0UT'

- Is the optional string 'CIRC' which causes the output

list to become the input list.

See the SERCH subtopic NAME for more information on this command.

k j

i •
7-30 SEARCHING THE DATA!ASE

7.6.6. INTERSECT

INTERSECT Command

Purpose

Forms intersection of current input list with the named list, and

writes the resulting list to the output list.

Command

INTERSECT NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be intersected with the input list.

7.6.7. INCLUDE

INCLUDE Command

Purpose

Combines the input list with the named list, and writes the result

to the output list.

Command

INCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to be combined with the input list.
GENERAL 7-31

7.6.8. EXCLUDE

EXCLUDE Command

Purpose

Finds all events on the input list which are not present in the

named list, and writes those event numbers to the output list.

Conlnand

EXCLUDE NAME

Where

NAME - Is the name of the list to remove from the input list.

7.6.9. AND

AND Con_nand

Purpose

This command searches for the input words with the condition that all of

the input words must be in each event for a match to occur.

Conmm_d

AND WORDI(,WORD2(,...(,WORDN)))

Where

WORD... - Is the input list of word to be searched on.

Note

Special conditions apply if synonym matching is used. See the SYNONYM

conlnand for more information.
7-32 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.6.10. OR

OR Command

Purpose

This command searches for the input words with the condition that at least

on of the input words must be in each event for a match to occur.

Command

OR WORDI(,WORD2(,...(,WORDN)))

Where

WORD... - Is the input list of word to be searched on.

Note

Special conditions apply if synonym matching is used. See the SYNONYM

command for more information.

7.6.11. NOT

NOT Command

Purpose

This command searches for the input words with the condition that none of

the input words can be in an event for a match to occur.

Command

NOT WORDI(,WORD2(,...(,WORDN)))

Where

WORD... - Is the input list of word to be searched on.

Note

Special conditions apply if synonym matching is used. See the SYNONYM

command for more information.
GENERAL 7-33

7.6.12. SYNONYMS

SYNONYMS Command

Purpose

This command turn on and off synonym matching from the data dictionary.

Command

SYNONYMS (IOP)

Where

IOP - Option to turn on or off synonym matching.

= ON - Turns synonym matching on.

= OFF - Turns synonym matching off.

If not input then the current status is displayed.

General

With this option on all input words are expanded to include their synonyms.

The search logic works something like this:

Given the following command:

AND A,B,C

The following is implied:

A.OR.(One of it's synonyms).AND.

B.OR.(One of it's synonyms).AND.

C.OR.(One of it's synonyms)

Given the following command:

OR A,B,C

The following is implied:

A.OR.(One of it's synonyms).OR.

B.OR.(One of it's synonyms).OR.

C.OR.(One of it's synonyms)

Given the following command:

NOT A,B,C

The following is implied:

.NOT.(A.OR.(One of it's synonyms)).AND.

.NOT.(B.OR.(One of it's synonyms)).AND.

.NOT.(C.0R.(One of it's synonyms))
7-34 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

This process can becomequite time consumingif the combinednumberof

words and synonymsgets very large. It can also have someundesirable

side effects if a synonymthat you don't wish to use has been input in

the data dictionary. On the other hand it can be quite useful if you

are unsure of exact word for which you are looking.

7.6.13. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminate execution of the current processor and returns control to

the main level of 5ERCH.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return.

There are no arguments to this command. A carriage return is equivalent

to the command DONE.
FIND 7-35

7.7. FIND

FIND Command

Purpose

The FIND command does not actually perform any searches. It is used to

make logical comparisons between lists.

Command

FIND INPUT,0UTPUT,CIRC

Where

INPUT - The name of the input list.

OUTPUT - Name of the output list.

CIRC - Keyword which forces the output list to become the input list

after a successful search.

LOGOP LISTS

7.7.1. AND

AND Command

Purpose

Create a list which consists of the intersection of the lists specified

and the input list. The output list will contain all the events which are

common to all the lists including the input list. If INPUT = ALL then the

input list is not included.

Command

AND LISTI,LIST2,...LISTI4

Wher e

LISTI,LIST2,...LISTI4 - Are up to 14 input lists to be operated on.
7-36 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

7.7.2. OR

OR Command

Purpose

Create a list which consists of the union of the lists specified and the

input list. The output list will contain all the events which are common

to all the lists including the input list. If INPUT = ALL then the input

list is not included.

Command

OR LISTI,LIST2,...LIST14

Where

LISTI,LIST2,...LISTI4 - Are up to 14 input lists to be operated on.

7.7.3. NOT

NOT Command

Purpose

When INPUT = ALL, a list is created which contains all events which are

not in any of the lists specified. When INPUT not equal to ALL a list is

created which contains all of the event in the input list which do not

appear in any of the lists specified.

Command

NOT LIST1,LIST2,...LIST14

Whet e

LISTI,LIST2,...LIST14 - Are up to 14 input lists to be operated on.

v
FIND 7-37

7.7.4. MAME

NAME command

Purpose

The purpose of the name coE_and is to set what the input and output

event number lists are set to.

Command

NAME IN,OUT (CIRC)

Where

IN,OUT - Input and output list names. Default is 'ALL','OUT'

CIRC - Is the optional string 'CIRC' which causes the output

list to become the input list.

See the SERCH subtopic NAME for more information on this command.

7.7.5. DONE

DONE Command

Purpose

Terminate execution of the current processor and returns control to the

main level of SERCH.

Command

DONE

or

Carriage return.

There are no arguments to this command. A carriage return is equivalent

to the command DONE.
7-38 SEARCHINGTHEDATABASE

7.8. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

List events contained in the specified lists.

Command

LIST LSTI,LST2, ... LSTI4

Where

LSTI,LST2,...LSTI4

- Up to 14 list names.

list used.

Notes

If none are specified then the output

The entry for each event includes all of the information from the PROC

section of the BOOK information, plus the name of the file which contains

the data for the event. If no lists are specified, the current output

list is listed.
7.9. SAVE

SAVE 7-39

SAVE Con_and

Purpose

Save a specified list on a DAL file so that it can be accessed later.

Command

SAVE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to save.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list is to be saved.

_t
7-40 SEARCHING THE DATABASE

7.10. RESTORE

RESTORE Command

Purpose

Restore a previously SAVEd list from the specified DAL file.

Command

RESTORE LST,NU,NAME,VER

Where

LST - Name of the list to create.

NU,NAME,VER - DAL unit, element and version where list was saved.
7.11. STATUS

STATUS 7- 41

STATUS Conanand

Purpose

This command will return the names of the current input and output lists.

If CIRC was set, STATUS will so inform the user.

Command

STATUS

o

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

8-1

ADMINISTRATION Command

Purpose

The ADMINISTRATION processor performs the administrative functions

associated with the VAPEPS data base. These functions include:

l) Saving portions of event files in the master file.

2) Spilling an event ( or events ) into a symbolic file as card images.

These card images are suitable for transmittal to other sites.

Co_and

ADMINISTRATION MU

Where

MU - The unit number of the master file. MU defaults to 13 if not

specified. MU will set the master file unit number for the

duration of the run unless reset by re-entering the ADMINISTRATION

processor with a different value. Under normal circumstances MU

should always be equal to the default value of 13.
8-2 DATABASEADMINISTRATION

8.1. PREPARATION OF DATA

The following steps must be done to the data before it is saved on the

master file.

I) Enter the data with the ENTER command or it's equivalent. Consult

Chapter 5 for more information.

2) Prepare the data with the PREP command. Consult Chapter 6 for more

information.

3) Set up word lists with the RUN=PADMIN command. Consult Chapter 3

RUN=PADMIN command for more information.

The remaining steps must be executed by thedatabase administrator to

insure that proper naming conventions are used. The master file and

dictionary file normally will be write protected so that only the database

administrator will be able to access them.

4) Define all words with the DICTIONARY/PREADMIN command. Consult Chapter

9 for more information.

At this point if all the words are properly defined the event can be saved

on the master file.

v
8.2. SAVE

SAVE 8-3

SAVE Command

Purpose

SAVE is used to write portions of an event file to the master file. Once

an event has been saved it is available for searching, etc.

Command

SAVE NU,VENT

Where

NU,VENT - The DAL unit and event name of the event to be saved.

Notes

Note that SAVE writes into the MASTER file. Thus you must have write

access on the MASTER file in order to use this command. Typically only the

VAPEPS Administrator has write access on the MASTER file.

Data Dictionary

If an authorization list, prepared by the DICTIONARY/PREADMIN command, is

not present then the event will not be saved on the MASTER file.
8-4 DATABASE ADMINISTRATION

8.3. SPILL

V

SPILL Command

Purpose

The SPILL sub-command is used to dump an entire event in symbolic form so

that it can be transmitted to other sites. An optional form of the SPILL

sub-command may be used to dump only the PREP deck for an event.

Command

SPILL NU,VENT NOUT,NELT,NVER

Where

NU,VENT - The DAL unit and version of the event for which card images

are to be produced.

NOUT - Either a FORTRAN unit number or a DAL unit number. If NELT

and NVER are left off of the sub-conm_nd, NOUT is the

FORTRAN unit to which the card images will be written. If

NELT and NVER are specified, NOUT is the DAL unit to which

card images will be written.

NELT,NVER - The element name and version on DAL unit NOUT to which card

images will be written. Note that NELT and NVER are

optional. If not specified, card images will be written to

FORTRAN unit NOUT instead of DAL element NOUT,NELT,NVER.

In this form, SPILL will write the entire event ( spectral data,

book-keeping info, configuration tree and data modules ) in symbolic form.

An alternate form of the SPILL sub-coa_nand will write all of the above

mentioned information except the spectral data. This is accom- plished by

specifying the value of NU as a negative number. In this case the

spectral data would be transmitted separately. See the desc- ription of

the RUN=ESAV runstream in chapter 13 for details on creating spectral data

decks for transmission to other sites.

There is a runstream RUN=SPIL, which enters ADMINISTRATION, and spills all

events in a given file.
8.4. FLIP

FLIP 8-5

FLIP Command

Purpose

The FLIP command transposes several of the files in the MASTER file. Once

transposed, the BOOK info (for example) may be interrogated using general

VAPEPS commands as opposed to the more specific SERCH command. Since this

usage requires a fair amount of experience with VAPEPS, FLIP is not

normally used.
,...j
o

DIRECT DICTIONARY INTERFACE 9-1

DIRECT DICTIONARY INTERFACE

DICTIONARY Command

Purpose

This command enters the Direct Dictionary Interface processor which allows

the maintenance of the Data Dictionary. It also has some specialized

functions for adding new events to the Data Base.

Conlnand

DICTIONARY

or

DICTIONARY/PREADMIN NI,EVENT

Where

NI,EVENT - DAL unit and event name for event which is to have it's words

added to the Data Dictionary.

Notes

The Data Dictionary resides on DAL unit 15.
9-2 DIRECT DICTIONARY INTERFACE

9.1. DEFINE

DEFINE command

Purpose

This command allows a definition to be associated with a word.

Command

DEFINE WORD

-definitionor

DEFINE WORD NDEF

Wher e

WORD - IS the word to be defined.

-definition- - Is the text that comprises the definition. It can be as

many lines as desired. It is terminated by a blank

line. The prompt for this will be the word input.

NDEF - Is the definition number which is to be associated with

the word as defined in PREP. This only works when the

PREADMIN option is used. This defaults to 1 so that

where only one definition is used it is not necessary to

use this con_nand.

Notes

The definition is formated by making line breaks between words so there is

no need to worry about making it appear well formatted on input. More than

one definition can be input for a single word. Each definition has an

integer number associated with it. The numbering is automatic staring at

1 and incrementing by 1 with each new definition added to a word. When a

definition is deleted all higher numbered definition numbers are

decremented by i. This could cause problems later on. In most cases

there will be only 1 definition.
DELETE 9-3

9.2. DELETE

DELETE Command

Purpose

This command is used to delete a word, definition, or synonym.

Command

DELETE WORD

or

DELETE WORD NDEF

or

DELETESYN WORD SYNONYM

Where

WORD

NDEF

- Is the word on which to operate.

- Is the number of the definition for WORD which is to be

deleted.

SYNONYM - Is the synonym of WORD which is to be deleted.

Notes

When only WORD is specified all reference to that word is deleted

including definitions and synonyms. This command is a little slow in that

it has to search all of the word lists to delete other words pointers to

this word.
9-4 DIRECTDICTIONARYINTERFACE

9.3. LIST

LIST Command

Purpose

This command allows the definitions and synonyms of words to be displayed

in an easily readable format.

Command

LIST

or

LIST WORD

or

LISTS SECTION

Where

WORD - Is a word for which the definitions and synonyms are to be

displayed.

SECTION - Is a section for which words are to be displayed. (Advanced

usage only.)

Notes

When no options are input the entire Data Dictionary is listed out in

alphabetic order. A hardcopy of this listing is useful when filling out

PREP worksheets.

Wild Card Character (?)

The character ? (question mark) can be used in the list command to match

zero or more characters in a string.

Example: LIST ?LMSC?

This will match any word which has the string LMSC in it and list it out.
9.4. SPILL

SPILL 9-5

SPILL Cow,hand

Purpose

This command is used to 'spill' out the contents of the Data Dictionary in

a manner in which the computer can readily read it back in.

Con_Nand

SPILL

or

SPILLWORD WORD

or

SPILLS SECTION

Where

WORD - Is a word for which all information is to be spilled.

SECTION - Is a section for which all information is to be spilled.

Notes

When no options are input the entire Data Dictionary is spilled. At this

time all output is directed to fortran unit 6. This limitation will be

removed in later versions.

Wild Card Character (?)

The character ? (question mark) can be used in the SPILL command to match

zero or more characters in a string.

Example: SPILL ?LMSC?

This will match any word which has the string LMSC in it and spill it out.
9-6 DIRECTDICTIONARYINTERFACE

9.5. SYNONYM

SYNONYM Command

Purpose

This command creates associates another word in the Data Dictionary to the

word specified. This association means that the two words are synonymous.

Command

SYNONYM WORD SYNONYM1 (SYNONYM2 (SYNONYM3 ... SYNONYMn)))

Where

WORD - Is the word for which SYNONYM ks a synonym.

5YNONYMn - Word which is a synonym of WORD. AS many synonyms as will

fit on one line can be input for WORD.

Notes

Synonyms can be used by the SERCH command to expand the scope of a search

such that is will find all events which have words similar in meaning to

the word(s) which were specified in the search command. See 5ERCH for

more information.

Allowed synonyms

Synonyms must be a previously defined word. A word cannot be a synonym of

itself. Multiple instances of the same synonym for a word are not allowed.

V
9.6. PREADMIN

PREADMIN 9-7

PREADMIN Option

Purpose

This option is used to interface the PREPed event with the Data Dictionary

and the Master File.

Notes

The following things happen when this option is used:

i) All the words in a list prepared by the RUN=PADMIN runstream which are

associated with a particular event are read.

2) Those words not appearing in the Data Dictionary are displayed.

3) The Direct Dictionary Interface is entered.

4) Words which were not defined are defined. This can be done all at once

or in separate executions of the DICTIONARY/PREADMIN command.

5) When all the words are adequately defined an authorization vector is

written to the event file. This tells ADMIN that all the words in the

event have been properly entered into the Data Dictionary. ADMIN will

not allow an event to be saved unless this step is finished.

6) The matrix BOOK LST$ is updated on the Master File. This is what

controls the warning in the BOOK section of PREP which tells you that

certain items do not follow the convention.

I0. STATISTICAL

STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER i0-i

ENERGY MODELER

Introduction

This section contains descriptions of commands that can be used for

performing a variety of acoustic and structural predictions. Besides

providing for strictly analytical predictions, prediction tools are also

provided that make use of the VAPEPS database of vibroacoustic data and

structural parameters to predict the environment for payload components of

new spacecraft systems; such predictions are empirical and are referred to

as either extrapolated or scaled predictions depending on the analytical

details around which the prediction tool was developed. To be considered

by the analyst in the selection of a particular prediction tool, is the

familiarity of the analyst with the underlying concepts upon which the

prediction tool was developed -- a very important consideration for the

successful application of the prediction tool to practical problems. The

following type of predictions are available:

l) Theoretical predictions. These predictions are all based on

Statistical Energy Analysis (SEA) concepts. SEA treats the various

acousticstructural components of a spacecraft system as energy storage

elements; the primary dynamic variable is then energy from which other

dynamic variables such as sound pressure, acceleration, etc. are derived.

A SEA model is made up of a series of discrete energy storage elements

(SEA elements), interconnected by a network of energy paths. The

Statistical Energy MODeler (SEMOD) is used to construct the SEA model. To

use this prediction technique effectively the analyst must be familiar with

SEA theory; the low frequency limitations of SEA must be understood, as

well as, the assumptions made with respect to the manner in which SEA

elements couple together to receive and transmit energy -- this

interchange of energy is characterized by parameters referred to as

coupling loss factors.

2) Extrapolated predictions (EXTRAP I). This empirical prediction is used

to make response predictions of a new system based on the measured data of

a baseline system. Two SEA models (one for the new system and the other

for the baseline system) are used. Data from a baseline model -- selected

from the VAPEPS database -- is used to obtain a transfer function. This

transfer function is then corrected for acoustic/structural differences

between the database spacecraft and the new spacecraft based on the SEA

models. The SEMOD processor is again used to build the appropriate models;

the command PREDICT/EXTRAP/I is used to make the prediction.

3) Scaling predictions (EXTRAP II). This is another empirical prediction

technique which captures the essential features of techniques that have

been previously developed and employed by the aerospace community (eg.

Condos-Butler, et. al.). Corrections, based on scaling, are made for
10-2 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

differences in structural parameters and differences in acoustic

excitation between the baseline and new spacecraft systems. This method

employs the SEMOD/EXTRAP/II command to build the required models and the

PREDICT/EXTRAP/II command to make the prediction.

The extrapolated prediction EXTRAP I provides for the modeling of systems

which are more complex than provided for by the scaling prediction EXTRAP

If. Since EXTRAP I is based on SEA concepts it has low frequency

limitations; EXTRAP II, however, is not based on SEA theory and has no

such frequency limitations as long as the database contains data obtained

from a spacecraft system that can be considered dynamically similar to the

new system for which a prediction is to made. The method for establishing

a baseline system from the VAPEPS database to have the desired dynamic

characteristics is described in this section -- refer to the paragraphs

entitled NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS.

4) Mean-squared spatial averaged stress. This method predicts the

mean-square spatial averaged stress of a flat plate, curved plate,

cylinder or user defined ratio of spatial average mean-square stress to

mean-square displacement. The STRESS command is used to do this

prediction (refer to Chapter 3).

5) Other predictions can be made by combining the general commands into a

runstream.

What is SEMOD?

SEMOD (Statistical Energy MODeler) is an interactive/batch processor used

to create Statistical Energy Analysis (SEA) models. The idea is to model

a spacecraft system using a series of discrete SEA elements interconnected

by a network of energy paths; each SEA element and energy path is labeled

with a type number and assigned the appropriate acoustic/structural

properties.

For example: if you have a cylinder in a reverberant acoustic chamber you

would want to model the acoustic chamber as a reverberant field (element

type i), the cylinder as a cylinder (element type 4) and the internal

acoustic space of the cylinder as a reverberant field (element type i).

You would then connect the external space to the cylinder (connection type

2) and the internal space to the cylinder (connection type 2). The

non-resonant "mass law" connection from the external space to the

internal space is modeled with connection type 5. The element and

connection type numbers have been preassigned and are described in this

section - refer to the paragraphs entitled PARAMETERS.

SEMOD allows an analyst almost unlimited flexibility in modeling, by using

a variety of elements and connection types, the analyst can model nearly

any type of structure desired either as (1) consistent with the predefined

element and element connection types or (2) the analyst can exercise an

option of utilizing independently derived connection types - the
STATISTICALENERGYMODELER 10-3

connection types are developed from the SEA coupling loss factors, refer

to the paragraphs entitled ATACALC and PATHNAME of this section.

ATTENTION

SEMOD is designed to be easy to use from the standpoint of creating SEA

models. However, this may lead the the deception that SEA modeling is

easy. SEA modeling is not easy. It takes a lot of experience and a

good understanding of the structural details with respect to the

spacecraft being modeled, as well as, an understanding of the assumptions

associated with SEA theory and the limitations of the coupling loss

factors being used to characterize the interconnecting network or energy

paths to be able to create a model that will yield rational predictions.

Successful application of the SEA concept to practical problems presents

a challenge that can be met only with substantial effort on the part of the

analyst to appropriately model the spacecraft structure using the abstract

elements and element interconnections with which SEA theory deals.

It is recommended that theoretical predictions be checked against

data--retrieved from the VAPEPS database--from structures perceived to be

dynamically similar to the structure for which a prediction is being made.

If the analyst is uncertain about performing theoretical predictions, the

use of the scaling prediction, EXTRAP II, is advised.

Input requirements.

Input is divided up into several steps. The following steps are normally

required to create a model. (Command names appear in parenthesis).

1 Determine how the structure is to be modeled by examining structural

drawings.

2 Obtain physical parameters of the structure to be modeled.

3 Input the elements and parameters for the model. (ELNAME)

4 Input the connections and connection dependant parameters.

(PATHNAME)

5 Define the excitation element(s). (SETEXC)

6 Step through the prediction sequence. (MDENS, ATACALC, ATACO, CFAC,

and, TPRD)

7 Display results. Tables and plots. (LIST, and RUN=PRSP)

Execution

The SEMOD processor is entered from the upper level of VAPEPS (question
10-4 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

mark prompt) by use of the commandSEMOD.The SEMODcommandand

sub-commandsare described in the following documentation.

As you mayhave noticed there are quite a few commandsin SEMOD.To the

beginner this maylead to confusion. It would appear that several of

these con_nandscould be combinedinto a single command.This is true for

the majority of simple models. The reason that these commands are broken

up in this manner is to allow greater flexibility in modeling.

For example: If a user wishes to input his own damping loss factors this

could be done between the ATACALC and ATACO commands.

This type of prediction modification allows a great degree of flexibility

for an experienced SEMOD modeler. For the novice it means more typing but

it also points out that the potential is there for user modification of

the prediction process.

References

The following list of references is included for those interested in

learning more about SEA. The list is far from complete but it is felt

that these references give a good start for more research into SEA:

R. H. Lyon and G. Maidanik, "Power Flow Between Linearly Coupled

Oscillators" J. Acoust. 5oc. Am., Vol. 34, No. 5, pp. 623-639, (May 1962)

P. W. Smith, Jr., "Response and Radiation of Structural Modes Excited by

Sound", J. Acoust. Soc. Am., Vol. 34, No. 5, pp. 640-647, (May 1962)

G. Maidanik, "Response of Ribbed Panels to Reverbverant Acoustic Fields",

J. Acoust. Soc. Am., Vol. 34, No. 6, pp. 809-826, (June 1962)

E. Eichler, "Thermal Circuit Approach to Vibrations in Coupled Systems and

the Noise Reuction of A Rectangular Box", J. Acoust. Soc. Am., Vol. 37,

No. 6, pp. 995-1007, (June 1963)

R. H. Lyon and T. D. 5charton, "Vibrational Energy Transmission in a Three

Element Structure", J. Acoust. Soc. Am., Vol. 38, No. 2, pp. 253-261,

(August 1965)

R. H. Lyon, Statistical Energy Analysis of Dynamical Systems, MIT Press,

Cambridge, MA, 1975

SENOD processor

Purpose

This processor is used to build and predict responses of Statistical

Energy Analysis (SEA) models. These models are created using commands and

sub-processors within SEMOD.
STATISTICALENERGY MODELER 10-5

Command

SEMOD NI,NAMEI (N2,NAME2)

Where

N1,NAMEI - Input dal unit and version name for model.

N2,NAME2 - Optional output dal unit and version name for model. If

present, the model NI,NAME1 is copied to N2,NAME2 then all

updates are made to N2,NAME2. If omitted, updates are made

to N1,NAME1. Note: This option is not operational yet.

Utility commands

DELETE - Deletes an element or connection.

RENAME* - Renames an element.

FREQUENCY - Sets the frequency range.

SETEXC - Sets the excitation elements.

SETRES - Sets the response elements. (EXTRAP I models)

EXCITATION - Prompts for input excitation.

RESPONSE - Prompts for input response. (Baseline EXTRAP I models.)

CRFR - Extracts appropriate critical and ring frequencies.

(EXTRAP I models.)

LIST** - Prints out a summary of your entire model.

CHECK* - Checks model for inconsistencies.

READ* - Reads in a previously developed model.

SAVE* - Saves the current model as a separate model.

DONE - Exits SEMOD.

QUIT - Exits SEMOD without updating the model history matrix.

* Not yet operational.

** Partially operational.

Sub-processors

ELNAME - Used to define elements.

PATHNAME - Used to define connections.

FPAR - Used to define frequency dependant parameters.

TEXT - Used to input descriptive text.

L
10-6 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Prediction commands

MDENS

CFAC

ATACALC

ATACO

TPRD

POWER

- Calculates modal density.

- Calculates conversion factors.

- Calculates coupling loss factors.

- Does inversion and calculates transfer functions.

- Does theoretical prediction.

- Calculates the power flow.
I0.I. ORDER OF EXECUTION

ORDER OF EXECUTION 10-7

Some commands or processors must be executed in a certain order when

building a model. The following list shows what conmmnds must be executed

before continuing on to any following con_ands.

ELNAME - Must be executed first to define elements

PATHNAME - Can be executed after ELNAME.

SETEXC - Can be executed after ELNAME.

FREQUENCY- Can be executed at any time.

EXCITATIO- Can be executed after SETEXC and FREQUENCY.

FPAR*

MDENS

ATACALC

ATACO

CFAC

TPRD

POWER*

- Can be executed after PATHNAME.

- Can be executed after ELNAME.

- Can be executed after MDENS and PATHNAME.

- Can be executed after ATACALC and SETEXC.

- Can be executed after ELNAME.

- Can be executed after CFAC and ATACO.

- Can be executed after TPRD.

* Optional

Any other conm_nds can be executed at any time.
10-8 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

10.2. EXAMPLE

VAP4.0 1-04/I0/86-15:38:17

* Enter SEMOD to build mc_lel.

?5EMOD I,SAMP

Creating new model S/_MP

67200

This problem uses the data from the event 5P01 in the VAPEPS database.

* Enter descriptive text.

SEMOD > TEXT WXYZ

>Prediction of event SP01 using SEMOD prediction software.

>

>This model consists of a cone in a reverberant chamber. The elements to

>be modeled are as follows:

>

>EXTA - Reverberant chamber.

>SKIN - Cylinder.

>INTA - Internal acoustic spa_e.

>

>Three connections are to be modeled as follows:

>

>EXTA,SKIN - Reverberant field to cylinder.

>INTA,SKIN - Reverberant field to cylinder.

>EXTA, SKIN, INTA - Reverberant field to cylinder to reverberant field.

>

>The excitation element is EXTA.

>

>The valid frequency range is 25. to 10000. Hz.

>

>WXYZ

Saving text...

* Define elements.

SEMOD > ELNAME

* There are three elements EXTA,SKIN,INTA

Input element name > EXTA, 1

EXTA > RHO=.II2E-6,CO=.I32E+5,V=.34E+9,AP=.314E+7,AAC=.01

EXTA > DESCRIPTION='External acoustic space (excitation).'
EXAMPLE 10-9

EXTA> DONE

OK

Input element name> SKIN,CYLN

SKIN> RHO=.471E-4,CL=.2E+6,H=.4,AP=.I86E+6,BL=.494E+3,ALX=.I6E+2,ALY=.I88E+3

SKIN> D=.I2E+3,DLF=.04,E=.I82E+7,PATA=.29E+5,RHOS=.I88E-4,ASMS=0,CO=.132E+5

SKIN> DESCRIPTION='Cylinder'

SKIN> DONE

OK

Input element name> INTA,I

INTA> RHO=.II2E-6,CO=.I32E+5,V=.559E+7,AP=.2090E+6,AAC=.01

INTA> DESCRIPTION='Internalacoustic space.'

INTA> DONE

OK

Input element name> LIST

EXTA

DESCRIPT=Externalacoustic space (excitation).

TYPE = 1

RHO = 1.120E-07 CO = 1.320E+04 VOLUME

AAC = i. 000E-02

SKIN

DESCRIPT=Cylinder

TYPE = 4

RHO = 4.710E-05 CL

BL = 4.940E+02 ALX

DLF = 4.000E-02 E

ASMS = 0.000E+00 CO

= 2.000E+05 H

= 1.600E+01 ALY

= 1.820E+06 PATA

= 1.320E+04

INTA

DESCRIPT=Internal acoustic space.

TYPE = 1

RHO = 1.120E-07 CO = 1.320E+04 VOLUME

AAC = 1.000E-02

Input element name > DONE

OK

* Define connections.

5EMOD > PATHNAME

* There are three connections.

* EXTA, SKIN

* SKIN, INTA

* EXTA, SKIN, INTA - non-resonant.

Input connection > EXTA,SKIN, 2

Creating new path.

* No parameters are required for this connection.

EXTA,SKIN > DONE

OK

= 3.400E+08 AP

= 4.000E-01 AP

= 1.880E+02 D

= 2.900E+04 RHOS

= 5.590E+06 AP

= 3.140E+06

= 1.860E+05

= 1.200E+02

= 1.880E-05

= 2.090E+05
I0-i0 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Input connection > 5KIN, INTA, 2

Creating new path.

* No parameters are required for this connection.

INTA,SKIN > DONE

OK

Input connection > EXTA,SKIN, INTA,5

Creating new path.

- No parameters are required for this connection.

EXTA,SKIN, INTA > DONE

OK

Input connection > LIST

EXTA SKIN

TYPE = 2

INTA 5KIN

TYPE = 2

EXTA SKIN INTA

TYPE = 5

Input connection > DONE

OK

* Define the excitation element.

SEMOD > SETEXC EXTA

* Define frequency range.

SEMOD > FREQUENCY=25.,10000.

FREQ i: FREQ SAMP 0

* Create excitation vector.

SEMOD > EXCITATION

0, SIZE = 27 i, NJ = 1

EXTA (27) > I03.3,105.8,122.5,132.3,130.5,132.1,131.2,135.4,136.0,135.4,133.4,134.4

EXTA (15) > 135.3,135.2,137.1,135.9,134.7,135.1,132.4,130.4,129.3,128.1,126.8,124.9

3, NJ = 1

EXTA ( 3) > 122.4,121.0,122.4

* Calculate modal density and establish frequency range.

SEMOD > MDENS

DENS l: DENS SAMP 0 0, SIZE = 27

* Calculate ata's.

SEMOD > ATACALC

ATA i: ATA SAMP 0 0, SIZE = 27 9,

* Calculate coefficient matrix and transfer functions.

SEMOD > ATACO

NJ = 1

CO l: CO SAMP 0 0, SIZE = 9 27, NJ = 1

TRNF l: TRNF SAMP 0 0, SIZE = 27 2, NJ = 1

Define conversion factors.
EXAMPLE 10-11

SEMOD > CFAC 7,1,4

CONV I: CONV SAMP 0

* Do theoretical prediction.

SEMOD > TPRD

RESP i: RESP SAMP 0

* Print the responses.

SEMOD > LIST RESP

0, SIZE =

0, SIZE =

27

27

3, NJ =

3, NJ =
10-12 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Excitations and responses for model 5AMP

Frequency EXTA SKIN INTA

Hertz dB G**2/Hz dB

25.0 103.3 3.5678E-03 99.2

31.5 105.8 4.9831E-03 101.5

40.0 122.5 1.9384E-01 I17.9

50.0 132.3 1.6785E+00 127.5

63.0 130.5 8.5578E-01 125.5

80.0 132.1 1.0307E+00 127.0

100.0 131.2 7.6262E-01 125.9

125.0 135.4 1.6679E+00 130.0

160.0 136.0 1.4390E+00 130.4

200.0 135.4 1.2311E+00 129.8

250.0 133.4 6.7551E-01 127.7

315.0 134.4 7.6424E-01 128.6

400.0 135.3 6.7900E-01 128.8

500.0 135.2 9.3572E-01 128.8

630.0 137.1 1.0232E+00 131.2

800.0 135.9 6.5679E-01 130.2

I000.0 134.7 6.5027E-01 130.5

1250.0 135.1 8.7401E-01 133.0

1600.0 132.4 1.3734E-01 126.2

2000.0 130.4 5.5018E-02 122.4

2500.0 129.3 2.4882E-02 119.5

3150.0 128.1 1.0652E-02 i16.5

4000.0 126.8 4.7543E-03 113.3

5000.0 124.9 2.0807E-03 109.6

6300.0 122.4 6.7243E-04 i05.1

8000.0 121.0 3.0041E-04 101.7

10000.0 122.4 2.8518E-04 i01.2

* Calculate power flow.

SEMOD > POWER

POWR i: POWR SAMP

PCRF i: PCRF SAMP

* Print out power flow and

SEMOD > LIST POWER PCRF

0 0, SIZE = 27 9,

0 0, SIZE = 27 i0,

percent power flow.

NJ =

NJ =
EXAMPLE 10-13

Powerflow and loss

Frequency EXTA

Hertz EXTA

for model SAMP

SKIN

SKIN

INTA

INTA

EXTA

SKIN

SKIN

EXTA

25.0 9.5496E-01 2.6589E+00 2.4765E-02 4.3612E+00 1.7008E+00

31.5 1.6982E+00 3.9473E+00 4.1594E-02 6.1959E+00 2.2642E+00

40.0 7.9431E+01 1.5316E+02 1.8425E+00 2.3023E+02 7.8650E+01

50.0 7.5856E+02 1.2286E+03 1.6802E+01 1.7776E+03 5.7025E+02

63.0 5.0117E+02 6.7790E+02 1.0629E+01 9.4530E+02 2.8429E+02

80.0 7.2442E+02 8.1440E+02 1.4748E+01 1.0968E+03 3.0894E+02

i00.0 5.8883E+02 5.5819E+02 1.1579E+01 7.3030E+02 1.9393E+02

125.0 1.5488E+03 1.2430E+03 2.9519E+01 1.5861E+03 3.9867E+02

160.0 1.7782E+03 1.1969E+03 3.2908E+01 1.4941E+03 3.5632E+02

200.0 1.5488E+03 9.0109E+02 2.8097E+01 I.II03E+03 2.5591E+02

250.0 9.7721E+02 5.0342E+02 1.7582E+01 6.1849E+02 1.4112E+02

315.0 1.2302E+03 6.0538E+02 2.1364E+01 7.3833E+02 1.6279E+02

400.0 1.5135E+03 5.3652E+02 2.2599E+01 5.9175E+02 9.3988E+01

500.0 1.4791E+03 6.8489E+02 2.2406E+01 7.9589E+02 1.4607E+02

630.0 2.2908E+03 8.1053E+02 3.9311E+01 9.2200E+02 1.7459E+02

800.0 1.7377E+03 5.1897E+02 3.0935E+01 6.5338E+02 1.5458E+02

i000.0 1.3182E+03 4.7596E+02 3.3129E+01 7.9900E+02 3.1236E+02

1250.0 1.4454E+03 6.5135E+02 5.8884E+01 1.9289E+03 1.2291E+03

1600.0 7.7623E+02 1.1424E+02 1.2387E+01 1.6414E+02 4.4627E+01

2000.0 4.8976E+02 4.0270E+01 5.1257E+00 5.1985E+01 9.9447E+00

2500.0 3.8018E+02 1.8543E+01 2.6798E+00 2.2577E+01 3.2124E+00

3150.0 2.8840E+02 8.4376E+00 1.3426E+00 9.8733E+00 1.0631E+00

4000.0 2.1379E+02 3.7566E+00 6.3942E-01 4.2660E+00 3.5052E-01

5000.0 1.3803E+02 1.5229E+00 2.7008E-01 1.6914E+00 1.0909E-01

6300.0 7.7622E+01 5.3266E-01 9.7165E-02 5.8042E-01 2.9342E-02

8000.0 5.6233E+01 2.3737E-01 4.4210E-02 2.5447E-01 1.0049E-02

10000.0 7.7622E+01 2.0873E-01 3.9507E-02 2.2094E-01 6.9474E-03
10-14 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Power flow and loss for model 5AMP

Frequency INTA SKIN

Hertz SKIN INTA

EXTA

SKIN

INTA

25.0 1.6992E+00 1.7008E+00 3.8011E-02

31.5 2.2800E+00 2.2642E+00 9.0709E-02

40.0 8.0235E+01 7.8650E+01 5.2609E+00

50.0 5.9153E+02 5.7025E+02 5.7061E+01

63.0 3.0119E+02 2.8429E+02 4.0397E+01

80.0 3.3548E+02 3.0894E+02 5.9477E+01

I00.0 2.1576E+02 1.9393E+02 4.7409E+01

125.0 4.5419E+02 3.9867E+02 1.1916E+02

160.0 4.1540E+02 3.5632E+02 1.2742E+02

200.0 3.0262E+02 2.5591E+02 1.0284E+02

250.0 1.6719E+02 1.4112E+02 5.9813E+01

315.0 1.9264E+02 1.6279E+02 6.9284E+01

400.0 1.3275E+02 9.3988E+01 7.9104E+01

500.0 1.8114E+02 1.4607E+02 7.4408E+01

630.0 2.3771E+02 1.7459E+02 1.3800E+02

800.0 1.7475E+02 1.5458E+02 6.9764E+01

1000.0 3.0168E+02 3.1236E+02 3.6062E+01

1250.0 1.1806E+03 1.2291E+03 2.6843E+01

1600.0 3.9353E+01 4.4627E+01 9.3552E+00

2000.0 8.1739E+00 9.9447E+00 3.9808E+00

2500.0 2.3910E+00 3.2124E+00 2.0785E+00

3150.0 6.9058E-01 1.0631E+00 1.0430E+00

4000.0 1.9169E-01 3.5052E-01 5.0321E-01

5000.0 4.9719E-02 1.0909E-01 2.1708E-01

6300.0 1.0916E-02 2.9342E-02 8.0248E-02

8000.0 3.0057E-03 1.0049E-02 3.7611E-02

i0000.0 1.6894E-03 6.9474E-03 3.4513E-02

INTA

5KIN

EXTA

1.4810E-02

3.3380E-02

1.8335E+00

1.8989E+01

1.2871E+01

1.8192E+01

1.4006E+01

3.4123E+01

3.5428E+01

2.8030E+01

1.6168E+01

1.8077E+01

1.7745E+01

1.6935E+01

3.5579E+01

1.8659E+01

1.3616E+01

1.6429E+01

2.2429E+00

6.2592E-01

2.2012E-01

7.2954E-02

2.2612E-02

6.3813E-03

1.5092E-03

4.4425E-04

2.6391E-04
EXAMPLE 10-15

Percent power flow per path for element SKIN

Frequency SKIN EXTA SKIN

Hertz SKIN SKIN EXTA

in model

INTA

SKIN

SAMP

SKIN

INTA

25.0 -43.87% 71.96% -28.06%

31.5 -46.57% 73.10% -26.71%

40.0 -49.33% 74.16% -25.33%

50.0 -51.86% 75.03% -24.07%

63.0 -54.38% 75.84% -22.81%

80.0 -56.86% 76.58% -21.57%

i00.0 -59.00% 77.19% -20.50%

125.0 -60.92% 77.74% -19.54%

160.0 -62.68% 78.25% -18.66%

200.0 -63.78% 78.58% -18.11%

250.0 -64.08% 78.72% -17.96%

315.0 -65.03% 79.31% -17.49%

400.0 -74.05% 81.68% -12.97%

500.0 -70.10% 81.46% -14.95%

630.0 -69.89% 79.50% -15.05%

800.0 -62.67% 78.90% -18.67%

1000.0 -43.24% 72.59% -28.38%

1250.0 -20.95% 62.03% -39.53%

1600.0 -56.14% 80.66% -21.93%

2000.0 -66.94% 86.41% -16.53%

2500.0 -74.27% 90.42% -12.87%

3150.0 -79.87% 93.46% -i0.06%

4000.0 -84.27% 95.70% -7.86%

5000.0 -87.47% 97.14% -6.27%

6300.0 -90.08% 98.15% -4.96%

8000.0 -92.19% 98.83% -3.90%

i0000.0 -93.76% 99.24% -3.12%

28.04%

26.90%

25.84%

24.97%

24.16%

23.42%

22.81%

22.26%

21.75%

21.42%

21.28%

20.69%

18.32%

18.54%

20.50%

21.10%

27.41%

37.97%

19.34%

13.59%

9.58%

6.54%

4.30%

2.86%

1.85%

1.17%

0.76%

-28.06%

-26.71%

-25.33%

-24.07%

-22.81%

-21.57%

-2O.5O%

-19.54%

-18.66%

-18.11%

-17.96%

-17.49%

-12.97%

-14.95%

-15.05%

-18.67%

-28.38%

-39.53%

-21.93%

-16.53%

-12.87%

-10.06%

-7.86%

-6.27%

-4.96%

-3.90%

-3.12%
10-16 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Percent power flow per path for

Frequency INTA INTA

Hertz INTA SKIN

element INTA

SKIN

INTA

25.0 -1.42% -97.72%

31.5 -1.77% -96.82%

40.0 -2.20% -95.62%

50.0 -2.68% -94.29%

63.0 -3.27% -92.76%

80.0 -4.00% -91.06%

i00.0 -4.80% -89.40%

125.0 -5.70% -87.71%

160.0 -6.80% -85.87%

200.0 -7.83% -84.35%

250.0 -8.75% -83.20%

315.0 -9.21% -83.01%

400.0 -13.06% -76.69%

500.0 -10.16% -82.16%

630.0 -12.58% -76.04%

800.0 -13.79% -77.89%

i000.0 -9.51% -86.58%

1250.0 -4.69% -94.00%

1600.0 -22.95% -72.90%

2000.0 -36.81% -58.70%

2500.0 -50.65% -45.19%

3150.0 -63.75% -32.79%

4000.0 -74.90% -22.45%

5000.0 -82.80% -15.24%

6300.0 -88.66% -9.96%

8000.0 -92.76% -6.31%

10000.O -95.29% -4.07%

SEMOD > DONE

?END

CPU: DELTA, EXECUTION, RUN = i1.25

***CIAU***

97.81%

96.15%

93.73%

90.90%

87.56%

83.86%

80.36%

76.99%

73_66%

71.33%

70.23%

70.15%

54.3O%

66.25%

55.85%

68.90%

89.65%

97.86%

82.67%

71.41%

60.72%

50.48%

41.06%

33.45%

26.77%

21.08%

16.76%

11.25

in model

EXTA

SKIN

INTA

2.19%

3.85%

6.27%

9.10%

12.44%

16.14%

19.64%

23.01%

26°34%

28.67%

29.77%

29.85%

45.70%

33.75%

44.15%

31.10%

10.35%

2.14%

17.33%

28.59%

39.28%

49.52%

58.94%

66.55%

73.23%

78.92%

83.24%

403.90

SAMP

INTA

SKIN

EXTA

-0.85%

-1.42%

-2.18%

-3.03%

-3.96%

-4.94%

-5.80%

-6.59%

-7°32%

-7.81%

-8.05%

-7.79%

-10.25%

-7.68%

-i1.38%

-8.32%

-3.91%

-1.31%

-4.15%

-4.49%

-4.16%

-3.46%

-2.65%

-1.96%

-1.38%

-0.93%

-0.64%
10.3. ATACALC

ATACALC 10-17

ATACALC command

Purpose

This command computes the coupling loss and damping loss factors for the

entire model.

Command

ATACALC (IOP)

Wher e

IOP - Option to control status output.

= 0 - No status output. (Default)

= 1 - The path number of the calculation currently being made is

displayed.

= 2 - The cpu time is displayed as well as the output for IOP=I.

Input

The following are the input matrices:

NI,'ELPH',NAME - Number of elements and paths. (ELNAME and

PATHNAME)

NI,'PIPM',NAME - Path independent variable control list. (ELNAME,

PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'PDPM',NAME - Path dependant variable control list. (ELNAME,

PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'MNAM',NAME - Element name list. (ELNAME)

NI,'DENS',NAME - Modal densities. (MDENS)

NI,'FREQ',NAME - Frequency vector. (MDENS)

NI,'PIPS',NAME - String control list. (ELNAME) Optional.

NI,'PISL',NAME - String list. (ELNAME) Optional.

NI,'PIRL',NAME - Real list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'PIIL',NAME - Integer list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'FPAR',NAME - Frequency dependant control list. (FPAR) Optional.

NI,'FRAN',NAME - Frequency range list. (FPAR) Optional.

Output

The following matrices are output:

NI,'PDES',NAME - Path descriptor vector. (#ATA's,I)

NI,'ATA ',NAME - Ata matrix. (#Frequencies,#ATA's)
10-18 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

The following two matrices are only output if plates, cylinders, or cones

are in the model:

NI,'CDES',NAME- Critical frequency descriptor vector.

(#Critical frequencies,l)

NI,'CRFR',NAME- Critical frequency matrix.

(#Frequencies,#Critical frequencies)

The following two matrices are only output if cylinders or cones are in

the model.

NI,'RDES',NAME- Ring frequency descriptor vector.

(#Ring frequencies,l)

NI,'RING',NAME- Ring frequency matrix.

(#Frequencies,#Ring frequencies)

Comment s

This command can take a while to run depending on the number of paths.

The execution time is proportional to the number of paths. For large

models (greater than 50 paths) execution in a batch mode is recommended.

The amount of time to calculate each connection type varies greatly so it

is difficult to predict exactly how long a particular model will take to

execute. In general the execution time is proportional to the number of

connections. If you are curious as to how long each connection type takes

to execute use lOP=2.

The PDES matrix identifies the coupling loss or damping loss factor in

question with an integer string. The integers in this string point to row

locations in the MNAM vector. The following example will illustrate this:

The following MNAM vector exists:

ROW

1 EXTA

2 SKIN

3 INTA

The code 001002 refers to the path EXTA,SKIN.

The code 001002003 refers to the path EXTA,SKIN, INTA.

Using this scheme a maximum of 999 elements can be used in the model.

There is a practical limit based on the capacity of the computer which is,

in most cases, much lower than this.

The commands RUN=CLFGET and RUN=CLFPUT can be used to extract or replace

coupling or damping loss factors in the ATA matrix.
ATACO i0-19

ATACO

ATACO command

Purpose

This command will calculate the coefficient matrix, inverse reduced

coefficient matrix, and the transfer functions required to make a

theoretical prediction on any size model.

Command

ATACO

Input

The following matrices are required as input:

NI,'ATA'

NI,'PDES'

NI,'ELPH'

NI,'EXEL'

,NAME = Ata matrix. #Freq's X #Ata's.

,NAME = Descriptor matrix #Ata's X 1. These two matrices are

output by the ATACALC command.

,NAME = Number of elements and connections. (2,1)

,NAME = List of excitation elements.

Output

The following matrices are output:

NI,'IDES',NAME = Descriptor matrix for use in the theoretical

prediction.

NI,'CO' ,NAME = Full coefficient matrix. Includes excitation terms.

NI,'INCO',NAME = Inverse reduced coefficient matrix.

NI,'TRNF',NAME = Transfer function matrix.

Comments

The cpu time on this calculation depends on the time required to invert

the reduced coefficient matrix. Since the dimensions of the reduced

coefficient matrix are the same as the number of response elements in the

model the cpu time for each inversion is dependant on the number of

excitation elements in the model. There is one inversion for each

frequency so the total cpu time is the time required for one inversion

times the number of frequencies.

This command has the potential for taking a large amount of cpu time when

very large models are used, since the time for each inversion is not

linearly increasing with the size of the model. For moderately large
10-20 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

models it has been found that the time required for this command is small

compared for the cpu time required for the ATACALC command.
CFAC 10-21

CFAC

CFAC command

Purpose

This command is used to calculate conversion factors for the model.

Command

CFAC ACC,SPL,PARA

Where

Input

ACC - The flag for input and output units of acceleration. (See

ACC FLAGS.)

SPL - The flag for input and output units of sound pressure. (See

SPL FLAGS.)

PARA - The flag for units of parameters. (See PARA FLAGS.)

The following are the input matrices for CFAC:

NI,'PIPM',NAME - Path independent variable control list.

PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'MNAM',NAME - Element name list. (ELNAME)

NI,

NI,

NI,

NI,

NI,

NI,

NI, FRAN',NAME - Frequency range list.

FREQ',NAME - Frequency vector. (MDENS)

PIPS',NAME - String control list. (ELNAME) Optional.

PISL',NAME - String list. (ELNAME) Optional.

PIRL',NAME - Real list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, and FPAR)

PIIL',NAME - Integer list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, and FPAR)

FPAR',NAME - Frequency dependant control list. (FPAR)

(FPAR) Optional.

(ELNAME,

Optional.

Output

There are three matrices output by CFAC.

NI,'CONV',NAME - This matrix contains the conversion factor for mean

square response in MKS units to energy in MKS units.

NI,'CPOW',NAME - This is a 1 X 1 matrix containing the conversion

factor from energy in the user's units to energy in

MKS units.

NI,'DBFG',NAME - This is a vector containing a flag for the unit type

for each element in the model.
10-22 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

10. 5 .1 . ACC_FLAGS

Valid flags for ACCeleration units.

Flag Units

1 dB

2 G**2

3 (M/S*-2)*-2

¢ (CM/S*-2)*-2

5 (FT/S**2)**2

6 (IN/S**2)**2

7 G**2/HZ

8 (M/S**2)**2/HZ

Flag

9

i0

ii

12

13

14

15

16

Units

(CM/S**2)**2/HZ

(FT/S**2)**2/HZ

(IN/S**2)**2/HZ

G

M/S**2

CM/S**2

FT/S**2

IN/S**2

10.5.2. SPL_FLAGS

Valid flags Sound Pressure Level units.

Flag Units

1 dB

2 (N/M**2)**2

3 (DYNES/CM**2)**2

4 (LBF/FT**2)**2

5 (LBF/IN**2)**2

6 (N/M**2)**2/HZ

7 (DYNES/CM)**2)**2/HZ

Flag

8

9

i0

Ii

12

13

Units

(LBF/FT**2)**2/HZ

(LBF/IN**2)**2/HZ

N/M**2

DYNES/CM**2

LBF/FT**2

LBF/IN**2

10.5 • 3 • PARA_FLAGS

Valid flags for PARAmeter units.

Flag

1

2

3

4

Units

Meter, Kilogram, second. (MKS)

Centimeter, Gram, second. (CGS)

FT, Slug (LBF-SEC**2/FT), second.

IN, Snail (LBF-SEC**2/IN), second.

V
10.6. CHECK

CHECK 10-23

CHECK command (Not yet operational)

Purpose

This co_nand is used to check your model for missing parameters and any

other discrepancies such as elements which are not connected to any other

elements.

Command

CHECK

There are no arguments for this command.
10-24 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.7. CRFR

CRFR Command

Purpose

Extract critical and ring frequencies for an EXTRAP I model.

Command

CRFR

This command has no arguments.

Notes

This command looks at the output of ATACALC and finds the appropriate

critical and ring frequencies for the current EXTRAP I model and then

creates a 2 x 1 matrix for input into the PREDICT/EXTRAP/II command.

v
10.8. DELETE

DELETE 10-25

DELETE command

Purpose

This command deletes an element and all connections to that element from

the model or deletes a single connection from the model.

Command

DELETE NAME

or

DELETE NAMEI,NAME2,(NAME3,...)

Where

LL_

BUGS

CASE I - Deleting an element

NAME - The name of an element. This form deletes the named element and

all connections to that element from the model.

CASE II - Deleting a path

NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3,...

These are the names of elements in a path. (See PATHNAME) The

connection defined by these elements is then deleted from the

model

Does not update excitation elements(s). This will require the use of the

SETEXCN command to update the excitation elements.

Does not get rid of unused string variable space. This doesn't affect the

prediction.
10-26 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

10.9. DONE

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks your model, updates the model history matrix and then

exits the SEMOD processor.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return
ELNAME 10-27

10.10. ELNAME

ELNAME sub-processor

Purpose

This sub-processor is used to input SEA element names and their

parameters.

Command

ELNAME (MXELTS, (MXVAR, (MXSTR)) )

Whet e

MXELTS - The maximum number of elements allowed for this model. Default

= 50 if this is a new model or twice the number of elements if

this is an existing model. (optional)

MXVAR - The maximum number of parameters allowed for this model.

Default = MXELTS*20 if this is a new model or twice the number

of parameters if this is an existing model. (optional)

MXSTR - The maximum amount of string storage space allowed for this

model. Default = MXELTS*20 words if this is a new model or

twice the existing string space if this is an existing model.

(optional)

Note

It is not normally required to input these parameters because when a model

starts to get close to exceeding the defaults it will increase the default

amount the next time the model is modified. That means that if you exceed

one of these parameters all you have to do is exit ELNAME (see DONE

command) and then get back into ELNAME.

Usage

Upon entry to this sub-processor you will receive the prompt:

Input element name >

At this point you have the option of inputing an SEA element name and type

or issuing one of the following commands:

DONE QUIT LIST CHECK RENAME DELETE

If you are inputing a new element the command is of the form:
10-28 5TATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

NAME,TYPE

Where

NAME - The name of the element. Up to 8 characters.

TYPE - The type of the element. Either a number or a 4 character

word from the following list:

# Word Description

1 REVB - Reverberant acoustic space.

2 NREV - Non-reverberant acoustic space. (not supported)

3 PLAT - Flat plate.

4 CYLN - Cylinder.

5 CONE - Cone (Treated as an equivalent cylinder.)

6 BEMR - Beam or truss rectangular cross section.

7 BEMC - Beam or truss circular cross section.

8 BEMT - Beam or truss tubular cross section.

9 BEMO - Beam or truss other cross section.

If you are changing the type of an element then the input is the same as

above. The values of parameters common to both the new and old type will

be retained.

If you are updating an element just put in the element name. If you put

in the type it will be treated as if you were changing the type if the

type you put in is not the same as the type that already exists.
ELNAME 10-29

I0.i0.1. PARAMETERS

Reverberant and non-reverberant acoustic space

Type = 1,2 (REVB,NREV)

Type=l

Parameter

2* Description

RHO

CO

VOLUME

AP

AAC

DESCRIPT

RHO

CO

VOLUME

AP

AAC

VISC

VEL

DESCRIPT i

Mass density of acoustic medium.

Speed of sound in medium.

Volume of acoustic space.

Surface area of acoustic space.

Acoustic absorbtion coefficient.

Kinematic viscosity of fluid.

Velocity of flying body.

Optional description.

* Non-reverberant type is not supported for predictions.

Notes

DENSITY UNITS ARE IN MASS MOT WEIGHT

Parameters VOLUME, AP, and AAC don't affect this element when it is used

as an excitation element. These parameters still need to be input. It is

suggested that good values for these parameters be used so that the model

is better documented.
10-30 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Type=3

Skin elements

Flat plate, cylinder, cone.

Type = 3,4,5 (PLAT,CYLN,CONE)

Parameters

5 Description

RHO

CL

H

AP

ALX

ALY

DLF

E

PATA

RHOS

ASMS

PIVOTFRQ

DESCRIPT

IRHO

CL

H

AP

BL

ALX

ALY

D

DLF

E

PATA

RHOS

ASMS

CO

PIVOTFRQ

DESCRIPT

RHO

CL

H

AP

BL

ALX

ALY

D

DLF

E

PATA

BETA

RHOS

ASMS

CO

PIVOTFRQ

DESCRIPT

Mass density

Longitudinal wave speed.

Equivalent thickness.

Surface area.

Length of cylinder or cone.

Sub-panel dimension X direction.

Sub-panel dimension Y direction.

Diameter of cylinder or base of cone.

Damping loss factor.

Young's modulus.

Total length of discontinuity.

Half apex angle of cone.

Surface mass density.

Non-structural mass.

Speed of sound in medium surrounding cone

or cylinder.

Frequency to pivot functionalized

damping at.*

Optional description.

* Optional - If this factor is input then the damping loss factor is

calculated as described in the following section.

Notes

DENSITY UNITS ARE IN MASS NOT WEIGI.IT

Non-structural Mass (ASMS)

This factor provides a means for adding a rigid mass to a model. This

method does not smear the mass into the model. This mass does not affect

the calculation of coupling loss factors or damping loss factors. It is

used in the conversion from energy to response of an element. This means

that the response of adjacent elements is not effected by changing this

parameter.

Total Length of Discontinuity (PATA)

This factor accounts for edge mode effects and does not affect the model

above the critical frequency. For a clamped plate the length of the

perimeter should be included. For free-free or simply supported panels
ELNAME 10-31

the length of the perimeter should not be included. For other cases a

portion of the perimeter may be included. When a beam bisects the panel

then the length of each edge of the beam that is on the panel is to be

included. For most cases this would be twice the length of the beam.

Damping Loss Factor

If PIVOTFRQ is input then DLF is calculated as follows:

DLFi = K/Fi

Where

Fi = The center frequency.

K = DLFo*PIVOTFRQ

DLFo = The DLF parameter that you input.

It has been found that a good value of PIVOTFRQ is 250 Hz. For electronic

boxes the following formula has been suggested:

DLFi = K/sqrt(Fi)

The parameters are the same as above. This may be calculated using

general computational commands and input using the RUN=CLFPUT command.
10-32 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

Type=6

Trusses and beams

Type = 6,7,8,9 (BEMR,BEMC,BEMT,BEMO)

Parameters

8 9 Description.

RHO

ASMS

H

B

BL

E

G

DLF

CL

CNT

DESCRIFI

RHO

ASMS

BL

DO

E

G

DLF

CL

CNT

DESCRIPT

RHO

ASMS

BL

DI

DO

E

G

DLF

CL

CNT

DESCRIPT

RHO

ASMS

BL

RGF

A

PJ

E

G

T

DLF

CL

CNT

DESCRIPT

Mass density.

Non-structural mass.

Thickness.

Width.

Length of truss members.

Inside diameter.

Outside diameter.

Flexural radius of gyration.

Cross section area.

Polar moment of inertia.

Young's modulus.

Shear modulus.

Torsional stiffness.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

Number of truss members.

Optional description.

Notes

DENSITY UNITS ARE IN MASS NOT WEIGHT

Non-structural Mass (ASMS)

This factor provides a means for adding a rigid mass to a model. This

method does not smear the mass into the model. This mass does not affect

the calculation of coupling loss factors or damping loss factors. It is

used in the conversion from energy to response of an element. This means

that the response of adjacent elements is not effected by changing this

parameter.
ELNAME 10-33

10.10.2. CHECK

CHECK command

Purpose

This command checks the parameters and tells you which ones have not been

input yet.

Command

CHECK

Note

If no parameters are missing then OK is printed out.

10.10.3. DELETE

DELETE command

Purpose

This command deletes an element and all connections to that element from

the model or deletes a single connection from the model.

Command

DELETE NAME

or

DELETE NAMEI,NAME2,(NAME3,...)

Where

CASE I - Deleting an element

NAME - The name of an element. This form deletes the named element and

all connections to that element from the model.

CASE II - Deleting a path

NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3,...
10-34 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

These are the names of elements in a path. (See PATHNAME) The

connection defined by these elements ks then deleted from the

model

Notes

This command saves any changes you have mode to the model before deleting.

This means that after a delete doing a quit will not undo the delete or

any changes up to the delete. It is equivalent to typing:

DONE

DELETE ...

ELNAME

BUGS

Does not update excitation elements(s). This will require the use of the

SETEXCN command to update the excitation elements.

Does not get rid of unused string variable space. This doesn't affect the

prediction.

i0.i0.4. DONE

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks the elements for missing parameters, saves the

elements and exits ELNAME.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return
10.10.5. LIST

ELNAME i0-35

LIST command

Purpose

This command is used to list out the parameters for every element in the

model or to list out the names of the elements.

Conmmnd

LIST (NAME)

Where

NAME - Is the four character string NAME. This causes only the names

of the elements to be listed. (optional)

Note

If NAME is left off then all of the parameters are listed as well as the

names of each element.

I0.i0.6. PARAMETER INPUT

The Parameter Input Processor

Purpose

This sub-processor is initiated when you type in an element name. It

allows for the input of parameters for that element.

Command s

CHECK - Checks the parameters for the current element.

DONE - Exits sub-processor with check.

EXIT - Exits sub-processor without a check.

LIST - Lists out the parameters for the current element.

P* - Input list of parameters.
10-36 5TATISTI_%L ENERGY MODELER

10.10.6.1. CHECK

CHECK command

Purpose

This command checks to see if all required parameters have been input for

the current element.

Command

CHECK

Note

The required parameters which have not been input will be displayed.

10.10.6.2. DOME

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks for missing parameters for the current element then

exits the parameter input processor.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return

Note

See CHECK for information on checking.

This command is recommended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in an interactive mode. Use EXIT in a batch mode.
ELNAME 10-37

10.10.6.3. EXIT

EXIT command

Purpose

This command exits the parameter input processor without checking.

Command

EXIT

Note

This command is recommended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in a batch mode. Use DONE in an interactive mode. Using exit

results in faster execution because the checking is then only done when

you exit ELNAME.

10.10.6.4. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command provides a list of the parameters and their values for the

current element.

Command

LIST

Note

Parameters not input will be flagged.
10-38 5TATI5TICALENERGY MODELER

10.10.6.5. P*

P* command

Purpose

This command is used to input parameters.

Con_nand

P* VARI=VAL1, VAR2=VAL2, VAR3=VAL3 ....

or

VARl=VAL 1, VAR2=VAL2, VAR3=VAL3 ....

Where

VARl=VAL 1, VAR2=VAL2, ....

This is the list of parameters and their associated values. If

a string is to be input, it must be enclosed in single quotes

<').

Example

DESCRIPT='This is a string.'

If it is desired to use ' in the string use ''.

Example

DESCRIPT=' I' 'm using a string. '

Would result in: I'm using a string.

10.10.7. QUIT

QUIT command

Purpose

This command exits ELNAME without saving or checking your elements.

Conmmlnd

QUIT
ELNAME 10-39

Note

This command should only be used if you don't want to save any changes

that you have made to the model.

I0. i0.8. RENAME

RENAME command

Purpose

This command is used to change the name of an element.

Command

RENAME OLDNAME NEWNAME

Where

OLDNAME - The existing name of an element that you wish to change.

NEWNAME - The new name to give to the element.

Note

The names associated with each path are also changed.

Example

RENAME EXTA EXTERNAL

Now to refer to the old path EXTA, SKIN you would now type EXTERNAL,SKIN.
10-40 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.11. EXCITATION

EXCITATION command

Purpose

This command allows the input of an excitation for the prediction.

Conm_and

EXCITATION

This command has no arguments.

The user is then prompted to input excitations for each frequency of each

excitation element as was specified by the SETEXC and FREQUENCY commands.

I0.ii.I. EXAMPLE

EXCITATION example

SEMOD > SETEXC EXTA

5EMOD > FREQUENCY 50.,100.

SEMOD > EXCITATION

EXTA ( 4) > I00.,ii0.,ii0.,i00.

SEMOD >

This case shows input for the frequency range 50. to 100. hz for the

excitation element EXTA.
10.12. FPAR

FPAR 10-41

FPAR subprocessor

Purpose

This subprocessor is used to input frequency dependant parameters for

either elements or connections.

Command

FPAR FI,F2

or

FPAR RNUM

or

FPARL

Where

CASE I - FPAR F1,F2

F1,F2 - Frequency range for parameters that will be input.

CASE II - FPAR RNUM

RNUM - The range number of a previously specified range.

CASE III- FPARL

This form lists out the ranges already specified then returns to the SEMOD

level.

Note

See RANGE sub-command for more information on setting frequency ranges.
10-42 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.12.1. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command lists out all the frequency dependant parameters.

Command

LIST

i0 •12.2 • PARAMETER INPUT

The Parameter Input Processor

Purpose

This sub-processor allows the input of parameters for the particular

connection or element specified in FPAR.

Commands

CHECK - Checks the parameters for the current element.

DONE - Exits sub-processor with check.

EXIT - Exits sub-processor without a check.

LIST - Lists out the parameters for the current element.

P* - Input list of parameters.

10.12.2.1. CHECK

CHECK command

Purpose

This command checks to see if all required parameters have been input for

the current element.

Command
FPAR 10-43

CHECK

Note

The required parameters which have not been input will be displayed.

10.12.2.2. DOME

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks for missing parameters for the current element then

exits the parameter input processor.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return

Note

See CHECK for information on checking.

This command is reconxnended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in an interactive mode. Use EXIT in a batch mode.

10.12.2.3. EXIT

EXIT command

Purpose

This command exits the parameter input processor without checking.

Command

EXIT

Note
10-44 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

This command is recommended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in a batch mode. Use DONE in an interactive mode. Using exit

results in faster execution because the checking is then only done when

you exit FPAR.

10.12.2.4. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command provides a list of the parameters and their values for the

connection or element being operated on in FPAR.

Command

LIST

Note

Parameters not input will be flagged.

10.12.2.5. P*

P* command

Purpose

This command is used to input parameters.

Command

P* VARI=VALI,VAR2=VAL2,VAR3=VAL3 ....

or

VARI=VALI,VAR2=VAL2,VAR3=VAL3 ....

Where

VARI=VAL1,VAR2=VAL2, ....

This is the list of parameters and their associated values. If

a string is to be input, it must be enclosed in single quotes
FPAR 10-45

(').

Note

Only integer and real parameters are allowed to be frequency dependant.

10.12.3. RANGE

RANGE - command

Purpose

This command is used to set or change the frequency range for a given set

of parameters input in FPAR.

RANGE (FI,F2)

or

RANGE (RNUM)

or

RANGEL

or

RANGEC RNUM F1,F2

Where

CASE I - RANGE (FI,F2)

FI,F2 - The frequency range for which subsequently input parameters

is valid. If no range is specified the current frequency

range is displayed.

CASE II - RANGE (RNUM)

RNUM - The frequency range number of a previously input frequency

range. See RANGEL for range numbers.

CASE III - RANGEL

This case displays a list of the frequency ranges already input along with

the range number.

CASE IV - RANGEC RNUM FI,F2

RNUM F1,F2 - These are the same as described above. This case will

Command
10-46 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

replace range numberRNUMwith the frequency range FI,F2.

Notes

The frequency range is not actually entered in the RANGElist until

parameters have been input for that range. This meansthat if you do a

RANGEListbefore you input any parameters for that range then that range will not be displayed.

V
FREQUENCY 10-47

10.13. FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY command

Purpose

This command inputs the frequency range for the model.

Command

FREQUENCY FL,FH

Where

FL,FH - Frequency range desired.

10.13.1. EXAMPLE

FREQUENCY example

FREQUENCY=I0.,IO000.

This sets the frequency range at i0. to i0000, hz.
10-48 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.14. LIST

LIST command (Limited version)

Purpose

This command provides a surmary of all the elements, connections,

parameters and various other things associated with your model. This

sun_m_ry is intended to tell everything about the model so that it could be

recreated from the listing. It can also be used as a tool to hand check

your model and could be used as an appendix to a report.

Command

LIST ARG1,ARG2,...

Where

ARGI,ARG2,... - List of operations. The following operations can be

performed.

ATA

CRIT

CONV

DENS

POWER

PCRF

RESP

RING

- Lists the damping loss and coupling factors.

- Lists the critical frequencies.

- Lists the conversion factor matrix.

- Lists the modal densities.

- Lists power flow. See POWER command.

- Lists percentage power flow. See POWER

command. This can result in many pages of

output.

- Lists the responses.

- Lists the ring frequencies.

Output modifiers:

WIDE - Formats output for 132 column display. Default

is for 80 column display.

FOR=NU - Lists output to fortran unit NU. Default = 6.
10.15. MDENS

MDENS 10-49

MDENS command

Purpose

This command calculates the modal density and establishes the frequency

range for the model.

Command

MDENS (FI,F2)

Where

F1,F2 - Frequency range for prediction.

Input

The following are the input matrices for MDENS:

NI,'PIPM',NAME - Path independent variable control list.

PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'MNAM',NAME - Element name list. (ELNAME)

NI,'PIPS ,NAME - String control list. (ELNAME) Optional.

NI,'PISL ,NAME - String list. (ELNAME) Optional.

NI,'PIRL ,NAME - Real list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, and FPAR)

NI,'PIIL ,NAME - Integer list. (ELNAME,PATHNAME, end FPAR)

NI,'FPAR ,NAME - Frequency dependant control list. (FPAR)

NI,'FRAN ,NAME - Frequency range list. (FPAR) Optional.

(ELNAME,

Optional.

Output

The following are the output matrices of MDENS:

NI,'FREQ',NAME - Band center frequencies.

are input.

NI,'DENS',NAME - Modal densities.

Output only if FI, and F2
10-50 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.16. NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS

VAPEPS computes values of non-dimensional parameters for each SEA element

stored in the VAPEP5 database. These non-dimensional parameters are used

for searching out existing models. The SERCH processor, however, searches

for integer non-dimensional parameter values. Thus, the values of the

non-dimensional parameters are actually computed as integer codes which

represent the real value of the non-dimensional parameters. This is best

explained by way of example.

Example 1

Suppose that the real value of a non-dimensional parameter was 0.0015983.

VAPEPS would convert this real number to the integer code -5159. The sign

and thousands digit indicate how many places and which direction to move

the decimal point. The hundreds, tens and ones digits of the code are the

three most significant digits of the real value. So the integer code

05159 represents the real number 159E-5 or .00159.

Example 2

What is the integer code for the real value 15.933.

-1159 (159E-i)

It may seem that this unnecessarily complicates the situation, but it

should be noted that this procedure actually simplifies some tasks.

Number one, integer searches are more reliable than real searches. And

twq, using integer codes reduces mass storage requirements. So while

this may seem like an inconvenience, keep in mind that it is a necessary

one. It should also be noted that the error in retaining only the three

most significant digits is always less than one percent, which is

insignificant when compared with the uncertainties associated with the

parameters themselves.

Each SEA element has a maximum of four non-dimensional parameters which

may be calculated. The actual number of non-dimensional parameters which

will be calculated for each SEA element will be between one and four.

The following table presents the formulae used to compute the values of

the non-dimensional parameters for each SEA element in an EXTRAP I model.
NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS 10-51

Non-Dimensional Parameters

ELEMENT

EXTA

SKIN

and

INST*

INTA

MONT

and

FRAM

MONT

TYPE

Acoustic

Space

Fluid

Pressure

Panel-like

Cylinder

Acoustic

Space

(Truss)

Rectangular

Circular

Tubular

Any section

Plate

and

Cone

A

AP**.5/

(v--(1/3))

VEL/CO

AP**.5/

(v*-(i/3))

H/BL

H/BL

H/BL

H/BL

H/BL

FBL*VEL/VISC

RHO*AP**.5/RHOS

RHO*AP**.5/RHOS

H*(E/(72*RHO))**.5/

(B*CL)

(E/(2*RNO))**.5/CL

(E/(2*RHO))**.5/CL

(E/(2*RHO))**.5/CL

(E/(2*RNO))**.5/CL

CO**2*AP**.5/

H*CL**2

CO**2*AP**.5/

H*CL**2

\

DO/BL

DO/BL

D

AP**.5/

D

* INST does not require RHOS to be input so non-dimensional parameter B is

not computed.
10-52 5TATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.17. PATHNAME

PATHNAME sub-processor

Purpose

This sub-processor is used to input connections and their associated

parameters.

Command

PATHNAME (MXPATH,<MXVAR))

Where

MXPATH - Approximate maximum number of paths allowed for this model.

Default = Number of elements , l0 if this is a new model or

twice the number of already existing paths for an old model.

MXVAR - Approximate maximum variable storage allowed for connection

variables. Default = MXPATH * 7 for a new model or twice the

existing storage for an old model.

Note

It is not normally required to input these parameters because when a model

starts to get close to exceeding the defaults it will increase the default

amount the next time the model is modified. That means that if you exceed

one of these parameters all you have to do is exit PATHNAME (see DONE

command) and then get back into PATHNAME.

The above values are approximate because each different path types can

have different numbers of variables. The variable storage has a header

for each path so it is decreased by i for every path. The best bet is, if

you feel that you are getting close to exceeding the storage, to allocate

more than you think you need.

Usage

Upon entry to this sub-processor you will receive the prompt

Input connection >

At this point you have the option of inputing a connection and type or

issuing one of the following commands:

CHECK DELETE DONE LIST QUIT
PATHNAME 10-53

If you are inputing a new connection the command is of the form:

NAME1, NAME2, . . ., NAMEn, TYPE

Where

NAMEI,NAME2,...,NAMEn

- The names of the elements associated with this connection.

TYPE - The type of the element. Types are as in the following list:

Type Description

1 - Acoustic space to flat plate.

2 - Acoustic space to cylinder.

3 - Acoustic space to cone.

4 - Acoustic space to flat plate to acoustic space.

5 - Acoustic space to cylinder to acoustic space.

6 - Acoustic space to cone to acoustic space.

7 - Flat plate to flat plate. "L" connection.

8 - Flat plate to flat plate. "T" connection of any angle.

9 - Flat plate to cylinder. "T" connection of any angle.

l0 - Flat plate to cone. "T" connection of any angle. Cone angle is

used for connection angle.

ii - Cylinder to flat plate. "T" connection of any angle.

12 - Cone to flat plate. "T" connection of any angle.

13 - Unused.

14 - Unused.

15 - Flat plate* to truss with equivalent frame. Truss extends from

the middle of the plate at some angle.

16 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied rectangular frame.

17 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied circular frame. Truss

extends from the middle of the plate at some angle.

18 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied tubular frame. Truss

extends from the middle of the plate at some angle.

19 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied other frame. Truss

extends from the middle of the plate at some angle.

20 - Flat plate* to truss with equivalent frame and attenuation

factor. Truss extends from the middle of the plate at some

angle.

21 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied rectangular frame and

attenuation factor. Truss extends from the middle of the plate

at some angle.

22 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied circular frame and

attenuation factor. Truss extends from the middle of the plate

at some angle.

23 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied tubular frame and

attenuation factor. Truss extends from the middle of the plate

at some angle.

24 - Flat plate* to truss with user supplied other frame and
10-54 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

attenuation factor. Truss extends from the middle of the plate

at some angle.

25 - Flat plate* to truss. Truss extends from the edge of the plate

at an acute angle.

26 - Flat plate* to truss with attenuation factor. Truss extends from

the edge of the plate at an acute angle.

27 - Flat plate* to truss. Truss extends from the edge of the plate

at an oblique angle.

28 - Flat plate* to truss with attenuation factor. Truss extends from

the edge of the plate at an oblique angle.

29 - Flat plate* to beam. Beam is perpendicular to the plate.

30-39 - Non-resonant beam cases. (Not yet operational)

40 - Flat plate* to parallel beam. Point connection.

41 - Flat plate* to perpendicular flat plate*. Point connection.

42 - Flat plate* to parallel flat plate*. Point connection.

43 - Butt connection between two plates.**

44 - "T" connection between three plates.**

45 - Beam to parallel beam. Point connection.

46 - "+" Connection between four plates.**

* You can substitute a cylinder or cone for the flat plate in these

connections.

** Same as above except some limitations may apply.

Notes

The following are general notes to the limitations of the SEA software.

l) Units are in terms of MASS not weight, length and time.

2) When the number of modes per band (Modal density x band width) is small

( < 6 has been suggested), the uncertainty could become excessive.

Therefore the results may be questionable.

If you are changing the type of a connection then the input is the same as

above. The values of parameters common to both the new and old type will

be retained.

If you are updating a connection just put in the connection name. If you

put in the type it will be treated as if you were changing the type, if

the type you put in is not the same as the type that already exists.
PATHNAME 10-55

....... ;_ ..... _¢ Par_mQters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

_i Reverberant fleld

__at plate

Figure 10.1 Type = I: Acoustic space to flat plate.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type i:

1/2 Wavelength Restriction

For a panel excited by an acoustic filed below the frequency,

F < CO/(2*L)

Where

CO = Speed of sound in acoustic field.

L = Typical dimension of a panel.

the calculated response of that panel may be questionable. Also adjoining

elements may be affected.

Acoustic Short Circuit Limitation

For a panel excited on both sides by the same acoustic field, a short

circuit of the acoustic filed may occur, and the calculated response may

be overly conservative.
10-56 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Parameters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

Figure 10.2 Type = 2: Acoustic space to cylinder.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 2:

Ring Frequency > Critical Frequency

When the ring frequency

Fr = CL/(2*PI*R)

Where

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.

R = Radius of cylinder.

is greater than the critical frequency

Fc = CO**2/(K*CL)

Where

CO = Speed of sound in acoustic medium surrounding cylinder.

K = Radius of gyration.

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.
PATHNAME i0- 5 7

the coupling loss factor is calculated using a somewhat questionable

method and the results should be used cautiously.

!!iiiii!iiii !iill i

___ i_everberant fieia

::::::::::::: j • • • • • • • - - u::::::::

.: . :: .,_•_.,•••s•••••.,,%• • :. EE E_I::I

•- • • • • • • • • • • • ::::::::::

•.::::::::::. • • • • _ _ _ • • • '.:::.-:'"'.'_:_','.".: .:::,_:;. ',:::::_:::.:..._:::::,=======================

::::. • • _, • • _.t%_= =v , • • :_._ ,.::. ".:._::." ..::::::::i::: :':_

:::" • • • • • %. .... ••_J• • '::..: '_:::::" :::::::::::::::::::::::::

_% %%S_•%%•%%•%• • • • •_7 • • '_":'_ "'"' :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::

_Cone treated as an N_

equivalent cylinder, iiiiiil!!!i::i_ ....

Parameters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

Figure 10.3 Type = 3: Acoustic space to cone.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 3:

Cone Treated as Equivalent Cylinder

The cone is treated as a cylinder whose diameter is equal to the average

diameter of the cone.

Ring Frequency > Critical Frequency

When the ring frequency

Fr = CL/(2*PZ*R)

Where

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.

R = Radius of cylinder.

is greater than the critical frequency
10-58 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

Fc = CO**2/(K*CL)

Where

CO= Speedof soundin acoustic mediumsurrounding cylinder.

K = Radius of gyration.

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.

the coupling loss factor is not calculated and is set to zero. This will

cause the results to be invalid.

___._": Reverberant field I

!ii_!i_:: _::_i_: _ :_i

0ooooct,oo.. . . _:i_a_.,-. plate

Parameters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

Figure 10.4 Type = 4: Acoustic space to flat plate to acoustic space.
PATHNAME 10-59

Parameters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

Figure 10.5 Type = 5: Acoustic space to cylinder to acoustic space.

Ring Frequency > Critical Frequency

When the ring frequency

Fr = CL/(2*PI*R)

Where

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.

R = Radius of cylinder.

is greater than the critical frequency

Fc = CO**2/(K*CL)

Where

CO = Speed of sound in acoustic medium surrounding cylinder.

K = Radius of gyration.

CL = Longitudinal wave speed.

the coupling loss factor is calculated using a somewhat questionable

method and the results should be used cautiously.
10-60 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Parameters

SCALEFAC - Optional factor

to scale ATA's by.

Figure 10.6 Type = 6: Acoustic space to cone to acoustic space.
PATHNAME i0-61

plate 2

TV_@ = 7

Joint angle = 90 °

Parameters

BJL - Joint length.

Figure 10.7 Type = 7: Flat plate to flat plate. "L" connection.
10-62 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Joint angle

IFlat plate 2

i >

ParameterF

BJL - Joint length.

BETA - Joint angle.

Figure 10.8 Type = 8: Flat plate to flat plate. "T" connection.
PATHNAME 10-63

Type = 9

,BET 

S J I s ¢ f • s • I • .':,: .::_

,%%%%%%%%%%% ', ...., .,.

%'%%%%%%%%%% _ :: ...'

%%%%%%%%%%% .''.'. ._.

• •%•%•%'J'%•%'#,%" • • i /"" ence)

Parameter_

BJL - Joint length.

BETA - Joint angle.

Figure 10.9 Type = 9: Flat plate to cylinder. "T" connection.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 9.

Cylinder Treated as Flat Plate

This connection type treats the cylinder as a flat plate for the coupling

loss factor calculation.
10-64 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

................. ce)

parameters

BJL - Joint length.

Figure i0.i0 Type = i0: Flat plate to cone. "T" connection.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 10.

Connection angle

The cone angle is used for connection angle.

Cone Treated as Flat Plate

This connection type treats the cone as a flat plate for the coupling loss

factor calculation.
PATHNAME 10-65

,,,, Type = 11

/JJJs_sJJJs

"__':':';:BETA = Joint angle.

Flat plate

I_p" _. BJL

Parameters

BJL - Joint length.

BETA - Joint angle.

Figure 10.11 Type = ll: Cylinder to flat plate. "T" connection.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type ii.

Cylinder Treated as Flat Plate

This connection type treats the cylinder as a flat plate for the coupling

loss factor calculation.
10-66 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Flat

Type = 12

_c.BETA ""';'";'e_= Joint angle.

Parameters

BJL - Joint length.

BETA - Joint angle,

Figure 10.12 Type = 12: Cone to flat plate. "T" connection.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type i0.

Cone Treated as Flat Plate

This connection type treats the cone as a flat plate for the coupling loss

factor calculation.

=
PATHNAME 10- 67

plate

Equivalent frame.

Parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

ALPHA

Truss or beam

Figure 10.13 Type = 15: Flat plate to truss with equivalent frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 15.

Angle

The truss extends from middle of plate at the specified angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling
10-68 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Equivalent Frame

The equivalent frame is calculated using the panel properties for a strip

the width of the truss.

_ Tvoe = 16

plate

------_',_ Rectang ular frame.

_Truss or beam

Parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Frame Parameters

R-O - Mass densi_.

H Thickness.

B Width.

BL Length.

CL -Wave speed.

Figure 10.14 Type = 16: Flat plate to truss with rectangular frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 16.

Angle

The truss extends from middle of plate at the specified angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be
PATHNAME i0- 69

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

TvDQ = 17

X_p'Flat plate _-

__ _Circular frame.

,_,,_ BETA

,,',;,;

,,'.viii!_ .....

Parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Frame Parameters

R-tO - Mass density.

130 Outer diameter.

BL Length.

CL - Wave speed.

Figure i0.15 Type = 17: Flat plate to truss with circular frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 17.

Angle

The truss extends from middle of plate at the specified angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used
10-70 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

A cylinder or cone maybe used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

S Tvne = 18

late -

Tubular frame.

I_1 _l__Truss or beam

_ ALFHA

Parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Frame Parameters

RHO - Mass density.

DO - Outer diameter.

DI - Inner diameter.

BL - Length.

CL - Wave speed.

Figure i0.16 Type = 18: Flat plate to truss with tubular frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 18.

Angle

The truss extends from middle of plate at the specified angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

 ̧ ̧._.I
PATHNAME 10-71

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Frame Parameters

FHO - Mass density.

BL Length.

RGF Flexural radius of gyration.

A - Cross section area.

CL - Wave speed.

Figure 10.17 Type = 19: Flat plate to truss with general frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 19.

Angle

The truss extends from middle of plate at the specified angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used
10-72 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Attenuated Truss Connections

Truss types 20-24 correspond to truss types 15-19 respectively. They are

the same except for the addition of an attenuation factor which is

specified with the following two parameters:

IRATE CFRQ Attenuation Center frequencyrate. at dB/octave. which attenuation begins I

Type = 20

Flat plate to truss with equivalent frame and attenuation factor.

Corresponds to type 15.

Notes

For notes on connection type 20, refer to connection type 15.

Type = 21

Flat plate to truss with user supplied rectangular frame, and attenuation

factor. Corresponds to type 16.

Notes

For notes on connection type 21, refer to connection type 16.

Type = 22

Flat plate to truss with user supplied circular frame, and attenuation

factor. Corresponds to type 17.
PATHNAME 10 -73

Notes

For notes on connection type 22, refer to connection type 17.

Type = 23

Flat plate to truss with user supplied tubular frame, and attenuation

factor. Corresponds to type 18.

Notes

For notes on connection type 23, refer to connection type 18.

Type = 24 - Flat plate to truss with user supplied other frame, and

attenuation factor. Corresponds to type 19.

Notes

For notes on connection type 24, refer to connection type 19.

ALPHA

parameters

ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Figure 10.18 Type = 25: Flat plate to truss no frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 25.
10-74 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

Frame

There is no frame in this connection.

Angle

The truss extends from the edge of the plate at an acute angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Attenuated Truss Connection

Type = 26

Flat plate to truss no frame. Extends from edge of plate at an acute

angle. With attenuation factor.

Same as type 25 except the following parameters are added:

I RATE Attenuation rate. dB/octave. CFRQ Center frequency at which attenuation begins

-_J
PATHNAME 10-75

Tv=)e = 27 Parameters

;ETA ALPHA - Orientation angle.

BETA - Orientation angle.

Truss or beam "_ALPHA

Figure 10.19 Type = 27: Flat plate to truss no frame.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 27.

Frame

There is no frame in this connection.

Angle

The truss extends from the edge of the plate at an oblique angle.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported
10-76 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Attenuated Truss Connection

Type = 28

Flat plate to truss no frame. Extends from edge of plate at an oblique

angle. With attenuation factor.

Same as type 27 except the following parameters are added:

RATE

CFRQ I Attenuation rate. dB/octave.

Center frequency at which attenuation begins

Tvoe = 29

Flat p_e

Truss..:.:.,...:.,._.____:___,:.:.:,:......_._...:.:. _.:.__:__°r beam _1 "

c¢.:.:.:.::.". __:._::-:.:-_.:_ ...'.:_. _ .._.$.._ _:::_:._.":i;}_._:_j

Figure 10.20 Type = 29: Flat plate to beam.

Notes

The following notes apply to connection type 27.

Frame

v
PATHNAME 10- 7 7

There is no frame in this connection.

Angle

The beam is perpendicular to the plate.

Only Moment Coupling Used

Note only moment coupling is assumed. Force coupling is assumed to be

negligible. This assumption is not valid for certain types of joints (eg.

a pinned joint).

Cylinder or Cone May be used

A cylinder or cone may be used in place of the flat plate but will be

treated as a flat plate.

Truss Types Supported

The truss may be of type BEMR, BEMC, BEMT or BEMO.

Non-Resonant Coupling

This type does not account for non-resonant coupling.

Non-Resonant Truss Connections

There are a number of possible non-resonant truss connections. In

the EXTRAP I prediction some of these are supported. In the current

implementation of SEMOD none of these non-resonant truss connections are

supported. The transmission from this type of coupling can be significant

so the results from not using these connections can be in error.
10-78 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

._ TyD¢ = 40

lat plate Point connection

_or beam

Parameters

NB Number of points connecting

beam and plate.

Figure 10.21 Type = 40: Plate to parallel beam. Point connection.
PATHNAME 10-79

Tyoe = 41 _Pm'kn tkc°nn ekctlOn

Parameters

I_ - Number of points connecting

plate 1 to plate 2.

Note the order of

specification.

Figure 10.22 Type = 41: Plate to perpendicular plate. Single point.
10-80 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

f_Tvpe = 42_

/Point connection

Flat plate

', -lat plate

\

\

\

\

\

\

\

"J

Parameters

NB Number of points connecting

the two plates.

Figure 10.23 Type = 42: Plate to parallel plate. Point connection.
PATHNAME 10 - 81

TyDQ = 43

_\\\\\\\\\\\\" _ _

iiiiiiii_iiii!i_i!iii!iiiii!iiiiii!iiii_iiiiiiiiii!iiii!!iiii_!ii!iiiiiiiii_i!_!iii_i_ii !i i ii i_._

_G:_:_6:i:_i:o:_!JiJ',!iiiii!ii!i _ _ Flat Plate _ _

!!!iiiiii iiiii i i _i_JL :

t

parameters

BJL - Joint length.

Figure 10.24 Type = 43: Butt connection between two plates.
_-82 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

TYPe = 44

Parameter 

BJL12

BJL13

BJL23

Joint length for

plates 1 and 2.

Joint length for

plates 1 and 3.

- Joint length for

plates 2 and 3.

Figure 10.25 Type = 44: "T" connection between three plates.

V
PATHNAME 10-83

TYPe = 45

__ Point Connection

Figure 10.26 Type = 45:

Notes

Not yet implemented.

Beam to parallel beam. Point connection.
10-84 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

TvDe = 46

Flat Plate 4

3

i _i,lJ_ii.l.i_:!i:_ii_i_i_,,'Aiiiiii_!_i_i_i_i_i_::_i._i_ii_|iiii[ Flat Plate 3

Figure 10.27 Type = 46:

Parameters

BJL12

BJL13

BJL14

BJL23

BJL24

BJL34

Joint length for

plates 1 and 2.

Joint length for

plates 1 and 3.

Joint length for

plates 1 and 4.

- Joint length for

plates 2 and 3.

- Joint length for

plates 2 and 4.

- Joint length for

plates 3 and 4

"+" connection between four plates.

10.17.1. CHECK

CHECK command

Purpose

This command checks the parameters and tells you which ones have not been

input yet.

CoEmmlnd

CHECK

Note

If no parameters are missing then OK is printed out.
10o17o2o DELETE

PATHNAME 10-85

DELETE command

Purpose

This command deletes an element and all connections to that element from

the model or deletes a single connection from the model.

Command

DELETE NAME

or

DELETE NAMEI,NAME2,(NAME3,...)

Where

CASE I - Deleting an element

NAME - The name of an element. This form deletes the named element and

all connections to that element from the model.

Notes

BUGS

CASE II - Deleting a path

NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3,...

These are the names of elements in a path. (See PATHNAME) The

connection defined by these elements is then deleted from the

model

This command saves any changes you have mode to the model before deleting.

This means that after a delete doing a quit will not undo the delete or

any changes up to the delete. It is equivalent to typing:

DONE

DELETE ...

PATHNAME

Does not update excitation elements(s). This will require the use of the

SETEXCN command to update the excitation elements.

Does not get rid of unused string variable space. This doesn't affect the

prediction.
10-86 5TATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.17.3. DONE

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks the connections for missing parameters, saves the

connections and exits the sub-processor.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return

10.17.4. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command is used to list out the parameters for every connection in

the model or to list out the names of the connections.

Command

LIST (NAME)

Where

NAME - Is the four character string NAME. This causes only the names

of the connections to be listed. (optional)

Note

If NAME is left off then all of the parameters are listed as well as the

names of each connection.

k.__.i

k_
PATHNAME 10-87

10.17.5. PARAINP_

Parameter Input processor

Purpose

This sub-processor allows the input of parameters for the particular

connection last specified in PATHNAME.

This sub-processor is entered when you specify a path name and/or type in

response to the prompt:

Input connection >

Commands

CHECK - Checks the parameters for the current connection.

DONE - Exits sub-processor with check.

EXIT - Exits sub-processor without a check.

LIST - Lists out the parameters for the current connection.

P* - Input list of parameters.

10.17.5.1. CHECK

CHECK command

Purpose

This command checks for parameters which have not been input yet for the

connection last specified in PATHNAME.

Command

CHECK

Note

The parameters which have not been input will be displayed.
10-88 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.17.5.2. DONE

DONE command

Purpose

This command checks for missing parameters for the last connection

specified in PATHNAME then exits the sub-processor.

Command

DONE

or

carriage return

Note

See CHECK for information on checking.

This command is recoE_ended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in an interactive mode. Use EXIT in a batch mode.

10.17.5.3. EXIT

EXIT command

Purpose

This command exits the sub-processor without checking.

Command

EXIT

Note

This command is recommended for exiting this subprocessor when it is

executed in a batch mode. Use DONE in an interactive mode. Using exit

results in faster execution because the checking is then only done when

you exit PATHNAME.
PATHNAME 10-89

10.17.5.4. LIST

LIST command

Purpose

This command provides a list of the parameters and their values for the

connection last specified in PATHNAME.

Command

LIST

Note

Parameters not input will be flagged.

10.17.5.5. P*

P* command

Purpose

This command is used to input parameters.

Command

4

P* VARI=VALI,VAR2=VAL2,VAR3=VAL3 ....

or

VARI=VAL1,VAR2=VAL2,VAR3=VAL3 ....

Where

VARI=VALI,VAR2=VAL2, ....

This is the list of parameters and their associated values.
10-90 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

B

10.17.6. QUIT

QUIT command

Purpose

This command exits the subprocessor without saving or checking your

connections.

Command

QUIT

Note

This command should only be used if you don't want to save any changes

that you have made to the model connections.
10.18. POWER

POWER 10-91

POWER command

Purpose

This command calculates the power flow between each element and also

calculates the flow between elements as a percentage of the total power

flowing into a specific element.

Command

POWER (MAXCON)

Where

MAXCON - Is the maximum connectivity in your model. Default = 2*

#elements.

Use the LIST POWER and LIST PCRF commands to display output.

"v
10-92 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.19. QUIT

QUIT command

Purpose

This command exits SEMOD without updating the model history matrix.

Command

QUIT
10.20. READ

READ 10-93

READ command (Not yet operational)

Purpose

This command is used to include as a part of your model another model

which was created at an earlier time. Also a single element of another

model can be included.

Command

READ NI,NAMEI (ELEMENT)

Where

NI,NAMEI - The DAL unit and version name for the model to be read.

ELEMENT - The name of a SEA element in the model to be read that you

want included in your model. (optional)

Conventions

If your model has an element with the same name as one in the model to be

read from, then you will be asked for a new name for the element being

read. If you don't put in a new name then that element will replace the

one that is already in your model.
10-94 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.21. RENAME

RENAME command

Purpose

This command is used to change the name of an element.

Command

RENAME OLDNAME NEWNAME

Where

OLDNAME - The existing name of an element that you wish to change.

NEWNAME - The new name to give to the element.

Note

The names associated with each path are also changed.

Example

RENAME EXTA EXTERNAL

Now to refer to the old path EXTA,SKIN you would now type EXTERNAL,SKIN.

BUGS

Does not check to see if you are duplicating another name. This could

result in two elements of the same name. If this were the case the first

one in the list would be accessed. Another RENAME should correct the

problem.
10.22. RESPONSE

RESPONSE 10-95

RESPONSE command

Purpose

This command allows the input of a response for an EXTRAP I prediction.

Command

RESPONSE

This command has no arguments.

The user is then prompted to input responses for each frequency of each

response element as was specified by the SETRES and FREQUENCY commands.

10.22.1. EXAMPLE

RESPONSE example

SEMOD > SETRES INTA

SEMOD > FREQUENCY 50.,i00.

SEMOD > RESPONSE

INTA ( 4) > 100.,110.,110.,100.

SEMOD >

This case shows input for the frequency range 50. to 100. hz for the

response element INTA.
10-96 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.23. SAVE

SAVE command (Not yet operational)

Purpose

This command is used to save your entire model or a single element of your

model to a separate location from the model you are working on.

Command

SAVE NI,NAME (ELEMENT)

Where

NI,NAME1 - The dal unit and version name for the model to be saved.

ELEMENT - The name of a SEA element in the model to be saved.

(optional)

Note

It is not necessary to issue this command to save your model as it is

automatically saved as you build it.
10.24. SETEXC

SETEXC 10-97

SETEXC command

Purpose

This command is used to specify which elements are excitation elements.

Command

SETEXCA NAME1,NAME2,NAME3...

or

SETEXCN NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3...

or

SETEXCL

Where

NAME1,NAME2,NAME3...

This is the list of elements to designate as excitation

elements.

CASE I

SETEXCA - Add elements to the list of excitation elements.

This command will add the input list of elements to an already

existing list of excitation elements. This form is the default.

CASE II

SETEXCN - Create new list of excitation elements.

This command will create an entirely new list of excitation elements

even if an old list already exists.

CASE III

SETEXCL - List the excitation elements.

The "L" option will list the excitation elements; it can also be

used in conjunction with the above two cases.

Notes

If an element is specified more than once a warning will be printed and

that element will only be used once.
10-98 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

This command must be issued prior to the ATACO command.
10.25. SETRES

SETRES 10-99

SETRES command

Purpose

This command is used to specify which elements are response elements for

EXTRAP I predictions..

Command

SETRESA NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3...

or

SETRESN NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3...

or

SETRESL

Where

NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3...

This is the list of elements to designate as response elements.

CASE I

SETRESA - Add elements to the list of response elements.

This conm_nd will add the input list of elements to an already

existing list of response elements. This form is the default.

CASE II

SETRESN - Create new list of response elements.

This command will create an entirely new list of response elements

even if an old list already exists.

CASE III

5ETRESL - List the response elements.

The "L" option will list the response elements; it can also be

used in conjunction with the above two cases.

Notes

If an element is specified more than once a warning will be printed and

that element will only be used once.
i0-I00 STATISTICALENERGYMODELER

This commandmust be issued prior to the ATACOcommand.
10.26. TEXT

TEXT 10-101

TEXT command

Purpose

This command is used to input a block of descriptive text for your model.

¢omm_d

TEXT (EOFL)

Line 1

Line 2

ZZZZ

Where

EOFL - Is a flag to terminate input of text• Default is 'ZZZZ'
10-102 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.27. TPRD

TPRD conm%and

Purpose

This conm_md calculates the theoretical response for the model.

Command

TPRD

Input

The following matrices are required for input:

NI,'FREQ',NAME - Frequency vector. (MDENS)

NI,'IDES',NAME - Descriptor matrix. (ATACO)

NI,'CONV',NAME - This matrix contains the conversion factor for mean

square response in MKS units to energy in MKS units.

(CFAC)

NI,'CPOW',NAME - This is a 1 X 1 matrix containing the conversion

factor from energy in the user's units to energy in

MKS units. (CFAC)

NI,'DBFG',NAME - This is a vector containing a flag for the unit type

for each element in the model. (CFAC)

NI,'INCO',NAME - Inverse coefficient matrix. (ATACO)

NI,'TRNF',NAME - Transfer function matrix. (ATACO)

NI,'EXC ',NAME - Excitation matrix. Each column is an excitation

corresponding to the element specified in SETEXC. The

order must be the same as is specified in SETEXC. The

ECOL command is useful for inputting this matrix.

NI,'POWF',NAME - POwer input flags. These are the numbers of the

elements (same as the row number in the MNAM matrix)

for which a power input is to be specified. (#Power

inputs,l) Optional

NI,'POWD',NAME - Power inputs. 1 column for each flag specified in the

POWF matrix. (#Frequencies,#Power inputs) Optional

Output

The following matrix is output:

NI,'RESP',NAME - The response matrix. One column for each element.

Contains both excitations and responses.

Commen t s
TPRD 10-103

This commandgenerally executes in muchless time than the ATACALCand

ATAC0commands.

The use of power inputs is identical to the usage in the PRDICT command

for EXTRAP I predictions.
10-104 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.28. PREDICT

PREDICT command

Purpose

This command is used to do EXTRAP I, EXTRAP II and Theoretical

predictions.

Command

PREDICT/THEORETICAL N1,NAME

or

PREDICT/EXTRAP/I NI,BASE N2,NEW IBACK

or

PREDICT/EXTRAP/II NI,BASE N2,NEW IUEXC,IURES

Where

CASE I: Theoretical prediction.

N1,NAME - DAL unit and version name for SEMOD model to do theoretical

prediction on.

CASE II: EXTRAP I prediction.

N1,BASE

N2,NEW

IBACK

- DAL unit and version name for SEMOD model to use as a

baseline.

- DAL unit and version name for SEMOD model to predict.

- SEA element number for which to back out a transfer

function.

Notes

CASE III:

N1,BASE

N2,NEW

IUEXC

IURES

EXTRAP II prediction. (Similar to SCALE command)

- DAL unit and version name for SEMOD,S model to use as a

baseline.

- DAL unit and version name for 5EMOD,S model to predict.

- Units of excitation. Same as used in the CONVERT command.

- Units of response. Same as used in the CONVERT command.

Refer to chapter ll (Statistical Energy Modeler) for information on

building models. The two extrapolation methods are documented ,in part,

in the following sections. Some of the commands are documented in chapter

ii.
10.28.1. EXTRAP I

PREDICT i0-105

Procedure for EXTRAP I predictions

Overview

This new procedure takes advantage of the SEMOD software for creating SEA

models. The two prediction methods, EXTRAP I and EXTRAP II, were modified

to use this software. The advantages are:

I) The input of parameters is easier.

2) The flexibility of the predictions are increased.

3) The connections listed for the SEMOD method are used so a different

set of connection types is not needed.

There are several disadvantages:

l) The user must now specify the connection types.

2) The interface to the database is not as strong.

3) More input is required.

The basic idea is to set up a set of allowable names and types for the

elements and connections in an EXTRAP I model. Then the user enters 5EMOD

and then begins input of his model using ELNAME and PATHNAME. The set of

allowable names and types limits what can be entered. This makes it easy

to create an EXTRAP I model using SEMOD . The following is a list of

allowed elements and connections and their allowed types (see the SEMOD

documentation for descriptions of each type):

Element Allowed types

EXTA 1,2

SKIN 3:5

INTA 1,2

MONT 3:9

INST 3:5

Connection Allowed types

EXTA-SKIN 1:3

EXTA-SKIN-INTA 4:6

SKIN-INTA 1:3

SKIN-MONT 7:12,15:29,41:43

SKIN-MONT-INST 30:39

INTA-MONT 1:3

INTA-INST 1:3

MONT-INST 7:12,15:29,41:43

Use the RUN=DCON command to create a symbolic list of the parameters in a

DAMO type parameter matrix such as the one returned by the RUN=GMOD

command.
10-106 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.28.1.1. EXAMPLE

EXTRAP I example.

The following is an example using this new method.

use data from the data base:

* VAPEPS demo of EXTRAP I prediction.

* i) Parameter input.

TEMPLATE=EXTRAP 2,$772 2,YPAN

SEMOD 2,s772

ELNAME

EXTA, I

rho =.i1480e-06, co =.13390e+05,

aac =.30000e-01

EXIT

5KIN,PLAT

rho =.25700e-04, cl =.20200e+06,

alx =.67900e+02, aly =.32290e+02

dlf =.10000e+O0, e =.10500e+07,

rhos=.32000e-04, asms=.71980e+00

EXIT

LIST

DONE

PATHNAME

EXTA,SKIN, I

EXIT

DONE

FREQUENCY=25.,10000.

SETEXCL EXTA

EXCITATION

74.4, 91.0,iii.9,125.6,134.1,135.2,133.6,135.1

135.6,129.6,126.9,129.9,129.1,127.0,126.7,124.2

124.2,124.3,123.5,121.0,I17.6,115.3,112.6,108.9

105.4,104.2,101.9

SETRESL SKIN

MDENS

ATACALC

ATACO

CFAC 7,1,4

CRFR

DONE

SEMOD 2,YPAN

ELNAME

EXTA, 1

rho =.I1480E-06, co =.13390e+05, v

v =.23000e+07,

h =.12500e+01,

pata=.20000e+03

=.23000e+07,

This example does not

ap =.10600e+06

ap =.21920e+04

ap =.I0600e+06

v
PREDICT 10-107

aac = .30000e-01

EXIT

SKIN, PLAT

rho =.25900e-04, cl =.20200e+06, h =.12400e+01, ap =.21920e+04

alx =.67900e+02, aly =.32290e+02

dlf =. 10000e+00, e =. I0600e+07, pata=. 20000e+03

rhos=. 32000e-04, asms=. 70700e+00

EXIT

LIST

DONE

PATHNAME

EXTA, SKIN, 1

EXIT

DONE

FREQUENCY=25., i0000.

SETEXCL EXTA

EXC ITAT ION

74.1 88.9 105.4 124.4 135.5 138.7 138.6 139.8

137.0 133.1 130.7 131.2 132.1 130.1 129.7 128.0

126.8 126.1 124.8 122.7 120.7 I18.2 116.0 113.6

iii.0 110.9 108.8

SETRESL SKIN

RESPONSE

3.9107E-06 2. 9200E-06 2. 3052E-06 5.3739E-05 2.0972E-03 6.5924E-04

5.3930E-03 2. 4060E-02 4. I195E-03 4.4200E-03 4. 5172E-03 6.7789E-03

1.0011E-02 5. 8346E-03 3.2441E-03 2.7141E-03 1.6797E-03 1.0214E-03

5.5276E-04 5.3567E-04 6.5492E-04 4.2887E-04 1.6892E-04 2.9483E-04

9.1950E-05 1. 3979E-04 3.3978E-05

MDENS

ATACALC

ATACO

CFAC 7,1,4

CRFR

DONE

* Do prediction

PREDICT/EXTRAP/I 2,ypan, 2, s772,1

SEMOD 2,5772

LIST RESP

DONE

END
10-108 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

10.28.1.2. PROGRAMMING NOTES

Programming Notes.

The storage of the above allowed element and connection names and types is

accomplished via 4 matrices.

The first is called the allowed name matrix (ANAM). It is stored as

follows:

Columnl Column2

EXTA ' '

SKIN ' '

INTA ' '

MONT ' '

INST ' '

The second is the allowed element type matrix (AETY). It is stored as

follows:

Columnl Column2

1 1

1 2

2 3

2 4

2 5

3 1

3 2

etc...

Column 1 refers to the element number in ANAM

Column 2 refers to the element types allowed.

In this case there are 17 allowed types.

The third is the allowed connection matrix (APTH). It is stored as

follows:

Columnl Column2 Column3

1 2 0

1 2 3

2 3 0

2 4 0

2 4 5

3 4 0

3 5 0

Each column represents an element in the

connection A 0 means that only 2

elements are involved in the connection.

V
PREDICT 10-109

4 5 0

The fourth is the allowed connection type matrix (APTY). It stored in the

same way as the allowed element type matrix. The difference is that the

columns refer the the connection number and connection type respectively.

Any one of these or all may be omitted except that the element name matrix

must be present if any of the others are to be used and the connection

matrix must be present if the connection type matrix is to be used.

10.28.2. EXTRAP II

EXTRAP II predictions

The EXTRAP II prediction method scales a structural element based on some

basic parameters. It is basically a 1 element SEA model. The parameters

required are different that for theoretical or EXTRAP I SEA predictions.

10.28.2.1. EXAMPLE

The following is an example using the new EXTRAP II method:

* Create base line model.

SEMOD,S 1,YPAN

ELNAME

YPAN, SCAL

* Parameters for baseline model.

RHO=7.2E-6,RHOS=2.19E-5,ASMS=.707,H=3.04,AP=2123.,DLF=.04

EXIT

DONE

t

* Input excitation and frequency range for baseline model.

SETEXC YPAN

FREQUENCY=f60.,250.

EXCITATION

137.0,133.1,130.7

DONE

* Create new model.

SEMOD,S I,$772
i0-ii0 STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER

ELNAME

5772,5CAL

* Parameters for new model.

RHO=7.20E-6,RHOS=2.19E-5,ASMS=.720,H=3.04,AP=2123.,DLF=.04

EXIT

DONE

* Input excitation and frequency range for baseline model.

SETEXC $772

FREQUENCY=I60.,250.

EXCITATION

135.7,129.6,126.9

DONE

* Input response for baseline model.

ECOL 1,RESP,YPAN 3,1

4.12E-3,4.42E-3,4.52E-3

* Do prediction.

PREDICT/EXTRAP/II I,YPAN 1,5772 1,7

* Display results.

SEMOD,S 1,5772

LIST RESP

DONE
II. OLD SEA COMMANDS

OLD SEA COMMANDS ii-i

This section contains an early version of the prediction co.hands given in

Chapter i0; they are included for the sake of transition from an old

method to the new method. The use of the Chapter i0 commands is now

recommended.

The use of the conm_nds in this chapter is described under the PRDICT

con_and in this chapter. Briefly the order of use of these commands is:

DAMO - Input properties.

DENS - Calculate modal densities.

TRNF - Calculate coupling loss factors and transfer functions.

CNVRT - Calculate conversion factors.

PRDICT - Do the prediction.
11-2 OLDSEACOMMANDS

ll.l. CNVRT

CNVRT Command

Purpose

The arguments of the CNVRT command are used to identify the user's units.

CNVRT takes these units and calculates a set of conversion factors which

are used by the prediction routines to convert into the units for which

these routines were designed.

Command

CNVRT NU,VER, ITYP,JTYP,KTYP

Whet e

NU,VER - DAL unit and version name of your model.

ITYP

JTYP

KTYP

Output

from CNVRT will be stored in the same DAL file with the same

version name as the parameter matrix.

- The units of mean-square acceleration.

= 1 - (M/Sec**2)**2

= 2 - g**2

= 3 - (in/sec**2)**2

= 4 - (ft/sec**2)**2

= 5 - dB (REF = 8.4144E-18)

- The units of mean-square pressure.

= 1 - (Newton/M**2)**2

= 2 - psi**2

= 3 - dB (REF = 8.4144E-18)

- The units of the parameters in the parameter matrix.

= 1 - M, KG, SEC

= 2 - CM, GRAM, SEC

= 3 - FT, SLUG (LBF-SEC**2/FT), SEC

= 4 - IN, SNAIL (LBF-SEC**2/IN), SEC

Output

The following matrices are output by CNVRT:

NU,'CONV',VER - Conversion factor from energy to response.

NU,'CPOW',VER - Conversion factor from power in user units to power in

MKS units.

NU,'DBFG',VER - Flags for conversion into dB units.

The output of this co_ is used by the other prediction commands. The

prediction command that uses this output is PRDICT. These output data

=
CNVRT 11-3

sets should not normally be used except by the PRDICT command.

Related Commands

DENS, DAMO, TRNF, PRDICT
11-4 OLD SEA COMMANDS

ll.2. DAMO

DAMO Com_nd

Purpose

DAMO creates and/or edits data module packets, as described in the MODULE

section of the VAPEPS PREP command. It is included as a stand alone command

to aid users in forming general SEA modules that may be applied (with minor

changes) to many events.

Command

DAMO N 1, VR1 N2, VR2 MAXCH

Where

Nl,VR1 - Input configuration (unit,name) If omitted, the module is built

from scratch.

N2,VR2 - Output configuration unit and name.

MAXCH - Maximum number of channels for this module. If omitted, MAXCH

defaults to 50.

Sub Commands

DESC NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Provides up to three 12 character names as a description of this module.

These names may later be searched in the SERCH processor.

EXTA NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Enters the external acoustic zone mode and optionally provides for up to 3

names to describe this zone. If any names are included, all previous EXTA

names are removed. If no names are included any previous names are kept.

SKIN NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Enters the skin zone. The above rules apply here as well.

INTA NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Interior acoustic zone.

MONT NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Mounting structure.

INST NAME1 NAME2 NAME3

Installation (usually the item whose response is desired)

FRAM NAME1 NAME2 NAME3
DAMO 11-5

Frame structure. This zone is applicable only in modules where the

mounting structure is a truss.

SEAZone Editting Commands

P* NAMI=VALI NAM2=VAL2 NAM3=VAL3 .....

Sets the value of named parameters. See the VAPEPS manual for details.

C* CHANI,CHAN2,CHAN3, .....

Adds the named channels (4 chars max) to the list of channels for this

zone.

REMOVE CHANI,CHAN2,CHAN3, ....

Removes the named channels from the list.

LIST CHANNEL

Will list the channels in the current zone. If no zone has been entered or

DESC was the last command, then channels will be listed for all zones.

LIST PARAMETERS

Will list parameters in this zone. If no zone is active parameters will be

listed for all zones.

General (any zone) commands

READ NU,VER,ZONE

Reads the specified module. If zone is included (ie. SKIN INTA, etc), then

only that zone will be read. Note that a read operation will completely

replace the data module or zone.

SAVE NU,VER

Saves the current module and stays in DAMO.

CHECK

Checks the parameters for all zones with non-zero types and computes the

appropriate non-dimensional parameters for those sections. These

parameters are then listed. Diagnostics are printed for parameters which

are needed but have not been specified.

DONE

Performs a CHECK operation (no listing), a SAVE to the original output

module name (N2,VR2) and then exits DAMO. A blank line is equivalent to

DONE.
11-6 OLD SEA COMMANDS

11.2.1. PARAMETERS

Note all parameters must be input as real numbers.

SEA Element EXTA.

TYPE = i.

Reverberant

Field

TYPE

RHO

AP

V

AAC

CO

TYPE = 2.

Non Reverberant

Field

TYPE

RHO

FBL

AP

V

VISC

AAC

CO

VEL

Description

Code describing type of acoustic field.

Mass density.

Length of flying body.

Surface area of external space.

Volume of external space.

Kinematic viscosity of fluid.

Acoustic absorbtion coefficient.

Velocity of sound.

Velocity of flying object.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

TYPE = 2. is not presently supported by the software.
SEAElement SKIN

DAMO 11-7

TYPE = i.

Flat

Plate

TYPE

RHO

RHOS

ASMS

H

ALX

ALY

PATA

AP

E

DLF

CL

TYPE = 2.

Cylinder

TYPE

RHO

RHOS

TYPE = 3.

Cone

TYPE

RHO

RHOS

TYPE = 4.

EXTRAP II

TYPE

RHO

RHOS

Description

Code describing geometry.

Mass density.

Surface mass density.

ASMS

H

D

BL

ALX

ALY

PATA

AP

E

DLF

CL

ASMS

H

D

BL

ALX

ALY

PATA

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

ASMS

H

AP

DLF

Non structural mass.

Equivalent thickness.

Diameter.

Length.

Sub panel dimension X.

Sub panel dimension Y.

Length of discontinuity.

Surface area.

Half apex angle of cone.

Young's Modulus.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

SEA Element INTA

TYPE = i.

Reverberant

Field

TYPE

RHO

AP

V

AAC

CO

Description

Code describing type of acoustic field.

Mass density.

Surface area of external space.

Volume of external space.

Acoustic absorbtion coefficient.

Velocity of sound.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.
11-8 OLDSEACOMMANDS

SEA Element MONT

TYPE = i., 2. or 6.

Truss Mount A, Truss Mount B or Beam Mount

XTYP = l_ XTYP = 2.

Rectangular Circular

Cross Cross

Section Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

H

B

BL

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

DO

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

XTYP = 3.

Tubular

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

DI

DO

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT CNT

XTYP = 4.

Other

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

RGF

A

PJ

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

T

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

Description

Code describing geometry.

Cross section type.

Coupling type.

Mass density.

Non structural mass.

Thickness.

Width.

Length or truss members.

Inner diameter.

Outer diameter.

Flexural radius of gyration

Cross section area.

Polar moment of inertia.

Orientation angle.

Orientation angle.

Young's Modulus.

Shear Modulus.

Torsional stiffness.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

Attenuation rate, dB/octave

1/3 octave band center freq

at which attenuation begins

Number of truss members.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

TYPJ is required only if INST is present.

If TYPE = i. allowable values for TYPJ are i. and 6. only.

If TYPE = 2. allowable values for TYPJ are 2. and 7. only.

If TYPE = 6. allowable value for TYPJ is ii.

RATE and CFRQ are required fro TYPJ = 6. or 7. only..

ALPHA and BETA are not required if TYPE = 6.
SEAElement MONT

TYPE= 3. or 4.

T Plate Mount or Oblique Plate Mount

TYPE

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

H

ALX

ALY

PATA

BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

Description

Code describing geometry.

Coupling type.

Mass density.

Non structural mass.

Equivalent thickness.

Sub panel dimension X.

Sub panel dimension Y.

Length of discontinuity.

Length of joint.

Surface area.

Plate to plate angle.

Young's Modulus.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

DAMO 11-9

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

BETA is not required fro TYPE = 3.

TYPJ is required only if INST is present.

The allowable values for TYPJ are 3., 4., 5., 9. and 10. only.
ll-10 OLDSEACOMMANDS

SEA Element MONT

TYPE = 5. or -5.

Corner Plate Mount or Line Mount

Description

TYPE = 5.

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

H

ALX

ALY

PATA

TYPE= -5. Code describing geometry.

Coupling type.

Mass density.

Non structural mass.

Equivalent thickness.

Sub panel dimension X.

Sub panel dimension Y.

Length of discontinuity.

BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

BJL

BETA

Length of joint.

Surface area.

Plate to plate angle.

Young's Modulus.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

TYPJ is required only if INST is present.

The allowable values for TYPJ are 3., 4., 5., 9. and I0. only.
SEA Element MONT

TYPE = 7.

Isolation Truss Mount

DAMO ii-ii

XTYP = l.J XTYP = 2.

Rectangular Circular

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

H

B

BL

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

DO

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

XTYP = 3.

Tubular

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

DI

DO

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

XTYP = 4.

Other

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

TYPJ

RHO

ASMS

BL

RGF

A

PJ

ALPHA

BETA

E

G

T

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

Description

Code describing geometry.

Cross section type.

Coupling type.

Mass density.

Non structural mass.

Thickness.

Width.

Length or truss members.

Inner diameter.

Outer diameter.

Flexural radius of gyration

Cross section area.

Polar moment of inertia.

Orientation angle.

Orientation angle.

Young's Modulus.

Shear Modulus.

Torsional stiffness.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

Attenuation rate, dB/octave

1/3 octave band center freq

at which attenuation begins

Number of truss members.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is consid _ed to be

not present in the model.

TYPJ is required only if INST is present.

The allowable values for TYPJ are i., 2., 6. and 7. only.

TYPJ = 6. or 7. indicates vibration isolators between SKIN and MONT and

INST. RATE and CFRQ apply to both isolators in this case.
11-12 OLD SEA COMMANDS

TYPE

TYPJ

RHOASMS

H

D

BL

ALX

ALY

PATA

BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

SEA Element MONT

TYPE = 8.

Cone Mount

Description

Code describing geometry.

Coupling type.

Mass density.

Non structural mass.

Equivalent thickness.

Base diameter.

Height of cone.

Sub panel dimension X.

Sub panel dimension Y.

Length of discontinuity.

Length of joint.

Surface area.

Half apex angle of cone.

Young's Modulus.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

If TYPE = O. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

TYPJ is required only if INST is present.

The only allowable value for TYPJ is 8.
SEAElement INST

DAMO 11-13

TYPE= i.

Flat

Plate

TYPE

RHO

ASMS

H

ALX

ALY

PATA

BJL

AP

GAMA

E

DLF

CL

TYPE = 2.

Cylinder

TYPE

RHO

ASMS

H

D

BL

ALX

ALY

PATA

TYPE = 3.

Cone

TYPE

RHO

ASMS

H

D

BL

ALX

ALY

PATA

BJL

AP

GAMA

E

DLF

CL

BJL

AP

BETA

GAMA

E

DLF

CL

TYPE = 4.

EXTRAP I I

TYPE

RHO

RHOS

ASMS

H

AP

DLF

Description

Code describing geometry.

Mass density.

Surface mass density.

Non structural mass.

Equivalent thickness.

Diameter.

Length.

Sub panel dimension X.

Sub panel dimension Y.

Length of discontinuity.

Joint length.

Surface area.

Half apex angle of cone.

Plate to plate angle.

Young's Modulus.

Damping loss factor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

BJL is required for MONT TYPJ = 3., 4., 5., 8., 9. and 10. only.

GAMA is required for MONT TYPJ = 4., 8., and I0. only.
11-14 OLDSEACOMMANDS

FRAM Structure

TYPE = I.

Beam Frame

(Required only for MONT TYPE = i., 2., and 7.)

XTYP = 1. I XTYP = 2.

Rectangular Circular

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

RH0

XTYP = 3

Tubular

Cross

Section

• XTYP = 4.

Other

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

RHO

BL

Cross

Section

TYPE

XTYP

RHO

H

B

BL

CL

BL

DO

CL

TYPE

XTYP

RHO

BL

DI

DO

CL

RGF

A

CL

Description

Code describing geometry.

Cross section type.

Mass density.

Thickness.

Width•

Length or truss members.

Inner diameter.

Outer diameter.

Flexural radius of gyration

Cross section area.

Longitudinal wave speed.

If TYPE = 0. (default condition) then the SEA element is considered to be

not present in the model.

Note

The following figures are shown as they appeared in the original VAPEPS

User's Manual, including the original figure numbers used.
DAMO 11-15

PHYSICAL SYSTEM

MODELED WITH SEA ELEMENTS

_--SEA ELEMENT

NUMBER

--_FRA

T

ENERGY DIAGRAM

NUMBER

I

2

3

4

S

SEA ELEMENT

NAME (physical type)

-EXTA (ACOUSTIC SPACE)

- SKIN (STRUCTURE)

- INTA (ACOUSTIC SPACE)

- MONT (STRUCTURE)

- INST (STRUCTURE)

- FRAM (OPTIONAL STRUCTURE,

NOT A SEA ELEMENT)

Figure 11-1

Figure ll.1 5 element SEA model.
11-16 OLDSEA/OMMANDS

QEXTA (ACOUSTIC SPACEI

TYPE = 1. REVERBERANT (A)

OR LIFTOFF (B)*

I

I

-- PARAMETERS {UNITSI

TYPE [ ]

ROW* [MASS/(LENGTH**3) }

[LENGTH**2]

[LENGTH**3]

AAC { ]

/_.,\CO_ ILENGTH/TIME]

_(B)

I

L

I IIII '1111111I

* To model the external acoustic environment that exists at liftoff, the volume V

should be calculated from the fnllowing expression: V = 0.35,_ 3

=2.

NOT REVERBERANT d

z "_ PARAMETERS {UNITS]

TYPE [ ]

ROW* {MASS/(LENGTH**3) ]

FBL {LENGTH l

///__/ A P [LENGTH**2]

V { LENGTH**3]

VISC { (LENGTH**2)/TIME]

AAC [ ]

CO [LENGTH/TIME]

VEL [LENGTH/TIME]

,4 Parameters for a TYPE = 2 acoustic space can be entered into the VAPEPS data base,

but currently cannot be used in the EXTRAP prediction scheme.

Figure 11-2

Figure 11.2 EXTA SEA acoustic space element.

v
DAMO 11-17

Q SKIN

(STRUCTURE)

TYPE

=I.

FLAT PLATE

PARAMETERS

TYPE

ROW*

ROWS*

ASMS*

H

ALX*

ALY *

PATA*

AP

E

DLF

CL

[UNITSi

]

MASS/(LENGTH**3) I

MASS/(LENGTH**2) ]

MASSI

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH I

LENGTH**2]

'FORCE/(LENGTH**2} 1

]

LENGTH/TIME ]

=2.

*SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 11-3d)

CYLINDER

PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE

ROW*

ROWS*

ASMS*

H

D

BL

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

AP

E

DLF

CL

[ ]

[MASS / (LENGTH**3} ]

[MASS/(LENGTH**2) I

[MASS]

LENGTH

LENGTH

LENGTH

LENGTH

LENGTH

LENGTH

LENGTH**2]

FORCE / (LENGTH**2) ]

]

LENGTH/TIME ]

Figure 11-3a

Figure ll.3 SKIN SEA elements, plate and cylinder.
11-18 OLDSEACOMMANDS

TYPE

= 3.

SKIN (CONTINUED)

CON E

PARAMETERS IUNITS]

TYPE

ROW*

ROWS*

ASMS*

H

D

BL

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

[ ]

IMASS/(LENGTH**3) ]

[MASS/(LENGTH**2) I

IMASS ]

LENGTH ]

LENGTH I

LENGTH l

LENGTH ]

LENGTH ]

LENGTH]

LENGTH**2]

DEGREES]

FORCEI(LENGTH*'2)]

I

LENGTH/TIME ]

= 4.

EXTRAP tl

./f PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE [ }

• L_) ROWS* [MASSI(LENGTH**2)]

ASMS* [MASS]

H [LENGTH ]

AP [LENGTH**2 I

DLF I ]

*SEE SKIN DETAIL {Figures 11-3(: and 11-3d)

Figure 11-3b

Figure i1.4 SKIN SEA elements, cone and EXTRAP II.
DAMO 11-19

SKIN - DETAIL

TYPICAL SKIN

NON-STRUCTURAL MASS

BARE SKIN

STIFFENER

PARAMETERS

ROW INCLUDES ALL

STRUCTURAL MASSES

(I.E., BARE SKIN

AND STIFFENER)

ROWS - INCLUDES THE BARE

SKIN ONLY

ASMS INCLUDES ALL

ATTACHED EQUIPMENT

DEVICES, ETC.

Figure 11-3c

Figure 11.5 Typical SEA SKIN element.
•penuT_uoD_uearaTeRIMSVaS I_T .(_ 9"TT e:nBTs

S31J-InNI.LNODSIC] _ = VZVd P[-II a-Jn6!-!

DNION38 ld17 hl_13 J. NI

.I.VHJ. SHJ.DN37 3D03

:S

8.r75

S311117NI.LNODSIO

HIIM NI)IS 7VDIclAJ.

(c]3rINI.1NOD) 71VI30-NI>IS
DAMO ll-21

Q INTA (ACOUSTIC SPACE)

TYPE = I. REVERBERANT

_ PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE [ ]

ROW* [MASS/(LENGTH**3) ]

AP [LENGTH**2] [LENGTH**31

/'-/" _. _,'_ AAC [ ]

/ _ CO [LENGTH/TIME]

.a

For some prediction models it may be desirable to model INTA as the external

acoustic environment (See VAPEPS Volume I for details). For an external

environment model of a liftoff acoustic space, see the sketch for EXTA in

this section.

Figure 11-4

Figure i1.7 INTA SEA acoustic space element.
11-22 OLDSEACOMMANDS

Q MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE

= 1.

FRONT

TOP

Y B °

E

® : =--X

TRUSS MOUNT CONNECTION

TO SKIN

Q PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE [ ]

XTYP TYPJ t

ROW*

ASMS *

H

B

BL

DI

DO

RGF

A

PJ

ALPH

BETA

E

G

T

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

[ l

[ ]

[MASS/(LENGTH**3) ]

[MASSI

LENGTHI

LENGTH J

LENGTH 1

LENGTH I

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH**2]

LENCTH**_,]

DEGREES!

DEGREES]

FORCE/(LENCTH**2) I

FORCE/(LENGTH**2al

FORCE*(LENGTH**2)}

]

LENGTH/TIME]

dB/OCTAVE ]

[HERTZI

{ ]

t SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

* SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 11-3(:1)

Figure 11-5a

Figure 11.8 MONT SEA element TYPE = i.
DAM0 11-23

O MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE = 2. TRUSS MOUNT CONNECTION

TO SKIN

FRONT

zI

Y

PARAMETERS [UNITS]

/f_/ '_" TYPE [ ]

_ XTYP- [ !

j TYPJT I i

" • ASMS* {MASS]

' _ " _..... I H LENGTH

B LENGTH

BL LENGTH

DI

DO LENGTH'

SIDE O

Z

X

RGF

A

PJ

ALPH

BETA

E

G

T

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

LENGTH'

LENGTH**2]

LENGTH**4]

DEGREES]

DEGREES]

FORCE I(LENGTH**2) ]

FORCE I(LENGTH**2) ]

FORCE*(LENGTH**2) I

]

LENGTH IT IME ]

dB IOCTAVE I

IHERTZI

[ 1

TOP

Y

B o

T

Z _ X 2(2(2_

t SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-Si through 11-5m)

* SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 11-3d)

Figure 11-5b

Figure ll.9 MONT SEA element TYPE = 2.
11-24 OLDSEACOMMANDS

TOP

SIDE

TYPE

= 3.

®

/

Z X

MONT (STRUCTURE)

PLATE MOUNT "T" CONNECTION

TO SKIN

PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE

TYPJ t

ROW*

ASMS*

H

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

BJL

AP

E

DLF

CL

]

I

MASS/(LENGTH**3) I

MASS]

LENGTH I

LENGTH]

LENGTHI

LENGTH I

LENGTH1

LENGTH**2]

FORCE I(LENGTH**2) ]

1

LENGTH/TItlE I

Y

o

X

t SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3(: and 11-3d)

Figure 11-5d

Figure ii.i0 MONT SEA element TYPE = 3.
DAMO 11-25

(_MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE

= 4, PLATE MOUNT OBLIQUE CONNECTION

TO SKIN

k

TOP

/

Z

PARAMETERS

(!:).

_X

Y

TYPE

TYPJt"

ROW*

ASMS*

H

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

[UNITSl

[ l

l l

[MASS I(LENGTH**3) ]

IMASS]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH ]

LENGTHI

LENGTH**2]

DEGREES]

FORCE I(LENGTH**2) ]

I

LENGTH ITIME ]

t_,EE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

*SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3(: and 11-3(I)

Figure 11-5e

Figure ll.ll MONT SEA element TYPE = 4.
11-26 OLDSEACOMMANDS

TYPE

•= 5.

YA

TOP

Y

SIDE

L._ MONT (STRUCTURE)

_9 _ PLATE MOUNT CONNECTION

"--. TO SKIN AT CORNER

ASMS*

H

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

I MASS }

LENGTH I

LENGTH ]

LENGTH ]

LENGTH I

LENGTH]

LENGTH"*2 I

DEGREESI

FORCE/(LENGTH**2)

I

LENGTH/T IME I

= -5 " _5_

,(

TOP t BETA°

Z _ --'_-X

' SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures

* SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures

LINE MOUNT (INACTIVE) CONNECTION

BETWEEN SKIN AND INST

PARAMETERS [UNITSi

TYPE [ ]

BJL {LENGTH]

BETA {DEGREES]

Y

SIDE 4 .BJL

S r I t T / ., I i

Z

11-5i through 11-5m}

11-3c and 11-3d)

Figure 11-5f

Figure ll.12 MONT SEA element TYPE = 5. and -5.
DAMO 11-27

MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE

=6.

BEAM MOUNT CONNECTION

TO SKIN

SIDE /

zt

/

/

/

X

FRONT Z T 90 °

t_

PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE

- XTYP

TYPJ t

ROW*

ASMS*

H

B

BL

DI

DO

RGF

A

PJ

E

G

T

DLF

CL

CNT

[

]

]

MASS/(LENGTH** 3) I

MASSI

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGTH**2]

LENGTH**4]

FORCE I(LENCTH**2) ]

FORCE I (LENC, T}I**2) ]

FORCE*(LENGTH**2) l

I

LENGTH/TIME]

I

tSEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

*SEE SKIN DETAIL (Fiqures 11-3c and 11-3d}

Figure 1 I- 5(=

k

Figure ll.13 MONT SEA element TYPE = 6.
11-28 OLDSEACOMMANDS

I_ MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE

: 7. ISOLATION TRUSS MOUNT CONNECTION

TO SKIN

X l ._/"Ii''SOLATOR%

TOP

Y

B

.... ]j ,. >'%,,

• /

X

PARAMETERS [ UNIT I

TYPE

XTYP

T_PJt

/ ROW *

,/ ASt,,S"

H

B

6L

DI

DO

RGF

A

PJ

ALPH

B_TA

E

G

T

DLF

CL

RATE

CFRQ

CNT

]

l

I

MASS/(LENGTH**3) ]

LASS]

Lr..:N G T H ]

LENGTtl]

LENGTH ]

' LI.- r,,GT H ]

LE. NGTI_ J

LHNGTHJ

LENGTH**Zl

L_NGTh**_]

r-,EGREES }

Dt.GREES]

FORCE/(LENGTH**2) ]

FORCE/(LENGTH**2) 1

F_JRCIS*(LEN(-,Tt-: _*2j I

}

LENGTH ITIME J

dS/OCTAVEI

HERTZl

I

t SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

* SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 11-3d)

Figure 11-5g

Figure 11.14 MONT SEA element TYPE = 7.
DAMO 11-29

® MONT (STRUCTURE)

TYPE

= 8,

CONE MOUNT CONNECTION

TO SKIN

SIDE

Y ) _X

PARAMETERS [UNITS]

TYPE

__ TYPJt

RO W *

ASMS*

H

D

BL

ALX*

__ ALY *

', PATA*

[BJL

AP

BETA

E

DLF

CL

[ ]

[ I

(MASS I (LENGTH**3) ]

[MASSI

[ LEN GTII ]

[ L_- N GTI-I ]

[LENGTH]

[ LI.-N GT H J

[ LE.NCT h ]

[LENGTH]

[ LENGTH j

(LENGTH**2]

[DEGREES]

[ FORCE _ (LENGTH"*2) J

( 1

[ LENGTH/TIME ]

TOP

Y

X

®

*SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 11-30)

*SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-Sin)

Figure 11-5h

Figure ll.15 MONT SEA element TYPE = 8.
11-30 OLDSEACOMMANDS

MONT DETAIL

F_LNT °(_

TRUSS MOUNT CONNECTION A TO

PLATE INSTALLATION

(INSTALLATION PARALLEL TO SKIN)

SIbE

2. TRUSS MOUNT CONNECTION B TO

PLATE INSTALLATION

(INSTALLATION NORMAL TO SKIN)

F r,Lt.,,NT SlU_

Figure lI-Si

Figure ll.16 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 1. and 2.
DAMO 11-31

TYPJ MONT DETAIL (CONTINUED}

=3.

SIDE I

/

)\ ".\ ,_ \

90 °

. ". _ ",I

PLATE MOUNT CONNECTION TO

INSTALLATION

--4. XM,,

A o

" , ', ,.\'k\)

®

OBLIQUE PLATE MOUNT CONNECTION TO

INSTALLATION

= 5.

*THIS PARAMETER IS ENTERED

INTO THE PARAMIF.TER LIbT

OF SEA F..L6MENT IN%T

CORNER PLATE MOUNT CONNECTION

TO INSTALLATION

./+ /"

/ ..-"

/ / /

/ / 5JL '_ • (_

-;"C7-qJ.:'_"_,T_ (

®"

Figure 11-5j

Figure 11.17 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 3., I. and 5.
11-32 OLD SEA COMMANDS

ORIGINAL PAGE i_

OF POOR QUALITY'

TY PJ =6.

MONT DETAIL (CONTINUED)

%ID£

OLATOR

ISQLATION TP, USS MCLNT CuN'_:C Flu:',

TO li_;S TA LL.gT IQ N

(INSTALLATION PAKALLLL TL; ..or It.)

TOP

SIL_

7.

I_7"7")--7"2"7"2_

_"I/SO LA T O R

ISLL.-'.I tCN TR_.Sb ;'.,L. uNT CCN;',zL Fl_J'.

1 _., I.%ST ALL,kFIu N

(INSFtkLLATIO_, NOiEMAL TO L.klf j

Fioure 11 5k

Figure ll.18 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 6. and 7.
-,-,,.,,-" iS

06. POOR QUALITY

MONT DETAIL (CONTINUEDj

DAMO 11-33

TYPJ

=8. (_)

/ '\®

CONE MOUNT CONNECTION

TO INSTALLATION

5U T TG _",:

G

51D6

- 9.

' I_oo,

PLATE MOUNT CONNECTION

TO INSTALLATION

Ft,:ON T r k_../

%// / I / -I / ,' / /_.

'F-....';-""1'

51Di

10.

*THIS PARAMETER IS ENTERED

INTO THE PARAMErER LIST OF

SEA CLEMENT IKST

PLATE MOUNT

OBLIQUE CONNECTION

TO INSTALLATION

bACk n iii / / ........ " ,

Figure 11-51

Figure ll.19 MONT SEA element TYPJ = 8., 9. and 10.
11-34 OLDSEACOMMANDS

ORIGINAL _'_ _;_"

OF POOR QuA_.,_

MONT DETAIL (CONTINUED)

TYPJ

11. BEAM MOUNT CONNECTION

TO INSTALLATION

F_,(. N T

I bUo

I

®

,f

31L, L

r

A

_Li"

G

@! f

Figure 11-5m

Figure 11.20 MONT SEA element TYPJ = ii.
• _<,_, ,_ - _ r  ̧ .

O_ _OOF. ,',,.. "-Y DAMO 11-35

Q INST

(STRUCTURE)

TYPE

= 1.

FLAT PLATE

PARAMETERS

TYPE

RO_d*

ASMS*

H

ALX*

ALY*

PATA*

_JL u

AP

GAMA _J

E

DLF

CL

IUNITSI

i

MASS, (LEN GTH '_" J) ]

MASS l

LENGT_I]

L_- NGTH ]

LENGTH j

LENGTH]

LENGTH]

LENGIH"*_J

DEGREES I

FORCE _ ( LEI'_ C.T k! "-2) j

]

LEN GTH,, Tl&ih j

: 2.

GAMA_

E

DLF

CL

*SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures II-3c and II 3d)

,._SEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

CYLINDER

PARAMETERS IUNITSI

TYPE [ l

RO_-_" [N,ASSi (LENCTII *'3) i

AS_V.S* [MASSI

H [ LENGTI-I ]

b [ U- N GTI-i ]

BL [ LENGTH ]

ALX* [LENGTh]

ALY* [ L_NCTt-I I

PATA* [LENGTH i

6JL*3 [LENGTH J

AP [ LI-N GTH ** :_l

[DEGREES]

[ FOR CE i (LENGTI'i**2) J

[ I

[ LENGTH/TIME ]

Figure ll-6a

Figure 11.21 INST SEA element, plate and cylinder.
OR!GIN#:.L F',_.'i,_E iS

OF POOR _' ("' ....

i1-36 OLD SEA COMMANDS

TYPE

= ].

INST (CONTINUED}

CON E

..... PARA\IETENS I t,',,l TS i

FYF_ t i

RU _,_," t:,A55 (LL.',t_I', _" :j

A _:.;:a * {:. ,_ u_ J

H [LLt;CT_, j

LI [Lt- r,G I 1-,]

l-;L I LEN(. Tl-il

5_.) ALX* [ LENCTI-, I

ALY * " I Lb_NC l'l-i J

PATA* [LLNGTt_]

F_.,JL _, [LENCrHI

AP _LENCT l:"'.:

'-'ETA [ E,EL. REE5 j

GA&iA'Y [ I:,E_C,RE.E5 j

E IFL)R(.I- {LE.!,{.Tl.'':i

ULF [

EL [ LENGTI-;, T I.',,E l

=4.

EXTRAP II INSTALLATION

'9 RO _',b" t;,:ASS { LEN C rl.-. *-._j l

AS,_.,5 * [,\lASS I

H [LENGTH]

AP [ LENGTH *'2]

L, LF [ ]

* SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figures 11-3c and 10-.kJ)

" ZEE MONT DETAIL (Figures 11-5i through 11-5m)

Figure 11-6b

Figure 11.22 INST SEA element, cone and EXTRAP II.
O_'_ ..... '"_ :' GIi!Y

FRAM

(STRUCTURE)

DAMO 11-37

TYPE

=I.

///_.5 FR A,'d

C)

BEAM FRAME CONNECTION

INTERFACE BETWEEN THE

MOUNT AND THE SKIN

PARAMETERS IUNITSI

TYPE

XTYP

H

rJ

bL

DI

DO

RGF

A

EL

L l

L i

[:,_ASS (LkNCTr,""3}I

[ LENGTh I

[LEh G TI.-.J

[ LEnGTh: ]

[ LENGTH ;

[LENGTH J

[ LE:,G TH]

[ LE r,,GT i i *"2 j

[ LL:NGTIi ,, TIME]

• SEE SKIN DETAIL (Figure 11-3c)

Figure 11-7

Figure 11.23 FRAM SEA. element.
11-38 OLDSEACOMMANDS

11.2.2. NON-DIMENSIONAL PARAMETERS

VAPEPScomputes values of non-dimensional parameters for each SEA element.

These non-dimensional parameters are used for searching out existing

models. The SERCH processor, however, searches for integer

non-dimensional parameter values. Thus, the values of the non-dimensional

parameters are actual computed as integer codes which represent the real

value of the non-dimensional parameters. This is best explained by way of

example.

Example 1

Suppose that the real value of a non-dimensional parameter was 0.0Q15983.

VAPEPS would convert this real number to the integer code -5159. The sign

and thousands digit indicate how many places and which direction to move

the decimal point. The hundreds, tens and ones digits of the code are the

three most significant digits of the real value. So the integer code

05159 represents the real number 159E-5 or .00159.

Example 2

What is the integer code for the real value 15.933.

-1159 (159E-l)

It may seem that this unnecessarily complicates the situation, but it

should be noted that this procedure actually simplifies a number of tasks.

Number one, integer searches are more reliable than real searches. Two,

the display of the integer codes via the CHECK command in DAMO would not

fit on the screen for interactive use unless the maximum length of each

number was limited to five characters (four characters plus sign). And

third, using integer codes reduces mass storage requirements. So while

this may seem like an inconvenience, keep in mind that it is a necessary

one. It should also be noted that the error in retaining only the three

most significant digits is always less than one percent, which is

insignificant when compared with the uncertainties associated with the

parameters themselves.

Each SEA element has a maximum of four non-dimensional parameters which

may be calculated. The actual number of non-dimensional parameters which

will be calculated for each SEA element will be between one and four.

When the CHECK command is issued in DAMO a table will be displayed,

assuming no errors are detected in the module. The table looks like this:

SECT TYPE CHAN A B C D DESCRIPTIONS

EXTA 1 2 1621 0 0 0 REVERBERANT
DAMO ii- 39

SKIN 2 6 -2251 -3154 -ii01 -1428 CYLINDER

The first column indicates the SEA element. The second column is the type

(from the TYPE parameter). The third column indicates the number of

channels associated with the SEA element. The next four columns are for

any non-dimensional parameters which apply to that SEA element. The last

column, headed DESCRIPTIONS, contains the description that was assigned to

the element in DAMO. Only those SEA elements which are present in the

model (TYPE not equal to 0) are listed in the table.

This same table will be displayed by the DUMP command in the MODULES

section of the SERCH processor. For more information refer to ELEMENT

SEARCHING COMMANDS in the MODULE section of Chapter 7 (SEARCHING THE

DATABASE).

The following table presents the formulae used to compute the values of

the non-dimensional parameters for each SEA element.
11-40 OLDSEACOMMANDS

Non-Dimensional Parameter s

ELEMENT TYPE A

EXTA

SKIN

and

INST*

INTA

MONT

and

FRAM

MONT

Acoustic

Space

Fluid

Pressure

Panel-like

Cylinder

Acoustic

Space

(Truss)

Rectangular

Circular

Tubular

Any section

Plate

and

Cone

i

AP**.5/

(V**(i/3)

VEL/CO

AP**.5/

(v**(1/3))

H/BL

HIBL

HIBL

H/BL

H/BL

FBL*VEL/VISC

IRHO*AP**.5/RHOS

RHO*AP**.5/RHOS

H*(E/(72*RHO))**.5/

(B*CL)

(E/(2*RHO))**.5/CL

(E/(2*RHO))--.5/CL

(EI(2*RHO))**.51CL

(E/(2*RHO))**.S/CL

C

CO**2*AP**.5/

H*CL**2

C0**2-AP**.5/

H*CL**2

DO/BL

DO/BL

D

* INST does not require RHOS to be input so non-dimensional parameter B is

not computed.
11.3. DENS

DENS ll-41

DENS Command

Purpose

The DENS command calculates the modal density (per Hz) of each of the five

SEA elements based on the system parameters (in the parameter matrix).

Command

DENS NU,VER,NFRQ,SF

Where

NU - DAL unit containing the parameter matrix.

VER - The version name of the parameter matrix.

NFRQ - The number of i/3 octave bands.

SF - The center frequency of the lowest 1/3 octave band.

Output

The following matrices are output:

NU,'DENS',VER = Modal density. (NFRQ X 5)

NU,'FREQ',VER = Frequency vector. (NFRQ X i)

Notes

Use DAMO to input parameters or obtain directly from the VAPEPS data base

by using RUN=GMOD.

The output of this command is used by the other prediction commands. The

prediction commands that use this output are as follows:

TRNF - Calculates the transfer functions.

PRDICT - Does theoretical and extrap predictions.
11-42 OLD SEA COMMANDS

11.4. PRDICT

PRDICT Command

Purpose

This command predicts the response of a new design based on data from a

baseline configuration found in the VAPEPS data base or alternately does a

theoretical prediction based on input parameters.

Command

PRDICT NUI,VERI,NU2,VER2,IBACK

or

PRDICT NU2,VER2

Where

For Case 1 - Extrapolated prediction.

NUI,VERI - DAL unit and version name of baseline model.

NU2,VER2 - DAL unit and version name of new model (model that is to be

predicted).

IBACK - A SEA element number indicating the excitation element for

which an empirical transfer function is desired.

For case 2 - Theoretical prediction.

NU2,VER2 - DAL unit and version name of model to be predicted.

Input

The following elements are required to make a prediction.

Case 1 - Extrapolated prediction.

NUI,'EXC',VERI - This element contains the space-averaged excitation

data for the baseline system. The data must be meansquare values or dB per i/3-octave. The dimensions

of this element are NFRQ BY #EXC, where #EXC is the

number of excitation elements.

NUI,'RSP ',VERI - This element will contain space-averaged response

data for the baseline system. The data must be meansquare values or dB per I/3-octave. The dimensions

of this element are NFRQ by #RESP, where #RESP is the

number of response elements.

NU2,'EXC',VER2 - This element contains the space-averaged excitation

k
PRDICT 11-43

data for the new system. The data must be meansquare values or dB per i/3-octave. The dimensions

of this element are NFRQ BY #EXC, where #EXC is the

number of excitation elements.

NUI,'FREQ',VERI - Output of DENS command.

NU2,'FREQ',VER2

NUI,'IDES',VERI - Output of TRNF command.

NU2,'IDES',VER2

NUI,'TRNF',VERI - Output of TRNF command.

NU2,'TRNF',VER2

NUI,'CONV',VER1 - Output of CNVRT command.

NU2,'CONV',VER2

Case 2 - Theoretical prediction.

NU2,'EXC',VER2 - This element contains the space-averaged excitation

data for the system. The data must be mean-square

values or dB per 1/3-octave. The dimensions of this

element are NFRQ BY #EXC, where #EXC is the number of

excitation elements.

NU2,'FREQ',VER2 - Output of DENS command.

NU2,'IDES',VER2 - Output of TRNF command.

NU2,'TRNF',VER2 - Output of TRNF con_and.

NU2,'CONV',VER2 - Output of CNVRT command.

Output

Both cases:

Notes

NU2,'RESP',VER2 - Predicted response for the new system in the same

units as designated by CNVRT. (NFRQ X #RESP) #RESP is

the the number of response elements.

In the case of an extrapolated prediction DENS, CNVRT and TRNF must be

issued twice, once for the old system and once for the new system, prior

to issuing the PRDICT command. For the theoretical prediction DENS, CNVRT

and TRNF only need to be issued once for the model.

You can also use power inputs to each SEA element.
11-44 OLDSEA COMMANDS

11.4. I. S[;_I4ARY

This is a summary of input to the PRDICT command:

COMMAND

ARGUMENT5

DENS

NU,VER,NFRQ,SFI

TRNF

NU, VER, JPA, JPI

,JEXC, JRES

CNVRT

NU, VER, ITYP

,JTYP, KTYP

PRDICT

NI,VERI

,N2,VER2,IBACK

INPUT ELEMENTS (DIMENSIONS) OUTPUT ELEMENTS (DIMENSIONS)

NU,'PARA',VER (30,6) NU,

From DAMO NU,

NU,'FREQ',VER (NFRQ,I) NU,

NU,'PARA',VER (30,6) NU,

NU,'DENS',VER (NFRQ, 5) NU,

OPTIONAL INPUT: NU,

NU,'COF',VER (#ITEMS,I) NU,

NU,'COD',VER (NFRQ,#ITEMS) NU,

NU,'ATAF',VER (#ITEMS,l)

NU,'ATAD',VER (NFRQ,#ITEMS)

NU, 'FREQ',VER (NFRQ,I)

NU,'PARA',VER (30,6)

!Old system:

INI,'FREQ',VERI

NI,'IDES',VERI

NI,'TRNF',VERI

(NFRQ, I)

(I0,i)

(NFRQ,#RESP

*#EXC)

(NFRQ,5)

(NFRQ,#EXC)

(NVRQ,#RESP)

NI,'CONV',VERI

NI,'EXC',VERI

NI,'RSP ',VERI

New system or theoretical:

N2,'FREQ',VER2 (NFRQ,I)

'DENS',VER (NFRQ,5)

'FREQ',VER (NFRQ, I)

'IDES',VER (i0,i)

'TRNF',VER (NFRQ,#RES*#EXC)

'CO',VER (25,NFRQ)

'ATA',VER (25,NFRQ)

'FCFR',VER (2,1)

'INCO',VER (NEXC,NFRQ)

NU,'CONV',VER

NU,'DBFG',VER

NU,'CPOW',VER

(NFRQ,5)

(2,1)

(NFRQ, 1)

N2,'RESP',VER2 (NFRQ,#RESP)

N2,'IDES',VER2 (i0,i)

N2,'TRNF',VER2 (NFRQ,#RESP

_#EXC)

N2,'CONV',VER2 (NFRQ,5)

N2,'EXC',VER2 (NFRQ,#EXC)

Optional input to both new

and old system:

NU,'POWF',VER (#ITEMS,l)

NU,'POWD',VER (NFRQ,#ITEM5)

J
PRDICT 11-45

11.4.2. EXAMPLE

This is an example of a theoretical prediction using PRDICT.

* INPUT PARAMETERS

DAMO i, LWPI

EXTA

P* TYPE=I., ROW=I. 12E-7 ,AP=561868., V=2198600., AAC=. 02, CO=I. 32E4

LIST

SKIN

P* TYPE=I., ROW=I. 66E-4, ROWS= 1. 882E-5, ASMS=I. 5645, H=. 385, ALX=40. ,ALY=4 ¢ o

P* PATA=672. ,AP=7040. ,E=6.42E6,DLF=.I,CL=2.E+5

LIST

INTA

P* TYPE=I. ,ROW=I. 12E-7, AP=19008., V=70400. ,AAC= .05, CO=1.32E4

LIST

DONE

SET SFRQ=50. ,NFRQ=24, HFRQ=I0000.

* CREATE VECTOR WITH ACOUSTIC EXCITATION

ECOL 1,CBAY,ENVI &NFRQ, 1

131.0,132.0,132.5,133.0,133.0,132.5,132.0,136.5,139.5,130.5,130.0,130.0

128.5,128.0,127.0,126.5,126.0,125.0,123.5,122.0,121.0,119.5,118.0,117.0

* CALCULATE MODAL DENSITY

DENS 1, LWPI, &NFRQ, &SFRQ

* CREATE FUNCTIONALIZED DAMPING FOR SKIN BASED ON .i0 DAMPING AT

* 250 HZ AND DAMPING=K/FREQUENCY.

ECOL i, ATAF, LWPI i, 1

22

FUN I,FREQ,LWP1 I,ATAD,LWPI 1.,25. -i,i

* CREATE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS SINGLE SIDED EXCITATION

TRNF 1, LWPI, 12,0, i, 2

* DEFINE UNITS

CNVRT I,LWPI,2,2,4

* EXCITATION VECTOR

CONVERT I,CBAY,ENVI I,EXC,LWPI 1,2

* DO THEORETICAL PREDICTION

PRDICT i, LWPI

* CONVERT RESPONSE TO G**2/HZ THEN PRINT

CONVERT 1, RESP, LWPI 1, SKG2, LWP1 3,6 &SFRQ, &HFRQ

PRINT i, SKG2
11-46 OLDSEACOMMANDS

11.4.3. POWER INPUTS

To put a power input into any element in a model use the following method:

ECOL NU,'POWF',VER IROW, I

(input SEA element numbers that a power input is to used)

ECOL NU,'POWD',VER NFRQ, IROW

(input power inputs by columns)

Where

NU = The dal unit number consistent with the model.

'POWF' = The element name. Must be 'POWF'.

VER = The version name consistent with the model.

IROW = The number of power inputs desired.

'POWD' = The element name. Must be 'POWD'

NFRQ = The number of frequencies. Consistent with the model.

11.4.3.1. EXAMPLE

Power input example:

ECOL I,POWF,XMPL 2,1

2,3

ECOL I,POWD,XMPL 16,2

16"3.5

16"-2.5

In this example the power input to SEA element number 2 is positive 3.5.

The power input to SEA element number 3 is negative 2.5. The negative

sign indicates that actually a power output has been specified. The units

of the power should be consistent with those in the parameter matrix.
SCALE

SCALE 11-47

SCALE Command

Purpose

Predicts the acoustically induced vibration response of a panel like

structure based on empirical data obtained from a similar (baseline)

structure. Corrections are made for differences in structural parameters

and differences in acoustic excitation between the baseline and the new

system.

Command

SCALE NI,IVNI N2,IVN2 SEANO IUEXC, IURE5

Where

NI,IVNI - Dal unit and version containing elements for the baseline

system.

N2,IVN2 - Dal unit and version containing elements for the new system.

SEANO - Sea element number to predict (elements 2 and 5 are allowed).

IUEXC

IURES - Codes indicating units of excitation and response

respectively. Allowable codes are:

1 - psi**2

2 - (n/m)**2

3 - (m/sec**2)**2

4 - g**2

5 - (in/sec**2)**2

6 - (ft/sec**2)**2

7 - dB

Required input elements

NI,PARA, IVNI - Parameters for the baseline system (generated by DAMO).

N1,EXC, IVNI - Excitation for the baseline system.

NI,RESP, IVNI - Response for the baseline system.

NI,FREQ, IVN1 - Center frequencies corresponding to the excitations and the

responses for both the baseline and new systems.

N2,PARA, IVN2 - Parameters for the new system (generated by DAMO).

N2,EXC, IVN2 - Excitation for the new system.

Output element

N2,RESP, IVN2 - Response result for the new system. Units are consistent
11-48 OLD SEA COMMANDS

with those of the baseline response (as indicated by

IURE5). The response is in standard 1/3 octave bands. If

a frequency shift has been made during the prediction, the

new response will have zero values in certain frequency

bands (see the equations for EXTRAP2 in the VAPEPS USER'S

MANUAL).

Ii •S. 1 • INPUT

Summary of input needed for the SCALE command.

COMMAND

ARGUMENTS

SCALE

NI,VERI N2,VER2

,SEANO, IUEXC

,IURES

INPUT ELEMENTS (DIMENSIONS)

New system:

N2,'PARA',VER2 (30,6)

From DAMO

N2,'EXC',VER2 (NFRQ, 1)

Old system:

NI,'PARA',VERI (30,6)

From DAMO

NI,'FREQ',VERI (NFRQ, 1)

NI,'EXC',VERI (NFRQ, 1)

NI,'RESP',VERI (NFRQ, I)

OUTPUT ELEMENTS (DIMENSIONS)

N2,'RESP',VER2 (NFRQ,1)
TRNF

1i-49

TRNF Command

Purpose

The TRNF command calculates transfer functions, a SEA model descriptor, a

coupling loss factor matrix and a coefficient matrix for the governing

energy balance equation.

Conmmnd

TRNF NU,VER,JPA,JPI,JEXC,JRES

Where

NU,VER

JPA

JPI

JEXC

JRES

- Dal unit and version name, respectively. These must be the

same as those specified in the DAMO and DENS commands.

- An optional string of numbers which specifies the SEA

elements which are present and active in the model.

Example: JPA = 345 indicates that elements 3, 4 and 5

(INTA, MONT and INST) are present and active. If not

specified, the sign of the TYPE parameter for each SEA

element will automatically be used to determine which

elements are present and active.

- An optional string of numbers which specify the SEA elements

which are present and inactive. A zero in this column

indicates that no elements are inactive. If not specified

the sign of the TYPE parameter for each SEA element will

automatically be used to determine which elements are

present and inactive.

- A string of numbers which specifies which SEA elements

supply excitation energy.

- A string of numbers specifying which SEA elements are

response elements.

Output

Output from TRNF consists of the following elements:

NU,'IDES',VER - This element contains descriptor flags. A modified

form of this element is printed out after 'FLAGS ='

when the TRNF command is issued.

NU,'TRNF',VER - This element contains the transfer function(s), one row

per frequency and one column per transfer function.

NU,'CO',VER - This element contains the coefficient matrix (see

illustration in VAPEPS USER'S MANUAL).
11-50 OLDSEACOMMANDS

Notes

NU,'ATA',VER - This element contains the coupling loss factor matrix

(the illustration also applies here).

NU,'FCFR',VER- This element contains the critical frequency in row 1

and the ring frequency in row 2.

NU,'INCO',VER- This element contains the inverse of the coefficient

matrix. It only includes the non-excitation elements.

The user will most likely never be concerned with the

contents of this element.

DAL elements required for the TRNF com_m_nd are the parameter element from

the DAMO cow, hand, the modal density element from the DENS command and the

1/3 octave center frequency element from the DENS command.

The option exists to input your own values for the coupling loss factors

or coefficients.

The output of this command is used by the other prediction commands. The

prediction commands that use this output are as follows:

PRDICT - Does theoretical and extrap predictions.

11.6.1. ATA_CO

To set coupling loss factors:

ECOL NU,'ATAF',VER IROW, 1

(input the index values of coupling loss factors to be set)

ECOL NU,'ATAD',VER NFRQ, IROW

(input the coupling loss factors column by column)

Where

NU - The dal unit, consistent with previous uses.

'ATAF' - The element name. Must be 'ATAF'.

VER - The version name. This must be consistent with previous

uses.

IROW - The number of coupling loss factors to be pre-set.

'ATAD' - Another element name. This must be 'ATAD'.

NFRQ - The number of 1/3 octave bands. This must be the same

value of NFRQ as used in the DENS command.

To preset terms in the coefficient matrix, use the same procedure as above

but substitute the element names COD and COF for ATAD and ATAF.
11 . 6 • 2 . EXAMPLES

TRNF 11-51

Use of the TRNF command.

TRNF I,XMPL,1235,4,12,5

This command would access data on DAL unit l, version name XMPL. SEA

elements i, 2, 3, and 5 are present and active, and element 4 is present

and inactive. Elements 1 and 2 are excitation and element 5 is response.

Element 3 is also responding to the excitation specified but the magnitude

of this response is not being requested.

Use Of coupling loss fac£or input.

ECOL I,ATAF,XMPL,3,1

25,52,13

ECOL 1,ATAD,XMPL,16,3

16-0.1

.1,.2,.3,13-.5

.8,.7,.5,.6,12-.9

In this example, terms (2,5), (5,2) and (1,3) have been preset. Each term

covers sixteen frequency bands, in this case.
V
TRANSPARENT COMMANDS 12-1

12. TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

This section deals with a special set of commands that are rarely 'needed'

by the one-command-at-a-time type DALPRO user. On the other hand they are

commands that t_e advanced user can hardly live without. Their purpose is

to provide the user with additional control over a DALPRO execution. They

allow the user to make conditional branches in a runstream, invoke

'do-loops', operate on variables, and reset processing modes.

Transparent commands differ from regular commands in that they must be

prefaced by a pair of transparent con_mand characters. These characters

must be the first two non-blank characters in the command line. While

cumbersome to type, these characters are necessary in that they tell

DALPRO that the card image is special and must be treated accordingly. The

use of the control characters allows the commands to be used virtually

anywhere in the runstream. This includes their use in sub-processors such

as CALC and BUILD, as well as embedded in data such as that required by

CHOP and ECOL. The only time they may not be used is when data is being

read according to a defined FORTRAN format (eg. SREAD).

Valid transparent conmmlnds are listed in the following table. Note that

each command is assigned one or more types. These types indicate the type

of control the command affects. A list of other transparent control

character pairs is included at the end of the table.These aren't really

commands but are used with transparent-type processing. For more

information about about a particular con_and, see the proper section

following the table.

Note that several commands contain arguments enclosed in parentheses ().

These are optional entries that may or may not be used depending on the

occasion. When they are used, do not enclose them in parentheses.

TRANSPARENT COMMANDS TYPE(S)

##ADD NI,ELI,VRI(,ICI,IC2)(,ICOL)

##ASK LABL @ PROMPT STRING

##CALC any one-line calc operation

##CCHAR '$S','##','++','>>'

##CLOSE NU

##CO_4ENT '*'

##CONTINUE '''#

##CYCLE ICI,IC2 (JC1,JC2)

##GET. NAME @ PROMPT STRING

##INC NAME,INCR

##JCAS IVAL LABI,LAB2,LAB3, ....

##JEQZ VALUE,LABL

ORS

ORS, J

V

RSC

ORS

RSC

RSC

SPM

0RS,V

ORS, V

J

J
12-2 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

##JGEZ VALUE,LABL j

##JGTZ VALUE,LABL j

##JLTZ VALUE,LABL j

##JLEZ VALUE,LABL j

##JNEZ VALUE,LABL j

##JEQV VAL1,VAL2 LABL J

##JGEV VAL1,VAL2 LABL J

##JGTV VAL1,VAL2 LABL J

##JNEV VALI,VAL2 LABL J

##JLTV VAL1,VAL2 LABL J

##JLEV VALI,VAL2 LABL J

##JUMP LABL j

##GxxZ VALUE,LABL RJ

##GxxV VALI,VAL2 LABL RJ

##OFF COMMENT,ECHO,FATAL,SPIT SPM

##ON COMMENT,ECHO,FATAL,SPIT SPM

##OPEN NU,'fil- _me' ORS

##READ NU (ELN .R (ICI,IC2)) (IEOF) ORS

##READ THROUGH ORS

##SET NAME,VALUE V

##SET NAME,NU,ELN,VER (ICI,IC2) IROW, ICOL V

##SET NAME,NU,ELN,VER (ICI,IC2) ITEM V

##VRES NI,ELI,VRI V

##VSAV NI,ELI,VRI V

J jump

RJ rewind and jump

ORS operate read stack

RSC reset special character

SPM set processor mode

V variables

v

OTHER TRANSPARENT CHARACTER PAIRS

$$CARD IMAGE

++XXXX

>>LABL

INVOKE PRECODER

SAME AS ##XXXX

LABEL
12.1. ADD

##ADD 12-3

##ADD Command

Purpose

Read the appropriate column from the indicated element as if it were a

card image. Note that the element should be a type 4 element (as produced

by ECOSYM). This command is useful in reading plot titles.

Command

##ADD NI,ELI,VRI (,ICI,IC2) (,ICOL)

Where

NI,ELI,VRI - DAL unit, element and version of element to add.

ICI,IC2 - Cylce numbers of element to add.

ICOL - Column of element to add. (Default = i).
12-4 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.2. ASK GET

##ASK ##GET Commands

Purpose

These commands read one line of data from the previous device on the read

stack. If they appear in a run-stream, they will read from the unit that

initiated the runstream. If the input device turns out to be the user

terminal, the user is prompted. For ASK the user is expected to enter a

YES or NO (Y or N). If NO is input, a jump is activated to the label LABL.

See jumps below for details on labels. For GET, the user is expected to

enter a single data value. The variable (ie NAME) is set to the input

value. Note that NAME is the name of a variable and must not be prefaced

by an ampersand. For both commands, the @ sign is required and it must be

placed as the 12th character in the card image. See ##READ 0 and ##READ

THROUGH for details on how to control where the input should come from.

Command

##ASK LABL @ Prompt string

##GET NAME @ Prompt string

Where

LABL - Label to jump to if the answer is no.

NAME - Variable to assign input value to.
##CALC 12-5

12.3. CALC

##CALC Command

Purpose

Perform any one line CALC operation.

Command

##CALC any one-line calc operation

See the regular CALC command for detailed documentation of CALC

capabilities. Any one-line operation can be placed on a ##CALC line,

##CALC I2 = 2-I

eg
12-6 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.4. CCHAR

##CCHAR Command

Purpose

Changes transparent character pair values. Four entries should always be

input and each entry should contain two characters enclosed in single

quotes. The entries are order dependant according to mode number:

Command

! ! t ! ! ! ##CCHAR '$S', ## , ++ , >> -

Where

MODE DEFAULT

1 SS

2 ##

3 ++

4 >>

USAGE

Invoke precoder

Transparent command or label

Transparent command or label

Label (preferred method for label)
12.5. CLOSE

##CLOSE i2-7

##CLOSE Command

Purpose

Serves to close/rewind a FORTRAN unit. If Nil is negative, the unit is

rewound. If NU is positive, the unit is rewound and closed. On most

systems the two are equivalent. On VAX, a close operation de-attaches the

unit so that subsequent writes will create the next higher version.

Command

##CLOSE NU

Where

NU - Fortran unit to close.

V
12-8 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.6. COMMENT

##COMMENT Command

Purpose

Resets the comment character. The default is an asterisk (-). Note that

all comments must have the appropriate comment character as the first

chara,ter in the line. Comment lines will be ignored. If the comment mode

is 'on' (see ON/OFF) the line will be printed on unit 6.

Command

##COMMENT ' *'

Where

'*' - Character to designate comment line. Default is '*'.
CONTINUE

##CONTINUE 12-9

##CONTINUE Connuand

Purpose

Turns on/off multiple records per line mode and establishes the character

to be used for separating logical records.

Command

##CONTINUE '''f

Where

';' - Character used to designate new line.

Example

##CONTINUE '''I

would allow lines of the form

CALC ; I=I+l ; DONE

The default for continue is ##CONTINUE -i This has the effect of turning

off the logical record mode. Note that use of this feature is not really

encouraged, but it is there if you want it.
12-10 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.8. CYCLE

##CYCLE Command

Purpose

This command is the same as the regular CYCLE command but it has the

advantage of being used anywhere a transparent command can be used. It is

especially handy in the BUILD com_nand.

Command

##CYCLE ICI,IC2 JCI,JC2

See the CYCLE command for further description.
##ECHO 12-11

12.9. ECHO

##ECHO Command

Purpose

Controls what echoing is performed and when it is turned on.

Command

##ECHO level,type

Whet e

level - When you ##READ another symbolic dataset, level controls

whether that will be echoed.

< 0 - Never echo added runstream (turn mode off)

= 0 - Echo only if echo mode is on prior to ##READ

> 0 - Always echo. Eg turn echo mode on for added streams

type - Controls what is echo'ed. Normally you want to echo whatever

was input, which is the default. There is a presym section to

line input that left adjusts all ## lines, etc. You can use

type=2 to echo the presym'ed line instead of the raw input

line.

= 3 - Give list of how command was decoded.
12-12 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.10. INC SET

##1NC ##SET Commands

Purpose

These are essentially one-line CALC commands that either set a variable or

increment a variable by some value. ##SET will work on any type of

variable. NO TYPE CONVERSION WILL EVER BE PERFORMED (SET and CALC will do

conversions). See the regular DALPRO SET command for details. Note that

the SETFL form may be used even though the command is still ##SET. Also

note that only one variable may be 'set' per command (as opposed to the

SET command where a group of variables may be set). Note that both

commands require a NAME for the first argument. Do not precede the name by

an ampersand. For ##INC, both integer and real variables may be

incremented. The value (second item) determines the type of addition

performed. Thus if you have a real variable, make sure you include a

decimal point on a constant value, or use a real type variable.

##INC 1,1

is preferable (cheaper) than

CALC

I = I + 1

DONE

Command

##INC NAME,INCR

##SET NAME,VALUE

##SET NAME,NU,ELN,VER (ICI,IC2) IROW, ICOL

##SET NAME,NU,ELN,VER (ICI,IC2) ITEM

Where

NAME - Variable to modify.

INCR - Amount to increment variable by.

VALUE - Value to set variable to.

NU,ELN,VER - DAL unit, element and version name to get data from

set variable to.

ICI,IC2 - Cylce numbers of NU,ELN,VER.

IROW, ICOL - Row and column to get value from NU,ELN,VER.

ITEM - Dataset parameter as defined in CALC.

to

!
##JUMP 12-13

12.11. JUMP

##JUMP Commands

Purpose

Branch to a label depending on test.

Command

##JCAS IVAL LAB1,LAB2,LAB3, ....

##JEQZ VALUE,LABL

##JGEZ VALUE,LABL

##JGTZ VALUE,LABL

##JLTZ VALUE,LABL

##JLEZ VALUE,LABL

##JNEZ VALUE,LABL

##JEQV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JGEV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JGTV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JNEV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JLTV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JLEV VALI,VAL2 LABL

##JUMP LABL

##GxxZ VALUE,LABL

##GxxV VALI,VAL2 LABL

If a variable is to be tested (anything else is pointless) the variable

name must be prefaced with an ampersand (&). LABL may have up to 4

characters and must start with an alphabetic character. When a jump is

signaled, all cards are ignored until one of the following cards are

encountered:

>>LABL ##LABL ++LABL

>>MASK ##MASK ++MASK

where the above assumes that the transparent character pairs have not been

changed. Note that the >> form is preferable since the label cannot be

confused with a transparent command.

Unconditional jump

##JUMP

Jumps based on a value compared to zero
12-14 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

_#JEQZ,##JGEZ,##JGTZ,##JNEZ,##JLTZ, ##JLEZ

Jumpsbased on the comparison of two values

##JEQV,##JGEV,##JGTV,##JNEV,##JLTV,##JLEV

These jumps are all conditional, and are similar to the above conmmnds

except that two values are used. The first value is compared to the second

value (rather than with 0, as before), ie. ##JGTV &X,&Y LABL would

cause a jump to LABL if X > Y.

Backward jumps

##GEQZ, ##GNEZ, ##GGEZ, ##GGTZ, ##GLTZ, ##GLEZ, ##GUMP

##GEQV, ##GNEV, ##GGEV, ##GGTV, ##GLTV, ##GLEV

Mimic the operation of their ##J counterparts, but perform a REWIND of the

current input device prior to jumping. The net effect is a backwards jump.

The only restrictions are that you can only jump within the same dal

dataset or FORTRAN unit.

Case jump

##JCAS IVAL LABI,LAB2,LAB3,...

Invokes a jump to one of the labels, depending on the value of IVAL. ie.

IVAL=3, would jump to the third label. If IVAL is non-positive or greater

than the number of labels, no jump is performed.
12.12. OFF ON

##OFF ##ON 12-15

##OFF ##ON Commands

Purpose

Turn on/off one or more of the following modes. Note that three default

values are given. These are for interactive, batch, and RUN command modes

respectively.

Command

##OFF MODEI(,MODE2(,MODE3(,MODE4)))

Where

MODEl - One or more from the following list.

MODE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION

COMMENT off-on -off

ECHO off-on -off

FATAL off-on -on

SPIT on -on -off

ON - Comments will be printed

OFF - Comments won't be printed

ON - User input is echoed

OFF - User input is not echoed

OFF - Errors result in 'TRY AGAIN'

or 'SAME TO YOU'

ON - Errors cause execution to

be terminated.

ON - Summary info (spit line) will

be printed following most

commands.

OFF - Summary info will not be

printed
12-16 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.13. OPEN

##OPEN Command

Purpose

Opens a FORTRAN unit by name. This is available on most systems, but not

on all systems. On some systems there is a distinction between print files

and non-print files. If you use the filename 'PRT$' then the unit will be

opened as a print file. The PRT$ option currently works only on the Sperry

system (both Fieldata and Ascii versions)

Command

##OPEN NU,'filename'

Where

NU - Fortran unit to use for file.

'filename' - Name of file to be associated with NU.

v
12.14. READ

##READ 12-17

##READ Command

Purpose

Directs DALPRO to read subsequent commands and/or data from either a

FORTRAN unit or from a DAL element (types 5 or 6 only) Type 5/6 elements

may be created in SYMIN or CSYM. The item IEOF controls what happens when

the end of the file or element is reached. If IEOF>I, the unit is rewound

and re-read IEOF-1 times, ie:

Command

##READ NU (ELN,VER (ICl,IC2)) (IEOF)

##READ THROUGH

Where

NU - Fortran unit to read from.

NU,ELN,VER - DAL unit element and version to read from.

ICI,IC2 - Cycle numbers of NU,ELN,VER

IEOF - Option flag.

Example

##SET LOOP=3

##READ I,DAL,SYM

##READ 1 &LOOP

&LOOP

would cause the DAL element DAL/SYM from DAL unit 1 to be read 3 times and

then FORTRAN unit 1 to be read 3 times.

If IEOF=0, an end of file will result An an EOF status being returned to

DALPRO. This is useful in commands like EZOUT and ECOSYM. If the end of

file As sensed while in regular DALPRO control mode, DALPRO exits normally

(it is equivalent to the DALPRO END command)

##READ ... DATA

When IEOF is set to DATA, the indicated stream is accessed, but not read.

The data is read only when a ##READ DATA is encountered later in the

runstream. This may be used to maintain position in a dal stream, eg

##READ I,TEST,SYM DATA

ECOSYM I,TITL,LINE 80
12-18 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

##READDATA AUTO

RECEIVE NR,NC

##READ DATA AUTO

ECOL 1,DATA,MAT

##READ DATA,AUTO

&NR,&NC

##READ ... AUTO

is shown above in an example. It causes the indicated stream to be read

until the current command is completed. Input then returns to the previous

stream. This is very useful for processing different input sections using

different commands, as shown above.

##READ 0 IEOF

A special case exists when FORTRAN unit 0 is referenced. This tells DALPRO

to read from the unit that was stacked just prior to this one. It is used

to allow a runstream (eg a RUN command) to read data from the calling

runstream. For ##READ 0, IEOF is the number of cards to read from this

earlier device. Once the cards have been read, reading resumes right after

the ##READ 0. If IEOF is 0, reading will continue until and end-of-file is

sensed, or until ##OFF READ is encountered.

##READ THROUGH

This is a special command that controls whether the currently stacked unit

is eligible for ##READ 0's that may occur later. The default mode is that

all units are eligible for 'dropped' reads. By issuing ##READ THROUGH, you

cause any future ##READ O's to read through this unit and go on to the

previous unit. The command ##READ THROUGH -i may be used to turn on the

unit's eligibility after it was turned off. An example of where ##READ

THROUGH is needed is when a runstream repeatedly prompts a user to enter

information. Ie. a loop element is created and then a ##READ is done to

add the element many times. Each time through, the element does an ECOL or

GCOL followed by a ##READ 0. Ie the actual data for the ECOL is meant to

come from whoever called the original runstream. Normally, ##READ 0 just

reads from the previous device on the stack, which in this case is the

runstream element. By including a ##READ THROUGH in the runstream prior to

invoking the loop, the subsequent #READ 0 will pass down to the correct

place, bypassing the runstream element. If you

PRINT 30,RUN, INDE

you will see the logic behind RUN=INDEX. It performs the operations

described above. Note that ##GET and ##ASK essentially perform ##READ O's

and thus may be controlled by ##READ THROUGH's.
12.15. VRES VSAV

##VRES ##VSAV 12-19

##VRES ##VSAV Commands

Purpose

Restores or saves the variable table. VSAV takes the internal variable

table and saves it on the specified element. At the same time it also

saves the status of ON/OFF modes (EG. COMMENT,ECHO,FATAL,SPIT). VRES reads

the specified element and overwrites the internal variable table with its

contents. If the unit number on the VRES command is input as a negative

number, the previously mentioned ON/OFF states will be reset to whatever

value they had at the time of the original VSAV.

Command

#_" "ZS N1,ELI,VR1

#_._AV N1,ELI,VR1

Wher e

NI,ELI,VRI - DAL unit, element and version name of element to save or

restore variables from.
12-20 TRANSPARENT COMMANDS

12.16. PRECODER

The Pr ecoder

Precoding is an operation that scans a card image and converts all

variables to symbolic form. It can best be explained by an example.

Consider plot titles. They are hollerith images that are printed on plots.

If the card image

MODE &I --- FREQUENCY = &F

is input as a title, the line will be printed exactly as input. If the

precoder is invoked:

$SMODE &I(I3) --- FREQUENCY = &F(F6.2)

then the line will be converted to

MODE I0 --- FREQUENCY = 34.59

Thus the $$ is removed and all variables are encoded according to the

format provided. Note that all variables must be followed immediately by a

format. This format must be enclosed in parentheses!

IMPORTANT NOTE

Precoder formats are limited to 12 characters. Eg lO characters plus

beginning and ending parenthesis.

$$TEST &I(I3) is legal

$$&I('TEST ',I3) is not
VARIABLESAND SYMBOLS 13-i

13. VARIABLES AND SYMBOLS

Variables and symbols are used in VAPEPS to create more flexible

runstreams. Variables can be set using the SET command as well as a number

of other commands. Symbols are set by using the := operator.

Example

SET I=20

SI50 := SET I=50

LIST I

LISTS

SI50

LIST I

In this example the variable I is set to 20. The symbol SI50 is equated

to the string 'SET I=50'. The LIST I command will display the value of

variable I. At this point it is 20. The LISTS command will list all the

symbols. The command SIS0 is a symbol so it is translated to be SET I=50

and sets the variable I to 50. The last LIST I will then show that the

values of I is now 50. The best way to see this is to type in the above

example and observe the results.

Symbols can also be substituted in the middle of a line by surrounding

them with " characters.

Example

A := I,A,A

B := I,B,B

C := I,C,C

MULT "A" "B ....C"

The MULT statement above is equivalent to typing:

MULT I,A,A I,B,B I,C,C

Symbols can provide a short cut for frequently typed strings which are

long or difficult to type. A good example is a list of channel names

(e.g. CHANLIST := A1,A2,AI2,A32,AI28,A20) When ever you wanted to input

that list of channels just type "CHANLIST".
13-2 VARIABLES AND SYMBOLS

13.1. LIST

L I ST Command

Purpose

List all variables in run by name and value.

Command

LIST NAMI,NAM2,...

Where

NAM1,NAM2,... Are variables to be listed. If none are specified, all

variables are listed.

Notes

Variable names should not be prefaced by (&).
13.2. SET

SET 13-3

SET Command

Purpose

Define or redefine a named variable. The SET command sets named variables

to constants, or to the value of other named variables. The SETFL command

sets one named variable equal to a particular term in an existing DAL

element or table of contents line.

Command

SET NAMI=VALI(,NAM2=VAL2,NAM3=VAL3,...)

Where

NAM1 (NAM2,NAM3,etc) are hollerith names of named variables. They are

not preceeded by an &.

VAL1 (VAL2,VAL3,etc) are any valid VAPEPS decodeable words. If named

variables are used, they must be prefaced by an &.

Notes

All values assigned to real variables (ist character A-H,O-Z) are

normalized prior to being saved in the variable. No conversions are done

in the case of integer variables. For this reason, all variables used to

contain hollerith names must be of integer type.
13-4 VARIABLES AND SYMBOLS

13.3. VAR

VAR Conmmnd

Purpose

Remove all or a portion of the variables from the variable table

Command

VARR NAMI,NAM2, ..... ,NAMN

Remove the named variables from the variable table. If no variables are

named, no action is taken. If a non- existent variable is specified, the

variable name is ignored.

VARS NAMI, NAM2, ..... ,NAMN

Remove all variables, except for those specifically named in the command.

If no variables are named, the variable table is completely cleared. If a

non-existent variable is named, an error occurs, and no action is taken.
LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS 14-1

14. LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

This section discusses the use of VAPEPS as a high level programming

language. The reader is assumed to be familiar with the basic format of

VAPEPS commands and be able to use many of the commands without refering

to the manual. In particular the reader should be familiar with the use of

variables. If you aren't, please look at the CALC conmmlnd and check the

INDEX for commands involving variables.

In many tasks, the user is faced with doing the same operation or group of

operations repeatedly. Repeated input of commands is a good way to improve

typing but is rather boring and prone to error. As an example we will

develop a method to print all real elements in a DAL file.

* FIRST GET A TABLE OF CONTENTS AND SAVE IT

* ASSUME WE ONLY WANT NEW ELEMENTS IE SINCE 8/1/80

FINES 1,MASK,MASK,MASK,MASK, 800801

28 TOC,LIST

* NOW TRANSPOSE IT, AND SEARCH FOR TYPES 1 AND -i

TRAN 28 TOC,LIST 28,TOC,TRAN

SEARCH 28,TOC,TRAN 28,ELT,LIST 9 2

1,-1

NOW CHOP THE MATRIX TO INCLUDE ONLY THOSE

ELEMENTS WE HAVE FOUND

TO BE SAFE, WE SHOULD CHECK MCH$ FROM SEARCH

TO MAKE SURE WE REALLY FOUND ANY?

##JEQZ &MCH$ NONE

* APARENTLY WE DID, SO CHOP

CHOPX 28,TOC,TRAN 28,GOOD,ELTS &-MCH$,4

= 28 ELT,LIST

10,11,12,13

* NOW PRINT THEM ALL. THE ONLY WAY IS TO ISSUE

* A PRINT COMMAND FOR EACH ONE. IN ADDITION, WE

*HAVE TO ACCOUNT FOR ALL THE DIFFERENT CYCLE NUMBERS.

* THE SOLUTION IS TO CREATE A LOOP ELEMENT. THE

"_._J
14-2 LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

* COMMAND 5YMIN WILL BE USED FOR THIS PURPOSE.

* PLEASE NOTE THAT WE ARE ONLY CREATING A LOOP

* ELEMENT, WE ARE NOT EXECUTING IT YET.

.

5YMEND 28, PRIN,LOOP MASK MASK SSSS

CALC

* INCREMENT ELEMENT COUNTER

I = I + 1

* RETRIEVE ELEMENT NAMES AND CYCLES

NAME = (28 GOOD ELTS &I,1)

NAMV = (28 GOOD ELTS &I,2)

IC1 = (28 GOOD ELTS &I,3)

IC2 = (28 GOOD ELTS &I,4)

*EXIT CALC

DONE

* ISSUE APPROPRIATE CYCLE COMMAND

CYCLE &IC1 &IC2

* WRITE A IHI FOR A NEW LINE, THEN PRINT

WRITE 6

(IHI)

t

PRINT 1, &NAME, &NAMV

* END OF LOOP

SSSS

* NOTE THAT SYMEND ALLOWS US TO SPECIFY AN

* END SENTINEL. IT WAS 'SSSS' THUS 'SSSS'

* INDICATED THAT THE DECK WAS FINISHED

* THE NEXT STEP IS TO INITIALIZE ANY VARIABLES

* IE: I

SET I=0

* NOW READ THE LOOP &MCH$ TIMES

* FIRST GET RID OF THE SPIT LINES ETC

##OFF SPIT,COMMENT, ECHO

##READ 28,PRIN, LOOP &MCH$

t

* THIS STREAM WILL WORK FOR ANY NUMBER OF ELF._MENTS
LOOPSANDRUNSTREAMS i4-3

##NONE

* THE ABOVE LABEL WOULD CATCH A JUMP IF NO ELEMENTS WERE

* FOUND

The real secret to looping is the use of SYMIN, and also the use of

##READ. This is the end of the section. I hope you get the general idea.

The best way to learn is to do it yourself. If you are lost, please type

in the above stream and add any writes or lists that would help you.

Example 2 - A plotting loop

This example will plot each column in a matrix, each on a separate page.

* First create some dummy elements to plot.

random 28,rand,data 30, i0

ecol 28,rand,nams I0,i

RI:RI0

frequency/center 28,rand,freq 10.,10000.

* Now create the loop.

symend 28,plot,loop wxyz

* Increment column pointer.

##inc i,l

* Get name of vector.

calc

name = (28,rand,nams &i,l)

done

* Get the ith column.

chopx 28,rand,data 28,plot,vec &nr, 1

l:&nr

&i

* Now plot data.

plot 28,rand,freq 28,plot,vec 13331

FREQUENCY, (HZ)

RANDOM DATA

10.,10000.

0.,1.

PLOT OF RANDOM DATA POINTS

* Use precoder to create title containg the name of the vector.

$$VECTOR &NAME(A4)

DEMONSTRATION PLOTTING LOOP
14-4 LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

i,I

* End of loop

WXYZ

* Get sizes.

calc

nr = (28,rand,data -6)

nc = (28,rand,data -7)

done

t

* Set column pointer.

set i = 0

* Set pl0t type

pset tek

- Read loop nc times

##read 28,plot,loop &nc
14.1. DEFAULT

DEFAULT 14-5

DEFAULT Command

Purpose

Conditionally define the value of a variable. If the variable already

exists, the default value is ignored.

Command

DEFAULT VARI=VALI VAR2=VAL2 ... VARn=VALn

Where

VARi = The name of a variable (no &).

VALi = The default value for the variable.

Example

Look at any run stream on DAL unit 30. (Prinz 30,RUN,...)

Notes

The DEFAULT command is usually used in conjunction with runstreams.

Related Commands

RUN, RECOVER, SET, LIST
14-6 LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

14.2. RECOVER

RECOVER Command

Purpose

Retrieves the values of arguments that were used in a call to a command

stream via the RUN command.

Command

RECOVER NAME1,NAME2,NAME3,NAME4, .......

or

RECEIVE NAME1,NAME2,NAME3,NAME4, .......

-DATAor

RECIPE NAME1,NAME2,NAME3,NAME4, .......

-Prompt-

-DATAWhere

NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3,NAME4, .......

- List of variable names to place recovered values.

-DATA- - Input list of values to put in the variable list.

-Prompt- - Prompt string to use when reading input.

RECOVER

Set the variables named in the command to the values that were present on

the RUN command. The variable whose name is NAME1 is set to the first

value from the RUN command, etc.

RECEIVE

Set the variables in the variable list to the values in the following

line.

RECIPE

Set the variables in the variable list to the values in the line following

the prompt line. Whatever text is input will be used to prompt for the

variables.

Notes

The passing of arguments from the RUN commands is handled as follows:
RECOVER 14-7

RUN=NAMEARGI,ARG2,ARG3,ARG4

causes the element 28:PARM/LIST-0,0- to be created as a vector 4 words

long. The proper run stream is accessed and added as data to the program.

The statement

RECOVER NAMEI,NAME2,NAME3,NAME4

reads the element 28:PARM/LIST-0,0- and essentially does a

SET NAMEI=ARGI NAME2=ARG2 NAME3=ARG3 NAME4=ARG4

It then disables the element 28:PARM/LIST-0,0-

Interactive Runstreams

The second two forms are good for building interactive runstreams. The

following example is an illustration of this.

* Read some variables and list them.

RECIPE A,B,C

Input A, B, C >

##READ 0,AUTO

LIST A,B,C

If a ##READ were done on the above the display would look something like

this:

?##READ 28,EXAM,PLE

Input A, B, C> 1.,2.,3.

A = i.

B = 2.

C = 3.

?

Symbol REC$

The symbol REC$ is set to the input from RECEIVE or RECIPE and can be used

later for whatever you wish.

Related Commands

RUN, LIST, SET, ##READ, ##READ THROUGH
14-8 LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

14.3. RUN

V

Purpose

Command

Notes

Initiate the execution of a previously prepared runstream.

The RUN command is functionally equivalent to the FORTRAN

CALL statement. The subroutine 'CALLed' is a sequence of

VAPEPS commands.

RUNx=NAME ARGI,ARG2,ARG3, ...... ,Argn

Where x is an integer number between i and 30, and refers

to a DAL unit. NAME is a 4 character hollerith name, which

indicates a runstream element on DAL unit x.

DAL unit 30 is usually used for the RUN command streams,

thus the value of x defaults to 30.

ARGI,ARG2,... Are arguments to the 'subroutine'.

The use of the RUN command by users is very straightforward, providing that the author of the routine has

documented it. Other than the fact that it starts with

RUNx=, it is no different than any regular command.

Creating a RUN subroutine is a slightly more complicated

matter. The following lines provide an example:

SYMIN 5 RUN TEST

* The convention for all RUN streams is to start the stream

* with a group of comments that describe the command. In

* this case, the purpose of this stream is to show a

* RUN command stream.

RUN=TEST NI,ELI,VRI N2,EL2,VR2 N3,EL3,VR3

THIS STREAM PERFORMS THE TRIPLE PRODUCT

T

C=ABA

FIRST WE WILL RECOVER THE ELEMENT NAMES

RECOVER NI,ILI,IVI,N2,IL2,IV2,N3,IL3,IV3

÷
RUN 14-9

* THEN, USE TMUL FOR FIRST PRODUCT

TMUL &NI,&ILI,&IVl &N2,&IL2,&IV2

* NOW PERFORM SECOND PRODUCT

MULT 28,AT,B &NI,&ILI,&IVl

* AND WE'RE DONE

RUN- TEST

SEOF

28,AT,B

&N3,&IL3,&IV3

The above run command could be executed as follows:

RUN5=TEST 1,PHI,MAT 1,MASS,MAT I,PHIT,MPHI

There are several important items to include when creating

run stream elements:

I. Always document the runstream command.

2. The RECOVER command may be used to retrieve arguments.

3. The RUN- NAME command must be used to terminate your

run stream element. (RUN+ NAME may be used instead,

see below)

The following notes will be usefull:

i. The RUN command automatically

a) Saves variables prior to starting the runstream.

b) Turns off the SPIT, ECHO, and COMMENT modes (if

they were on).

2. The variable table is left unchanged when the stream

is started. Thus any new variables are added to the

table. This has advantages, in that variables may be

referenced other than through the argument list. It

has disadvantages, though in that the variable table

might overflow if the sum of existing variables plus

new variables gets too large. (Max variables = 50)

3. The RUN- command retrieves the variables that were

in effect prior to the runstream. Variables that were

created in the stream may not be passed out of the

stream. If RUN+ is used to terminate a runstream,

the original variable table will not be recovered. This

means that the variables defined in the stream will be

retained once the stream is finished.

4. The status of SPIT, COMMENT, and ECHO are restored

to their original values. Thus a programmer can change

the comment mode inside a stream and not have to reset

it.
14-10 LOOPS AND RUNSTREAMS

5. An error status may be passed to VAPEPS by supplying

an additional argument to the RUN+ or RUN- commands.

eg. RUN+ NAME &IERR or RUN- NAME &IERR

If IERR=0, normal (successful) completion. If IERR=I,

VAPEPS will issue a 'TRY AGAIN' message if the session

is interactive, or 'FATAL ERROR, .... ' if not.

6. Note that the command SYMIN was used to create the

runstream element. The element must be either a type

5 or a type 6 DAL element. The name is also

important, as the command RUNx=NAME will

look for the element RUN/NAME on unit x.

v

Special notes

Users may toggle an automatic runstream selection mode. In

english, this translates to: If a command is not found

you normally will get a SAME TO YOU error message. If the

auto runstream mode is turned on, VAPEPS will

search the runstream file for a runstream element by that

name. If one is found, execution will continue as if the

user had actually typed in RUN=COMMAND. This mode is

initially on. It may be turned off by

RUNOFF

or back on by RUNON

The user may also specify an additional unit that should

be used for runstreams. In this case, the command is

RUNON 3

Now an illegal command will be re-submitted as RUN3=COMMAND

If that is still no good, the form RUN=COMMAND will be tried.

Note that RUN=NAME always refers to runstreams on unit 30.
15. DATABASE WORKSHEETS

DATABASE WORKSHEETS 15-1

The following pages contain worksheets designed to aid in the entry and

preparation of data into the VAPEPS database.
_w4
PREP

STATUS*

CHECKLIST

_ COMMAND SECTION

D

V1

[3

[3

[3

V1

[3

N

[3

[3

D

PREP

BOOK

CHANNEL COORDINATES

CONFIGURATION

MODULES

MODULES- DESCRIPTION

MODUELS - ATTACH CHANNELS

MODULES- MODULE PARAMETERS

MODULES - MODULE ATTACHMENT

DEFINE NEW WORDS

STATUS

l--]

C]

C]

rN

F-1

c]

[3

c]

r-1

[-3

SheeJ.._of

Event

MODULE NAME

4 CHARACTERS

ADMINISTRATION

PREP Command Sheet of_

Event,

? PREP NU,VENT NSEC

(

I

NU is the DAL unit where the data for the EVENT is stored.

VENT and EVENT are the same four character word.

NSEC is the number of sections ENTERed for the EVENT.

BOOK Section

Sheet of_

Event

>BOOK

>PROC

AGENCY PROGRAM PROJECT ID*

>CONT

>COGN

>DATE

>TIME

month day year

/ /

hours rain. sec. fract.

* The EVENT and the ID are the same four character word.

All other fields except for TIME and DATE can be up to 12 characters long.

NOTE: All argument fields are SERCHable.

>EVENT

CLASS TYPE ID1 ID2

>LOCATION

GLOBAL LOCAL ID1 ID2

>VEHICLE

CLASS TYPE CONFIGURATION ID

Channel Coordinates

Sheet of_

Event

ChannelXYZ System Channel

Y

Z System

CONFIGURATION Tree

Sheet of_

Event

/

LAST THIS GENERIC SPECIFIC MOUNT ENCLOSURE

MODULES Command

Sheet

Event

>MODULES MXMOD MXCT MXCPS

See the USER'S MANUAL for default values for MXMOD, MXCT, MXCPS.

MXMOD is the maximum number of modules for this event.

MXCT is the maximum number of channels attached to all MODULES entered for the EVENT.

MXCPS is the maximum number of channels per SEA element.

MODULES- Description

Sheet of_

Event

Four character module name

>DAMO

>DESC

>EXTA

>SKIN

>INTA

>MONT

>INST

Three word module description

Three word descriptionof EXTA

Three word description of SKIN

Three word descriptionof INTA

Three word descriptionof MONT

Three word descriptionof INST

MODULES - ATTACHED

Four character module name

>DAMO

>

t

t

>

t

t

>

t

CHANNELS

Sheet

Event

NOTE: If more than 15 channels are attached to a SEA

element, sea the MXCPS spcification for the MODULES

command.

: SEA ELEMENT, i.e.,EXTA, SKIN, INTA,MONT, INST

Channel names to be attached to this element

m mm m

: SEA ELEMENT, i.e., EXTA, SKIN, INTA,MONT,INST

Channel names to be attached to this element

mD m

: SEA ELEMENT, i.e., EXTA, SKIN, INTA,MONT, INST

Channel names to be attached to this element

t

|0

|ueA=l

leeqs

I

N

m

I m n m

m I n I

I m _ u

m

m haul m m .

nw m

lueuJeles!q|JO|pepeeu sJe;eweJed

= 3c_L

18NI'1NOIN'VINI 'NINS 'V.I.X::I"e'! '1N31N3-13 V--JS:

I

m

n

m

m

m

m m m

m m m

m

=l

n m m

m m m

m m

luewele s!qlJoj pepeeu sJelewezed

= 3cb_1

18NI'INOIN'VINI 'NI)I8 'VIX::I "e'! '1N31N3"I3 V--JS:

.d

.d

.d

.d

.d

<

.d

,d

.d

,d

,d

<

O VO<

SI::I313NVI::IVd - s=nnaon
.._,r
MODULES - MODULE ATTACHMENT

Sheet of_

Event

>ATTACH

MODULE CONF ZONE SYSTEM X Y Z

MODULE - CONF - ZONE must be uniquewithina given EVENT

MODULE isthe four character name used to identify a MODULE withina EVENT

CONF is the branch, "This', on the EVENT's configurationtree where the MODULE attaches.

ZONE is a four character name which designates a general area inthe CONFIGURATION where the MODULE attaches.

Data Dictionary worksheet. -- Previously defined words.

Definition Definition

Word number. Word number.

D

D D

D D

D

D

D D

D D

D

D D

D D

D D

D D

D D

5 D

Sheet -----of

Event

Word

Definition

number.

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

B

D

D

D

( ( (

Data Dictionary worksheet. -- Synonyms.

Word

Synonyms

Word

Synonyms

Word

Synonyms

Wor,

Synonym-Q

Worn

Synonyms

Word

Synonyms

Word

Synonym Q

Word

Synonyms

Word

Synonyms

SheeL._of __

Event
V
Data Dictionary worksheet.

Word

-- Undefined words. Shee.L._of

Event

Deflnltloll

Synonyms

Word

Definition

Synonyms

16. SEMOD WORKSHEETS

SEMOD WORKSHEETS 16-i

The following pages contain worksheets designed to aid in the creation of

SEMOD models.

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

CO=

VOLUME =

AP =

AAC=

Type = 1 - REVB (Reverberant Acoustic Space)

Mass density of acoustic medium. (Note:ThisIsMASSdensitynotWBGHTdens/ty.)

Speed of sound in acoustic medium.

Volume of acoustic space.

Surface area of acoustic space.

Acoustic absorbtion coefficient.

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

CO=

VOLUME =

AP=

AAC=

VISC =

VEL =

Type = 2 - NREV (Non-Reverberant Acoustic Space)

NOT SUPPORTED FOR PREDICTIONS

Mass density of acoustic medium. (Note:ThisisMASSdensitynotWBGHTdensity.)

Speed of sound in acoustic medium.

Volume of acoustic space.

Surface area of acoustic space.

Acoustic absorbtion coefficient.

Kinematic viscosityof fluid,

Velocity of flying body.

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

CL=

H=

AP=

ALX =

ALY =

DLF =

E=

PATA =

RHOS =

ASMS =

PIVOTFRQ =

Type = 3 - PLAT (Flat Plate)

Mass density of plate. (Note:ThisIs MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Longitudinal wave speed.

Equivalent thickness.

Surface area.

Sub-panel dimension - X direction.

Sub-panel dimension - Y direction.

Damping lossfactor.

Young's modulus.

Total length of discontinuity.

Surface mass density. (Note:ThisIs MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThisIs MASSnotWEIGHT.)

Frequency for pivoting functionalized damping. (optional)


Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

CL=

H=

AP=

BL =

ALX =

ALY=

D=

DLF =

E=

PATA =

RHOS =

ASMS =

CO=

PIVOTFRQ =

Type = 4 - CYLN (Cylinder)

Mass density of cylinderINote:Thisis MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensily.)

Longitudinal wave speed.

Equivalent thickness.

Surface area.

Length of cylinder.

Sub-panel dimension - X direction.

Sub-panel dimension - Y direction.

Diameter of cylinder.

Damping lossfactor.

Young's modulus.

Total length of discontinuity.

Surface mass density. (Note:ThisisMAssdensilynctWEIGl-rrdensily.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThisISMASSnotWEIGHT.)

Speed of sound in medium surroundingthe cylinder.

Frequency for pivoting functionalized damping. (optional)
Element Name:

DESCRIPTION= '

RHO =

CL=

H=

AP =

DLF =

E=

PATA =

BETA =

RHOS =

ASMS =

CO=

PIVOTFRQ =

Type = 5 - CONE

Mass density of cone. (Note:ThisIs MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Longitudinal wave speed.

Equivalent thickness.

Surface area.

Length (height) of cone.

Sub-panel dimension - X direction.

Sub-panel dimension - Y direction.

Diameter of base of cone.

Damping lossfactor.

Young's modulus.

Total length of discontinuity.

Half apex angle of cone.

Surface mass density.(Note:Thisis MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass,Note: Thisis MASSnotWBGHT.)

Speed of sound in medium surrounding the cone.

Frequency for pivotingfunctionalized damping. (optional)

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION= '

RHO =

ASMS =

H=

B=

BL=

E=

G=

DLF =

CL=

CNT=

Type = 6 - BEMR (Rectangular beam or truss.)

Mass density of truss. (Note:ThisIsMASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThisIsMASSnotWEIGHT.)

Equivalent thickness of truss.

Width of truss.

Length of truss member.

Young's modulus.

Shear modulus.

Damping lossfactor.

Longitudinal wave speed.

Number of truss members.

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

ASMS =

BL =

DO=

E=

G=

DLF =

CL=

CNT=

Type = 7 - BEMC (Circular beam or truss.)

Mass density of truss. (Note:ThisIs MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThisIs MASSnotWEIGHT.)

Length of truss member.

Outside diameter.

Young's modulus.

Shear modulus.

Damping lossfactor,

Longitudinalwave speed.

Number of truss members.
v

_wJ
Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

ASMS =

BL=

DI=

DO=

E=

G=

DLF =

CL=

CNT=

Type = 8 - BEMT (Tubular beam or truss.)

Mass density of truss. (Note:ThisIsMASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThisIsMASSnotWEIGHT.)

Length of truss member.

Insidediameter.

Outside diameter.

Young's modulus.

Shear modulus.

Damping lossfactor.

Longitudinalwave speed.

Number of truss members.
V
! i ̧ / ̧

Element Name:

DESCRIPTION = '

RHO =

ASMS =

BL=

RGF =

A=

PJ=

E=

G=

T=

DLF =

CL=

CNT=

Type = 9 - BEMO (Other beam or truss.)

Mass density of truss. (Note:TldsIs MASSdensitynotWEIGHTdensity.)

Non-structuralmass. (Note:ThIsIs MASSnotWEIGHT.)

Length of truss member.

Flexuralradius of gyration.

Cross section area.

Polar moment of inertia.

Young's modulus.

Shear modulus.

Torsional stiffness.

Damping lossfactor.

Longitudinalwave speed.

Number of truss members.

17. FREQUENCY TABLES

FREQUENCY TABLES 17-1

This section contains table for standard 1/3 octave and 1/6 octave center

frequencies, band widths, and lower and uppper band edge freqeuncies.

The following runstream was used to generate the numbers in these tables:

frequency/center 28,cen,frq 10.,10000.

frequency/width 28,wid,frq 10.,10000.

frequency/edge 28,edg,frq i0.,i0000.

calc

nf = (28,cen,frq -6)

nf2 = nf+l

done

build 28,frq, tabl &nf,4

mix 28,cen,frq

mix 28,wid,frq l,&nf i,i 1,2

mix 28,edg,frq l,&nf I,i 1,3

mix 28,edg,frq 2,&nf2 i,i 1,4

done

prinf 28,frq,tabl -7

(4f8.1)

frequency/set 2

frequency/center 28,cen,frq i0.,10000.

frequency/width 28,wid,frq 10.,10000.

frequency/edge 28,edg,frq 10.,10000.

calc

nf = (28,cen,frq -6)

nf2 = nf+l

done

build 28,frq, tabl &nf,4

mix 28,cen,frq

mix 28,wid,frq l,&nf 1,1 1,2

mix 28,edg,frq l,&nf i,i 1,3

mix 28,edg,frq 2,&nf2 I,i 1,4

done

prinf 28,frq,tabl -7

(4f8.1)

end
17-2 FREQUENCYTABLES

Standard 1/3 Octave Center frequencies

Center Band Band Edge

Frequency Width Lower Upper

i0.0 2.2 9.0 ii.2

12.5 2.8 11.2 14.0

16.0 4.0 14.0 18.0

20.0 4.4 18.0 22.4

25.0 5.6 22.4 28.0

31.5 7.5 28.0 35.5

40.0 9.5 35.5 45.0

50.0 ii.0 45.0 56.0

63.0 15.0 56.0 71.0

80.0 19.0 71.0 90.0

I00.0 22.0 90.0 112.0

125.0 28.0 I12.O 140.0

160.0 40.0 140.0 180.0

200.0 44.0 180.0 224.0

250.0 56.0 224.0 280.0

315.0 75.0 280.0 355.0

400.0 95.0 355.0 450.0

500.0 Ii0.0 450.0 560.0

630.0 150.0 560.0 710.0

800.0 190.0 710.0 900.0

i000.0 220.0 900.0 1120.0

1250.0 280.0 1120.0 1400.0

1600.0 400.0 1400.0 1800.0

2000.0 440.0 1800.0 2240.0

2500.0 560.0 2240.0 2800.0

3150.0 750.0 2800.0 3550.0

4000.0 950.0 3550.0 4500.0

5000.0 Ii00.0 4500.0 5600.0

6300.0 1500.0 5600.0 7100.0

8000.0 1900.0 7100.0 9000.0

i0000.0 2200.0 9000.0 11200.0
FREQUENCYTABLES 17-3

Standard 1/6 Octave Center frequencies

Center Band Band

Frequency Width Lower

i0.0 1.2 9.4

11.2 1.3 10.6

12.5 1.4 11.9

14.0 1.7 13.3

16.0 1.8 15.0

18.0 2.0 16.8

20.0 2.3 18.8

22.4 2.6 21.i

25.0 2.9 23.7

28.0 3.3 26.6

31.5 3.6 29.9

35.5 4.1 33.5

40.0 4.6 37.6

45.0 5.1 42.2

50.0 5.8 47.3

56.0 6.5 53 .i

63.0 7.2 59.6

71.0 8.2 66.8

80.0 9.1 75.0

90.0 10.3 84.1

i00.0 11.6 94.4

112.0 13.0 106.0

125.0 14.0 119.0

140.0 17.0 133.0

160.0 18.0 150.0

180.0 20.0 168.0

200.0 23.0 188.0

224.0 26.0 211.0

250.0 29.0 237.0

280.0 33.0 266.0

315.0 36.0 299.0

355.0 41.0 335.0

400.0 46.0 376.0

450.0 51.0 422.0

500.0 58.0 473.0

560.0 65.0 531.0

630.0 72.0 596.0

710.0 82.0 668.0

800.0 91.0 750.0

900.0 103.0 841.0

i000.0 116.0 944.0

1120.0 130.0 1060.0

1250.0 140.0 1190.0

1400.0 170.0 1330.0

1600.0 180.0 1500.0

1800.0 200.0 1680.0

Edge

Upper

10.6

11.9

13.3

15.0

16.8

18.8

21.1

23.7

26.6

29.9

33.5

37.6

42.2

47.3

53.1

59.6

66.8

75.0

84.1

94.4

106.0

119.0

133.0

150.0

168.0

188.0

211.0

237.0

266.0

299.0

335.0

376.0

422.0

473.0

531.0

596.0

668.0

750.O

841.0

944.0

1060.0

ll90.0

1330.0

1500.0

1680.0

1880.0
17-4 FREQUENCYTABLES

Standard 1/6 Octave Center frequencies

(continued)

Center Band Band Edge

Frequency Width Lower Upper

2000.0 230.0 1880.0 2110.0

2240.0 260.0 2110.0 2370.0

2500.0 290.0 2370.0 2660.0

2800.0 330.0 2660.0 2990.0

3150.0 360.0 2990.0 3350.0

3550.0 410.0 3350.0 3760.0

4000.0 460.0 3760.0 4220.0

4500.0 510.0 4220.0 4730.0

5000.0 580.0 4730.0 5310.0

5600.0 650.0 5310.0 5960.0

6300.0 720.0 5960.0 6680.0

7100.0 820.0 6680.0 7500.0

8000.0 910.0 7500.0 8410.0

9000.0 1030.0 8410.0 9440.0

i0000.0 1160.0 9440.0 10600.0

k_

V
18. CONVERSION TABLES

CONVERSION TABLES 18-1

This section contains some commonly used conversions. You can use the

CONVERT command to perform many of these conversions. The general units

give the values in terms of Mass (M), Length (L), and Time (T).

To convert from

ft/s**2

in/s**2

ft**2

in**2

kip

ibf

ozf

ibf-s

ft

in

mile

oz mass

ib mass

slug

ton

Ibf-ft

ibf-in

in**4

ibf-ft-s**2

ibf-s

ft-lbf/s

hp

ibf/ft**2

ibf/in**2 (psi)

ft/s

in/s

mi/h (mph)

mi/h (mph)

ft**3

in**3

gal

qt

to

m/s**2

m/s**2

m**2

mm**2

kN

N

N

N-s

m

fifth

km

g

kg

kg

kg

N-m

N-m

mm**4

kg-m* *2

kg-m/s

W

W

Pa

kPa

m/s

m/s

m/s

km/h

m**3

cm**3

1

1

multply by

0.3048

0.0254

0.0929

645.2

general units

L*(T**-2)

L*(T**-2)

L**2

L**2

4.448

4.448

0.2780

4.448

0.3048

25.40

1.609

28.35

0.4536

14.59

907.2

1.356

0.1130

0.4162E6

1.356

4.448

1.356

745.7

47.88

6.895

0.3048

0.0254

0.4470

1.609

0.02832

16.39

3.785

0.9464

M*L*(T**-2)

M*L*(T**-2)

M*L*(T**-2)

M*L*(T**-l)

L

L

L

M

M

M

M

M*(L**2)*(T**-2)

M*(L**2)*(T**-2)

L**4

M*(L**2)

M*L*(T**-I)

M*(L**2)*(T**-3)

M*(L**2)*(T**-3)

M*(L**-2)

M*(L**-2)

L*(T**-I)

L*(T**-I)

L*(T**-I)

L*(T**-I)

L**3

L**3

L**3

L**3

19. INDEX

INDEX 19-i

VAPEPS has an interactive index that is available by accessing the RUN

stream called INDEX (RUN=INDEX). The following pages list the keys that

are present in this index and the commands which relate to each of the

keys.

The purpose of the index is to help users find the appropriate commands.

The section containing the command can be found by looking in the Table of

Contents.

##JUMP

==> CONTROL

##OFF

==> CONTROL

##ON

==> CONTROL

##READ

==> CONTROL

##VRES

==> CONTROL

##VSAV

==> CONTROL

==> FORMAT

i/3 OCTAVE

==> FREQUENCY

1/6 OCTAVE

==> FREQUENCY

3-D

==> GCOL

FREQUENCY_TA

FREQUENCY_TA

_ffi> SYMIN

=ffi> SYMIN
19-2 INDEX

==> FORMAT

ABSOLUTE

==> FUN

AC

==> AC

ADDITION

==> ASMD

ADMIN

==> ADMIN

ANALYSIS

==> PREDICT

AND

APPEND

==> AND

==> OR

ARC-TANGENT

==> CMOD

AS

==> AS

ASSEMBLE

==> BUILD

ATAN

==> CMOD

AU

==> AU

BAND

==> NTOW

BAND EDGE

==> FREQUENCY

BAND WIDTH

==> FREQUENCY

BASIC

==> SET

BUILD

PREDICT

GROUP

PRINTING AND VARIABLES AN
INDEX 19-3

BIT

==> CBIT

BLOCK

==> EXPAND

BUILD

==> BUILD

C1

==> CYCLE

C2

==> CYCLE

CALCULATOR

==> CALCULATOR

CENTER

==> FREQUENCY

CHANGE

==> CHANGE

CHARACTER

==> CRYPT

CHARGE

==> CPU

CHECK

==> CBIT

CHOLESKI

==> CHL

CHOP

==> CHOP

CLF

==> TRNF

CNFG

==> CNFG

CNVRT

==> CNVRT

COEFFICIENT

SSTRNG

GROUP

FREQUENCY_TA

EXPAND

TRANSPOSE

MODIFY
19-4 INDEX

==> TRNF

COLLECT

==> BUILD GROUP

COMBINE

==> BUILD OR

COMMAND

==> AC COMMAND FORM ENTER

PREP SCALE SERCH

CO_4ANDS

==> GENERAL COMM PRINTING AND

COMMENT

==> CONTROL

COMPLEMENT

==> NOT

COMPLEX

==> CMOD

CONFIGURATIO

==> CNFG

CONTENTS

==> TOC

CONVERSION

==> CNVRT

RTOI

CONVERSION T CONVERT

CONVERT

==> CEAL CONVERT DPTOR

COPY

==> COPY

CORE

==> CORE

CORNERS

==> PRCRN

COS

==> FUN

COSINE

HELP

VT

DPTOR

MENU UTILITY

NTOW
INDEX 19-5

==> FUN

COST

==> CPU

COUPLING

==> TRNF

CPU

CREATE

CROSS

==> CPU

==> BUILD

==> INDEX

CRYPTOLOGY

==> CRYPT

CSF

==> LOOPS

CUBE

==> FUN

CYCLE

==> CYCLE

CYCLES

==> CYCLE

CYLINDER

==> STRESS

DAL

==> DAL FILES

DAL001

==> FNAME

DALPRO

==> FORMAT

DAMO

==> DAMO

DAMPING

==> TRNF

POW

FNAME TRDAL
19-6 INDEX

DATA

==> DAMO DICTIONARY

DATA-SPACE

==> CORE

DATABASE

==> DATABASE WOR ENTER

DBM5

==> DATABASE WOR

DECOMPOSITIO

==> CHL

DEFAULT

==> DEFAULT

DEFINE

==> SET

DEFINITIONS

==> DICTIONARY

ECOL

PREP

DELETE

==> DISABLE ENABLE PACK

DERIVATIVE

==> MDIFF

DEVIATION

==> STAT

DEVICE

==> PSET

DICTIONARY

==> DICTIONARY

DIFFERENCE

==> ASMD

DIFFERENTIAT

==> MDIFF

DIRECT

==> DICTIONARY

DISABLE

ENTER SREAD
INDEX 19-7

==> DISABLE

DIVISION

==> ASMD

DLF

==> TRN_

DMOD

==> MODIFY

DOC

--=> DOC

DOCUMENTATIO

==> DOC

DOUBLE

==> DPTOR

DUMP

==> TDUMP

E

==> FUN

EAL

==> CEAL

EASY

==> EZOUT

EC

==> EC

ECHO

==> CONTROL

EDGE

==> FREQUENCY_TA

EDIT

==> VAR

EDITOR

==> CNFG

EF

==> EF

ENABLE

FNAME

DAMO

MSPAR
19-8 INDEX

ELEMENT

==> CYCLE

ELEMENTS

==> CSYM

ENABLE

ENERGY

ENTER

ENTRY

EULER

EXPAND

EXTRAP

EXTRAP2

==> DISABLE

==> PREDICT

==> ECOL

==> ECOL

==> EULER

==> EXPAND

==> PRDICT

==> SCALE

EXTRAPOLATIO

==> PREDICT

EXTRAP I

==> PREDICT

EXTRAP I I

FACTORS

FAST

FFT

FIELD

==> PREDICT

==> CNVRT

==> FFT

==> FFT

==> ECOL

DAL FILES

ENABLE

SEMOD

ENTER

ENTER

PREDICTION

PREDICTION

TRNF

TOC

SCALE

FORMAT
INDEX 19-9

FILE

==> CSYM FILES TRDAL

FILES

==> CSYM DAL FILES FILES

FILTER

==> SEARCH

FIND

==> FIND LOCATE

FIT

==> FIT

FORMAT

==> COMMAND FORM FORMAT

FORMATTED

==> SREAD WRITE

FORTRAN

==> SREAD WRITE

FOURIER

==> FFT

FREE

==> ECOL FORMAT

FREE-FIELD

==> GREAD

FREQEUNCY

==> FREQUENCY_TA

FREQUENCY

==> FREQUENCY SEQUENCE

FUNCTION

==> FUN

FUNCTIONS

==> TRNF

GENERAL

==> GENERAL COMM GENERAL TOPI GREAD IN UG
19-10 INDEX

GENERATOR

==> DOC

GLOSSARY

==> GLOSSARY

GR

==> GR

GRAPHICS

==> GR

GROUP

==> GROUP

GUIDE

==> UG

HELP

==> AC

HH

==> HH

HOLLERITH

==> RLJUST

IMAGINARY

==> CMOD

IN

INDEX

==> IN

==> GLOSSARY

INFORMATION

==> IN

INITIALIZE

==> PSET

INPUT

==> CSYM

INSERT

==> ECOL

RANDOM

DOC

INDEX

UG

ECOL

SEQUENCE

HELP

UH

GCOL

HH

SREAD

UH

SYMIN

V
INDEX 19-11

INTEGER

==> RTOI

INTEGRATE

==> MGRATE

INTEGRATION

==> MGRATE

INTERFACE

==> DICTIONARY

INTERPOLATE

==> INTERPOLATE

INTERPOLATIO

==> INTERPOLATE

INTRODUCTION

==> IN

INVERSE

==> CHL

INVERSION

==> INVERT

INVERT

==> INVERT

IO

==> IO

JLOC

==> EXPAND

JPI

==> JPI

JUMP

==> CONTROL

JUSTIFY

==> RLJUST

KEEP

==> VAR

LABEL

==> CONTROL

INTRODUCTION

NOT
19-12 INDEX

LABELS

LAST

LATEST

LEAST

LEFT

LIST

LOCATE

LOG

LOGICAL

==> CONTROL

==> LAST

==> FIND

==> FIT

==> RLJU5T

==> AND

RITE

==> FIND

==> FUN

==> AND

LONGWORD

==> GCOL

LOOK

==> LOOK

LOOP

==> LOOPS

LOOPS

==> LOOPS

LOSS

==> TRNF

LS

==> LS

MANUAL

==> DOC

FILES

TABLE

LOCATE

FNAME

SYMIN

INTRODUCTION

LIST

TOC

OR

OR

WRITE

PRCRN
INDEX 19-13

MAP

==> CBIT

MATRIX

==> INVERT TRNF

MAXIMUM

==> MAXMIN

MEAN

==> STAT

MENU

==> MENU UTILITY

MERGE

==> OR

METHOD

==> PREDICTION

MINIMUM

==> MAXMIN

MODELER

==> SEMOD SEMOD WORKSH

MODIFY

==> LOCATE MODIFY STORE

MODULE

==> DAMO

MODULUS

==> CMOD

MULTIPLICATI

==> ASMD

MTRAN

FUN

MULTIPLY

MSAP

TMUL

MSPAR MTJ

NAME

==> CHANGE FNAME

NAMES

==> CYCLE

NARROW

==> NTOW

NEPSAP
19-14 INDEX

NINJ

NJ

==> MSAP

==> TTYP

==> CHANGE

NON-ZERO

==> SEARCH

NORMALIZE

==> NORM

NOT

NUMBER

OF

OFF

OLD

ON

OR

ORDER

OUTPUT

OVERLAY

PACK

PAGE

==> NOT

==> LAST

==> TOC

==> CONTROL

==> PREDICTION

==> CONTROL

==> OR

==> ORDER

==> EZOUT

==> BUILD

==> PACK

==> WRITE

EXPAND

RANDOM

PRCRN

GCOL

PRINT

MTJ

WRITE

TTYP

-..,-
INDEX 19-15

PCT

==> JPI

PERCENTILE

==> STAT

PHASE

PICK

PLATE

PLOMXX

PLOPXX

PLOT

==> CMOD

==> CHOP

==> STRESS

==> PLOT

==> PLOT

==> PLOT

PLOTTING

==> LOOK

POLAR

==> CMOD

POLYNOMIAL

==> FIT

POWER

==> POW

PPF

==> PSET

PRDICT

==> PRDICT

PRECISION

==> DPTOR

PREDICTION

==> CNVRT

PSET

PRINTING AND

POW

PRDICT SCALE STRESS _F
19-16 INDEX

PREDICTIONS

==> PREDICT

PREP

==> PREP

PRINT

==> LIST

WRITE

PRINTING

==> LOOK

PROCESSOR

==> LOOK

PROGRAM

==> CSYM

QUALITY

==> TABLE

QUICK

==> LOOK

RANDOM

==> RANDOM

RANGE

==> SEARCH

RE-ARRANGE

==> BUILD

READ

==> CONTROL

SREAD

REAL

==> CMOD

RECOVER

==> CONTROL

RECTANGULAR

==> CMOD

REDUCE

==> CHOP

PRCRN

PRINTING AND

UH

CHOP

CSYM

SYMIN

RTOI

DISABLE

PRINT

ECOL

TDUMP

ENABLE

RITE

GCOL

TABLE

GREAD
REFERENCE

==> INDEX

REMOVE

==> VAR

RENAME

==> CHANGE

REPEAT

==> LOOPS

REPEATED

==> LOOPS

REPLACE

==> MODIFY

REPORT

==> TABLE

RESIZE

==> EXPAND

RIGHT

==> RLJUST

ROTATION

==> EULER

ROUTINE

==> CONVERT

RUN

==> RECOVER

RUNSTREAM

==> AC

SAVE

==> ADMIN

SCALE

==> NORM

SCALING

==> PREDICT

SEA

STORE

RUN

RECOVER

CONTROL

PREDICTION

SYMIN

VT

FIND

INDEX 19-17

==> CNVRT PREDICT PREDICTION SEMOD WORKSH TRNF
19-18 INDEX

SEARCH

SECTOR

SELECT

SEMOD

==> CBIT

55TRNG

==> CKAL

==> AND

==> SEMOD

SEQUENCE

==> SEQUENCE

SERCH

SET

SHOCK

SIGMA

SIN

SINE

SINGLE

SIZE

SLOPE

SMF

SORT

==> SERCH

==> FREQUENCY

==> SHOCK

==> STAT

==> FUN

==> FUN

--=> DPTOR

==> CORE

==> MDIFF

==> MODIFY

==> ORDER

FIND

CHOP

SEMOD WORKSH

NOT

EXPAND

GLOSSARY

OR

SET

INDEX

TRANSPOSE

STORE

SEARCH
INDEX 19-19

SPAR

SPAR-A

SPARSE

SPECTRA

==> MSPAR

==> FNAME

==> MSPAR

==> SHOCK

SPECTRAL

==> ENTER

SPECTRUM

==> SHOCK

SPILL

SPIT

SPLINE

==> ADMIN

==> CONTROL

==> INTERPOLATE MDIFF

SQUARE

==> FUN POW

SQUAREROOT

==> FUN

SQUARES

==> FIT

STANDARD

==> STAT

STATISTICAL

==> PREDICT SEMOD

STATISTICS

==> STAT

STATUS

==> CPU FILES

STIFFNESS

MGRATE

JPI
19-20 INDEX

STORE

STRESS

STRING

STRIP

STRIPE

STRP

==> MSAP

==> STORE

==> STRESS

==> SEQUENCE

==> SEARCH

==> SEARCH

==> SEARCH

SUBROUTINE

==> RUN

SUBTRACTION

==> ASMD

SUMMARY

==> AC

GR

VD

SUP

==> CPU

SYMBOLIC

==> CSYM

SYMBOLS

==> VARIABLES AN

SYMIN

==> RUN

SYNONYMS

==> DICTIONARY

SYNTHESIS

==> BUILD

SYSTEM

MSPAR

SSTRNG

AS

HH

VP

SYMIN

SYMIN

AU

IO

VT

EC

LS

EF

VC

V  ̧
INDEX 19-21

==> CSYM

TABLE

==> TABLE TOC VAR

TABLES

==> CONVERSION T TABLE

TANGENT

==> CMOD

TAPE

==> TDUMP WTAPE

TERM-BY-TERM

==> ASMD

THEORETICAL

==> PRDICT PREDICT

TIME

==> CPU SEQUENCE

TO

==> INTRODUCTION NTOW

TOC

==> CHANGE FI_

TTYP

TOPICS

==> GENERAL TOPI

TRANSFER

==> COPY TRNF

TRANSFORM

==> FFT

TRANSFORMATI

==> EULER

TRANSLATE

==> TRDAL

TRANSLATION

==> CRYPT

TRANSPOSE

==> EXPAND MTJ

LAST

MTRAN

LOCATE

TMUL

TOC

TRANSPOSE
19-22 INDEX

TRNF

==> TRNF

TRUNCATION

==> DPTOR RTOI

TYPE

==> CHANGE SYMIN

TYPE-5

==> CSYM

TYPE-6

==> CSYM

UG

==> UG

UH

==> UH

UNDELETE

==> DISABLE ENABLE

UNIT

==> CONVERT

UNITS

==> CNVRT

USER

==> UG

USING

==> UH

UTILITY

TTYP

==> COPY DISABLE ENABLE

PACK PR INT TOC

VALUE

==> FUN

==> ADMIN AS

CONVERT DAMO

FREQUENCY GR

INTRODUCTION IO

VAPEPS

LAST LOCATE

ALl CEAL CNFG

EC EF ENTER

HELP HH IN

LS MENU UTILITY PREDICT
INDEX i9-23

PREP SCALE

UG UH

VT

SEMOD

VC

SERCH

VD

STRESS

VP

VARIABLE

==> LIST VAR

VARIABLES

==> CALCULATOR CONTROL

VARIABLES AN WRITE

DEFAULT SET VAR

VC

==> VC

VD

==> VD

VECTOR

VP

==> SEQUENCE

==>- VP

VRES

VSAV

==> CONTROL

==> CONTROL

VT

==> VT

WIDE

==> NTOW

WIDTH

WORDS

==> FREQUENCY_TA

==> DICTIONARY

WORKSHEETS

==> DATABASE WOR SEMOD WORKSH

WRITE

==> PRCRN PRINT

WTAPE

RITE TABLE WRITE

X-Y

==> PLOT
19-24 INDEX

ZERO

==> CHOP SEARCH
20. SUMMARY

51fMMARY 20-i

***** COMMAND SUMMARY

NAME DESCRIPTION

HELP ........ VAPEPS ONLINE DOCUMENTATION.

MENU VAPEPS MENU UTILITY

AND .......... REDUCE TWO LISTS TO ONE LIST OF LIKE ITEMS

ASMD ......... TERM BY TERM ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY AND DIVIDE

BUILD(X) ..... BUILD MATRICES FROM OTHER MATRICES

CALCULATOR...CALCULATOR MODE -- OPERATES ON VARIABLES

CBIT ........ SEARCH BIT MAP MATRIX FOR SEQUENCE OF BITS

CEAL ........ CONVERT EAL ELEMENTS TO DAL AND VISA VERSA

CHANGE ...... CHANGE NAME, TYPE, OR NJ FOR ELEMENTS

CHL ......... CHOLESKI DECOMPOSITION -- INVERSE OF SYMMETRIC MATRICES.

CHOP(X) ..... SELECT ROWS AND COLUMNS OF A MATRIX.

CMOD ........ COMPLEX TO MODULUS/PHASE OR REAL/IMAGINARY, POLAR TO RECTANGULAR

CNFG ........ STAND ALONE CONFIGURATION TREE EDITOR (VAPEPS)

CONVERT ..... VIBROACOUSTIC UNIT CONVERSION.

COPY ........ COPY INDIVIDUAL OR MULTIPLE ELEMENTS

CORE ........ SET MAXIMUM CORE LIMIT.

CPU ......... PRINT ELAPSED CPU (SUP) TIME

CRYPT ....... CHARACTER TRANSLATION, CRYPTOLOGY.

CSYM ........ TRANSFER SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO/FROM SYSTEM FILES.

CYCLE ....... CHANGE DEFAULT CYCLE NUMBERS.

DISABLE ...... DISABLES DAL ELEMENTS

DOC ......... DOCUMENT FORMATER.

DFTOR ....... DOUBLE PRECISION TO REAL, AND VISA VERSA.

ECOL ........ FREE-FIELD DATA ENTRY

ENABLE ....... ENABLES DISABLED DAL ELEMENTS

EULER ....... CREATE EULER ROTATION MATRIX.

EXPAND ...... CHANGE BLOCK SIZE OF AN ARRAY.

EZOUT ....... WRITE EASY FORMATTED SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS

FFT ......... FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM.

FILES ....... LIST FILES ASSIGNED TO CURRENT EXECUTION.

FIND ........ LIST TO(: LINES FOR GROUP OF ELEMENTS.

FIT .......... DO A LEAST SQUARES CURVE FIT TO AN NTH ORDER POLYNOMIAL

FNAME ....... RESET LOGICAL DAL UNIT NAME.

FREQUENCY...FREQUENCY CALCULATOR 1/3 OCTAVE - I/6 OCTAVE ETC..

FUN ......... COMPUTE Y AS A FUNCTION OF X (SIN,COS,LOG,ETC)

GCOL ........ READ 12 CHARACTER WORDS, BLOCKED SETS, ETC.

GLOSS ....... GLOSSARY CREATION, INSERTION, CHECKING

GREAD ....... READ DATA IN FREE-FIELD FORMAT.

GROUP ....... COLLECT SEVERAL ELEMENTS INTO ONE (SIMPLIFIED BUILD)
20-2 SUMMARY

INDEX ....... REPLACE DATA WITH POSITION IN AN INDEX LIST.

INTERPOLATE.INTERPOLATE AN ORDERED SET TO A NEW ABSCISSA.

INVERT ...... MATRIX INVERSION.

JPI ......... OBTAIN SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM DEPENDENT)

LAST ........ PRINT TOC LINE OF LAST ELEMENT IN A DAL FILE.

LOCATE ...... LOCATE A SPECIFIC ELEMENT.

LOOK ........ QUICK LOOK PROCESSOR.

MAXMIN ...... FIND MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM VALUES OF AN ARRAY.

MDIFF ....... GET THE DERIVATIVE OF A VECTOR.

MGRATE ...... INTEGRATE A VECTOR OR GROUP OF VECTORS.

MODIFY ...... CHANGE INDIVIDUAL TERMS IN A MATRIX.

MSAP ........ MULTIPLY NEPSAP STIFFNESS MATRIX BY REGULAR MATRIX.

M5PAR ....... SPARSE MATRIX MULTIPLICATION.

MTJ ......... TRANSPOSE MULTIPLICATION USING 'NJ'

MTRAN ...... MATRIX MULTIPLICATION A*BT = C

MULTIPLY .... MATRIX MULTIPLICATION A*B=C

NORM ........ NORMALIZE A MATRIX TO 1.

NOT ......... GET NUMBERS NOT PRESENT IN A LIST.

NTOW ........ NARROW TO WIDE BAND CONVERSION.

OR .......... COMBINE TWO LISTS INTO ONE LIST CONTAINING ALL ITEMS.

ORDER ....... SORT A MATRIX IN ASCENDING ORDER.

PACK ........ REMOVE ALL DISABLED ELEMENTS FROM A DAL FILE.

POW ......... RAISE A VECTOR TO SUCCESSIVE POWERS.

RANDOM ...... CREATE A MATRIX OF UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS

RLJUST ...... RIGHT OR LEFT JU5TIFIE5 HOLLERITH WORDS.

RTOI ........ REAL TO INTEGER CONVERSION AND VISA VERSA.

SEARCH ...... FIND VALUES OF MATRIX WITHIN A GIVEN RANGE.

SEQUENCE .... MAKE A LINEAR OR LOGARITHMIC SEQUENCE OF REAL NUMBERS.

SHOCK ....... COMPUTE SHOCK SPECTRA.

SREAD ....... READ DATA IMAGES USING FORTRAN FORMATTED READ

SSTRNG ...... SEARCH COLUMNS FOR A STRING OF INTEGERS.

STAT ........ GET MEAN, STANDARD DEVIATIONS, MEAN +/- X SIGMA.

STORE ......

STRESS .....

SYMIN ......

TDUMP ......

TMUL .......

TOC ........

TRANSPOSE..

TRDAL ......

TTYP .......

WTAPE ......

PLOT .......

PRCRN ......

PRINT ......

PSET .......

RITE .......

TABLE ......

WRITE ......

ENTER

•STORE A VALUE IN A PARTICULAR LOCATION OF A MATRIX.

•CALCULATE MEAN SQUARE STRESS FROM MEAN SQUARE RESPONSE.

.INPUT IMAGES TO A DAL SYMBOLIC (TYPE 5/6) ELEMENT.

.READ ANY TAPE INTO A DAL FILE.

•MATRIX MULTIPLICATION AT*B = C.

•PRINT THE TABLE OF CONTENTS OF A DAL UNIT.

•MATRIX TRANSPOSITION.

•TRANSLATE DAL FILE FROM ONE SYSTEM TO ANOTHER.

.CHANGE THE TYPE OF TO(: LISTING.

•WRITE A MATRIX TO TAPE.

.PLOT X VERSUS Y.

.PRINT CORNERS OF A MATRIX.

.PRINT THE CONTENTS OF A DAL ELEMENT.

.PLOT SET - PLOT INITIALIZATION SUBPROCESSOR.

.PRINT AN ELEMENT AS A FUNCTION OF SOME VECTOR.

.PRINT MATRICES IN REPORT TYPE FORMAT.

•WRITE VARIABLES/CONSTANTS USING FORTRAN FORMATS.

DATABASE SPECTRAL DATA INPUT COMMAND.
SUMMARY 20-3

PREP ........ DATABASE EVENT DEFINITION AND STANDARDIZATION COMMAND.

SERCH ....... SEARCH VAPEPS DATABASE.

DICTIONARY..DIRECT DICTIONARY INTERFACE PROCESSOR.

SEMOD ....... STATISTICAL ENERGY MODELER.

PREDICT ..... THEORETICAL, EXTRAP I AND EXTRAP II PREDICTIONS.

CNVRT ....... SETS UP CONVERSION FACTORS FOR SEA PREDICTIONS

DAMO ........ STAND ALONE DATA MODULE EDITOR.

DENS ........ CALCULATES MODAL DENSITY. NON-SEMOD MODELS.

PRDICT ...... DOES THEORETICAL AND EXTRAPOLATED SEA PREDICTIONS.

SCALE ....... EXTRAP II PREDICTION COMMAND.

TRNF ........ CALCULATES SEA TRANSFER FUNCTIONS

LIST ........ LIST VALUE OF ALL OR SELECTED VARIABLES

SET ......... DEFINE THE VALUE OF A VARIABLE

VAR ......... REMOVE VARIABLES FROM THE VARIABLE TABLE

DEFAULT ..... SPECIFY DEFAULT VALUES FOR VARIABLES.

RECOVER ....

RUN

AC

AS

AU

EC

EF

GR

HH

IN

IO

LS

UG

UH

VC

VD

VP

VT

•RECOVER ARGUMENTS FROM A RUN COMMAND.

INITIATE A 'VAPEPS' SUBROUTINE CALL

(NOT A COMMAND) COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY.

ARITHMETICS AND STATISTICS COMMAND SUMMARY

ADVANCED USAGE COMMAND SUMMARY

ELEMENT CREATION MANIPULATION COMMAND SUMMARY

ELEMENT FILE SYSTEM COMMAND SUMMARY

GRAPHICS COMMAND SUMMARY

HELP WITH HELP

INTRODUCTION TO VAPEPS.

INPUT/OUTPUT COMMAND SUMMARY

LOGIC SORTING OPERATONS COMMAND SUMMARY

USER GUIDE TO GENERAL INFORMATION.

USING THE VAPEPS HELP PROCESSOR.

VARIABLE CONTROL COMMAND SUMMARY

VIBROACOUSTIC DATABASE COMMAND SUMMARY

VIBROACOUSTIC PREDICTION COMMAND SUMMARY

(NOT A COMMAND) VIBROACOUSTIC TOOLS COMMAND SUMMARY.
20-4 SUMMARY

20.1. AC

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - ALPHABETICAL.

NAME DESCRIPTION

ABLD-ABLE...ENABLE AND DISABLES DAL ELEMENTS.

RUN=ADDC .... ADD NEW COMMANDS TO SETCOM ROUTINE.

ADMIN ....... DATABASE ADMINISTRATION CO_4AND.

RUN=AJNV .... ADJUST THE INVERSE OF A MATRIX.

RUN=ALL ..... PRINTS OUT ENTER HEADER AND CHANNEL INFO IN A DAL FILE.

AND ......... REDUCE TWO LISTS TO ONE LIST OF LIKE ITEMS.

APE ......... CURVE FIT TO NTH ORDER POLYNOMIAL.

ASMD ........ TERM BY TERM ADD, SUB, MULT, DIV.

RUN=AVG ..... CALCULATES THE AVERAGE BY ROW OR COLUMN.

RUN=BCL ..... BUILD COM/LIST ELEMENT FOR SAVING THE COMMAND LIST.

BIGSEA ...... LINKS SEPERATE SEA MODELS TOGETHER.

RUN=BLIM .... CREATES A VECTOR OF 1/3 OCTAVE BAND LIMITS.

RUN=BOOT .... CREATES A VAPEPS BOOT TAPE FOR THE NAMEDE SYSTEM.

RUN=BSC ..... CREATES A SETCOM ROUTINE FOR DALPRO/VAPEPS TYPE SYSTEM.

BUILD(X) .... BUILD MATRICIES FROM OTHER MATRICIES.

RUN=BWTH .... CREATES A VECTOR OF 1/3 OCTAVE BANDWIDTHS.

CALC ........ CALCULATOR MODE -- OPERATE ON VARIABLES.

CBIT ........ SEARCH BIT MAP MATRIX FOR SEQUENCE OF BITS.

CHANGE ...... CHANGE NAME, TYPE, OR NJ FOR ELEMENTS.

CHL ......... CHOLESKI DECOMPOSTION --INVERSE OF SYMMETRIC MATS.

CHOP ........ SELECT ROWS AND COLUMNS OF A MATRIX.

RUN=CIMV .... CALCULATES THE CONFIDENCE INTERAL FOR A TRUE MEAN OF X.

RUN=CLFGET..Gets a set of ATA'S from a SEMOD path.

RUN=CLFPUT..Puts a set of ATA'S into a SEMOD path.

CMOD ........ COMPLEX TO MODULUS/PHASE OR REAL/IMAGINARY.

CNFG ........ STAND ALONE CONFIGURATION TREE EDITOR (VAPEPS).

CNVRT ....... SETS UP CONVERSION FACTORS FOR PREDICTIONS.

COMMAND ..... (NOT A COMMAND) COMMAND FORMAT DESCRIPTION.

CONVERT ..... Vibroacoustic Unit Conversion.

CONTROL ..... (NOT A CO_nWJ%ND) INFO ON CONTROL COMMANDS (##) AND PRECODER ($$).

COPY ........ COPY INDIVIDUAL OR MULTIPLE ELEMENTS.

RUN=COPS .... WRITES ALL SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO A FORTRAN UNIT.

CORE ........ SET MAXIMUM CORE LIMIT.

CPU ......... PRINT ELAPSED CPU (SUP) TIME.

RUN=CPYS .... CREATES FILE OF CARD IMAGES FROM MATCHING SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS.

CRYPT ....... CHARACTER TRANSLATION, CRPTOLOGY.

CSYM ........ TRANSFER SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO/FROM SYSTEM FILES.

CYCLE ....... CHANGE DEFAULT CYCLE NUMBERS.

DALDOC ...... (NOT A COMMAND) DAL FILE DESCRIPTION.
AC 20-5

_v

DAMO ........ STAND ALONE DATA MODULE EDITOR (VAPEPS).

RUN=DATA .... EXTRACTS AND AVERAGES CHANNEL DATA FROM DATABASE.

DEFAULT ..... SPECIFY DEFAULT VALUES FOR VARIABLES.

DENS ........ CALCULATES MODAL DENSITY.

DPTOR ....... DOUBLE PRECISION TO REAL, AND VICE VERSA.

ECOL ........ FREE-FIELD DATA ENTRY.

ENTER ....... DATABASE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA INPUT COMMAND.

RUN=ESAV .... WRITES ENTER DECK OUT TO A FORTRAN UNIT.

EXPAND ...... CHANGE BLOCK SIZE OF AN ARRAY.

EZOUT ....... WRITE EASY FORMATTED SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS.

FFT ......... FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM.

FILES ....... LIST FILES ASSIGNED TO CURRENT EXECUTION.

FIND ........ LIST TOC LINES FOR GROUP OF ELEMENTS.

FNAME ....... RESET LOGICAL DAL UNIT NAME.

FORMAT ...... (NOT A COMMAND) FREE-FIELD FORMAT DESCRIPTION.

FRQ ......... Generates Frequencies.

FUN ......... COMPUTES Y AS A FUNCTION OF X (SIN,COS,LOG,ECT).

RUN=GCLS .... ORDERS COMMAND ABBREVIATIONS AND ENTRY POINTS.

GCOL ........ READ 12 CHARACTER WORDS, BLOCKED SETS, ECT.

RUN=GDOC .... PREPARES A DOC FILE FROM GENERAL AND HELP FILE.

RUN=GENP .... INTERACTIVE PLOTING.

RUN=GETRESP.Stores SEMOD responsed on a specified DAL element.

GLOSS ....... GLOSSARY CREATION, INSERTION, CHECKING.

RUN=GLST .... LIST RUN=GMOD OUTPUT.

RUN=GMOD .... RETRIEVES DATABASE MODULE DATA.

RUN=GPSD .... CALCULATES PSD FROM A TIME HISTORY.

GREAD ....... READ DATA IN FREE-FIELD FORMAT.

RUN=GRLT .... UPDATES THE 'READ ELTS' ELEMENT IN THE 'EASY' FILE.

RUN=GRMS .... VIBRATION SPEC MANIPULATOR AND RMS CALCULATOR.

GROUP ....... COLLECT SEVERAL ELEMENTS INTO ONE (SIMPLIFIED BUILD).

RUN=GVAL .... RETRIEVES DISTRIBUTION VALUE GIVEN SAMPLE SIZE AND CONFIDENCE.

GXI ......... GET X INTERCEPT - FIND ALL ZERO CROSSINGS.

RUN=HEAD .... PRINTS OUT ENTER HEADER AND CHANNEL INFO.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

INDEX ....... REPLACE DATA WITH POSITION IN AN INDEX LIST.

RUN=INDE .... INTERACTIVE COMMAND INDEX.

RUN=INTE .... INTERACTIVE PROMPTING ROUTINE.

INVERT ...... MATRIX INVERSION.

JPI ......... OBTAIN SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM DEPENDENT).

LAST ........ PRINT TOC LINE OF LAST ELEMENT IN FILE.

RUN=LFU ..... CREATES LOWWER OR UPPER TRIANGULAR, AND FULL MATRICIES.

LIST ........ LIST VALUE OF ALL OR SELECTED VARIABLES.

LOCATE ...... LOCATES A SPECIFIC ELEMENT.

LOOPS ....... (NOT A COMMAND) INFORMATION ON LOOPING TECHNIQUES.

RUN=LRMS .... CALCULATES RMS OF VIBRATION SPEC.

RUN=LTRP .... INTERPOLATES VIBRATION SPEC TO 1/3 OCTAVES.

LUMP ........ DISPERSE A LIST OF VALUES INTO PRESCRIBED SLOTS.

RUN=MANU .... WRITES A VAPEPS MANUAL.

MAXIN ....... FINDS THE MAX AND MIN VALUES OF AN ARRAY.

MDIFF ....... GET THE DERIVATIVE OF A VECTOR.
20-6 SUMMARY

RUN=MEZ..... READSEZOUT FILES AND RELATES THEM TO C RUN=BLOCK REFS.

MGRATE ...... INTEGRATE A VECTOR OR GROUP OF VECTORS.

MODIFY ...... CHANGE INDIVIDUAL TERMS IN A MATRIX.

RUN=MPNT .... PRINTS A MASTER FILE SUMMARY.

MTRAN ....... MATRIX MULTIPLICATION A*BT RUN= C.

MULTIPLY .... MATRIX MULTILPICATION A*B RUN=C.

RUN=MVC ..... CALCULATE MEAN VARIANCE AN CO-VARIANCE.

RUN=NEWS .... PRINTS OUT NEWS ELEMENT ON RUNFILE.

RUN=NOML .... Normalize baseline response to a new excitation.

NORM ........ NORMALIZE A MATRIX.

RUN=NORM .... NORMALIZES DATABASE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

NOT ......... GET ITEMS NOT PRESENT IN A LIST.

RUN=OCT3 .... CONVERT NARROW BAND PSD TO 1/3 OCTAVE PSD.

OR .......... COMBINE TWO LISTS INTO ONE LIST CONTAINING ALL ITEMS.

ORDER ....... SORT A MATRIX IN ASCENDING ORDER.

RUN=ORTH .... CHECKS THE ORTHOGONALITY OF MATRIX.

RUN=OVER .... CALCULATES OVERALL LEVEL OF 1/3 OCTAVE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

PACK ........ REMOVES ALL DISABLED ELEMENTS FROM A DAL FILE.

RUN=PGLS .... ORDERS A GLOSSARY ALPHABETICALY, THEN PRINTS IT.

RUN=PGRM .... PLOTS THE SPEC CREATED BY RUN=GRMS.

RUN=PICK .... RETRIEVES DATABASE ACOUSTIC AND VIBRATION DATA.

PLOT ....... PLOT X VERSUS Y

PLU ......... CONVERT PACKED UPPER-LOWER TRIANGULAR TO REGULAR AND VICE VERSA.

POW ......... RAISE A VECTOR TO SUCCESSIVE POWERS.

PRCRN ....... PRINT CORNERS OF A MATRIX.

PRDICT ...... DOES THEORETICAL AND EXTRAPOLATED SEA PREDICTIONS.

PREP ........ DATABASE EVENT DEFINITION AND STANDARDIZATION COMMAND.

PRINT ....... PRINT THE CONTENTS OF A ELEMENT.

RUN=PRST .... CALCULATES STATISTICAL INFORMATION FOR PREDICTED RESPONSE.

PSET ........ PLOT SET --PLOT SUBPROCESSOR.

RUN=PTMP .... CALCULATES AT*B*A TRIPLE PRODUCT.

RUN=PUTC .... PUTS A C RUN=DECK IN ALL (CI,C2)I,0 ELEMENTS.

PVP ......... PEAK AND VALLEY PICKER -- DIGITIZATION.

RANDOM ...... CREATAES A MATRIX OF UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS.

RECOVER ..... RECOVER ARGUMENTS FROM A RUN COMMAND.

RITE ........ PRINT AN ELEMENT AS A FUNCTION OF A VECTOR.

RLJUST ...... RIGHT OR LEFT JUSTIFIES HOLLERITH WORDS.

RUN=ROUN .... CONVERTS FLOATING POINT TO INTEGER WITH ROUNDING OFF.

RUN=RRAN .... CREATES A MATRIX OF RANDOM BETWEEN LIMITS.

RTABS ....... CONVERTS TAB CHARACTERS TO PROPER SPACING.

RTOI ........ REAL TO INTEGER CONVERSION AND VICE-VERSA.

RUN=RTOC .... PULLS OUT FILES FROM CURRENT VAX DIRECTORY.

RUN ......... INITIATE A VAPEPS SUBROUTINE CALL.

RUN=SAVG .... Averages the responses from a SEMOD model.

RUN=SAVE .... SAVES ALL PREPED EVENTS FROM A DAL UNIT TO A MASTER FILE.

SCALE ....... EXTRAP2 PREDICTION COMMAND.

SEARCH ...... FIND VALUES OF A MATRIX WITHIN A GIVEN RANGE.

5EMOD ....... Statistical Energy Modeler.

RUN=SEND .... FINDS AND PRINTS OUT MATCHING ELEMENTS.

SEQUENCE .... MAKE A LINEAR OR LOGRITHMIC SEQUENCE OF REAL NUMBERS.
AC 20-7

SET ......... DEFINE THE VALUE OF A VARIABLE.

RUN=SHIFT...Shifts SEMOD'S FPAR parameters up or down.

SHOCK ....... COMPUTE SHOCK SPECTRA FROM TIME HISTORY.

SHUFFLE ..... CREATE A MATRIX BY PLACING SQUARE MATS AT SPEC.LOCATIONS.

RUN=SNDP .... FINDS DAL ELEMENTS THAT HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE A DATE.

RUN=SPIL .... SPILLS ALL EVENTS FROM A DAL UNIT TO A ELEMENT.

SPLIT ....... FORM MATRIX BY SELECTING SPECIFIC ROWS AND COLUMNS FROM ANOTHER,

SREAD ....... READ IMAGES ACCORDING TO INPUT FORTRAN FORMAT.

SSTRNG ...... SEARCH COLUMNS FOR A STRING OF INTEGERS.

RUN=STAS .... Calculates normal and log-normal statistical quantities.

RUN=STAT .... CALCULATES STATISTICAL INFO ON VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

STAT ........ GET MEAN, STANDARD DEVIATIONS MEAN +/- X SIGMA.

RUN=STAC .... PRINTS OUT ELEMENTS TO BE TRANSFERED TO ANOTHER SYSTEM.

STORE ....... STORE A VALUE IN A PARTICULAR LOCATION OF A MATRIX.

RUN=STTS .... SAME AS RUN=STAT PLUS TABULATES RESULTS.

SYMIN ....... INPUT IMAGES TO A DAL SYMBOLIC (TYPE 5/6).

TABLE ....... PRINT MATRICIES IN REPORT TYPE FORMAT.

RUN=TCPY .... WRITE DAL UNIT TO TAPE UNIT.

TDUMP ....... READ ANY TAPE INTO A DAL FILE.

TMUL ........ MATRIX MULTILPICATION AT*B=C.

RUN=TOCO .... ORDER A TOC/TABLE OF CONTENTS LISTING.

TOC ......... PRINTS THE TABLE OF CONTENTS OF A DAL FILE.

TRANSPOSE...MATRIX TRANSPOSTION.

RUN=TRFU .... CALCULATES VIBROACOUSTIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS.

TRNF ........ CALCULATES TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR PRDICT.

RUN=TSTA .... STATISTIC COMMAND WITH TRANSPOSED INPUT.

TURP ........ INTERPOLATE AN ORDERED SET TO A NEW ABSCISSA.

RUN=UCON .... VIBROACOUSTIC UNIT CONVERSION OF DATABASE DATA.

RUN=UPDS .... COPIES SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS FROM DAL UNIT TO FORTRAN UNIT.

VAPUP ....... (Not a con_nand) Procedure for updating VAPEPS code.

VAR ......... REMOVE VARIABLES FROM THE VARIABLE TABLE.

RUN=VFIX .... DEVELOP A VIBROACOUSTIC TEST SPEC FROM FIXTURE SURVEY OF DATA.

RUN=VTSE .... SETS UP VT TERMINAL FOR PLOTTING.

RUN=WLSQ .... WEIGHTED LEAST SQUARES.

WRITE ....... WRITE VARIABLES/CONSTANTS USING FORTRAN FORMATS.

WTAPE ....... WRITE A MATRIX TO TAPE.

XQT ......... EXECUTE USER PROGRAM.
20-8 SUMMARY

AS

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - ARITHMETICS AND STATISTICS

NAME DESCRI PTION

RUN=AJNV .... ADJUST THE INVERSE OF A MATRIX.

APE ......... CURVE FIT TO NTH ORDER POLYNOMIAL.

ASMD ........ TERM BY TERM ADD, SUB, MULT, DIV.

RUN=AVG ..... CALCULATES THE AVERAGE BY ROW OR COLUMN.

BUILD(X) .... BUILD MATRICIES FROM OTHER MATRICIES.

CALC ........ CALCULATOR MODE -- OPERATE ON VARIABLES.

CHL ......... CHOLESKI DECOMPOSTION --INVERSE OF SYMMETRIC MATS.

RUN=CIMV .... CALCULATES THE CONFIDENCE INTERAL FOR A TRUE MEAN OF X.

CMOD ........ COMPLEX TO MODULUS/PHASE OR REAL/IMAGINARY.

FFT ......... FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM.

FUN ......... COMPUTES Y AS A FUNCTION OF X (SIN,COS,LOG,ECT).

RUN=GVAL .... RETRIEVES DISTRIBUTION VALUE GIVEN SAMPLE SIZE AND CONFIDENCE.

GXI ......... GET X INTERCEPT - FIND ALL ZERO CROSSINGS.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

INVERT ...... MATRIX INVERSION.

MAXIN ....... FINDS THE MAX AND MIN VALUES OF AN ARRAY.

MDIFF ....... GET THE DERIVATIVE OF A VECTOR.

MGRATE ...... INTEGRATE A VECTOR OR GROUP OF VECTORS.

MTRAN ....... MATRIX MULTIPLICATION A*BT = C.

MULTIPLY .... MATRIX MULTILPICATION A*B=C.

RUN=MVC ..... CALCULATE MEAN VARIANCE AN CO-VARIANCE.

NORM ........ NORMALIZE A MATRIX.

RUN=ORTH .... CHECKS THE ORTHOGONALITY OF MATRIX.

PLU ......... CONVERT PACKED UPPER-LOWER TRIANGULAR TO REGULAR AND VICE VERSA.

POW ......... RAISE A VECTOR TO SUCCESSIVE POWERS.

RUN=PTMP .... CALCULATES AT*B-A TRIPLE PRODUCT.

PVP ......... PEAK AND VALLEY PICKER -- DIGITIZATION.

RANDOM ...... CREATAES A MATRIX OF UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS.

RUN=ROUN .... CONVERTS FLOATING POINT TO INTEGER WITH ROUNDING OFF.

RUN=RRAN .... CREATES A MATRIX OF RANDOM BETWEEN LIMITS.

RTOI ........ REAL TO INTEGER CONVERSION AND VICE-VERSA.

SEQUENCE .... MAKE A LINEAR OR LOGRITHMIC SEQUENCE OF REAL NUMBERS.

RUN=STAS .... Calculates normal and log-normal statistical quantities.

5TAT ........ GET MEAN, STANDARD DEVIATIONS MEAN +/- X SIGMA.

TMUL ........ MATRIX MULTILPICATION AT*B=C.

RUN=TPVL .... Calculates a theoretical percentile value given a mean value.

TRANSPOSE...MATRIX TRANSPOSTION.

RUN=TSTA .... STATISTIC COMMAND WITH TRANSPOSED INPUT.

TURP ........ INTERPOLATE AN ORDERED SET TO A NEW ABSCISSA.
AS 20-9

RUN=WLSQ .... WEIGHTED LEAST SQUARES.
20-i0 SUMMARY

20.3. AU

V

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - ADVANCED USAGE

NAME DESCRIPTION

RUN=ADDC .... ADD NEW COMMANDS TO 5ETCOM ROUTINE.

RUN=BCL ..... BUILD COM/LIST ELEMENT FOR SAVING THE COMMAND LIST.

RUN=BOOT .... CREATES A VAPEPS BOOT TAPE FOR THE NAMEDE SYSTEM.

RUN=BSC ..... CREATES A SETCOM ROUTINE FOR DALPRO/VAPEPS TYPE SYSTEM

CBIT ........ SEARCH BIT MAP MATRIX FOR SEQUENCE OF BITS.

CONTROL ..... (NOT A COMMAND) INFO ON CONTROL CO_Wa%NDS (##) AND PRECODER ($$).

CNFG ........ STAND ALONE CONFIGURATION TREE EDITOR (VAPEPS).

RUN=COPS .... WRITES ALL SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO A FORTRAN UNIT.

CORE ........ SET MAXIMUM CORE LIMIT.

CPU ......... PRINT ELAPSED CPU (SUP) TIME.

RUN=CPYS .... CREATES FILE OF CARD IMAGES FROM MATCHING SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS.

CRYPT ....... CHARACTER TRANSLATION, CRPTOLOGY.

CSYM ........ TRANSFER SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO/FROM SYSTEM FILES.

DPTOR ....... DOUBLE PRECISION TO REAL, AND VICE VERSA.

EZOUT ....... WRITE EASY FORMATTED SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS.

RUN=GCLS .... ORDERS COMMAND ABBREVIATIONS AND ENTRY POINTS.

RUN=GDOC .... PREPARES A DOC FILE FROM GENERAL AND HELP FILE.

GLOSS ....... GLOSSARY CREATION, INSERTION, CHECKING.

RUN=GRLT .... UPDATES THE 'READ ELTS' ELEMENT IN THE 'EASY' FILE.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

RUN=INDE .... INTERACTIVE COMMAND INDEX.

RUN=INTE .... INTERACTIVE PROMPTING ROUTINE.

3PI ......... OBTAIN SYSTEM PARAMETERS (SYSTEM DEPENDENT).

LOOPS ....... (NOT A COP_4AND) INFORMATION ON LOOPING TECHNIQUES.

RUN=MEZ ..... READS EZOUT FILES AND RELATES THEM TO C=BLOCK REFS.

RUN=PGLS .... ORDERS A GLOSSARY ALPHABETICALY, THEN PRINTS IT.

RUN=PUTC .... PUTS A C=DECK IN ALL (CI,C2)I,0 ELEMENTS.

RECOVER ..... RECOVER ARGUMENTS FROM A RUN CO_W_%ND.

RLJUST ...... RIGHT OR LEFT JUSTIFIES HOLLERITH WORDS.

RTABS ....... CONVERTS TAB CHARACTERS TO PROPER SPACING.

RUN ......... INITIATE A VAPEPS SUBROUTINE CALL.

RUN=SEND .... FINDS AND PRINTS OUT MATCHING ELEMENTS.

RUN=STAC .... PRINTS OUT ELEMENTS TO BE TRANSFERED TO ANOTHER SYSTEM.

SYMIN ....... INPUT IMAGES TO A DAL SYMBOLIC (TYPE 5/6) ELEMENT.

RUN--TCPY .... WRITE DAL UNIT TO TAPE UNIT.

TDUMP ....... READ ANY TAPE INTO A DAL FILE.

RUN=TOCO .... ORDER A TOC/TABLE OF CONTENTS LISTING.

RUN=UPDS .... COPIES SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS FROM DAL UNIT TO FORTRAN UNIT.

VAPUP ....... (NOt a coumklnd) Procedure for updating VAPEP5 code.
AU 20-11

WTAPE ....... WRITE A MATRIX TO TAPE.

XQT ......... EXECUTE USER PROGRAM.
20-12 SUMMARY

20.4. EC

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - ELEMENT CREATION/MANIPULATION

NAME DESCRIPTION

BUILD(X) .... BUILD MATRICIES FROM OTHER MATRICIES.

CHOP ........ SELECT ROWS AND COLUMNS OF A MATRIX.

ECOL ........ FREE-FIELD DATA ENTRY.

FORMAT ...... (NOT A COMMAND) FREE-FIELD INPUT DESCRIPTION.

GCOL ........ READ 12 CHARACTER WORDS, BLOCKED SETS, ECT.

GREAD ....... READ DATA IN FREE-FIELD FORMAT.

GROUP ....... COLLECT SEVERAL ELEMENTS INTO ONE (SIMPLIFIED BUILD).

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

RUN=LFU ..... CREATES LOWWER OR UPPER TRIANGULAR, AND FULL MATRICIES.

MODIFY ...... CHANGE INDIVIDUAL TERMS IN A MATRIX.

RANDOM ...... CREATES A MATRIX OF UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS.

RUN=RRAN .... CREATES A MATRIX OF RANDOM BETWEEN LIMITS.

SEQUENCE .... MAKE A LINEAR OR LOGRITHMIC SEQUENCE OF REAL NUMBERS.

SHUFFLE ..... CREATE AMATRIX BY PLACING SQUARE MATS AT SPEC. LOCATIONS.

SPLIT ....... FORM MATRIX BY SELECTING SPECIFIC ROWS AND COLUMNS FROM ANOTHER.

SREAD ....... READ IMAGES ACCORDING TO INPUT FORTRAN FORMAT.

5TORE ....... STORE A VALUE IN A PARTICULAR LOCATION OF A MATRIX.
EF 20-13

EF

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - ELEMENT ,FILE ,SYSTEM CONTROL

NAME DESCRIPTION

ABLD-ABLE...ENABLE AND DISABLES DAL ELEMENTS.

CHANGE ...... CHANGE NAME, TYPE, OR NJ FOR ELEMENTS.

COPY ........ COPY INDIVIDUAL 0RMULTIPLE ELEMENTS.

COMMAND ..... (NOT A COMMAND) COMMAND FORMAT DESCRIPTION.

CYCLE ....... CHANGE DEFAULT CYCLE NUMBERS.

DALDOC ...... (NOT A COMMAND) DAL FILE DESCRIPTION.

EXPAND ...... CHANGE BLOCK SIZE OF AN ARRAY.

FILES ....... LIST FILES ASSIGNED TO CURRENT EXECUTION

FIND ........ LIST TOC LINES FOR GROUP OF ELEMENTS.

FNAME ....... RESET LOGICAL DAL UNIT NAME.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

LAST ........ PRINT TOC LINE OF LAST ELEMENT IN FILE.

LOCATE ...... LOCATES A SPECIFIC ELEMENT.

PACK ........ REMOVES ALL DISABLED ELEMENTS FROM A DAL FILE.

RUN=RTOC .... PULLS OUT FILES FROM CURRENT VAX DIRECTORY.

RUN=SNDP .... FINDS DAL ELEMENTS THAT HAVE BEEN CHANGED SINCE A DATE.

TOC ......... PRINTS THE TABLE OF CONTENTS OF A DAL FILE.
20-14 SUMMARY

GR

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - GRAPHICS

NAME DESCRIPTION

RUN=GENP .... INTERACTIVE PLOTING.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

RUN=PGRM .... PLOTS THE SPEC CREATED BY RUN=GRMS.

PLOT ....... PLOT X VERSUS Y

PSET ........ PLOT SET --PLOT SUBPROCESSOR.

RUN=VTSE .... SETS UP VT TERMINAL FOR PLOTTING.
20.7. HH

HH 20-15

General Information - Help on HELP

Summary of commands

? ..... Reprints first page of current

help section.

?? .... Prints subtopics of current

help section.

SKIP..Skips to subtopics of the

current help section.

QUIT..Takes you out of help.

Carriage return

..... Go up one help level or go to

nextpage of current section.

RUN=..Gives help on RUN= con_nand

specified.

For further information..Type

* ? and ?? ............... H?

* SKIP ................... SKIP

* QUIT ................... QUIT

* Carriage return ........ CARRIAGE

* RUN= commands .......... RCOMMANDS

20.7.1. H?

Use of ? and ??

7 If you are within the print out of a section (i.e. when the prompt

ends in a question mark), "7" reprints the current section starting

at the beginning. If you have a prompt ending with ">", "?" prints

the help section indicated by the prompt (see example 1).

77 Used £o find out what the subtopics are of the current help level

when you have a prompt ending with ">" (see example 2). You can

also use "7" or "?7" as the last argument of a string of help subtopics

to find the subtopics of the specified level (see example 3).

Examples

i) HELP HH > ?

2) HELP HH > 77

- Reprints the information for

the HH section.

- Prints out subtopics of the HH
20-16 SUMMARY

section

3) HELP > PREP MODULES ?? - prints out subtopics the MODULES

section of PREP.

20.7.2. SKIP

Use of SKIP

SKIP is used only within the print out of a help section to skip to

the end of that particular section and print out the subtoptics, if

any. If no subtopics exist then you are moved up one level in help.

See "Use of ? and ??" for information on how to find out what the

subtopics are in other cases.

20.7.3. QUIT

Use of QUIT

QUIT will take you completly out of the help processor except when

a subtopic call QUIT is available. If a QUIT subtopic is available

then it is treated the same as any other subtopic.

20.7.4. CARRIAGE

Use of carriage return

A carriage return will move you up one level in help when you have a

prompt ending with ">" and will take you out of help when you are at

the top (i.e when the prompt is "HELP >"). When a carriage return

is used when you have a prompt ending with "?" the next page of the

current help section is printed out.
20.7.5. RC0t_EIAJ_DS

HH 20-X7

Use of RUN= commands

To obtain help at any time on RUN= commands type RUN= followed by the

command name. Once one RUN= command has been printed out you will

receive a prompt like this:

HELP RUN= >

When this prompt is displayed the HELP processor assumes that subsequent

conmmnds are RUN= commands. A carriage return will put you back to the

top level of help even if you were not there when you first typed RUN=.
20-18 SUMMARY

20.8. IN

General Information - Introduction to VAPEPS

Purpose

VAPEP5 (Vibroacoustic Payload Environment Prediction System)

software:

* Manages a database composed of acoustlc/vibration ground

test or flight data obtained from payload components of an

Expendable Launch Vehicle or Space Shuttle; the database also

allows for storage of payload component physical parameters.

* Has prediction routines (using Statistical Energy Analysis

or scaling techniques) to establish the vibroacoustic

environment of new payload components.

* Has general data processing routines which perform

functions such as: arithmetics, statistics, results display,

etc.

* Uses DAL (Direct Access Library) files to store and retrieve

data.
IO 20-19

IO

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - INPUT/OUTPUT

NAME DESCRIPTION

CSYM ........ TRANSFER SYMBOLIC ELEMENTS TO/FROM SYSTEM FILES.

ECOL ........ FREE-FIELD DATA ENTRY.

FORMAT ...... (NOT A COMMAND) FREE-FIELD FORMAT DESCRIPTION.

GCOL ........ READ 12 CHARACTER WORDS, BLOCKED SETS, ECT.

GREAD ......

HELP .......

RUN=MANU...

RUN=NEWS...

PRCRN ......

PRINT ......

RITE .......

SREAD ......

SYMIN ......

TABLE ......

TDUMP ......

WRITE ......

WTAPE ......

.READ DATA IN FREE-FIELD FORMAT.

.LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

.WRITES A VAPEPS MANUAL.

.PRINTS OUT NEWS ELEMENT ON RUNFILE.

.PRINT CORNERS OF A MATRIX.

.PRINT THE CONTENTS OF A ELEMENT.

.PRINT AN ELEMENT AS A FUNCTION OF A VECTOR.

.READ IMAGES ACCORDING TO INPUT FORTRAN FORMAT.

.INPUT IMAGES TO A DAL SYMBOLIC (TYPE 5/6).

.PRINT MATRICIES IN REPORT TYPE FORMAT.

.READ ANY TAPE INTO A DAL FILE.

.WRITE VARIABLES/CONSTANTS USING FORTRAN FORMATS.

.WRITE A MATRIX TO TAPE.
20-20 SUMMARY

20.10. LS

COM_ AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - LOGIC, SORTING OPERATIONS

NAME DESCRI PT ION

AND ......... REDUCE TWO LISTS TO ONE LIST OF LIKE ITEMS.

INDEX ....... REPLACE DATA WITH POSITION IN AN INDEX LIST.

LUMP ........ DISPERSE A LIST OF VALUES INTO PRESCRIBED SLOTS.

NOT ......... GET ITEMS NOT PRESENT IN A LIST.

OR .......... COMBINE TWO LISTS INTO ONE LIST CONTAINING ALL ITEMS.

ORDER ....... SORT A MATRIX IN ASCENDING ORDER.

SEARCH ...... FIND VALUES OF A MATRIX WITHIN A GIVEN RANGE.

SSTRNG ...... SEARCH COLUMNS FOR A STRING OF INTEGERS.
20.11. UG

UG 20-21

General Information - User Guide

New User Information ........... Type

* Vapeps operation ........ OPERATION

* Vapeps structure ........... VAPEPS

* Executing Vapeps ........ EXECUTION

* Command format ............ COMMAND

* Read formats ............... FORMAT

* All about Dal files ....... DALDOC

Advanced User Information

* Looping techniques .......... LOOPS

* User created routines ......... RUN

* Control and Precoder ...... CONTROL

Information (all users) ........ Type

* Getting a manual ....... RUN=MANUAL
20-22 SUMMARY

20.12. UH

General Information - Using HELP

Purpose

Use HELP to display information on VAPEPS functions. While in

HELP, use the commands shown below to move through the information.

HELP commands

Command..Description

? ..... Display the beginning of

current help section.

?? .... Display subtopics of the

current help section.

SKIP..Skip to the end of the

current section and display

subtopics - if any.

QUIT. oExit from the HELP processor.

Carriage return (<CR>)..

..If you are at the end of

a section, go up one level.

If you are in the middle

of a section, display the next

page.

20.12.1. EXAMPLE

General Information - Using HELP - example

Example

Enter the input in the order shown below to get a feel for how

HELP works.

prompt > you enter - what happens

i) HELP UH > ?

2) HELP UH > ??

3) HELP UH > <CR>

4) HELP > ?

5) HELP > VD

- Redisplays the information for

the UH (Using HELP) section.

- Displays subtopics of the UH

section.

- Bumps you back to the HELP >

level.

- Redisplays the main HELP

directory.

- Displays a summary of
-short formUH 20-23

Vibroacoustic Database commands.

6) HELP > ENTER ?? - Displays the subtopics of the

ENTER command.

7) HELP ENTER > EXAMPLE - Displays the information in

EXAMPLE subtopic of ENTER.

8) HELP ENTER EXAMPLE> QUIT

- takes you out of HELP back

to the VAPEPS command level.

9) ?> HELP PREP BOOK - Displays the information for

the BOOK section of PREP.
20-24 SUMMARY

20.13. VC

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - VARIABLE CONTROL

NAME DESCRI PT ION

CALC ........ CALCULATOR MODE -- OPERATE ON VARIABLES.

CONTROL ..... (NOT A COMMAND) INF0 ON CONTROL COMMANDS (##) AND PRECODER

DEFAULT ..... SPECIFY DEFAULT VALUES FOR VARIABLES.

LIST ........ LIST VALUE OF ALL OR SELECTED VARIABLES.

SET ......... DEFINE THE VALUE OF A VARIABLE.

VAR ......... REMOVE VARIABLES FROM THE VARIABLE TABLE.

($S).
20.14. VD

VD 20-25

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - VIBROACOUSTIC DATABASE

NAME DESCRIPTION

ADMIN ....... DATABASE ADMINISTRATION COMMAND.

RUN=ALL ..... PRINTS OUT ENTER HEADER AND CHANNEL INFO IN A DAL FILE.

RUN=DATA .... RETRIEVES AND AVERAGES DATABASE ACOUSTIC AND VIBRATION DATA.

ENTER ....... DATABASE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA INPUT COMMAND.

RUN=ESAV .... WRITES ENTER DECK OUT TO A FORTRAN UNIT.

RUN=GLST .... LIST RUN=GMOD OUTPUT.

RUN=GMOD .... RETRIEVES DATABASE MODULE DATA.

RUN=HEAD .... PRINTS OUT ENTER HEADER AND CHANNEL INFO.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

RUN=MPNT .... PRINTS A MASTER FILE SUMMARY.

RUN=PICK .... RETRIEVES DATABASE ACOUSTIC AND VIBRATION DATA.

PREP ........ DATABASE EVENT DEFINITION AND STANDARDIZATION COMMAND.

RUN=SAVE .... SAVES ALL PREPED EVENTS FROM A DAL UNIT TO A MASTER FILE.

RUN=SPIL .... SPILLS ALL EVENTS FROM A DAL UNIT TO A ELEMENT.

RUN=STAT .... CALCULATES STATISTICAL INFO ON VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

RUN=STTS .... SAME AS RUN=STAT PLUS TABULATES RESULTS.
20-26 SUMMARY

20.15. VP

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - VIBROACOUTIC PREDICTION

NAME DESCRI PTION

BIGSEA ...... Links seperate SEA models together.

RUN=CLFGET..Gets a set of ATA'S from a SEMOD path.

RUN=CLFPUT..Puts a set of ATA'S into a SEMOD path.

CNVRT ....... SETS UP CONVERSION FACTORS FOR PREDICTIONS.

DAMO ........ 5TANDALONE DATA MODULE EDITOR (VAPEPS).

DENS ........ CALCULATES MODAL DENSITY.

RUN=EQPL .... Calculates SEA parameters for complex panels.

RUN=GETRESP.Stores SEMOD responses on a specified DAL element.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

PRDICT ...... DOES THEORETICAL AND EXTRAPOLATED SEA PREDICTIONS.

RUN=PRST .... CALCULATES STATISTICAL INFORMATION FOR PREDICTED RESPONSE.

RUN=SAVG .... Averages the responses from a SEMOD model.

SCALE ....... EXTRAP2 PREDICTION COMMAND.

SEMOD ....... Statistical Energy Modeler.

RUN=SHIFT...Shifts SEMOD'S FPAR parameters up or down.

TRNF ........ CALCULATES TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR PRDICT.
20.16. VT

VT 20-27

COMMAND AND RUNSTREAM SUMMARY - VIBROACOUSTIC TOOLS

NAME DESCRIPTION

RUN=BWTH .... CREATES A VECTOR OF 1/3 OCTAVE BANDWIDTHS.

RUN=BLIM .... CREATES A VECTOR OF 1/3 OCTAVE BAND LIMITS.

CONVERT ..... Vibroacoustic Unit Conversion.

RUN=CIMV .... CALCULATES THE CONFIDENCE INTERAL FOR A TRUE MEAN OF X.

RUN=DATA .... EXTRACTS AND AVERAGES CHANNEL DATA FROM DATABASE.

FRQ ......... Generates Frequencies.

RUN=GPSD .... CALCULATES PSD FROM A TIME HISTORY.

RUN=GRMS .... VIBRATION SPEC MANIPULATOR AND RMS CALCULATOR.

HELP ........ LIST COMMANDS, HELP.

RUN=LRMS .... CALCULATES RMS OF VIBRATION SPEC.

RUN=LTRP .... INTERPOLATES VIBRATION SPEC TO 1/3 OCTAVES.

RUN=NOML .... Normalize baseline response to a new excitation.

RUN=NORM .... NORMALIZES DATABASE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

RUN=OCT3 .... CONVERT NARROW BAND PSD TO 1/3 OCTAVE PSD.

RUN=OVER .... CALCULATES OVERALL LEVEL OF 1/3 OCTAVE VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

SHOCK ....... COMPUTE SHOCK SPECTRA FROM TIME HISTORY.

RUN=STAT .... CALCULATES STATISTICAL INFO ON VIBROACOUSTIC DATA.

RUN=STAS .... Calculates normal and log-normal statistical quantities.

RUN=STTS .... SAME AS RUN=STAT PLUS TABULATES RESULTS.

RUN=TPVL .... Calculates a theoretical percentile value given a mean value.

RUN=TRFU .... CALCULATES VIBROACOUSTIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS.

RUN=UCON .... VIBROACOUSTIC UNIT CONVERSION OF DATABASE DATA.

RUN=VFIX .... DEVELOP A VIBROACOUSTIC TEST SPEC FROM FIXTURE SURVEY OF DATA.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC DATA SHEET

1. Report No. 2. Government Accession No. 3. Recipient's Catalog No.

NASA CR-180781

5 Report Date

REFERENCE MANUAL July 1988

4. Titleand Subtitle

VAPEPS USER'S

VERSION 5.0

6. Performing Organization Code

7. Author(s) 8. Performing O_anization Repod No.

D. M. Park LMSC/FI86312/SSV-2167

10 Wo_ Un_No 9. Performing Organization Nameand Address

Lockheed Missiles and Space Company

iiii Lockheed Way

Sunnyvale, California 94086

12. Sponsoring Agency NameandAddress

Goddard Space Flight Center

Greenbelt, Maryland 20771

Technical Monitor: F. On

11Contra_ orGrantNo

NAS5-29452

13TypeofReportand Per_dCovered

Final

14 Sponsoring Agency Code

15. Supplementary Notes

16. Abstra_

This is the reference manual for the VibroAcoustic Payload Environment

Prediction System (VAPEPS). The system consists of a computer program and a

vibroacoustic database. The purpose of the system is to collect

measurements of vibroacoustic data taken from flight events and ground

tests, and to retrieve this data and provide a means of using the data to

predict future payload environments. This manual describes the operating

language of the program. Topics covered include database commands,

Statistical Energy Analysis (SEA) prediction commands, stress prediction

command, and general computational commands.

17. Key Words(Selected by Author(s))

Space Shuttle, Vibroacoustics,

database, VAPEPS, environment,

Vibroacoustic predictions, payloads,

SEA, Statistical Energy Analysis

18 Distribution Statement

19Security Classif(ofthisrepo_)

Unclassified

20Security Classff(ofthispage)

Unclassified

21 No of Pages

8O0

22 Price"

"-_ "For sale by the National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22151. GSFC 25-44 (10/77)